백작가의 망나니가 되었다

유려한
Silence filled the bedroom.
Crown prince Alberu’s eyes opened wide.

‘What did I just hear?’

He recalled what Cage had just said.

‘What do you think? Do you have any intentions of making the White Star's comments
come true?’

‘Make the White Star's comments come true? That’s what the God of Death said?’

Alberu was truly shocked this time.

‘This is unexpected.’

Alberu got the chills the more he thought about the current situation. Didn’t that mean
that what the White Star said might become reality?

The God of Death.

Alberu started to think about that god.

‘…That church does not have too many believers.’

People who believed in the God of Death were spread out throughout the Roan
Kingdom. This was similar to most other churches within the Roan Kingdom.

‘It’s because the Roan Kingdom does not have a national religion.’

Some people have found it odd that the Crossman royal family who were said to have
been blessed by the Sun God did not choose the Church of the Sun God as its national
religion.
‘I’d have to be crazy to take the Church of the Sun God as our national religion.’

But from Alberu’s perspective, as well as the rest of the Crossman household's
perspective, the Sun God was just a fearful entity who kept its eye on them.

‘Now that I think about it, there isn’t much known about the Church of the God of
Death other than the vow of death.’

But the God of Death was acting so aggressively regarding the White Star issue?
A single thought popped up in Alberu’s mind.

‘I need to look into it.’

He needed to gather information on the God of Death and his church.

Alberu peeked toward Cale as he organized his thoughts.

‘…Will this punk really accept the will of a god?’

He was curious.
It was at that moment.

“That, that-”

Cale started to speak.

His body was stiff and his emotions were slowly starting to show on his face as if he
was really shocked.

"That motherf*cking God of Death!”

‘Oh.’

Alberu was wowed.

‘He’s willing to even swear at gods without any hesitation!’

He knew that Cage would deliver the message to the God of Death.

Alberu was amazed by his little brother for the first time in a long while.
Cale didn't care as he was extremely angry.
‘He keeps doing these crazy shits these days.”

‘Is the God of Death a crazy bastard?’

Cale was very angry. He subconsciously pounded his chest with his fist.

‘I mean, he brought two people from the innocent Choi family here and even made a
deal to try to bring a third one over. Then he also brought me here when I was just
relaxing on my vacation and reading a novel.’

He was also the being who had started this countdown that Cale had not wanted,
talking about sending him back or letting him stay here.

“…Now he wants to get in the way of my dream too?”

Being someone who received the will of a god would not allow him to live a slacker
life as it would force him to live in hiding because everybody would be trying to find
him.
A truly vicious and chaotic glow could be seen in Cale's gaze as he quietly mumbled.

A noise that did not seem to fit the situation started to fill the bedroom.

Clap- clap clap, clap-

Someone was clapping.

Everybody turned toward the woman.

Cage was clapping with a very satisfied smile on her face.
She then started to praise Cale.

“Young master-nim! Your tone just now as you cursed the God of Death was fabulous!
Hahaha!”

She laughed loudly before slowly taking drinking glasses out of her baggy sleeves.

“Young master-nim, you are rejecting the offer, right? You truly are wise! The will of a
god my ass! You just need to live as you want. You can’t live your life doing what other
people want.”

A bottle came out of her sleeve as well.

Alberu gasped in surprise.

‘How does she keep a bottle and glasses hidden in her sleeves?’

It was amazing.

"Let’s drink since we share the same desires! Ahahaha!”

Cage seemed quite happy.

The reason was soon revealed.

“You landed him a good one! Hahahaha!”

They didn't need to ask who he landed a hit on.

Cale looked toward Cage who was happy to land a hit on the God of Death and started
to speak.

“I'm guessing you expected that I would respond like this?”

She answered Cale's question while setting the alcohol up on a nearby table.

“I assumed that's how you would respond, young master-nim. Was I wrong?”

“No. You made an astute observation.”

Cale responded without any hesitation and sat down on a chair by the table. He then
made eye contact with someone.

Flinch.

Cale’s shoulders subconsciously started to shake.

‘Hmm?’

Alberu and Cage who looked in the same direction after seeing Cale’s reaction flinched
as well.
Alberu could see Choi Han standing there.

‘…What's wrong with him?’

Alberu had seen Choi Han’s sharp gaze in the past, but he had never seen Choi Han
looking so blatantly vicious.
Choi Han quietly looking at one spot while his eyes were burning with anger was many
times more vicious than Cale's angry expression just a moment ago.

‘…His stoic expression is even scarier.’

Choi Han slowly closed his eyes as Alberu had that thought and continued to look at
Choi Han.

Choi Han recalled the first time he went to see the World Tree.
Raon and Cale had met the World Tree prior to that meeting, but that had been Choi
Han’s first time.

Cale had chatted with the World Tree while keeping his hand on her trunk.
Choi Han had heard what Cale said to the World Tree.

‘Are you saying that the God of Death is aiming for me?’

The World Tree had said that the God of Death was aiming for Cale.
Choi Han had asked Cale about it later.

‘Did the God of Death do something?’

‘…Mm… you see.’

That was the first time Choi Han had seen Cale be unable to respond properly.

‘Cale-nim.’

‘…Mm. He seems to want to take something from me.’

That was what Cale had said after Choi Han pushed him for an answer once more.
Elf priestess Adite had said something once Cale gave that response.

‘Is it death?’

Choi Han had thought that that was the answer after hearing her say it.
He thought that the only thing that the God of Death would want from a person would
be death or something related to death.
‘No. It’s not like that.’

However, Cale had sternly said that Adite was wrong.

But Choi Han had seen it.

He had seen Cale's unique expression he had whenever he was worried about something.
Choi Han instantly realized that what the God of Death wanted from Cale was
something so important that Cale could not openly tell the others about it.

Choi Han opened his closed eyes.

‘…The God of Death wants Cale-nim to receive his will? He wants to take something
from him?’

"Absolutely not.”

His emotionless voice sounded very cold.

There was a bundle of black energy fluctuating next to Choi Han as well.

“…I, the great and mighty will not even leave gods alone.”

It was the invisible Raon.

His chaotically sparkling dark blue eyes appeared within the black energy that wrapped
around Raon to the point that his body could not be seen.

‘Mm.’

Cale got slightly scared after seeing the two of them.

It was scary seeing these two black individuals acting like this at the same time.
Cale was slightly scared but feigned ignorance and asked Cage a question.

"Why is the God of Death acting this way to me?”

‘Ah.’

Cage and Alberu were finally able to take their eyes off Raon and Choi Han and snap
out of it.

“Hmm.”
Cage seemed to contemplate Cale’s question for a bit before opening the bottle and
filling the glass.

Chhhhhhh-

Cage took a big gulp once the glass was full.

“Ahhhh-”

A happy smile finally appeared on her face.

However, her gaze was serious.
She looked toward Cale and started to speak.

“Even I do not know why the God of Death is acting this way towards you, young
master-nim. He has not said anything about it.”

Tap. Tap.

She tapped the empty glass on the table gently before continuing to speak.

“Mm, however.”

Cale waited for her to continue and Cage continued without filtering anything, similar
to her personality.

“Remember how I was caught as a hostage earlier?”

“Yes, I do.”

“Do you by chance know the identity of the people in grey robes?”

"Aren’t they people who serve the Demonic race?”

Cage peeked toward Alberu after hearing Cale’s response. Cage relaxed and continued
as Alberu looked as if he knew about it as well.

“That’s right, they are people who serve the Demonic race. I realized it the moment I
saw them use their powers.”

It was an instinctual thing for Cage.

Squeeze.

She tightened her grip on the glass as she continued to speak.

“But that really isn’t a big deal.”

“…Not a big deal?”

Alberu unintentionally interjected. It could not be helped.

How could it not be a big deal when people serving the Demonic race showed up?

“Your highness.”

Cage looked toward Alberu.

"Are all gods in the world good and just?”

“…What?”

“Are all believers good and just?”

Alberu did not respond.

Cage looked at the silent Alberu before filling her glass again.

“Isn’t it obvious that there would be people serving the Demonic race since there are
people who serve the gods, their opposite?”

Cage knew that her thoughts were not normal.

But there was something she had learned while living in the world.

“Everything has two sides to it. If there is white, then there is black. That is an obvious
law of nature.”

Cale looked at Cage with an odd feeling inside him.

Cage’s natural worth became visible whenever he chatted with her.
That was why she could make such decisions and act without any hesitation.

Of course, Cale had no positive nor negative thoughts about her values. He had no
plans on thinking about it. It was none of his business.
“Anyway, their existence is not a problem.”

Tap.

The bottle was placed on the table.

“The problem is…”

Cage’s gaze sank down.

“That items from the Demon World have made it over to our world.”

Cale thought about the drums on the battlefield and the White Star’s white mask.

The drums and the mask.

They should both be items from the Demon World.

Cage took another gulp of alcohol.

Clack!

She continued to speak after slamming the glass on the table.

“It’s also the fact that those items are being used for evil. They are being used to harm
people.”

Those were problems for Cage.

She could not just sit back and watch that happen. Although she was excommunicated
from the church, she still used the powers of that side.
Having those powers came with a level of responsibility. That was her philosophy.

“We need to destroy those items. Hopefully, before they harm even more people with
them.”

Cage looked toward Cale and continued to speak.

“There’s no need to follow the God of Death's orders. I won't follow him either. But I
still want to destroy those items.”

Cage had seen the people who were cowering in fear after being taken hostage.
“Young master-nim. You plan on fighting against the White Star, right?”

Chhhhhhh-

Cage put a new glass in front of Cale and filled it with alcohol.

“Please take me with you. I promise I'll be useful.”

She then waited for Cale's response.

And then, she smiled.

“Ahh. This alcohol is a bit bitter.”

It was because Cale picked up the cup and drank the whole thing at once.
She could feel Cale giving her permission with the empty glass. Cage’s smile became
even wider.

Cale just looked at her without saying much.

‘…I need both Saint Jack and Cage.’

The chances of the Demonic race getting involved in future battles were highly likely,
so he needed Jack and Cage.
It would also be beneficial in many ways to have Cage by his side as the promised date
with the God of Death got closer.

Cale filled her glass.

"Wow, you’re filling it so much.”

Cage laughed and picked up the class.

It was at that moment.

Clang. Clang.

They heard someone tapping on the window.

Everybody inside the bedroom turned toward the window.

“…A bird?”
A beautiful black bird was tapping on the window with its beak.

They had never seen such a bird before as it was not one of the birds that lived in the
Roan Kingdom. That was why they found it to be odd.

Was it the enemy?

Everybody had that thought on their minds.

A sense of nervousness filled the bedroom.

The bird seemed to have realized this as it lowered its wings to show that it had no
intention of attacking.

“Should I open the window?”

Cale cautiously asked Alberu who nodded his head.

“It seems to have come looking for us, so let it in but we will surround it as soon as it
enters.”

“I will open it.”

Choi Han walked toward the window with his hand on the hilt of his sword and opened
the window.

Click. Screeeech-!

The window slowly opened.

Flutter-

The bird elegantly entered through the window. Choi Han closed the window as he
pulled out his sword. Raon was slowly gathering his mana as well.
It was at that moment.

“The situation changed a bit. That’s why I came here myself.”

‘Hmm?’

Cale recognized this voice. It was a voice that was already recorded in his memories.
“…Duke Fredo?”

Cale could see the beautiful black bird flying toward him.
The bird elegantly landed on the table and opened its beak again.

“Yes, it is I.”

The bird elegantly fluttered its wings once before folding them and focusing its gaze
on Cale.
The black bird majestically asked as Cale was shocked by this unexpected visit.

“Cale Henituse, what do you think? Have you thought about it yet? I want to quickly
drink your blood.”
‘Why did this Vampire come here?’

Cale was shocked.

He thought this Vampire was going to send him an invitation, and furthermore, how
the hell did he know he was here?

Flutter.

The black bird didn’t care whether Cale was shocked or not and slightly flew up and
moved elsewhere.

Plop.

The bird landed on Alberu Crossman's bed.

Chhhhh!

The black bird opened up its shiny beautiful black wings and with some elegant
movements…

“Your highness, Alberu Crossman. Nice to meet you.”

It greeted Alberu.

“My name is Duke Fredo Von Ejellan of the Endable Kingdom. I currently lead the
Vampires of the two continents.”

“Hooo.”

Alberu quietly mumbled in amazement before slightly bowing toward the black bird.

“Nice to meet you as well.”

Alberu was speaking somewhat respectfully to follow the proper etiquette of addressing
a foreign nation's Duke. The black bird’s eyes slightly curled up in response.

“I wished to meet your highness at some point, but I apologize for suddenly barging
in like this.”

“Not at all. It’s okay.”

“Your highness, you truly are as wise and benevolent as I've heard.”

“Hahaha! Duke Fredo, you are the one who seems quite wise.”

‘Oh?’

Cale looked toward the black bird and Alberu who were chatting peacefully with each
other in disbelief.
Alberu noticed Cale's gaze and started to speak.

“Little brother, have you ever thought about learning such cool etiquette like Duke
Fredo's?”

‘What nonsense is this?’

Cale just said whatever came to mind.

“I plan on being a slacker, so I don't think I’ll have anywhere to use that etiquette even
if I learned them.”

“Ah.”

Alberu sighed.
Cale found Alberu’s pitying gaze to be odd.

‘…Why is he looking at me like that?’

Although he didn't know the reason, it made him feel extremely iffy that Cale slightly
started to frown as he looked at Alberu.
Alberu shook his head and then started to speak toward Duke Fredo.

“Based on what I heard, Duke Fredo was unconscious. Are you okay?”
Smile.

Alberu started to smile.

He had a sharp gaze toward Duke Fredo as if they had not been speaking peacefully to
each other at all.
The black bird who received his observing gaze directly shared his astonishment.

“Hooo. You've heard about my condition.”

Swish.

The black bird turned toward Cale.

The black bird’s eyes flashed as they looked at him.

“I'm extremely curious as to how his highness knew about my condition. My current
condition should have been a secret.”

Cale just shrugged his shoulders toward the black bird.

‘There’s no need to tell him that the Wind Elementals told me.’

He didn’t want to share that information with someone who was not his ally.
Duke Fredo seemed to notice this as he did not ask further.

Flutter.

He flapped his wings and flew up into the air.

“Your highness, if it is okay with you, may I have a conversation with young master
Cale Henituse in secret?”

“Of course. Do whatever you need.”

“Thank you very much, your highness. I will come bade goodbye before I leave.”

“I understand.”

Cale observed the bird and the crown prince in a stiff position as he thought to himself.

‘They work well off each other.’

Cale chuckled and got up from his seat.

He was the one Duke Fredo wanted to chat with the most.
He had no reason to decline that conversation.
It was even better that he didn’t need to go looking for him.

“Let’s go chat in my bedroom.”

They couldn't talk in the reception room nor an office because this was the Stan Lord’s
Castle.

“Sounds good.”

Duke Fredo happily left with Cale.

…While landing on Choi Han’s shoulder.

‘What the hell is he doing?’

Cale looked toward Duke Fredo who gracefully landed on Choi Han’s shoulder with
shock.
Duke Fredo didn't care and patted Choi Han's shoulder with his foot before speaking
in a satisfied voice.

“Mm. This shoulder is nice because it is the firmest. This is satisfactory.”

Cale could see Choi Han's pupils shaking after being taken back by this development.
Duke Fredo who did not notice this at all patted Choi Han’s shoulder with his feet again.

“Choi Han, you escort me.”

Cale could see something at that moment.

‘What is up with this bastard?’

He could tell that Choi Han was swearing in his head just by looking at his eyes.
Cale subconsciously took a step away from Choi Han and headed toward the bedroom
door.

 Human!
Raon was invisible and right behind him.

 Is it okay for that fearless Vampire to move around like this after claiming to be
unconscious?

‘I know, right?’

Cale kind of bowed toward Alberu who was waving his hand and grabbed the
doorknob.

 Oh, human, also! You cannot get close to the God of Death at all! The God of Death
seems to be cunning! Don’t worry, I won't let even a god get away with messing with
you!

‘Oops. I forgot about the God of Death.’

Cale had forgotten about the God of Death issue because of Duke Fredo's sudden
appearance.

Click.

Cale turned the doorknob and headed outside.

A couple of Royal Knights were standing a bit away while guarding the area around
Alberu’s bedroom door. Cale greeted them before starting to walk toward his room.

“Young master-nim!”

He turned his head after hearing someone calling his name from behind him.
Cage walked out from behind Choi Han, who was walking with the black bird on his
shoulder, and approached Cale.

She stood next to Cale and quietly whispered something in his ear.

“Young master-nim, is it fine to consider that you are declining the offer for sure?”

Cale answered sternly without even a second of hesitation.

“Yes.”

It was one thing to land a punch on the God of Death, but he did not want to move
according to a god’s will.
Cage blinked a few times after hearing his response before mumbling to herself.

“Hmm, I don't know if he’ll listen. He’s a persistent god. He’s such a blockhead that you
can't really talk to him.”

Cale flinched.

Cage who was mumbling to herself slowly looked up at Cale’s face and observed him.

Smile.

She then started to smile.

“I will figure out a way.”

 Human! Cage is smiling like when you and the crown prince are scamming someone!
No, she’s smiling in an even scarier way!

That smile soon turned to her usual refreshing smile and she bowed to Cale.

“Then see you next time.”

“…Sure.”

Cale watched Cage leave in the opposite direction before his expression turned stiff.
He turned away from Cage and started to walk toward his room.

‘The God of Death… things are getting annoying.’

His expression continued to stiffen from the frustration he felt as he thought about his
situation.

The invisible Raon and Choi Han… As well as Duke Fredo on Choi Han’s shoulder
followed quietly behind Cale.
Cale’s group could no longer see the area around Alberu's bedroom.
There were many people who had watched them from the beginning.

“…Wasn't his expression too vicious?”

The voice of one of the knights in the hallway filled the area.

Peek peek.

The knights guarding the crown prince's room stopped looking solemn and serious
and peeked at each other.

‘This is weird.’

‘His expression… was very serious.’

The battle had ended.

But Cale Henituse, the person who could be said was the one to end the battle, had
entered the crown prince's bedroom looking weak and down but left with a stiff and
serious expression and headed somewhere.
His steps looked firm and urgent.

All of the knights had ominous feelings.

They were the ones who were responsible for guarding the crown prince and
protecting the kingdom after all.
That was why they were worried that another war or something big would happen.

The Knight Captain was not there right now, so one of the knights cautiously started
to ask.

“Do you think… something happened to young master Cale-nim?”

His sunbae knight let out a fake cough before adding on.

“Looks that way. He’s always working for the Roan Kingdom… he’s always busy and
unable to rest.”

One of the quietest Knights started to speak at that moment.

“It might be for the entire world and not just the Roan Kingdom. Didn't you guys see it
just now too?”

The knights all looked toward him as it was rare for him to speak.
He usually did not speak because he was a deep thinker.
“See what?”

“Young master Cale-nim chatting with someone.”

They recalled the person who had just whispered to Cale.

“…You mean the lady wearing the priestess robe?”

“Yes.”

“That madam-, isn’t she Lord Stan’s close friend?”

The knights had not reacted to her being here because they were clear about her
identity.

“But that’s not it.”

"What do you mean?”

“I think I can answer that for you.”

“Hmm?”

The knight chatting with the quiet knight looked toward his hoobae knight who had
been the first to speak.

Peek peek.

The hoobae knight looked around in order to make sure that they were the only ones
there before he cautiously started to speak.
He needed to be even more cautious as this was the Stan Lord’s Castle and not the
palace.

“The lady from earlier is indeed Lord Stan's close friend, however…”

Gulp.

He gulped and continued to speak.

“…She is also an excommunicated priestess of the Church of the God of Death.”

The knights who had been quietly listening to him reacted to that statement.

"Excommunicated?”

“The God of Death?”

It was because it was difficult and rare for a priestess to be excommunicated.

“Yes. She was excommunicated from the church of the God of Death, but you see…”

The important information was here.

The hoobae knight shared the story he had heard from his close friend who was a
knight at the Stan Lord’s Castle.

"She was excommunicated, but the Church of the God of Death does not dare to touch
her.”

He shared his thoughts.

“And based on what I've heard, that excommunicated priestess-nim can still use
powers like the vow of death that the God of Death gives to his priests.”

“…How is that possible?”

“Exactly.”

Peek peek.

The knight looked around once more before continuing to speak.

“The fact that the church does not dare to touch that priestess-nim is because the God
of Death still considers her to be his child. Such a person came urgently looking for
young master Cale-nim. She then chatted so closely with him.”

The knight known for being silent started to speak again.

“Especially right after that evil White Star bastard told us that thing about young
master Cale-nim.”

A priestess who was excommunicated but still remained the child of a god.
That priestess urgently came looking for Cale and chatted so closely with him until
just a moment ago.

Cale had turned stiff after that conversation.

The White Star had just said that Cale was someone who had received the will of a god.
Of course, the White Star did not say which god it was. He just considered Cale to be
an envoy of a god.

Young master Cale was saying that that was not the case, but…

A scenario popped up in the knights’ minds.

They all subconsciously looked at each other.

“…Perhaps?”

The knights all looked toward the quiet Knight. He stood up straight after receiving
their gazes and started to speak.

“I just shared my hypothesis.”

He then shut up again.

All of them shut up.
They felt as if they figured out something they were not supposed to know.

Silence filled the hallway once more.

Cale closed his bedroom door and looked toward the center of the room.

“So, why did you come to find me?”

Flutter.

The black bird that elegantly started to flutter its wings on Choi Han’s shoulder
approached Cale.
It then made eye contact with Cale once it was about a step away.

The bird’s beak opened again.

“My friend, it looks like you'll need to go to the Endable Kingdom with me.”

‘…Since when am I your friend?’

Cale was flabbergasted.

Cale lifted his index finger and pointed at himself.

“Me…”

He then pointed toward the black bird.

“…And you are friends?”

The black bird’s eyes curled up.

Shaaaaaaaaaaaa-

Cale flinched after seeing a black aura filling the room.

Crackle!

The black bird suddenly cracked into pieces. Once those pieces disappeared…

Plop.

Duke Fredo in his child’s form gently stepped down on the ground. He then looked up
at Cale and started to speak.

“Of course we are friends. Actually, it'd be fine to call us brothers too.”

Smile.

The boy started to smile. For being a child’s smile, there was a sense of cruelty visible
in it. His innocent voice filled the room.

“Yes, brothers might be a better expression. Doesn't brothers sound good since we are
people who will share blood?”
‘This crazy bastard!’

Step.

Cale took a step toward Duke Fredo.

Clang!

“Mm!”

Cale then took a step back in shock. Cale looked toward the sparkling silver item.

Drip.

Red blood dripped down the sword touching Duke Fredo's skin. The silver light Cale
had seen was the blade of a sword.

He looked at the sword touching Duke Fredo’s neck. He then slowly moved his gaze to
the owner of the sword.

‘…So vicious!’

There were no emotions visible on Choi Han’s face as he held the sword against Duke
Fredo's neck.

“I'm sorry, but I'm not in a good mood right now. It’d be best to stop with the nonsense.”

Choi Han’s voice sounded calm but firm.

‘But his tone is still innocent!’

Cale thought that it was the same innocent Choi Han, but he could tell that Choi Han
was seriously angry.

‘…This is nice. ’

Cale found it nice to see Choi Han baring his fangs at someone he found to be annoying
instead of him. Cale was thinking that Choi Han was very good at dealing with crazy
people like Clopeh and now this guy.
“That’s right! Hey, Vampire! Our human's blood is not tasty! Don’t drink it!”

Even Raon revealed himself at that moment and viciously glared at Duke Fredo. Cale
smiled with satisfaction while walking toward these two black beings.

 A wise decision, Cale. You will faint for a long time if you use an ancient power one
more time in your current state. That’s why you should stick next to strong individuals
like them until you get to rest a day or two.

The Super Rock praised Cale as if he was satisfied with Cale's decision.

 Cale, very sly of you to take advantage of the people around you.

Cale ignored the Super Rock's comments and sat down on the chair next to Choi Han.

He then started to speak toward Duke Fredo.

“Why did you suddenly come looking for me like this?”

“I'd appreciate it if you'd move this sword away first.”

Cale looked toward Choi Han after hearing Fredo's comment and Choi Han finally
withdrew his sword and stood next to Cale.

Duke Fredo walked over and sat down on the chair opposite Cale.

“Tsk, you all must not know how valuable blood is.”

Swipe.

He touched his neck. It was a light injury so the blood had already stopped.

‘…He definitely is amazing. ’

Fredo made sure to remember that Choi Han's sword draw was so quick that even he
had missed it before starting to speak again. He had been the one to request this chat
after all.

“Currently, I am in seclusion in my grand residence at the Endable Kingdom's capital

as I am unconscious.”
Cale had assumed this based on what he had heard. He remained silent as he wanted
to hear more details and Fredo continued to speak.

“It was to trick the nobles who were on the northern snowy mountain and the
members of the Endable Kingdom.”

Fredo continued to speak. In order to avoid being called a Duke who did not do
anything in the battle at the northern snowy mountains, he faked a battle against Cale
before they reached the snowy region.

“Disguises are our specialty.”

Vampires needed to live in hiding even more than Dark Elves. The fact that they
needed blood from living beings every so often required them to live such lives. That
was why they were talented in camouflage and disguise. This was how Fredo was able
to make it look as if he was in critical condition.

“Of course, it was not simply to dodge negative attention from the nobles. I did it to
also avoid the White Star's suspicion. That bastard trusts me more than you would
expect.”

Cale nodded his head.

‘The White Star said that this bastard was loyal. ’

It was at that moment.

“Haaaaa.”

Duke Fredo let out a deep sigh. Cale turned toward him.

“I was planning on feigning unconsciousness for a little longer before continuing my

act as the White Star’s loyal noble.”

“…Won't the White Star rush back to the Endable Kingdom to see his loyal subordinate?”

Was it okay for Fredo to be relaxing like this here?

Cale asked the question and Fredo nonchalantly responded.

“Yes, I'm sure he went to see me. But the White Star won’t be able to see me right away.
My household's Vampire healers are not allowing anyone to enter as they are focused
on treating me.”

“But it’s not like the treatment will continue for days. Shouldn’t you hurry back to
show yourself to the White Star?”

The White Star would become suspicious and wonder if Duke Fredo was really in
critical condition if he didn’t show himself for multiple days while claiming to be in
treatment. There was no way a loyal subordinate would continue to reject his liege
who came to visit him because he was injured.

“Correct. I need to hurry back, but I ended up learning about the White Star’s crazy
plan.”

‘What? Crazy plan?’

Cale recalled how Duke Fredo had said that the situation had changed.

“…I mean that the situation has changed.”

Duke Fredo said that one more time. Cale could see that Duke Fredo looked serious.

“What kind of situation is it that you are acting like this?”

Duke Fredo's purple eyes looked toward Cale.

“You know that the Demonic race is planning something, right?”

“Yes, I know, but I don't know what they are planning.”

Cale nonchalantly responded to Fredo's question.

“Then this should be easy to explain.”

Plop.

Duke Fredo undid a button on his well-pressed shirt’s sleeve as he continued to speak.

“The Demon World wants to turn this Natural World into their land.”
Plop.

He undid both of his sleeve buttons.

“Furthermore, they want the Demonic race to run freely on this land.”

Fredo stared at Cale. Cale who looked right back at him started to speak.

"Are they really planning on opening The Gate to the Demon World?”

The Demonic race needed to open the Gate to the Demon World to climb over to the
Natural World.

‘Is the White Star really trying to open the Gate to the Demon World on this land? Was
that his contact with the Demonic race?’

Cale’s mind quickly started to move. But his thoughts were quickly stopped.

“No.”

Fredo sternly rejected that claim.

“There are no plans to open the Gate to the Demon World right now. It is possible that
we may open it in the future. But that’s not the plan right now.”

“…Then what is he trying to do now?”

“Cale Henituse.”

Fredo called his name but was looking to the side. Raon and Fredo made eye contact.

"The moment the Gate to the Demon World is opened, the Divine World would notice
and inform the Dragons.”

Cale knew about this because Dragon Lord Sheritt had told him.

“That is why they don't dare to barge in from the Demon World. Why? Both sides
would receive serious damage if the Demonic race and the Divine race were to fight.
The Demonic race simply desires this land, they have no desire to fight a battle of life
and death with the Divine race.”
That didn't make sense. They didn’t want to fight, but the Demon World had signed a
contract with the White Star to plot something in this world.

Cale's expression changed after hearing what Fredo said next.

“Now then. There’s something here. There’s a loophole among the things I just said.”

‘A loophole?’

Cale recalled the things Fredo just said as Fredo continued to speak.

“Cale Henituse. The only way that the gods and the Divine race know when the Demon
World is trying to invade this world is-”

“…The Gate to the Demon World.”

“That's right!”

Fredo started to smile brightly.

“You noticed it right away. That’s right! It is from the odd dimensional twist that should
not appear in nature! The gods and Divine race will know that the Demonic race is
trying to come over based on the dimensional twist caused by the Gate to the Demon
World.”

Something flashed through Cale's mind at that moment.

‘Then does that mean they wouldn't notice if the Demonic race found a way here
without using the Gate to the Demon World?’

Duke Fredo continued to speak as if he knew Cale's question.

“Of course, the gods and the Divine race will realize it as soon as a Demonic race uses
their powers in this Natural World.”

Cale's eyes clouded over.

‘Doesn't that mean that the gods and the Divine race won’t know if the Demonic race
walks around here without using their powers?’
Cale’s expression had turned pale.

“Human, are you shocked?”

“Cale-nim, are you okay?”

Raon and Choi Han approached Cale in shock. It was because his complexion had
suddenly changed.

Grab.

Cale could see Fredo grabbing his hand with both hands.

“What are you doing?”

Cale stopped Choi Han who was about to draw his sword.

“It’s fine. Let him be.”

Cale then saw Fredo opening his palm. Fredo then covered that open palm with his
arm so that Raon and Choi Han won't be able to see.

“Close your eyes.”

Cale's pale complexion recovered a bit and he started to smile after hearing Fredo's
comment.

‘This bastard knows. ’

The moment he closed his eyes and had that thought… Fredo started to write on Cale’s
palm with his finger.

< The gods have eyes in many places around the world. It's best to be stealthy. >

Cale started to smile even more.

Fredo knew about the eyes of the gods. Cale had turned pale earlier because of this
one question.

‘…If the Demonic race is plotting something in this world… How can the gods who have
eyes all around the world not know about it?’

It would have been difficult for the White Star to avoid those eyes during these past
1,000 years.

Even Cale's body was touched by the powers of the God of Death because of the Vow
of death.

‘In my case, they said it was a location tracker. ’

They couldn't see or hear anything going on around Cale but he could locate him.

< The eyes of the gods cannot reach the Endable Kingdom. The powers of the gods do
not reach there at all. The gods know about it, of course. >

‘Ah. ’

Cale now realized one of the reasons the gods did not know about what the Endable
Kingdom was plotting.

< And the information that I know are things only those with titles know about. >

< Only five people, including the White Star, know about it. >

< You are the sixth person. >

Cale was silent as he continued to keep his eyes closed.

It was fine to ask questions after hearing everything.

More things continued to be written on his palm.

< Cale Henituse. I'm sure you are curious to know how the Demonic race plans on
entering this world without using the Gate to the Demon World. >

Yes, he was curious.

It was a big problem if that was possible.

The World Tree had said the following.

‘Gods cannot interfere with the happenings of the world. They cannot change nor
modify the fate people were born with. ’

That was why they used Saints and Holy Maidens, as well as Dragons if it involved the
Demonic race, to stop them. If it got really bad, then they sent the Divine race.

That was why if the Demonic race found a way to stealthily enter this world and cause
a ruckus, the entire world might end up in the Demonic race's hands before anybody
could do anything about it.

‘Then how will the Demonic race make it over?’

Fredo continued to write at that moment.

There were no traces left behind as he was using his finger on Cale’s palm.

“Ah.”

Cale gasped.

< Why do you think the Demonic race must come over from the Demon World? >

< Won't it be solved if they can ‘create’ the Demonic race here? >

Create the Demonic race. But who?

Cale thought about the White Star.

‘…The White Star is planning on becoming a part of the Demonic race!’

He was not subservient to the Demonic race.

Cale's heart thumped loudly.

< The White Star, he, against Dragons, humans… He plans to become a ruler who has
transcended all limits of this world. >

< He will no longer be an existence of this world. >

Cale opened his closed eyes. He looked right at the purple eyes looking at him and
started to speak.

“Sounds like we need to destroy it.”

They wanted to create it. Then they needed to destroy it to stop it.

“Duke Fredo, you knew about all this already. Why are you suddenly thinking it is
crazy?”

Smile.

Fredo finally let go of Cale's hand. He confirmed that Choi Han and Raon looked
confused before starting to speak.

“He’s rushing it.”

“Rushing?”

“Yes, the White Star is rushing things.”

Originally, this was supposed to happen later.

That was why Fredo had planned on slowly taking over the Endable Kingdom and
turning the White Star into a scarecrow or getting rid of him.

“Cale Henituse. That man is rushing things because of you.”

“…Because of me?”

“Yes. You are someone who has received the will-”

Bang!

Raon suddenly slammed down on the table with his chubby front paw.

Craaaaaaack-

The table cracked in half.

Raon looked angry and started to shout as Cale turned toward him.
“No! Our human is not even a tiny bit interested in a god! He is a good human whose
only dream is to be a slacker!”

“I know.”

“…You know?”

“…I don't believe in the slacker part but I know that he is not someone who has
received the will of a god. I told Cale Henituse everything because I know that that is
the case. Otherwise, I wouldn’t be able to tell him. They would hear everything.”

They didn’t need to ask who would hear. They knew that Fredo must be talking about
the gods.

“To be honest with you, I hate both the gods and the Demonic race. I hate having
anybody above me.”

His goal was the most important.

An arrogant smile appeared on Fredo’s face.

“Anyway, you'll need to come to the Endable Kingdom with me.”

“Why?”

Fredo grabbed Cale’s hand again and quickly started to write.

< The device to turn the White Star into a member of the Demonic race is located at
the deepest spot of the Endable Kingdom. I cannot destroy it. I need your help. >

“I will tell you more details at the Endable Kingdom.”

The device to change a human into a member of the Demonic race existed inside the
Endable Kingdom.

‘Is he telling the truth?’

Cale stared at Duke Fredo.

The Endable Kingdom. That was the enemy headquarters. It was quite dangerous to
go there.

‘…But I need to go at least once. ’

Regardless of whether Fredo was telling the truth or lying… He needed to go to the
Endable Kingdom at least once. That was a mysterious dimension where nothing was
known about.

“I know what you are thinking about.”

Cale looked toward him after hearing Duke Fredo's voice.

“You don’t trust me.”

“Of course.”

“Then let me show you some proof so that you can trust me.”

Fredo touched his wrist that was visible because he undid the buttons.

“The reason I was able to trick the White Star and move around so freely until now is
because of a family treasure that has been passed down for generations.”

“…Are you going to give that treasure to me or something?”

“Yes, I'll give it to you.”

Cale looked toward Fredo in shock as he had just asked that question without
expecting much.

Fredo chuckled at him before continuing to speak.

“It is also how you will infiltrate the Endable Kingdom without hiding and causing any
suspicion.”

Cale was wondering what the hell he was he talking about.

It was at that moment.

“You. How would you like to be me?”

“What?”

Cale looked at the young Duke Fredo from head to toe.

‘Become Duke Fredo? That much is not possible with dye magic. It’s not like I'm a
Dragon who is polymorphing. ’

Duke Fredo continued to speak at that moment.

"Do you know how I can take on this young boy’s appearance?”

Shhh.

He pulled up his sleeve.

There was a black band surrounding his arm.

“This treasure is able to record the current patriarch's appearance from when he was
young and help the patriarch turn into that young appearance whenever he wants
until he dies.”

Shhhhhhh-

The black band started to glow red.

“Mm.”

Cale could now see that Duke Fredo was in his adult form. Duke Fredo who returned
to his original appearance crossed his legs and leaned on the chair. He looked very
sluggish.

Cale, who was watching this, started to speak.

“Even if I go as the young Duke Fredo, there will at least be once when I have to meet
the White Star as Duke Fredo. How do you plan on tricking him?”

Even if he could transform into young Duke Fredo's appearance… He would get
tangled up with the White Star and the other nobles. Most importantly, he would need
to trick everyone inside the Endable Kingdom.
There was no way that would be easy.

"That’s not an issue.”

Fredo seemed very relaxed.

“I guess I didn't explain properly.”

He touched his band as if he had forgotten a key detail.

Shhhhhhh-

He returned to his young appearance before continuing to speak.

“I am Fredo the Second in the Endable Kingdom.”

“What?”

‘Fredo the Second? Duke Fredo's son?’

“So…”

The band flashed again.

Fredo returned to his adult form.

“I'm the father.”

The band flashed again. The young Fredo appeared.

"This appearance is the son. Everybody other than a few subordinates all believe that
this is the case.”

Cale looked toward the smiling Vampire and started to speak.

“So you are saying that the people of the Endable Kingdom think that your young
appearance is Fredo the Second?”

“Yes. They think this is my son.”

“…Then I will be going into the Endable Kingdom as your son?”

“Yes, you will go into the Endable Kingdom holding your father’s hand.”

“Ho!”

Cale was flabbergasted.

How could he not be when one person had tricked everyone else while pretending to
be both the father and the son?

‘But it is a good plan. ’

Cale didn't know about the Endable Kingdom.

That was why there were chances that he would do something odd and people might
find it weird.

‘But if I’m a child?’

Then they should be understanding of his actions.

‘And it won't be weird for a son to be by his father’s side. ’

That was why Cale would be able to move with Duke Fredo and have him guide him
around. It would be easy for him to get help as well.

‘This doesn't sound bad. ’

Cale’s gaze headed toward the band on Duke Fredo's arm.

The band changed size based on Fredo's physique, so it fit the young Duke Fredo's arm
as well.

“Cale Henituse. Some of your allies have seen my appearances.”

Cale nodded his head.

The mercenaries, Elves, and the others had seen Duke Fredo's two different appearances.
“I'm sure that you can keep them quiet? Don’t you have at least that much power?”

Cale did not respond. It was obvious that he could do that.

Duke Fredo seemed satisfied by his lack of response and took the band off his arm. He
instantly returned to his adult form.

“Let's go together, my son.”

Cale quietly watched him for a bit before grabbing the band from Fredo.

Smile.

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

“Should I call you father?”

Fredo smiled back and responded.

“By the way, you will need to call the White Star, Eldest Uncle.”

‘What? Eldest Uncle?’

Cale started to frown.

“The White Star cherishes Fredo the Second quite a bit.”

‘Damn it. ’

Cale was already getting chills.

“…The White Star is the Eldest Uncle?”

Cale subconsciously mumbled and lowered his head.

Choi Han flinched at this reaction before approaching him and quietly whispering.

"Cale-nim, should I do it?”

“Why?”

“Excuse me?”

Choi Han was shocked at Cale's response and then noticed Cale slowly raise his head.
There was a bright smile on Cale’s face as it became visible.

“It sounds fun.”

‘The White Star cherishes Fredo the Second?’

“Hehe.”

‘It’ll be fun to act like a spoiled nephew in front of him.’

It was giving him the chills, but it sounded fun.

The corners of Cale's lips kept twitching and trying to go up. But they were trying to
go up in a very twisted way.

He looked toward Duke Fredo.

‘He was an arrogant and rude young boy.’

The young Duke Fredo's appearance seemed like the type to be arrogant and rude, a
kid who did as he pleased.
“What kind of personality did Duke Fredo the Second have?”

A small smile appeared on Fredo's face.

“My son is very respectful and full of class.”

‘Hmm?’

“He’s smart and he respects all adults regardless of their title.”

‘Hmm?’

“All parents inside the Endable Kingdom go, ‘Be more like Naru-nim! Can’t you see how
well he grew up?’ ”

“Naru?”

“Ah. I called him Fredo the Second, but his actual name is Naru Von Ejellan. He's a very
shy and nice little kid.”

‘…This is different than what I expected?’

Cale heard Choi Han mumbling next to him.

“…A model student?”

“Oh, Choi Han, that is the perfect description. He is a model student. He is also pure
and his heart is tender.”

Choi Han peeked toward Cale.

‘…He seems frozen in shock.’

Cale looked stiff as he blankly stared at Fredo the Second.

“That is why many of the top individuals in the Endable Kingdom are quite concerned.
They keep asking how someone who will lead the Duchy in the future could be so good
and tender. Let’s give it our best.”

Cale suddenly got upset.

‘Give it our best my ass.’

“Ah. My son is 153 years old. It would be around 12 - 13 years old in human years.”

 Human! You'll become similar to us in age!

‘…I know, I’ll be the same age as On.’

Cale weakly lowered his head and had to listen to Fredo's calm voice.

“You'll become a cute and good little kid.”

‘Damn it.’

Cale’s hand was shaking as it held the band.

“Your highness. Young master Cale-nim has left.”

The Mage Captain informed Alberu while peeking at Alberu’s expression.

‘Young master Cale returned in less than one hour after chatting with his highness to
report something and then left. He only told his highness his reason for leaving.’

The Mage Captain thought about it before cautiously asking a question.

“Your highness.”

“What is it?”

“…May I ask what young master Cale-nim went to do?”

The Mage Captain’s fists were clenched as he looked toward Alberu with a nervous
gaze.

‘I must know.’

The captain had heard from the knights that Cale had looked very serious.
‘I'm sure that it’s not something normal.’

That was why he had to know.

The captain could not help but think that, although he was the captain of the Mage
Brigade, he was extremely weak after this battle at the Stan territory.

That was why he had set his resolve to get stronger and do whatever he needed to do
to help.

“I'm sure your highness may not think that I am reliable, but…”

He was lacking quite a bit compared to young master Cale, but…

Captain Lishie still wanted to do something.

That was why he had to ask that question even though it went against proper etiquette.

“What are you talking about? Captain Lishie, why would you think you are not reliable?
Do not say such things.”

Captain Lishie became emotional after hearing Alberu say that in a warm voice, but he
held himself back from tearing up and continued to look at him.

‘May I ask what young master Cale-nim went to do?’

He still had not heard a response to that question.

The captain focused on Alberu’s lips.

It was at that moment.

Smile.

‘Hmm?’

The Mage Captain's eyes opened wide. He wondered if he had seen correctly.
However, he slightly frowned after seeing that Alberu had a serious expression on his
face.

‘I thought his highness was smiling just a moment ago?’

He felt certain that he had seen Alberu smiling.
But the Mage Captain just quietly stood there after seeing an extremely serious
expression on Alberu’s face.

Alberu started to speak after a few seconds of silence.

“I cannot tell you everything, however…”

‘However?’

The Mage Captain focused as he waited for Alberu to continue talking.

Alberu who stopped talking for a moment felt as if he could still hear Cale’s voice in
the distance.

‘Haaaaa. Your highness. Apparently I need to pretend to be a good and respectful

twelve years old! Does that make any sense?’

‘I also need to smile at the White Star and call him ‘Eldest Uncle!’ My goodness!’

‘Do you know how frustrated I must be to come rant to you like this?’

‘Oops.’

Alberu stopped himself from almost smiling again.

A punk who was known for being trash just a few years ago was going to act like a
respectful young master?

Alberu slowly started to speak.

“However, I'm sure that my little brother will face difficult battles once again today.”

This was probably harder than fighting in a war or scamming someone for Cale.

“So, Captain.”

The Captain noticed Alberu’s gaze turning sharp and tensed up.
Alberu spoke as if he was quietly whispering.

"Shouldn't we do something as well? We can't just sit still like this.”

The Mage Captain slowly bowed his head.

“That’s right, your highness.”

Alberu had a satisfied smile on his face after hearing that.

The Endable Kingdom.

If Cale was heading to the Endable Kingdom's capital, then Alberu needed to return to
the Roan Kingdom’s capital.

He had a lot of things to do.

The young boy’s steps looked weak.

“…Aigoo.”

The owner of the bakery watched the young boy's back with a pitying gaze.

The boy's grey hair weakly fluttered similarly to his steps and the purple eyes that the
owner had seen as the boy passed by looked dreary.

Endable, the capital of the Endable Kingdom.

The capital that had the same name as the Kingdom was the center of the kingdom.
The residents of the merchants’ district on the northern part of the Endable Kingdom
were whispering while looking at a young boy.

“…Look at young master Naru-nim. He looks so down.”

“How sad. I wonder if we can help in any way.”

They sounded full of concern.

“He looked extremely pale earlier too.”

“Exactly! How upset must a tender and good person like young master Naru-nim be
feeling while thinking about what happened to Duke Fredo-nim?”
“I know, right? I hope Duke Fredo-nim wakes up soon.”

The miserable handsome boy's name was Naru Von Ejellan.

He was the only son of Duke Fredo who lived in a grand residence in the northern part
of the capital, as well as a good child who was loved by everyone in the Endable
Kingdom.

“I’m just glad Solena-nim is at least by young master Naru-nim’s side.”

“Yes.”

There was a woman in uniform walking next to the boy as if she was guarding him.
Her name was Solena.
She was the Vampire who was known as Duke Fredo's right arm.

“Young master-nim.”

Solena started to talk to the young boy next to her.

She was speaking so quietly that only the boy could hear.

“Please look even more upset.”

“…Haaa.”

“That looks wonderful.”

The boy slightly glared at Solena.

“Young master-nim. That expression does not suit you. Elite! Good! Tender! That’s how
you should look! You should look like a pitiful boy that people can’t help but want to
protect!”

“Damn it.”

“Such words do not suit you either.”

The boy decided to give up on glaring and just sighed as he started to speak.

"Do I just need to go to the residence like this?”

“Yes, young master-nim.”

Step.

Solena moved one step closer to the boy. She then whispered quietly.

“Cale-nim. The White Star will arrive soon.”

“Okay.”

Cale’s eyes clouded over for a moment before clearing again.

‘Cale Henituse.’

Duke Fredo had said the following.

‘Currently, Fredo the Second… Naru is away from the capital for a bit. He is headed
home after hearing that his father is in critical condition.’

‘Do I need to rush over?’

‘No, there’s no need to do so. People who have not received permission from the king
cannot be on carriages nor horses inside the Endable Kingdom's capital. They must all
walk. So don't run and just walk.’

He had also said the following.

‘And until you get to the residence, I will be there unconscious. The butler will make it
so that the White Star visits right as you arrive.’

‘And then?’

‘Then the White Star won’t come for a while, so we can talk in detail about the Endable
Kingdom and the thing we need to destroy.’

Cale stopped walking.

A large black residence appeared in front of him.

"This is home.”
“Even I know that much.”

Solena looked at the guards at the gate walking toward them and whispered to Cale.

“The Butler. Me. The Knight Captain. Only these three people know about Duke Fredo-
nim and Cale-nim. Please keep that in mind.”

“Okay.”

Cale held back a sigh and watched as the gates opened.

Screeeech-

The gates slowly opened and the guards could see their young master Naru-nim and
Solena walking in.

“Ah.”

The guards who were bowing their heads to greet him subconsciously sighed.

‘The young master who always greeted us so brightly is……!’

Young master Naru-nim had always warmly greeted the guards, servants, and
everyone else with a bright smile without caring about their status.
Such a person was walking into the residence with emptiness in his eyes today.

Solena, the Duke-nim’s right arm, was walking next to him with a concerned expression.

‘I’ve never seen him like this.’

The guards became sad.

Fredo Von Ejellan.

He was a Duke of the Endable Kingdom and the leader of the Vampires on the Eastern
and Western continents.
He was the liege of all Vampires living in this residence.

But their liege's son was entering with empty eyes.

He had returned to see his unconscious father.
The staff who saw this felt pained.

“Young master-nim, welcome home. Please let me escort you.”

Their young master-nim weakly nodded his head at the Butler and followed behind
him.
The Butler watched for a bit before approaching Solena and quietly whispering.

“He’s doing well.”

“I know, right?”

Solena hid her shock as well before keeping up with Cale, who had become young
master Naru.
As for Cale who became young master Naru…

‘Haaaaa. I'm sure Choi Han and Raon are already in the secret room relaxing and eating
delicious food.’

He did not have many thoughts.

He was just grumbling aimlessly as he walked.

‘The residence looks nice, I wonder if dinner will be delicious.’

He did think about dinner.

“Y, young master-nim. It’s over here!”

That was why Cale had walked past Duke Fredo's bedroom.

“Ah.”

Cale thought he made a mistake.

“I'm sorry.”

“Not at all.”

The Butler who knew about Cale’s identity quickly looked around.
The guards outside the Duke’s bedroom were looking at Cale with sad expressions.
Their expressions seemed to be asking how shocked he must be to even forget the
location of his father’s bedroom.

“I will open the door.”

The knight cautiously told Cale and the now grey-white haired Cale nodded his head.

Screeeech-

The door opened and Cale could smell a strong odor of medicine as he noticed Duke
Fredo lying on his bed as if he was dead.

“…I wish to be alone with my father.”

“I understand.”

The Vampire healer next to Duke Fredo left the room. Cale slowly entered the room
alone.
His slow steps made the staff and knights all look at him with sorrow.

Screeeech-

The door slowly closed.

But before it closed…

“Father.”

The last thing they saw was a young boy kneeling next to the bed and holding his
father’s hand.

The knight closing the door bit down on his lips to prevent himself from tearing up
and quickly closed the door.
He didn't want to interrupt this family moment between a father and his son.

Click.

The door finally closed.

The young boy held the unconscious Duke Fredo’s hand and looked toward his closed
eyes.
He then moved his face toward Fredo's ear and started to whisper.

“Hey, I thought you said the White Star is coming soon. What's the plan?”

The unconscious Duke Fredo started to speak at that moment.

“Heh. Son, what is the issue?”

“Son, my ass.”

Duke Fredo slightly opened his eyes after hearing Cale's grumbling. He then warmly
started to speak to Cale.

“Cale Henituse, just trust me.”

‘Aigoo.’

Cale snorted.
But at that moment…

Knock knock knock.

“His majesty has arrived.”

His majesty.

The King of the Endable Kingdom. He was not the true king yet, but there was still only
one person who was called that.

The White Star was here.

The door would open soon.

Cale who looked toward the door for a moment looked back at Duke Fredo.

This was the moment he would appear in front of the White Star as Naru and not as
Cale.
Cale was naturally nervous, so he looked toward Fredo who said to just trust him.

Fredo quickly started to speak.

"But you'll need to take care of this one on your own.”

‘What?’

“I laid down many different types of bait so you can relax and do as you please.”

‘What kind of nonsense is this Vampire bastard spewing? Relax? He wants me to relax
and do as I please?’

Screeeech-

However, the door opened.

Cale turned away from Duke Fredo and looked toward the door.

The White Star was walking in through the open door with a serious expression on his
face.
The White Star looked toward Cale and started to speak.

“Naru. This must be hard on you.”

Solena had said the following.

“You called him uncle.”

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“Uncle.”

Cale started to speak with honesty.

“It’s too hard.”

‘My dream is to be a slacker, so why do I have to do all these difficult and complicated
things? Why was this bastard, Duke Fredo, pretending to sleep and leaving everything
to me? Ah. I'm starting to get annoyed.’

The face that just said it was hard was starting to frown in frustration.

The White Star and the people coming in behind him all flinched after seeing that
expression.

‘Ah, was I found out?’

Cale subconsciously started to shout.

He did it to avoid any potential suspicion.

“…Cale Henituse. I will never forgive him. I will make him pay for this!”

Inside the bedroom and even in the hallway outside the open door… They were both
filled with silence.

Cale cowered a bit at that suffocating silence.

‘Was that too much?’

The moment he had that thought…

“…Naru.”

The White Star approached him.

He then put a hand on Cale’s shoulder.

“How hard must it be for such a tender child like you to say such a thing.”

‘Uhh, mm. He said I’m tender?’

Cale just quietly stood there in shock.

The White Star rubbed Cale’s head and warmly continued to speak.

“My good little Naru. Feel free to lean on your uncle if you are sad.”

‘…Wow.’

Cale was completely flabbergasted at this situation.

Flinch.

He could feel Fredo's hand that he was grabbing flinching as well.

He slightly turned his head to look but he still had his eyes closed.
‘Hey bastard, are you not going to open your eyes? Are you not going to wake up?
You're laughing internally, aren’t you?’

Cale clenched his eyes shut because he was worried that he would glare at Duke Fredo.
However, it just seemed like a tender child trying to hold back his tears after being
consoled by an adult to the others.
The son's shoulders were slightly shaking as he looked at his loving father, his only
family member, being in pain like this.
Naru had this thought on his mind.

‘…My poor life.’

He felt as if he would laugh in disbelief.

Holding back that laughter was making his shoulders shake.

But the people who did not know this were just looking at him with pitying eyes.
The eyes of the two people who were standing in the hallway just outside the bedroom
were extremely teary.

The people who came with the White Star were people Cale knew as well.
It was the woman wearing the black armor and riding on the black horse.
The other was the Dark Elf old man.
The two of them were in their regular outfits instead of their battle outfits.

The Dark Elf old man started to speak.

“I always feel this way, but Naru does not seem to be like Duke Fredo-nim at all.”

There was a bit of sneer in his eyes as he said that before it disappeared.

Smile.

The woman sneered at the Dark Elf old man.

“Why don’t you just say it outright instead of beating around the bush?”

“Beating around the bush? I am just telling it as is.”

The two of them looked at each other for a moment before looking back at Naru Von
Ejellan whose head the White Star was patting.
The two of them had the same thought.

‘He’s weak.’

His foundation was weak.

The Future Duke Ejellan who would lead the Vampires…

Naru Von Ejellan…
This young boy’s body had been weak since he was young, which was why Duke Fredo
ordered him to stay in a villa for healing and resting instead of staying in the Endable
Kingdom.

There was a hidden sneer in the Dark Elf old man’s mouth.

‘The Kingdom has been here for 20 years. Naru has always been weak during that
time.’

Twenty years was a short period of time for Vampires who lived for hundreds of years,
but this was the time that the future Vampire leader should be growing.
However, Naru was the same as the first time they met and had not grown at all.

His body was weak, so his physique was less developed as well.

This was why the Vampires and the citizens of the Endable Kingdom loved Naru’s pure
innocence and warm demeanor but worried about the kingdom’s future.

However, Naru’s weakness was a source of joy for at least these two people.
They were all in competition with each other.
The thought of their enemy’s future slipping away was enjoyable.

“Let's go in.”

“Okay.”

The two of them then entered the bedroom.

No matter how they truly felt, they had to look as if they were concerned and upset
about the status of their comrade, Duke Fredo.

“Mm.”
A person who was watching the two of their backs as well as the sight inside the
bedroom subconsciously rubbed the back of his hand.
He had slight goosebumps on his hands.

This man was Melundo, the Butler of this residence and one of Duke Fredo's hidden
trusted subordinates.

‘What an amazing human.’

His gaze had been focused on Cale’s back since a while ago.
Vampires were born with talent in stealth and camouflage.

‘Even if it is easier to camouflage because he changed his appearance with the Duke-
nim’s treasure… I didn’t expect him to be so talented.’

He could not hide his shock at Cale who had transformed into their young master
Naru.

Cale Henituse and the White Star.

The two of their relationships could be said to be the worst of the worst.

‘But he’s able to act so sad as if Duke Fredo-nim really is his father even in front of his
bitter enemy!’

His mental strength was surprising.

He heard that this human was twenty years old this year, but how could such a young
human use such clever methods?

He turned to look at Solena.

She was already looking at Melundo as well.
The two of them made eye contact and realized that they were both shocked by Cale.

Both of them started to smile.

‘We picked the right card.’

‘This is beneficial for us.’

Duke Fredo's two trusted subordinates became certain that they had made the right
decision.

They slowly turned their gazes back toward the back of Naru Von Ejellan, the boy
known as Duke Fredo's son… Well, Cale Henituse who had become him.

These two Vampire allies were looking at Cale…

Two enemies were looking at Cale while sneering as well.
Cale who was receiving all these gazes gasped in amazement internally without
knowing what was going on behind him.

‘How amazing.’

Cale thought about the armband that should be hidden inside his clothes.
Duke Fredo had said the following about this band.

‘This treasure changes my outer appearance and hides all the internal stuff as well.
The White Star will not be able to notice your ancient powers.’

The White Star truly did not seem to notice his ancient powers as Fredo had mentioned.

‘That’s why he’s patting my head like this.’

He was extremely upset.

It was obvious why, given the situation.

The White Star was patting Cale’s head not with the left hand that Cale had sent flying
in the battle at the Caro Kingdom’s Land of Death, but with a new hand.

‘…It’d be weird if I wasn’t upset.’

Alberu Crossman would probably be laughing if he saw what was going on.
Cale suddenly recalled the crown prince who barely managed to hold back his
laughter and told him to have a safe trip with a pitying gaze in his eyes when Cale went
to report to him prior to leaving.

Cale subconsciously tensed up.

It was because he became extremely annoyed.

The White Star calmly looked down at him and watched before starting to speak.
“Naru.”

Naru Von Ejellan, the boy who was known for being weak but also for being good.
That child was closing his eyes and shaking his shoulders in front of his uncle whom
he usually followed very well.

Anybody would find this to be pitiful.

The White Star called out in a gentle and low voice.

“Naru.”

The White Star could see his nephew's purple eyes that barely managed to open and
look up at him. He was not his blood nephew, but he followed the White Star as if he
was his blood uncle.

The White Star started to speak to that child.

“I understand what you are thinking. This Eldest Uncle of yours will make Cale
Henituse submit, so don’t worry.”

“…Uncle.”

The boy's voice was shaking.

The White Star nodded his head as if he understood everything.

“Yes, I can feel your heart even without you saying anything else. Cheer up.”

He then moved his hand away from Cale’s head and turned toward Duke Fredo.
He looked at Duke Fredo's complexion for a while before starting to speak.

“Duke. I hope that you can recover quickly to join me in achieving our grand vision of
the Endable Kingdom.”

His voice was calm but honest.

“I will work hard to achieve the great accomplishment that we have been working
toward for so long while I wait for you to wake up. So, hurry up and get better.”

The White Star’s feelings about Duke Fredo seemed to be showing.

‘Ha!’

However, Cale scoffed internally while watching him.

‘My goodness, it’s not even funny.’

He was flabbergasted at the White Star’s actions.

The White Star was cursed after breaking the promise between Dragon Lord Sheritt
and the Dragon Slayer that had been passed down for generations.
That curse was one that Lord Sheritt had made while making a deal with the God of
Death.

He would eternally repeat life and was unable to have anything precious forever.
The White Star was cursed to lose anything he found precious.
Things that were precious to him had to disappear from this world.

‘But Duke Fredo and Naru aren’t dead.’

That could only mean one thing.

‘Truth?’

That wasn’t even funny.

The White Star did not truly cherish Duke Fredo and Naru.

‘He’s probably pretending to like them because a loyal Duke and a nephew who listens
to him are both easy to use.’

That was why Cale did not trust anything the White Star said with a gentle smile on
his face.

‘Of course, Duke Fredo thinks that the White Star truly cherishes Naru and himself.’

Cale did not fix Duke Fredo's misunderstanding.

‘…He’s the enemy.’

Duke Fredo was not a trustworthy person.

They were just working together, so it wouldn't be weird if their partnership stopped
at any moment.
‘But there is still one thing I gained from this.’

Cale had realized something based on Duke Fredo's attitude.

‘The White Star must not have told his subordinates about his curse.’

He felt as if he could use this information to his advantage in the future.

“Then Naru, Uncle is leaving now.”

“Ah.”

Cale, who was debating how to use this information to smack the White Star from
behind, looked toward him in shock.
The White Star opened his arms as if he felt pity for the blanking Cale.

“Naru. Let’s say goodbye before I leave.”

“…Uncle?”

“Yes.”

The White Star smiled brightly while opening his arms.

“Uhh… that… this……”

‘He wants to hug, right? Me hugging the White Star?… Should I kill him?’

This was the perfect opportunity in some ways.

 No! Cale! You will faint the moment you use an ancient power to try to kill the White
Star! You will leave this world while you have fainted if you fail!

Cale lowered his head and walked toward the White Star after hearing the Super Rock
urgently stop him.

He then hugged him.

“Aigoo. You have no strength.”

The White Star patted his nephew's back as he received a weak hug and consoled him.

“Your Eldest Uncle will send over food you like, so make sure to take care of yourself
as you are taking care of the Duke. Got it?”

“…Yes… Uncle.”

‘Wow. I never expected there to be a day when I could eat food that the White Star
sends me and relax.’

Cale had never felt this way before.

The White Star who didn’t know this stopped hugging Cale and turned around as if he
was done here.

“Naru, there is no need to walk me out. Take care of yourself. All of you can speak to
Naru and the Duke if you have anything to say before coming out.”

“Yes, my liege.”

“We will follow you soon, my liege.”

Cale could see the Dark Elf old man and the knight walking toward him.

‘Looks like they somehow survived the avalanche.’

Cale looked toward the two enemies who looked fine despite the large avalanche he
sent toward them on the northern snowy mountain with disappointment.
However, he had to start speaking.

He used the information he heard from Solena and Duke Fredo to speak to them
properly.

“Grandfather, aunt. Hello. It’s been very long.”

“Yes.”

The Dark Elf old man grabbed Cale’s hand.

“This must be very hard on you. This grandfather will pray for you and your father.”
Cale recalled Duke Fredo's thoughts on the old man as the old man said that.

‘That bastard is extremely desperate to push me out and become a Duke. It's rare to
see someone so old still being so greedy for power. He's a cute old man.’

Next was the woman who had been in black armor.

“Cheer up.”

That was all she said.

‘She’s a decent person. She doesn’t show me any animosity, she just thinks I'm weird.’

She then looked at Duke Fredo once before turning around and heading out of the
bedroom.

“I’ll be on my way as well.”

The Dark Elf old man said a few words of concern to the unconscious Duke Fredo
before leaving as well.

The Butler followed them out and Solena was the only one left outside the door.
She bowed toward Cale and started to speak.

“Young master-nim, please chat.”

Screeech- boom!

The bedroom door closed.

Cale blankly looked at the door for a bit before turning around.

“You happy?”

He glared at Duke Fredo who was now sitting on the bed and leaning against the
headrest.

“You think this is funny?”

Duke Fredo was smiling.

“Cale Henituse, you are very good at dealing with an unexpected situation.”

“You happy?”

“Yes. Seeing my old self cursing at me is quite new and enjoyable.”

“You crazy bastard.”

Cale plopped down on a corner of the bed.

“Anyway, now that the White Star and the other bastards saw us together, they
shouldn't say anything even if we are out and about together right?”

“That should be the case.”

Duke Fredo nodded his head and continued to speak.

“We should be able to start making our move once I wake up tomorrow night or the
morning after that.”

“Then I guess that I can explore the area and observe the current atmosphere until
then.”

“Yes.”

Fredo and Cale made eye contact.

Fredo then started to speak again.

"We can focus on finding a way to destroy the facility that will turn the White Star into
a member of the Demonic race starting two days from now.”

The facility that will turn the White Star into a member of the Demonic race.
It was said to be located in the deepest spot in the Endable Kingdom.

Cale nodded his head and started to speak.

“You're freely saying those things now.”

“Of course. The gods have no eyes inside the Endable Kingdom.”
Fredo could say those secretive things freely as the gods could not see within the
kingdom.
Of course, Cale could not relax.

‘The God of Death should know that I am in the Endable Kingdom.’

Cale’s body had a tracker known as the Vow of Death.

“Then I can now rest until you wake up, right?”

Cale looked toward Fredo and asked.

“Yes, you can rest.”

Cale felt a bit relaxed even though this was the enemy's territory after hearing that he
could rest a bit.
Duke Fredo started to speak at that moment.

“Ah. Also, this is for your reference. My Butler Melundo told me about this.”

‘Hmm? What could it be?’

“There is going to be a grand assembly at the palace tomorrow afternoon.”

‘What assembly?’

“It is a gathering of the Endable Kingdom’s nobles and high-ranking officials. It is an

important meeting. You will need to go in my place. That’s what you’ve always done.”

‘Hmm?’

“I'm sure it is a meeting regarding the Endable Kingdom's festival in the fall.”

‘Festival?’

“Why do you look so shocked? People live here as well, so we should have things like
festivals so they can enjoy themselves.”

“…I guess so?”

“Yes. That’s the situation.”

‘I see.’

Cale nodded his head, thinking that it shouldn’t affect him at all.
Of course, it was a big problem to attend the grand assembly.

Cale started to frown again.

Duke Fredo started to speak again after seeing that.

“Ah, also…”

"There's more? Another, ‘also’?”

Fredo ignored Cale’s vicious gaze and pointed somewhere with his hand.

“Do you see that mirror over there?”

Cale noticed the full body mirror on the bedroom wall.

“The secret area is inside there.”

Cale's eyes clouded over after hearing that.

The secret area inside the residence.

That meant that inside there-

“Your friends are in there.”

Choi Han and Raon who had stealthily come with him were on the other side of the
mirror.

“You can come out now.”

Once Fredo looked toward the mirror and said that…

Screech. Screech. Screech.

Some odd noises filled the bedroom before a hole appeared at the center of the mirror
until the mirror completely disappeared.
Cale could see a warm and simple room where the mirror used to be.

“Huh?”

As Cale subconsciously gasped…

“Human!”

Raon opened his chubby front paws toward Cale who was outside the mirror.

Shhhhh.

Choi Han appeared behind him.

Cale looked toward the Dragon and the human walking toward him before starting to
speak.

“…You were watching the whole thing?”

Had they seen everything from the other side of the mirror?
Could they hear the conversation in the bedroom from inside the mirror?

As Cale had those questions…

“Human!”

Raon flew over and patted his back with his front paw.

“Human……”

Raon sounded sad.

“I saw everything from inside there… Human… I know that was hard.”

Raon was consoling Cale.

Choi Han then walked up as well and raised his bowed head.

“Cale-nim.”

Choi Han barely managed to say the following with an emotional gaze.
“…That really must have been hard, holding back for the future when you could have
slashed the enemy’s neck. I respect you.”

Raon and Choi Han were looking at Cale with pity and pride.

“That’s right! Human! I saw how you were holding back your anger as well! Human,
you looked cool!”

‘…Ha. This is so hard.’

Cale avoided the emotional Raon and Choi Han and started to think that today had
been harder than most of the battles he had faced.
Cale brushed his tired face with both hands.

“Cale-nim, I understand. Maintaining your calm while dealing with the White Star,
especially while pretending to be a sad young boy, is very difficult. It is so difficult I
can't even imagine trying to do it.”

“Choi Han! It’s not that you can't imagine it, you’re just bad at acting! Bad things would
happen if you tried to act!”

Cale ignored Raon and Choi Han's conversation and nonchalantly commented to Duke
Fredo.

“Hurry up and tell me.”

His annoyed voice sounded very cold.

Choi Han and Raon quietly closed their mouths while Duke Fredo smiled leisurely and
started to speak.

“I'm guessing that you’re asking me to explain about the place where they will turn
the White Star into a member of the Demonic race?”

Cale didn't even respond, as if he was telling him not to ask something so obvious.

“Mm.”

Duke Fredo brushed his chin with his hand before continuing to speak.

“There’s a noble who didn't show up today.”

Cale knew who it was.

“The bastard with the fan?”

“Yes. That bastard is a noble and the chief priest at the same time.”

Duke Fredo had said his name was Gersey.

“I guess I need to explain about the Endable Kingdom before I explain about him.”

The Duke looked out the window.

The large hole at the northern part of the Eastern continent.

“The Endable Kingdom is divided into many floors. Of them, the areas that have been
labeled as ‘Endable,’ are the lowest three floors.”

The Endable Kingdom that was located in this giant hole started with Section 1 on the
lowest floor.

"This Section 1 is where the royal palace and the first four nobles’ residences are
located.”

Of course, there was a market and many other facilities as well.

However, this place could be seen as the most important place within the Endable
Kingdom because the royal palace and the first four nobles were located here.

“Are you four the only nobles?”

“Yes, for now.”

‘For now?’

Duke Fredo smirked while looking at Cale's questioning gaze.

“The liege is quite a clever person.”

“Why?”

"There are currently noble ‘awaiters.’ They will immediately become nobles as soon
as the Endable Kingdom goes out into the world and the White Star accomplishes his
first goal.”

Noble awaiters.
Cale's expression turned odd before he started to speak.

“The White Star will use the greed of those who want to become nobles as his
strength.”

“That’s right. There are 96 of them, and they are all strong individuals who have never
appeared in the world before.”

96 strong individuals.
Choi Han’s shoulders tensed up.

“Of course, they are much weaker than I am.”

Duke Fredo smiled, but Cale just ignored it.

“Stop smiling for no reason and keep talking.”

“I understand. My goodness, my son is quite difficult.”

Cale, Raon, and Choi Han. All three of them glared at Fredo at the same time.

“Ahem. I will keep talking.”

Duke Fredo quickly returned to the topic at hand.

“The first floor, that is, the most central region. There are multiple temples for the
priests who serve the Demonic race on the second floor above us.”

There were different temples as, just like the gods, there were multiple Demonic races.
The third floor is where most foundational facilities and residential dwellings are
located.

“Anyway, the person who leads and controls the priests is Marquis Gersey. He is the
Chief Priest.”

Duke Fredo stopped talking for a moment.

Smile.

A different kind of smile appeared on his face.

“That bastard is the one who maintains the device that will turn the White Star into a
member of the Demonic race.”

Duke Fredo slowly pointed down with his finger.

“Underneath Section 1… There is an underground area.”

Cale's eyes clouded over.

“Is that where the Demonic race creating device is located?”

“Yes. I've only been there three times as well. But Gersey and the White Star go there
routinely.”

Cale started to frown at that moment.

“How can we easily infiltrate a place even you’ve only been three times?”

Cale's goal was to destroy that place.

But that would be difficult if they even had issues going in.

“My son. Your father is quite the talented Vampire.”

“Why don’t you cut the crap?”

Fredo ignored Cale and continued to speak.

“There is one person other than Gersey and the White Star who can freely go in and
out of that place.”

‘Hmm? A person?’

"The Deputy Chief Priest.”

A wicked smile suddenly appeared on Fredo's face.

 Human! What a questionable smile! Ah! Human, you’re smiling that way too!

Cale was smiling the same way.

The Deputy Chief Priest.
Wasn’t it obvious what they wanted?

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“That person wants to become the Chief Priest?”

“Yes. She also wishes to become a Marquis.”

“Then she’ll need to make Gersey renounce his position, or…?”

“Make him die?”

Renounce his position or die.

Cale repeated those words in his mind before starting to speak again.

“You're going to drag the Deputy Chief Priest into this.”

“Correct. She and I share a common desire.”

Fredo's sluggish gaze slowly started to look fired up.

“We will infiltrate that place with her without anybody knowing. Then we will destroy
the device and quickly sneak back out.”

“Hold on.”

Cale stopped Duke Fredo at that moment.

“I have a question.”

“If it is a parent's duty to answer their child’s questions, then I will happily answer my
son's question.”

Cale ignored Fredo's stupid comment and asked his question.

“I don't think I’m needed for this based on what I heard?”

Stealthily infiltrating, destroying the device, and quietly escaping.

Such a simple plan did not require Cale or his group to accomplish.

“No, I need you.”

Duke Fredo's face stiffened.

“Those who are a part of the Endable Kingdom are cursed so that they cannot destroy
the device.”

He started to explain about this curse that only the first four nobles, the White Star,
and the Deputy Chief Priest knew about.

“People properly joining this kingdom must go through a rite of passage.”

“That is when they are cursed?”

“Yes. The curse is simple.”

He pointed down with his finger again.

“It just makes it so that they cannot destroy the device down there that is needed for
our grand vision.”

“But only a few people know that they are being cursed?”

“That’s right. They just think that it is a rite of passage.”

Cale pointed to himself with his finger.

"That's why you need me to destroy it?”

“Exactly. My son is so smart.”

Cale ignored Fredo's nonsense again and reached his hand out.

"Destroying things is our specialty.”

"Sounds good.”

Fredo grabbed Cale’s hand and the two men had a short handshake.
‘Mm.’

Choi Han internally groaned while looking at Cale and Duke Fredo.
Maybe it was because Cale looked like a young Fredo right now, but the two seemed
to be quite coordinated with each other.

 Choi Han! Our human and the Duke whom I can’t tell is crazy or not look similar!

Choi Han could not agree with Raon's comment.

“Hehe. We will destroy it into the ground.”

“I will trust you. Hoo hoo.”

It seemed as if doing so would make Cale and Fredo cause a big issue.

“Human! I am looking at the White Star differently now!”

“I feel the same way.”

Cale agreed with Raon's comment before nodding his head with a shocked expression.
He started to mumble to himself with a blank expression.

“…I didn’t think it would be so relaxing.”

He was currently sprawled out on a couch.

“…My goodness. I didn't think it would be this comfortable.”

It was a perfectly sized couch for a 12 years old boy to lie across.
Cale was rolling around on that couch.

‘This is ideal.’

His current situation was very ideal.

He was young, so nobody was calling on him to do anything.

In fact, they were all pushing him to his room, saying that his young heart must have
been terribly shaken by this incident.

‘This area is the best too.’

This room was the room next to Duke Fredo's room.

Of course, it was not actually the ‘next’ room.

‘It’s the next, next room.’

Cale gaze headed toward the mirror on the wall.

It was the same as the mirror in Fredo's bedroom that led to the secret area.
Although it looked different, it served the same purpose.

Fredo's bedroom - secret area - Naru’s bedroom.

That was the layout of the three rooms that made up the entire floor.

Because of that, the room was very large and there were many benefits.

Swiiiiiiiish swiiiiiiiiiiiish-

That was the sound of Choi Han’s sword cutting through the air.

Peek.

Cale peeked toward Choi Han as Cale laid on the bed. Choi Han was diligently training
in one corner of the large room.

“Human, this is delicious!”

As for Raon, he was on the large bed on the other side of the room, rolling around and
munching on cookies he floated them through the air with magic, one by one.

“Human, this is so shocking! The White Star can’t taste anything but sent cookies that
are even more delicious than the ones the crown prince gave me!”

‘I know, right?’
Cale looked toward a corner of the room with an amazed expression.

“…What a nice uncle.”

Cale's smile was so twisted it looked evil.

On top of the large table…

There were many delicious looking cookies and dessert… Luxurious fruit… And even
fancy clothes and many other gifts piled up as high as a mountain.

They were all presents that the White Star had sent Naru from the palace.

‘He’s very good at acting.’

Although the White Star didn’t mean it, anybody in the Endable Kingdom who saw his
actions would think that he was a benevolent king who cared a lot about Naru.
He recalled what Duke Fredo told him.

‘People even say that the White Star treats Naru as his own blood nephew. That’s how
much he dotes on me. That's why the nobles’ envoys and even the other nobles who
keep their blades pointed at me are gentle to Naru.’

Fredo had continued to speak while smiling wickedly.

‘Naru is a form of purity in the Endable Kingdom.’

Not because he was strong. Not because he was cruel either.

He was a form of purity because they all wanted to protect the gentle heart of the boy
who was loved by all.

‘What bullshit.’

Cale held back a sigh.

‘Loved by all?’

Based on his long life with over 30 years of experience as Kim Rok Soo, he knew that
it was impossible to be loved by all.
At least, that was what he believed.
‘Naru Von Ejellan. This person is an illusion.’

The Endable Kingdom.

It was an illusion for the people who wanted to invade and trample upon the Eastern
and Western continents.

“Hmm.”

Cale ate something that looked similar to a grape from the things that the White Star
sent him as he started to think.

“Man, the more I think about this…”

Maybe it was because he heard the pleasure in Cale's voice…

Choi Han stopped swinging his sword and turned to look at Cale.

Cale smiled and continued to speak at that moment.

The more he thought about it…

“This is good.”

Naru Von Ejellan.

This existence was quite good.

Duke Fredo had done a good job painting him as an innocent Vampire.

He ate a cookie from the pile.

Crunch!

This cookie that was more delicious than the ones made by the Roan Kingdom broke
into pieces in his mouth.

“Hehe.”

Cale’s laughter filled the room.

Raon stopped eating a cookie and looked at Cale before looking toward Choi Han.

The young Dragon and the swordsman nodded at each other while thinking about Cale
who was laughing as he looked at the cookies and presents in front of him.

‘Choi Han, I think he’s going to loot them dry!’

'It does seem that way.’

Cale who didn't notice them exchanging glances looked at the mirror that connected
to the secret area before motioning to Choi Han and Raon.

“Come here.”

Cale almost whispered to the two of them who had become serious.

“We should do something more.”

Choi Han seriously asked.

"Are we going to loot them?”

“…Hmm?”

“Human, are we stealing things?”

“…No?”

“No?”

“No? Human, I'm surprised!”

Cale looked toward Raon and Choi Han in shock.

‘How do these punks see me?’

The 12 years old boy lay on the couch with an insulted expression as he responded.

"Do you think I always steal things?”

Choi Han could not say anything.

Raon's silence showed his agreement.
Cale looked at the two of them in disbelief before casually asking.

“Do you know why innocent bastards are scary?”

Cale smirked while seeing the questioning gazes of the Dragon and the swordsman.

“They have the courage to run wild without knowing that the world is scary.”

Choi Han felt the back of his neck getting cold for some reason.

He subconsciously gulped and asked.

“…What are you planning on doing?”

Pat, pat.

Cale brushed the cookie crumbs off his fingers before nonchalantly responding.

“I am going to suggest at the grand assembly that we immediately attack and get rid
of Cale Henituse.”

‘Hmm? What?’

The Dragon and the swordsman’s eyes opened wide.

Cale didn’t care and his smile became wider.

He jumped up from the couch and shouted in a serious and energetic voice.

“ ‘Cale Henituse, the evilest enemy in the world who turned my father this way! I, Naru
Von Ejellan, believe that we must defeat this enemy as soon as possible!’ That’s the
bomb I will drop on the grand assembly that is busy preparing for the festival!”

Cale's gaze headed toward Choi Han.

“So, Choi Han.”

“…Yes… Cale-nim.”

“Tell Duke Fredo to relax and rest for a few days. This angry yet pure bastard needs to
flip the kingdom around a bit before he wakes up.”
Choi Han’s mind was truly getting complicated.
Was Cale going to tell them to go get rid of him with his own mouth?

‘What is Cale-nim thinking? I'm sure he must have a plan.’

Cale didn't care whether Choi Han was confused or not as he started to speak to Raon.

“Ah, this cookie is delicious. Should I ask the White Star for more? I feel like he’d send
a truckload over if his nephew asked for it.”

“…I think that at least your cookie-related thought is a good suggestion.”

“Right? Hehe.”

The black Dragon and the black-haired sword master looked toward the smiling 12
years old boy with expressions that seemed to say that they were at a loss for words.
Duke Fredo’s grand residence.
All Vampires related to that residence were currently in the first-floor hall chatting
with each other.

“What's going on?”

“Who knows? We're all here because they told us to all gather.”

All of them looked nervous.

The ones in charge of cooking, cleaning, and even the guards. Beyond them, the vassals
who were responsible for handling everything big and small that happens in the
Ejellan Duchy.

“…But the warrior-nims aren't here?”

“You're right. I think everybody except them is here.”

The large hall almost seemed small as everybody except the warriors was gathered
here.
Actually, it was a bit small.

Some of them had opened the doors to the room connected to the hall and were inside
there as they looked around.

"The Butler-nim isn't here either.”

“I'm sure that the Butler-nim went to escort young master Naru-nim!”

Young master Naru-nim.

The Vampires around him stopped talking for a moment after hearing that.

The reason they all looked nervous…

The reason for that came out of one of the Vampires’ mouths.

“…Do you think that they have to tell us something related to the Duke-nim?”

That voice sounded full of concern.

He looked toward his close friend who was not saying anything and started to whisper.

“You saw the healers urgently rushing in just now. Something, what if something-”

“Hey, shut up!”

He finally looked around after hearing his close friend shout.

He looked into the eyes of the others who looked as nervous as he looked and shut up.

The White Star and the other nobles had visited after young master Naru-nim
returned yesterday.

Things had been peaceful since then.

They were all relieved that at least young master Naru-nim was here while the Duke-
nim was unconscious.
That was why they had started the day a bit more relaxed than yesterday.

‘Yes, we were a bit relieved.’

The Vampire who had shut up after his friend scolded him clenched his eyes shut.

They had just seen healers rushing to Duke Fredo-nim’s bedroom led by the butler.
He had not seen young master Naru-nim all day and Solena-nim was not visible either.

‘I have a bad feeling about this.’

Was something going to happen?

That uncertainty was slowly creeping up in the minds of all of the Vampires inside this
grand residence.

The Ejellan Duchy, no, Duke Fredo, was an extremely precious liege for them.

It was at that moment.

The staircase heading down to the first-floor hall.

Naru Von Ejellan appeared at that spot.
Behind him were Solena and Butler Melundo as they slowly walked down the stairs.

The three Vampires walking down the stairs looked more serious than ever.

The Vampires in the hall stood up straight and stopped talking.

‘This is the first time.’

‘I've never seen the young master-nim looking so serious……!’

Naru Von Ejellan always had a gentle smile on his face.

His face was stiff, unlike usual.

Boom. Boom.

The Vampires’ hearts started to thump a bit louder.

Tap!

Naru stopped at the middle of the stairs.

‘There’s so many of them.’

Naru, no, Cale was slowly looking around at the Vampires standing inside the hall at
the bottom of the stairs.
Well, the hall and the nearby rooms and the kitchen.

Everybody inside this grand residence was gathered here.

Everybody except the warriors.

Cale recalled a piece of information at this moment.

‘It’s been about 20 or so years since the Endable Kingdom was created.’

It was the information that Duke Fredo had given him.

He had said the following as well.

‘That means that the White Star is barely over twenty years old in this life.’
Cale had learned that the Endable Kingdom was started when the White Star's current
life had started.

Of course, the White Star would have prepared for the creation of this kingdom in his
previous life. It had started about 50 years ago.

That meant that this Endable Kingdom had a history of about 70 years, including the
preparation time.

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“Thank you all for gathering together even though you may be busy.”

The people in the hall raised their heads to look at him.

Cale was looking at their gazes as he recalled a portion of the conversation he just had
with Duke Fredo before coming down here.

‘My son.’

‘Cale.’

‘Yes, my friend. Are you really planning on fighting against, ‘Cale Henituse’?’

Cale had shrugged his shoulders as Duke Fredo asked that.

‘No? Why would I fight?’

Duke Fredo had a relaxed smile after hearing Cale say that he wasn't going to fight as
he nodded his head.

‘Okay then, my son. Do as you please. Your father will cheer on his son’s dream!’

‘How about you drop the act?’

‘But this is quite entertaining.’

Cale snorted at Fredo's response and casually asked.

‘I guess you don’t like to fight?’

‘I hate fighting.’

That response came without a second of hesitation.

Cale found it odd such that he subconsciously asked.

‘Why?’

Fredo asked a question instead of answering the question.

‘What did you see on the streets on your way to this house?’

Cale was about to respond right away before choosing to remain silent for a moment
after seeing Fredo's gaze.
Fredo's gaze seemed more serious than ever.

Cale answered honestly after sensing his seriousness.

‘Everything was the same.’

It was the same.

‘Here and the Roan Kingdom. They looked the same.’

What he saw in the Henituse territory and the Endable Kingdom's Section 1 were the
same.
Cale chuckled and started to speak after realizing this.

‘You made Solena take me through there on purpose to show me that, didn’t you?’

‘My son is so smart.’

Fredo also laughed and continued to speak.

‘It was a father's desire to teach his son something. That was why I showed you the
path to this grand residence.’

Fredo turned toward the window as he continued to speak.

‘As you mentioned, everything is the same. This place and the outside world.’
Although they each had differences if you took a closer look, they were similar at a
distance.
They shared the common factor of living.

‘Us Vampires had to live in hiding for generations such that we could never settle
anywhere.’

Fredo recalled how things were more than twenty years ago.

‘I said the following to the Vampires as we created our home here.’

That moment remained vivid on his mind.

‘ ‘I will create a hometown that all of you can always return to in the future.’ ’

He wanted to create a hometown, a place of their own for the Vampires.

‘I think I did what I needed to do by creating a place for Vampires to settle down, a
place that they can always return to if needed.’

He turned back toward Cale.

Fredo looked into Cale's eyes as he sternly continued.

‘I do not wish to shed any more blood.’

Cale finally realized what this enemy, Duke Fredo, whom he had been suspicious
about, truly wanted.

He understood why he wanted the King position.

He understood why this Duke lived in a 12 years old boy's appearance.
He understood why Fredo tried to befriend Cale, his group, and even Alberu.

He understood it all.

Cale was silent and Fredo continued to speak while looking at Cale.

‘And it is just my intuition, but I do not think that the White Star truly cares about the
Endable Kingdom.’

On the other hand, Cale could tell that Fredo truly cared about the Endable Kingdom.
Fredo looked south from his home that was located on the northern part of the floor.
He could see a white palace.

The center of Section 1. It was the White Star’s palace.

‘The White Star and Chief Priest Gersey. I can feel it. Neither of them treasures this
place.’

Hmph.

A bitter scoff flowed out of Fredo's mouth.

‘As for the Dark Elf old man and the knight, they are quite greedy, but they are attached
to this kingdom.’

The two among the first four nobles who were greedy for power and influence.
Fredo did not hate them.

‘I do not hate them. It is because I can feel that they consider this place to be home.’

Cale realized it at that moment.

‘I can trust this guy a little bit.’

Also that it was time to tell him.

Cale started to speak.

‘The White Star has been cursed.’

‘I know. Isn’t it the curse of reincarnation? Of course, it might be a blessing to him.’

‘Not that.’

Cale continued to speak and Fredo started to frown for the first time.

‘The White Star cannot cherish anything. The moment he cherishes someone or
something, he loses that thing. That is his other curse.’

‘Ha!’
Fredo scoffed.
He was silent for a while before saying just one thing.

‘…This Endable Kingdom was just a means to an end for him. Everything is just a
means to an end.’

Cale thought about how Fredo’s expression had looked as he said that before he
stopped thinking about him.
Instead, he started to speak to the Vampires looking at him.

"Father is currently in a coma.”

“Ah.”

Someone let out a gasp.

“And we do not know when he will wake up.”

The atmosphere instantly changed.

However, Cale continued to speak before anybody could say anything.

The boy's voice that had always been gentle calmly caused a ruckus today.

“Father told me this.”

The owner of this household.

The boy who was the son of that owner was talking to them.

“ ‘I will create a hometown that all of you can always return to in the future.’ ”

Silence filled the area.

The Vampires started to tear up.

Everybody other than the Vampires who were born in the last twenty years or so
remembered those words.

They started to think about Duke Fredo.

There was a reason why every Vampire in the Eastern and Western continents
followed Duke Fredo and cherished him.
Fredo Von Ejellan.

He always kept his word to the Vampires.

Duke Fredo always spoke the truth to Vampires who specialized in camouflage,
stealth, and escaping, and had created a place where they did not need any of those
things.

They came here not trusting the White Star, but trusting Duke Fredo.

They were given a peaceful life as a result.

An extremely precious peaceful life.

“I, Naru Von Ejellan, give this order as the acting patriarch.”

His son was talking to the Vampires in this house right now.

‘No.’

The Vampires could feel it.

These words were not just for them in here, but for all Vampires.
That was what their intuitions were telling them.

The boy they always just saw as a little kid was speaking calmly but more confidently
than anybody else.

“Until my father wakes back up…”

This was a precarious situation.

“Trust me and follow me.”

Cooks, maids, guards. All of the Vampires living in the Endable Kingdom clenched their
fists.

“Some bad things may happen. It might become chaotic.”

Cale looked toward the Vampires looking at him as he continued.

“But trust our Ejellan household and follow me.”

He was serious.
Duke Fredo was someone he could trust.

‘Cale Henituse. You can do as you please. However, you must remember that this place
is the same as the Roan Kingdom.’

‘Isn’t that obvious? Places people live are pretty much always the same.”

‘Yes, it is obvious.’

Fredo had said the following.

‘I do not want this peace to be destroyed because of the White Star’s greed. He will
probably start a war against the Eastern and the Western continents. However, the
Vampires and all different races inside this kingdom have already suffered a lot prior
to making this place our home. Most of the regular citizens welcome this peace and
are happy. You can tell that that is the case if you walk the streets.’

Fredo was able to walk freely around this kingdom, get close to the citizens, and see
their lives because he could become Naru, a young and gentle boy.

Vampires, Dark Elves, and the other races.

All of their lives were normal here.

‘I must protect this peace. That is my responsibility for the people who trust and follow
me.’

Fredo's voice echoed in Cale’s ears.

Cale spoke honestly as Cale and not as Naru.

“I will fend off the people who disturb your peace with my own hands, so do not shake
even if it becomes chaotic.”

The Vampires clenched their fists.

This was it.

The Ejellan household was such a place.

“Remember these words from today and continue to live as if things were normal.
Then everything will have passed.”

Cale then walked through the hall and headed to the main door of the house.

Screeeech-

The door slowly opened and Cale walked out.

There was a black carriage outside to take him to the palace.

Cale got on the carriage.

“Young master-nim.”

He turned his gaze.

Solena got on the carriage with him and quietly whispered.

“Thank you very much.”

He could sense her gratitude in her voice.

“No need to thank me. I'm going to cause a shitshow from here onward.”

According to the plan, Duke Fredo will stay in his coma for a while during which things
would happen to cause the White Star headaches.
There won’t be a war inside the Endable Kingdom, but it will become noisy.

Cale just did what he needed to do to make sure the Vampires who would be even
more flustered because their leader was in a coma would not cause trouble.

Smile.

A gentle smile appeared on Solena's face.

“It’s okay, young master-nim. We will be able to carry on as if everything was normal
without being shaken.”

She stopped for a moment and started to close the carriage door.

Solena could see the Vampires heading back to work.

Their strides looked much less concerned about their patriarch’s wellbeing.

Clack.

The carriage door closed and she resumed talking to Cale underneath Naru’s appearance.

“And that is why I am thankful.”

She felt that he was sincere.

Cale had been sincere when he said that he would stop the people from disturbing
their peace.

“…I don’t think I did anything that really deserves gratitude?”

Solena smiled at Cale who was looking at her with a brusque expression that seemed
to be asking what she was talking about before opening the door toward the driver.
She then addressed the driver.

“Let’s go to the palace.”

“Yes, ma’am!”

The driver responded energetically and the carriage started to move toward the palace.

The center of Section 1 of the Endable Kingdom's capital.

The white palace that was said to be the White Star's residence.
The center of that palace, in the grand assembly room currently filled with 101 people.

‘Shall I get started?’

Cale stealthily looked around as if he was a hunter with his prey in front of him.
Of course, he just looked like an awkward and innocent boy who was not yet used to
this type of assembly.
The center of the Endable Kingdom.
The white castle.

As the name indicates, every part of the palace was white.

However, the reason this place was called the white castle was not simply because of
its color.

The large sinkhole.

The inside of that pit was no longer just a sinkhole.

There were different floors with many different facilities.

However, all of the floors were created with a hole in the middle so that sunlight could
reach all the way to the bottom.

‘The sun falls right onto the white castle.’

Section 1 at the bottom of the sinkhole was the only floor with a central location, which
was where the white castle was located.

‘It is called the white castle because sunlight gathers here.’

Cale barely held himself back from chuckling.

The white castle.

The citizens of the Endable Kingdom found this place to be quite holy.

Cale found that to be funny.

‘…The truth is that greed runs wild in this place.’

The grand assembly hall.

The White Star.
The people representing the first four noble households.
And the 96 noble awaiters.

There were 101 people present in this hall.

“Then we will move onto the next topic.”

The Dark Elf old man. Count Mock was leading the meeting.
Cale had been getting a feel for the group during the past thirty minutes.

Count Mock started to speak at that moment.

“This is regarding changing the administrator for Section 7 and Section 9.”

Cale could feel the atmosphere in the grand assembly hall change almost immediately.

The look in the eyes of all 96 noble awaiters changed after hearing that they were
changing the administrator for a section.

‘Heh.’

Cale lowered his head and started to frown to stop himself from laughing.

‘96 noble awaiters. What an odd system.’

The grand assembly hall.

There was a high platform with a circular table and five chairs there.

Of course, one of those chairs was on a slightly higher platform and gave off a luxurious
feel.
Naturally, that was the chair for the White Star.

The remaining four chairs were for the representatives of the first four nobles, and
these five people sat at the center of the assembly hall.

‘And the 96 of them get the floor.’

The 96 noble awaiters.

They were sitting on cushions on the grand assembly hall’s floor looking up at the
platform with the circular table.
Cale peeked toward the hall door.
He started to recall the things Solena told him on their way over one by one.

‘The 96 noble awaiters consist of many different races and homelands. There are races
without the darkness attribute, such as humans and Elves as well. However, they all
have something in common.’

Solena had quietly whispered to Cale.

‘They wish to become nobles. They desire for higher positions. That is why they
quietly sit on the cold stone floor on a cushion even though they are all quite strong.’

Solena looked around even though they were inside a carriage before telling Cale even
quieter.

‘Young master-nim. They all have different reasons they desire to become nobles. Of
them-’

‘It's fine.’

‘Excuse me?’

‘I don't need to know their reasons. I’m not interested in it.’

Cale recalled what he had said to Solena.

‘I just need to know that they wish to become nobles. That’s the important part.’

The corners of Cale’s lips were about to go up again.

“Naru.”

Cale felt someone put a hand on his shoulder at that moment.

It was cold.
There were no traces of warmth.

Cale could not help but subconsciously curl up.

It could not be helped.

The person sitting to Cale's right…

That person reached his left arm out and warmly asked.

“Is it hard?”

Cale could see the smile on this person's face as he warmly spoke to him in the middle
of the meeting.

‘Ha… I really want to smack him from behind.’

Cale wanted to smack him the moment he saw the White Star’s warm smile.
However, he held back and shook his head.

“…Uncle, I am okay.”

Being respectful to the White Star and sitting still was his job right now.
Cale held back what he wanted to say to the White Star and lowered his head.

“Oh my.”

He heard the White Star’s disappointed voice, but Cale ignored it.
The White Star looked at Cale with an even stronger pitying gaze.

‘Did they say that they don't know how long Duke Fredo will be in a coma for?’

The White Star could not hide his disappointment after hearing the news from Duke
Fredo's residence this morning.

‘Tsk. I can't believe I can’t use an important pawn at a time like this.’

The White Star could not help but be disappointed that one of the cards that could
help his plan was not usable.
But the White Star was quietly looking at the 12 years old boy who had his head down
for a different reason.

‘…I guess he is quite torn up.’

The boy who was frowning as if he was holding something in was sitting with his head
held down.

The way he looked made it impossible not to pity him.

But it also made some other people sneer.

‘It looks like the next Ejellan generation will not be able to keep the Duke title.’

Count Mock, the Dark Elf old man, was holding back a sneer as he looked at the White
Star and Naru.

‘But at least he managed to participate in the assembly as the Duke’s envoy even with
his weak personality.’

He held back his sneer and continued the meeting.

However, other than the White Star who was on a slightly higher platform and Count
Mock who was standing to lead the meeting…
The other two nobles were looking at Naru with odd gazes.

The woman who was attending the grand assembly in full armor.
Count Hubesha.
She was confused while looking at Naru who had his head down but his fists clenched.

‘He’s different than usual.’

She was sitting on Naru’s left and could see the White Star looking pitifully at Naru,
but she could not take her gaze away from Naru's clenched fists that were shaking.

‘He's clenching his fists like that because he is concerned about his father?’

That was not it.

This was actually-

‘Isn’t that what people do when they are angry?’

Count Hubesha suddenly recalled what Naru had shouted to the White Star when they
visited the Ejellan Duchy.

‘…Cale Henituse. I will never forgive him. I will make him pay for this!’

She remembered how the boy had shouted in anger.

‘No way.’
She didn't think that that was the case, but this odd feeling continued to overwhelm
her.

‘Naru Von Ejellan. This child is a nice boy.’

He was too nice to be the child of one of the Endable Kingdom's leaders.

He was gentle and kind.

He was upright.
He was pure.

‘But upright people can show a strength that cannot be hindered in certain times.’

Hubesha suddenly looked certain about something.

She started to pay more attention to Naru who had his head down and his eyes closed
as if he was thinking about something.

“Mm.”

Another person who noticed Naru’s odd behavior had his arms crossed and his head
tilted to one side.

‘This is weird.’

That person was Gersey, the Endable Kingdom’s only Marquis and Chief Priest.
But he was thinking about something different than Count Hubesha.

‘Is Solena not controlling him?’

Gersey had felt Naru’s anger as Hubesha had felt.

‘I'm sure Duke Fredo would have talked to Solena in advance.’

The mysterious Duke Fredo that Marquis Gersey knew would have talked to his
trusted subordinate Solena before he fell into his coma.

He would have told her not to let Naru get angry.

He would also have told her to not let the Ejellan household and the Vampires cause
an uproar.
That’s what Duke Fredo would have told her to do.
‘…But Naru is unable to hide his anger?’

This could mean one of two things.

Either Duke Fredo fell into a coma after fighting so desperately that he didn't have
time to say such things to Solena.

‘Or, Solena is unable to control Naru. Hmm.’

The corners of Gersey’s lips started to go up.

He couldn't tell which of the two it was.

‘Well, it doesn’t matter which it is.’

Regardless of which of the two it was, while Fredo, the sturdy foundation for the
Vampires was in a coma… What could Naru do even if he was angry?

‘He naturally has a gentle disposition. That is why whatever he does won't be much.’

Gersey then stopped caring about Naru.

It would be one thing if he had gone to visit Duke Fredo as Count Hubesha had done
and seen Naru’s anger toward Cale Henituse, but he didn’t have time to go visit Fredo.

“Here is the next topic.”

‘We're here.’

Gersey's eyes clouded over.

His gaze moved to the highest spot inside this assembly hall.

He could see the White Star looking back at him with a gaze full of an eccentric desire.
Count Mock continued to speak at that moment.

"This is a motion Marquis Gersey-nim brought up related to the festival.”

Marquis Gersey, the Chief Priest.

The fact that this motion was from the Marquis changed the atmosphere in the hall
once again.
Gersey was one of the Endable Kingdom's three pillars and strongest people.
The 96 noble awaiters and the other nobles all turned toward him.
Even the White Star turned toward him.

Of course, one person was an exception.

Cale kept his head down but still focused to hear what was about to be said.

“Ahem.”

Count Mock peeked toward Gersey with a slightly uncomfortable and confused gaze
and started to speak.

“Marquis Gersey-nim’s motion is to request your permission to allow all priests in

Section 2 to participate in a large ritual on the last day of the festival.”

The heavy atmosphere in the assembly hall lessened.

The noble awaiters looked disappointed.

‘Damn it. I thought it was something big since the Marquis brought up the motion.’

‘It’s just a ritual during the festival. It’s not much.’

Count Mock continued to speak as if it wasn’t much.

“The content of the ritual is to give thanks for successfully completing the year and to
pray for peace and happiness in the future for the Endable Kingdom.”

Everybody stopped caring as much, thinking that it was just a part of the festival.
However, Cale’s eyes sparkled as he had his head down.

‘…This is weird.’

The White Star was supposedly rushing to become a member of the Demonic race.
And Chief Priest Gersey was working with him to make that happen.
But Chief Priest Gersey was doing a ritual for the festival while they were busy with
that?

‘There’s something here.’

Cale realized it.

The White Star and Gersey…
‘These two bastards must be up to something.’

He had a feeling that something dark and sneaky was hidden within that festival ritual.

Count Mock turned toward Marquis Gersey.

“Marquis, is there anything you would like to add on?”

“Ahem.”

Marquis Gersey let out a small fake cough before smiling gently.

“It is just a small issue, so nothing else needs to be said. The materials and costs for
the ritual will all be handled by the priests, so you don’t need to worry about that
either. However, as it is a ritual, we hope that all citizens can observe it with reverence.”

Flap flap.

He flapped his fan and slightly shrugged his shoulders.

It was a very casual action, but the people who knew the weight of his position did not
even frown because of his action.

“Then we will now make a decision about this motion.”

Count Mock decided this was nothing much and quickly tried to pass the motion.
There wasn’t anything to object about it.

Marquis Gersey watched Count Mock as he covered his mouth with his fan.

‘It's done.’

The corners of his lips that were hidden underneath the fan went up without anybody
knowing.

“Then I will take it as this motion has passed-”

Count Mock's voice echoed in the hall. His hand was turning the page to the next
motion.

It was at that moment.

“I object.”

Screeeech-

A chair was pushed back.

‘Hmm?’

Count Mock wondered if he had heard incorrectly and turned his gaze away from the
document and toward the speaker.

Flinch.

His shoulders subconsciously flinched a bit.

“…Young master Naru. Just now-”

“I object.”

Dark Elf old man Mock looked toward Naru who cut him off in shock.

‘…What the…? Wasn’t this bastard completely feeling down?’

Mock could see the boy's eyes burning up.

He could see his clenched fists shaking as well.

“…Oh my.”

The black knight. Count Hubesha subconsciously gasped.

She realized that what she had worried about was starting to happen.

“Naru. What are you doing?”

The White Star gently but sharply looked toward Naru.

The White Star’s eyes opened wide at Naru’s action at that moment.

Baaaaang!

The boy slammed down on the table with both hands.

“Your majesty.”

The boy looked toward the White Star with eyes that seemed to be burning wildly.
This was the thought on the boy's mind.

‘As if I am smacking the White Star around! With that kind of emotion!’

The boy shouted full of emotion.

Of course, his thoughts and the words that came out were completely different.

“We do not think this is the time to be thinking about the festival.”

“…What?”

“My Father. Duke Fredo-nim is a Duke of our Endable Kingdom.”

The boy shouted while his eyes were fired up with the thought of smacking the White
Star around.

“Such a respected person! He was injured by that evil Cale Henituse bastard!”

The boy looked as if he was so angry that he was ready to beat Cale Henituse to a pulp
at any moment.
The atmosphere in the grand assembly hall instantly changed.

‘Hmm?’

‘Huh?’

The eyes of the 96 noble awaiters started to cloud over one or two at a time.

‘…This might be a chance.’

An odd sense of desire filled the eyes of the people looking up at the platform.
Their gazes were very different than when Marquis Gersey was trying to pass the
motion.

The reason that they were willing to sit down on this cold floor with a single cushion.
Duke Fredo had told Cale about it.
‘My son. The noble awaiters trust that the White Star and the Endable Kingdom will
become the strongest kingdom on the Eastern and Western continents combined.’

‘Hmm. What do they need in order to get out of the awaiter position?’

Smile.

Fredo had smiled as he said the following.

‘First, the Endable Kingdom must officially reveal itself to the world and dominate
another kingdom. That is the only way for the kingdom to increase its territory and
require new nobles and administrators to maintain it.’

‘And?’

‘Second, they need merits from each individual awaiter. They must stand out on the
battlefield. That's the way to get the White Star to choose them as the next noble.’

Cale's eyes flashed as he recalled Fredo's words.

‘My son. The noble awaiters have waited a minimum of five years and a maximum of
twenty years for their moment to become a noble.’

Cale had laughed at that as he responded.

‘I'm sure that they're tired of waiting.’

‘Probably?’

‘I guess they’re waiting for someone to start an all-out war?’

‘…My son. Do as you please.’

Cale, looking like Naru, looked the White Star in the eyes and asked.

“Are we just going to sit around like this? I firmly believe we cannot just sit around like
this!”

The boy who had seen his father fainted in a coma shouted with sorrow and anger.
“It is for our Endable Kingdom and our future when we dominate the Eastern and
Western continents! This is an issue of the Endable Kingdom’s pride!”

They could also feel the innocent boy's love for the Endable Kingdom.

“We cannot hide around and wait any longer!”

They could not wait.

The atmosphere around the 96 awaiters started to heat up.

“I, Naru Von Ejellan, the representative of the Ejellan Duchy!”

The assembly hall was quietly but quickly heating up.

The moment Chief Priest Gersey’s smile disappeared from underneath the fan…
The boy's voice filled the assembly hall.

“I would like to make a motion!”

The 96 noble awaiters.

Their intuitions were telling them that this moment was important.

‘The chance to become a noble.’

Something to end the long boring time they had been quietly waiting through.
Something to fulfill their desires.
They thought that the starting point to all of that might happen here.

Naru Von Ejellan.

He calmly started to speak as everybody looked at him.

“Please give the order to kill Cale Henituse right away.”

‘…Shit.’

Chief Priest Gersey subconsciously started to frown.

He had thought that it wouldn't be much even if Naru got angry because he was a
gentle boy.
‘I was mistaken!’

Gersey only just realized that Naru could cause something even bigger because he was
an innocent boy.
He turned his head.

The White Star and Naru…

Gersey could see them looking at each other.

The boy held back his anger and calmly continued to speak.

“The proud warriors of the Endable Kingdom and I will kill Cale Henituse.”

The Endable Kingdom’s warriors.

Those words made some of the noble awaiters clench their fists.

‘It's here!’

They had thought it would not happen for a long time, but someone was creating the
chance for them.
The boy’s next words made the noble awaiters fully confident.

“We will also let the continents know! They will know the greatness of the Endable
Kingdom! They will know about the great and mighty warriors of the Endable
Kingdom! We will let the entire world know about us!”

This bastard was trying to start an all-out war.

‘A chance might come if I help this bastard get this pushed through.’

The fierce gazes of the noble awaiters under the platform were focused on Cale’s back.
Cale knew this but pretended not to know as he continued to speak as if he was a boy
just dreaming of getting revenge.

“And please give me the chance to lead those warriors myself.”

The boy asked the king who had not been fully crowned yet.

“Please.”
He bowed toward the White Star.
However, his spirit looked as unwavering as a large mountain.

The boy. The 96 warriors.

A total of 97 fierce gazes looked toward the White Star.

Of course, the reasons behind those fierce gazes were all different.
Silence filled the grand assembly hall.
However, it was more chaotic than ever.

There was no noise, but the gazes of the 101 people in this hall were showing many
different emotions.
100 of them looked toward the back of the boy who was bowing.

‘Shit.’

Chief Priest Gersey, one of those 100 people, subconsciously folded his fan and put his
hand on his forehead.

‘…Is that child saying this because he knows something?’

He quickly decided that he was wrong.

‘No. What would he know? He’s just acting according to his emotions.’

This action was brought on by useless convictions and bravery.

However, that action had turned into a fuse.

Chief Priest Gersey turned away from the boy and looked around the grand assembly
hall.
It was hot.

The 96 noble awaiters.

It looked as if a small explosion would lead to tens, no, hundreds of other explosions.

Gersey then turned toward the other nobles.

‘…This is bad.’

Count Mock and Count Hubesha.

Both of them were looking at Naru as if he was reckless, but they seemed to be drawn
in by his actions and suggestion.
They were tired of living in hiding as well.

‘But we can't let that happen.’

At least not right now.

Gersey and the White Star had a plan to pull forward their grand vision.
They were working hard right now to pull it up.
This 'festival’ was the only time they could use to pull it up.

Gersey and the White Star looked at each other for a short moment.
Both of them realized that they were thinking about the same thing.

The White Star slowly opened his mouth to speak.

It was at that moment.

“That’s right! There’s no need for us to hide any longer!”

Flinch.

The White Star closed his mouth again and looked down at the ground.

Jump.

One person stood up.

He was one of the 96 noble awaiters.

“The Endable Kingdom is stronger than ever! There’s no need to hide our strength and
run away any longer!”

Count Mock started to speak.

“The noble awaiters do not have speaking rights. Please sit down.”

“…I was just!”

“Please sit down. We will ignore the previous comments.”

The person standing clenched his fists and sat down with his body shaking.
Count Mock looked toward the White Star and started to speak.

“Young master Naru, the envoy’s suggestion seems quite appropriate, your majesty.”

Color returned to the noble awaiter who had sat down.

It was the same for the other noble awaiters as well.

Chief Priest Gersey instantly realized what Count Mock was thinking.

‘…Shit… He’s greedy.’

Disputes and wars. All of them were great opportunities for this Dark Elf old man who
was greedy for a higher position.

“However.”

Count Mock continued to speak with an odd expression on his face.

“The Dark Elves were involved in a battle not too long ago. I'm not sure that we are
capable of participating in another war.”

He seemed to be trying once before stepping back.

Naru’s confident voice echoed in the assembly room at that moment.

"The Vampires have all come together for the same goal. The forces are ready.”

He still seemed adamant as ever.

It was at that moment.

Screeeech-

The White Star got up from his chair and walked over to Naru.
He put his hand on Naru’s shoulder as Naru continued to stand there while bowing.

“…The Vampires may be the first to get hurt if we start a war. Naru, do you understand
this as their leader?”

Cale flinched for a moment after hearing that question.

‘Of course, I do. How can I not?’

It was funny the White Star was saying such a thing, but he at least understood the
meaning behind those words.

‘That’s why I tried to drag the Vampires in.’

Something Duke Fredo told him echoed in Cale’s ear.

‘Yes. Vampires are the same as well.’

Those words were the reason Cale had told the Vampires who live peaceful lives and
have nothing to do with the war to trust him and not fall into chaos.

Cale slowly raised his bent waist.

He looked at the White Star and started to speak.

“Yes sir, I do.”

The White Star looked annoyed for a moment.

However, nobody noticed as it disappeared almost immediately.

He looked toward Chief Priest Gersey for a moment and the Chief Priest nodded his
head.
It was a signal to play along for a bit.
The White Star knew he should do that as well.

‘…Tying them down even more might make them cut the ropes and escape.’

96 strong individuals.
It wasn’t a bad idea to release them at least once so that they don’t go crazy and cause
a ruckus before running away.

He looked toward Naru Von Ejellan, the boy whom he thought would just quietly stay
tied down. He started to speak to his nephew who was causing the greatest ruckus but
still innocently bowing toward him.

“I will think deeply about this motion.”

He then addressed everyone.

“Tomorrow evening. We will reconvene tomorrow.”

Naru’s motion.
They will discuss this motion further tomorrow evening.

The 96 noble awaiters. Their eyes sparkled as their minds quickly started to move.

“We will end today's meeting here.”

The White Star who had stoically been looking at them forcibly ended the meeting.
However, nobody objected.

It was because an even bigger meeting would take place tomorrow.

Cale returned to Fredo's residence as soon as the meeting ended.

“We will come back at mealtime.”

“Okay.”

Cale said bye to Solena and Butler Melundo and walked into his bedroom.

“Cale-nim, you’re here.”

“Human!”

Choi Han and Raon welcomed Cale.

Cale casually nodded his head and immediately walked over to the couch and lay
down.

Choi Han walked over to Cale and cautiously asked.

“Are you worried about something?”

“I'm not sure.”

Cale didn’t say much with an odd expression on his face.

Choi Han observed Cale’s expression that seemed to be saying that he was worried
about something before moving away.

It was at that moment.

“Ah! Human! Bud called! He said, ‘okay,’ and hung up when I said you weren’t here!”

Choi Han and Raon could see Cale’s expression turn odd at that moment.

‘…What to do.’

Cale’s mind started to become complicated.

The reason he originally wanted to cause a ruckus here was because he wasn't very
interested in the citizens of this place.

But everywhere that people lived were pretty much the same.
The regular Vampires and Dark Elves… They seemed like normal neighbors.

‘This is difficult.’

Even if he could now trust Duke Fredo as a leader and the Vampires’ lives were similar
to their own…

There was something Cale had to take care of with the Vampires.
Bud was involved with that as well.

“Connect him.”

Cale motioned for Raon and Choi Han to look around with his eyes before sitting up.
He then looked toward the video communication device that Raon was connecting.

Ooooooong-

A light flashed and Bud’s face appeared on the screen above the video communication
device.

 Wow, shit! What the hell?!

Bud’s face instantly stiffened.

 You crazy bastards! What the hell did you do to Cale Henituse?!
“Ah.”

Cale immediately realized why Bud was reacting like this.

“It’s me.”

 What do you mean it's me? You wicked Vampire bastard! You must have sucked
Cale’s blood dry! You crazy bastard! I'm going to head to the Endable Kingdom right
now and cut off your neck myself!

“I said, it’s me.”

 What do you mean it's me?

As Bud’s face turned red with anger and his eyes had a cold gaze…
A chubby black front paw appeared in front of the screen and moved side to side.

“Bud! He is our human! He’s currently under disguise!”

 Ah. Is that so?

‘What?’

Cale frowned after seeing Bud accept Raon’s statement right away and calm down
after not trusting him at all.

 Huh? It really is him! That damn bitchy expression!

“…Are you crazy?”

 Ahem. Sorry.

Bud then smiled and had a sly look on his face.

 I heard you were going to the Endable Kingdom's base?

“…Even you heard about it?”

 Of course! I contacted his highness. I couldn't talk to you earlier.

Bud stopped talking for a moment before his face slowly stiffened and he took a few
steps back.
Cale then saw the scenery behind Bud’s shoulder through the video communication
device.

“…You!”

Cale’s face stiffened.

“Hey, Bud! That place is dangerous!”

Raon shouted in shock while Cale kept his mouth shut and closed his eyes for a
moment before opening them back.
He then started to speak.

“…Did you go to find the bodies?”

Bud calmly nodded his head.

 Yes. I can’t let my friends’ bodies stay in this cold and dangerous place.

The snowy mountain on the northern part of the Eastern continent.

Bud was at the place where almost the entire Ranger Brigade was probably killed and
the place Cale and Bud’s group had barely managed to escape from.
They could see mercenaries searching the mountain over Bud’s shoulder.

Both Cale and Bud were silent for a moment.

Cale's heart then started to tilt.
Toward Bud of course.

His mouth slowly opened again.

“…It must be hard.”

 Something is weird.

Cale and Bud. Both of them flinched at each other's comments and looked at each other.

“Hmm?”
 Huh?

Cale flinched before immediately asking.

"What is weird?”

Bud looked around the mountain as if it was difficult to explain before sighing and
starting to speak.

 There are no bodies.

“What?”

Cale was truly shocked this time as he asked.

‘There are no bodies?’

How could that be?

How could someone move close to 1,000 bodies?
The bastards who were running away from the avalanche managed to move all those
bodies in only one or two days?

Cale suddenly had a thought and asked.

“Are the enemy bodies gone too?”

 No.

Bud shook his head.

 The numbers don’t match. There are not enough bodies. Over half of them.

Over half of the bodies were missing.

 We found a little less than half of the bodies.

Bud seemed bitter but his eyes were full of sadness and anger.
At the same time, there was a look of hope as well.

‘Hope?’
It happened the moment Cale found that emotion to be odd.

 There’s one type of corpses missing that Pan explained.

The Rat Pan.

He was the Ranger who served as the leader of the 1,001 member Ranger Brigade.

“Hurry up and tell me.”

Cale urged Bud who seemed to be hesitating to talk.

Bud took a deep breath before responding.

 Furthermore, the few Rangers you saved with Pan's information were all missing
one type of injury.

Bud continued to speak.

 Pan's memory is quite good, so we were able to find the bodies quickly. However,
we found that there was an error with Pan's memory.

That was the case.

As Bud mentioned, it would be an error if there wasn’t a body in the spot Pan
remembered.

Bud hesitated for a bit before starting to speak again.

 You said that you're working with that Duke Fredo bastard, right? You said he was
interested in you.

As Bud suddenly mentioned Duke Fredo…

“Perhaps?”

Cale subconsciously started to speak.

“Pan clearly told me about it.”

He recalled something the Rat Pan told him.

‘There seems to be a Vampire! I found the corpse of one of our brigade members and
there was no blood left in the corpse.’

Pan had also been extremely upset the first time they saw Duke Fredo.

‘W, what nonsense! You’re the leader of the bastards who sucked our brigade
members’ blood dry……!’

Cale looked at Bud’s eyes through the screen.

“There were no bodies that had their blood sucked?”

 Yes. No injured people either.

Choi Han who had quietly been listening while looking at the door and the mirror
looked toward the video communication device in shock.
Cale started to mumble at that moment.

“…You think, rather than Pan being wrong, that it has something to do with the
Vampires?”

He looked toward the mirror that was a secret passage.

Duke Fredo was in the room two doors down.

‘What is going on?’

Cale started to recall the battle from a few days ago.

‘Did Pan remember wrong?’

That couldn't be it.

The rest of the bodies were where he said that they would be.

He heard Bud’s anxious voice at that moment.

 Hey. Did you find the Illusionist?

“Ah!”

Cale subconsciously jumped up from his seat.

The northern snowy mountains.
The enemies who attacked them at that location. They had found the enemies who
had attacked, however, they had not found one thing.

The Illusionist.
Who could that be?

Bud started to whisper.

 …Cale, what if Pan seeing a brigade member getting their blood sucked dry was an
illusion?

Cale suddenly remembered something at that moment.

Vampires were said to specialize in camouflage and escape.

Then what was their leader’s specialty?

‘Is Fredo the Illusionist?’

Or…

‘Is there a separate Illusionist?’

Then who could the Illusionist be?

Cale suddenly thought about someone else who was working with Fredo but was not
a Vampire.

“…The Deputy Chief Priest?”

‘Who else could be the Illusionist? Who the hell could the Illusionist be?’

Cale’s mind quickly started to move.

Cale put the thought about who the Illusionist was aside before slowly recalling
everything that had happened.

Cale had not told Fredo much because he could not trust him.
Similarly, Fredo had done the same as he could not trust Cale either.
However, Fredo had appeared in front of Cale and asked to make a deal or sign a
contract without any hesitation.
What led him to do that?

“…There was something.”

There was something that he trusted, something he could offer as a condition.

That was why he had acted so rash and confident.

‘For example, Ranger Brigade members that he stealthily hid away.’

Cale subconsciously started to smile.

‘Oh, how interesting.’

Duke Fredo.
He truly was not someone to look down on.

“Hey. Bud. Hang up for a bit.”

 …I leave it to you.

The video communication device turned off and Cale started to talk to Choi Han.

“Open the mirror.”

He needed to meet with Duke Fredo again.

Fredo was with Solena in his bedroom.
Cale looked toward Fredo and bluntly asked.

“Where are they?”

Fredo had a bright smile on his face.

“My son, you must finally be looking for the bodies.”

“Haaaaa. You crazy bastard.”

Cale could feel Solena flinch, but he ignored it and plopped down on the empty chair
across from Fredo.

“Where are they? Actually, no.”

Cale asked the same question before shaking his head. He then asked Fredo a different
question.

“Why did you do it?”

“What are you talking about?”

“Don’t feign ignorance. It’s funny to hear someone who just smiled and asked if we
were looking for the bodies pretending like he doesn’t know anything now.”

“Mm. I guess it is funny.”

Fredo nodded his head as if he agreed with Cale.

He then continued to speak.

“It was because the weight wasn’t balanced.”

“The weight?”

“A deal or a contract means that both sides are giving something of equal value to the
other.”

Fredo believed that they needed to be clear on what each side was giving and
receiving.

“And when both sides of the scale are equal in weight… That’s when a contract is set.”

“You thought that holding the Ranger Brigade members hostage was balancing the
scale?”

“Yes. Shouldn’t I at least do that much?”

Choi Han who came through the mirror after Cale started to speak at that moment.

“Is that why you included Cale-nim’s blood as a condition?”

Choi Han's gaze did not look happy as he glared at Fredo. Actually, there was a lot of
animosity that Choi Han did not hide.

Choi Han thought Cale had more trust in Fredo than before, but in Choi Han's point of
view, Fredo was just an enemy aiming for one of his family member’s blood.
He saw him as someone who could stab them in the back at any moment.

Smile.

Choi Han could see Fredo smiling toward him at that moment.
Fredo started to speak in a gentle voice as if Choi Han’s animosity was cute.

“Choi Han. Do you think your master values his blood a lot? I think Cale Henituse
would put a higher value on his friends’ blood than his own.”

Choi Han was suddenly at a loss for words.

Cale started to speak instead.

“My blood is very important to me.”

Choi Han was at even more of a loss for words that he turned away from Cale.
On the other hand, Fredo looked toward Cale and nonchalantly commented.

“I also needed a conversation with the Mercenary King.”

Solena sighed quietly after hearing that.

Fredo continued to speak as Cale looked at her.

“I didn't want to be hated anymore.”

It sounded light, but those words were not light at all.

“The people of the Eastern continent do not look favorably on most of the races that
make up the Endable Kingdom.”

The animosity toward Vampires and Dark Elves were obvious, but it was highly likely
that the people on the Eastern continent would feel repulsed by the citizens of the
Endable Kingdom when it was revealed.

“There were people I needed to slowly change that mindset.”

Cale immediately realized who those people were.

“You’re talking about the mercenaries.”

“Yes. The mercenaries going around the continent and saying good things about us in
restaurants or shops will slowly change people’s opinions about us.”

Tap. Tap.

Cale tapped his knee with his finger as he started to speak.

“You hid the Rangers because you needed to make a deal with both the Mercenary
King and me?”

Fredo raised his hand and pointed somewhere.

“Here. Solena was in charge of that. The other Vampire knights helped her as well.”

Now that he thought about, Cale had not seen any Vampires other than Solena and
Fredo in the northern snowy mountain.

“Hmm.”

Cale crossed his arms and stared at Fredo as he started to speak again.

“It looks like you are not going to tell me where they are.”

Fredo did not disagree with that statement.

"They are safe. Ah, but we did suck some blood from them in order to trick both allies
and enemies while we were on the northern snowy mountains.”

Solena urgently interjected.

“Sucked their blood?! My liege, you must not use such phrasing! Mm! Young master-
nim, the amount was very minimal. It was only a tiny bit that we couldn't help but
absorb while pretending to take their blood. Everybody is safe.”

She smiled as gently as possible toward Cale.

"This is the truth.”

“Who said it wasn’t?”

“Excuse me?”

Cale shrugged his shoulders toward Solena and then stared back at Fredo.
Fredo smiled at him and started to speak again.

“I will let you know where the Ranger Brigade members are if you properly destroy
the facility that would turn the White Star into a member of the Demonic race.”

“It’s not enough.”

“What?”

Cale looked right at Fredo and shook his head.

“There are not enough benefits for me.”

“…You’ll prevent the White Star from becoming a member of the Demonic race and
manage to save over half of the Ranger Brigade members that you thought were dead.
But that’s still not enough benefits for you?”

Smirk.

Cale started to smirk.

‘Well, I would have made that deal if things had proceeded according to Fredo's plan.’

If Cale had followed the map to the Endable Kingdom and met with Fredo as he had
originally planned… And then if he had heard about the Ranger Brigade members still
being alive at that moment…

Cale would have made the deal as Fredo wanted.

‘But the situation is different now.’

The situation had changed.

Shouldn't he earn more benefits while he could do so?

Cale uncrossed his arms and leaned his upper body toward the bed.

“Father.”

Fredo flinched after hearing Cale call him father.

His eyes could see Cale’s twisted smile on his innocent childhood appearance.

“Father, you become king in return, but there’s nothing I gain from it. Nothing in my
hand.”

Fredo let out a short groan.

As Cale said, there was nothing Cale Henituse would gain from this.

Fame, power, wealth, none of it.

‘I thought he wasn't the type to seek those things?’

Fredo wondered if he had heard wrong about Cale. On the other hand, he had a
different thought as well.
‘…It would be weird if he had no greed at all.’

He heard a cold voice as he had that thought.

“In addition, the situation has changed.”

Cale returned to his usual tone as he continued to speak.

The situation had changed.

“How will you handle this without me now?”

His help was now necessary.

“Mm.”

Solena let out a groan.

Fredo quietly observed Cale for a bit before starting to speak.

“Yes. Now we need you.”

Cale’s value to Fredo had gone up more now.

Cale nonchalantly commented as Fredo accepted this.

“Raise it some more.”

Offer some more things to put on the scale.

Balance the weights on the scale.

That was what Cale’s gaze was saying and Fredo accepted it.

“Sure. I will think about what to add to my side of the scale.”

“Good. That’s what I wanted to hear.”

Cale immediately stood up from the chair.

“Slowly think about what I would want. Then I’ll start to prepare and make my move
as well.”
Solena flinched and turned toward Cale after hearing him saying that he would
prepare.
However, Cale ignored her gaze and headed back to the mirror.

He heard Fredo ask him a question from behind him.

“My son, have you called his highness, the crown prince?”

Cale turned back for a moment just before climbing through the mirror and smiled at
Fredo.

“A long time ago. I'm quite a thorough person.”

More than he seemed at least.

It was late at night.

The moonlight from above was shining down on the white palace.
However, in a dark residence on the southern part of Section 1 where that light did
not reach…

Knock knock knock.

The person who was looking through documents in this study that was full of books
looked up after hearing someone knocking on the door.

“What is going on?”

This study… Actually, this southern mansion's owner looked out the door and started
to speak.

The middle of the night was too early for a person like him who stayed up very late
with work to sleep.

“Count-nim.”

The owner of the house slightly tilted his head to the side after hearing the butler’s
voice.
The butler knew that he did not like being interrupted while he is working and did not
come around this time if possible.
He was a talented butler who usually took care of everything himself.

He heard the butler’s voice at that moment.

"Count-nim, young master Naru Von Ejellan has come to see you.”

‘What?’

The Count immediately got up.

The old man’s eyes were full of shock and confusion.

He immediately opened the door to his office and the butler bowed.

“The young master has requested to meet quietly with you alone as he has something
he would like to discuss with you.”

Quietly. Something to discuss with him alone.

That meant that Naru wanted this meeting to be a secret.

‘Naru Von Ejellan came to meet with me? Why?’

The butler cautiously asked.

“Count-nim, what shall I do?”

Count Mock.
The Dark Elf old man's mind quickly started to move.

‘…Naru Von Ejellan secretly came looking for me so late at night?’

Mock started to recall the events from the afternoon.

‘The proud warriors of the Endable Kingdom and I will kill Cale Henituse.’

He naturally thought about the moment Naru caused chaos in the grand assembly
room.
The innocent-looking bastard had done something big.
“Hooo.”

Count Mock started to smile.

It was because he suddenly thought of something.

“Will you look at that?”

A wicked smile appeared on the old man’s face before it instantly disappeared.
He gave the butler and order with a solemn expression.

“Bring young master Naru inside.”

“Yes, Count-nim. I will escort him to the reception room-”

“No, just bring him to the study.”

The reception room was where he met with guests.

“I feel like I’ll have to do some work to do.”

His study was the place to work.

Rooms were supposed to be used as they were planned.

Count Mock soon saw a hooded individual walking into the study with his butler.

Shhhh.

The person walked in and removed his hood before greeting Mock.

“Hello, Count-nim. I'm sorry for visiting you so late at night.”

“It’s not a problem.”

Mock greeted young Naru with a benign smile.

“Don’t be so stiff calling me Count. I told you to call me grandfather.”

He gently sat the boy across from him.

“Here are the cups of tea.”

“Good work. Butler.”

“Please have a nice conversation.”

The butler left tea and snacks before carefully leaving the study and closing the door.

Click.

The study was separated from the outside once the door was closed.

“Naru. Drink some tea first.”

“Thank you very much, Count-nim.”

“I told you to call me grandfather.”

Click.

The boy picked up the cup and observed the Count.

“I think I need to speak to you today not as, ‘grandfather,’ but as, ‘Count-nim.’ ”

Count Mock realized that the boy's passionate gaze looked different than usual.
One corner of the Count’s lips went up.

“Sure. What brings you here?”

The boy took a sip of tea and put the cup back down on the table.

Clang.

There was a short moment of silence after the quiet clinking of the cup.
The boy said the following at the end of that short moment.

“Our liege will not start a war.”

Smile.

The corners of Mock's lips went up.

Cale looking like Naru continued to speak.
“I say that based on his majesty's usual demeanor. The fact that he did not make his
mind up right away in the assembly hall and pushed it back shows that he has no
thoughts on starting a war right now.”

“You're right. I also feel that our liege does not plan on starting a war.”

He benignly smiled after noticing Cale’s gaze.

“If he had any thoughts about starting a war, he would have called Count Hubesha or
me. He would have also called you to have a separate conversation.”

“Unfortunately, he only took Chief Priest Gersey-nim with him to his office.”

“Yes.”

Count Mock had not liked that either.

‘Why does our liege stick around Chief Priest Gersey so much?’

Cale started to laugh internally while looking at Mock, however, he continued to speak
as if he did not realize how Mock felt at all.

“However, it will be difficult for his majesty to just ignore this motion.”

“Yes. 101 people have heard it.”

Count Mock agreed with this.

The Noble awaiters.

Their desires and patience were at their limits after waiting so long for the White Star
to cover this issue up and forget about it.

Mock noticed a deep smile on the boy's face at that moment.

“That’s right. We cannot ignore the 96 people.”

“Ha!”

Mock subconsciously laughed at that moment.

“Naru, you knew what you were doing in there, didn’t you?”

‘I thought he was just a clueless child! I thought he was stupidly charging forward in
the grand assembly hall!’

Based on his actions right now, it seemed as if he had acted that way in front of the 96
people on purpose.

“Count-nim.”

The boy quietly started to speak.

“I am an Ejellan after all.”

Mock suddenly felt chills on his back.

“You remind me of your father when he was young.”

Mock recalled the focused eyes that had been charging forward toward his goal.

“So then. Why did you come looking for me?”

The boy smiled and asked back.

"Why did you decide to meet with me?”

The boy acted as if he knew everything as he quietly spoke to the Count almost in a
whisper.

“Count-nim, you want there to be a war, don't you?”

The old man’s gaze stiffened and became colder.

Cale looked at him as he recalled a conversation with Duke Fredo.

‘My son, you’re going to target Count Mock?’

‘Yes. Based on what you told me, he seems to be the greediest for power.’

‘That is true. It would be good to put him in the forefront.’

‘That’s right. I'm going to use that bastard.’

Fredo had smiled after hearing Cale say that he was going to use Mock.

‘Mock will move according to your will without knowing anything.’

‘What is it? You don’t like it?’

‘No, I think it'll be entertaining.’

Cale looked right into the eyes of the old man who had come out of his thoughts and
was staring at him with a piercing gaze.

Cale knew as well.

The White Star who wished to become a member of the Demonic race would put his
grand vision ahead of dealing with Cale Henituse.

That was why an all-out war was impossible.

He had come up with a plan while knowing that that was the case.

‘Destroy and swipe.’

He would destroy the White Star's things and swipe them.

Cale stealthily asked the old man a question.

“Count-nim. Don’t you want to achieve some merits?”

A short moment of silence fell in the room.

However, Mock soon destroyed that silence.

“Ha, hahaha-”

The old man’s laughter filled the study.

Clang.

Mock's gaze turned cold as he put the teacup down.

“Crisis is said to make people grow. Naru. You've grown. I don’t know when you grew
so much.”

He stopped leaning on the couch and leaned forward toward the boy and asked.

“Yes. You want to plot something with me?”

Tap.

Cale took a document out of his pocket and put it on top of the table.

“…Naru, I don’t know what this is.”

The old man’s questioning gaze changed the moment he heard what Cale had to say.

“This is top secret information my father has been gathering.”

Mock subconsciously clenched the armrest with both hands.

It was here.
A big opportunity had come his way.

That was what Mock's intuition was telling him.

“…What is the information?”

Cale laughed internally at the Count's question.

His gaze headed toward the document.

‘Information my ass.’

This was a fake document he and Fredo created this morning.

Cale slowly unraveled the rolled-up document and gently smiled toward the enemy.

“This is precious information.”

Count Mock's gaze moved to the document that was slowly being opened on the table.

‘Precious information?’

He looked away from the document and looked at Cale. Cale felt his gaze and raised
his head as Mock started to speak to him.

“…The Duke does something like this?”

“Of course. There is a reason he is the Duke.”

‘Ho!’

Mock barely managed to hold himself from scoffing out loud.

“Is there anyone who knows about this?”

“The fact that he is collecting information like this?”

“Yes.”

Mock subconsciously tensed up.

But the boy casually answered as if it wasn't much.

“How would there be anybody who knows?”

Mock tightly clenched onto the armrests after hearing that nonchalant response.

‘I didn’t think Duke Fredo would be gathering information in secret like this without
even reporting it to his majesty!’

Based on how he said that it was top secret information, there was a whole system set
up to divide the information up by value or importance.
Mock knew that Duke Fredo was the strongest physically among the first four nobles.

‘But I thought that he was just an eccentric individual whose thoughts I couldn't
predict but that he was still loyal to his majesty!’

Mock could not hide his shock at this newly gained knowledge.
He then started to think.

‘…I guess these kinds of things need to be done to rise to the Duke position.’

The veins on the back of his wrists were clearly visible as he continued to clench on
the armrests.

Mock's gaze shook as he looked back at the document. His gaze was filled with self-
reflection at the fact that he had not gathered information in this matter and that he
should do so in the future.
Furthermore, there was also a strong desire that doing so would allow him to rise to
the Duke position as well.

‘My goodness, he lives such a complicated life.’

Cale confirmed Mock’s status before smiling internally.

Shhh.

The document containing top-secret information finally opened all the way.

“Please take a look.”

Count Mock leaned forward and focused on the document after hearing Cale's
statement.

< 1. The location suspected of being Cale Henituse's base. >

“Cale Henituse's base……?”

Mock immediately looked back at Cale. The boy smiled and motioned with his hand.

“Please keep reading.”

Mock turned back toward the document.

“Count-nim. You should read all the red words first.”

There were a lot of things written on the document, but the red words were quite eye-
catching and Mock started to read them first, as Cale had mentioned.

< The Forest of Darkness, one of the Forbidden Regions that exists in the Roan
Kingdom's Henituse territory. >

< The families of Cale Henituse's friends are confirmed to be living there. Determined
to be a black castle located at the center of the Forest of Darkness. (Confirmed in the
air.) >

< Security is quite tight because the Tiger tribe and others usually reside there. >

The Henituse territory.

It was a place that any of the Endable Kingdom's chief executives have heard about at
least once, no, many times.
It was Cale Henituse’s hometown as well as where the northern Indomitable Alliance’s
first plans failed.

Mock confirmed the new details among the familiar details.

“…There’s a castle in the Forest of Darkness within the Henituse territory?”

‘And that is where Cale Henituse's friends and their families live? It is where Cale
Henituse spends most of his time as well?’

Mock naturally looked at the next sentence.

< It is not easy to approach because of the Tiger Tribe and Cale Henituse's friends who
reside in the castle. >

At the bottom of the document…

Written in the brightest red color…

< However, I believe that if we are able to attack and take control of this location, we
could use the hostages here to land a serious blow on Cale Henituse and his friends. >
That last sentence was written in Duke Fredo’s handwriting.

Count Mock was the overseer of the grand assembly.

He had seen the motions the first nobles had submitted many times and was familiar
with all of their handwriting.

‘That should mean that this last sentence is Duke Fredo's opinion.’

He could consider the last sentence to be Duke Fredo's analysis of this top-secret
information.

‘…The chances of this information being real just went up.’

Mock's level of trust in the information went up as well.

He had gone himself to confirm Duke Fredo's status.

Fredo was clearly comatose, so he would not have been able to write this at the
moment.
That meant that this information was analyzed prior to his going unconscious, so the
chances of this being real were quite high unless Duke Fredo had gone crazy and acted
nonsensically.

Mock tried to maintain his expression and nonchalantly asked the boy as if he wasn’t
interested at all.

“…What is this?”

“Count-nim, I know you read it all.”

The boy mischievously smiled.

“I read it, but I don't understand why you are showing this to me.”

Mock could see the mischievous expression disappear from the boy's face after
hearing that.

“Count-nim.”

The boy leaned forward toward the Count as well.

“The Tiger tribe that is the central force for protecting the black castle at the center of
the Forest of Darkness is currently at the Roan Kingdom's capital with crown prince
Alberu.”

Tap. Tap.

The boy lightly tapped on top of the document as he continued to speak.

"And where are Cale Henituse and his famous friends right now?”

Mock and the boy made eye contact.

“Count-nim, they are all split up among the four different battles we had prepared.”

The Lake of Despair at the north of the Western continent.

The snowy mountain on the northern part of the Eastern continent.
The Eastern continent's Molden Kingdom.
And the Roan Kingdom's Stan territory and capital on the Western continent.

“Finally, our information team has figured out Cale Henituse's current location.”

“…Where is it?”

“He is said to have headed north to the Lake of Despair. One of our people who have
infiltrated the Stan territory has figured that out.”

“…He must have gone to the World Tree.”

“That’s right. Cale Henituse is probably worried about the World Tree the most right
now.”

Mock silently nodded his head to show his agreement.

He felt his mouth going dry at that moment. His body was slowly starting to tense up.

Mock knew the reason this was happening.

However, he did not say it out loud. The boy in front of him would say it first.

“Count-nim, the black castle is currently empty.”

Count Mock's heart was slowly starting to beat wildly.

A plan naturally formed in his mind.
The boy's voice egged him on.

“To be more specific, there are no strong individuals there right now. There are some
magic circles, but there is nobody protecting the place. We should be able to destroy
the magic circles if we go attack it a few times.”

‘We can destroy it.’

That sentence etched itself on Mock's mind.

“Count-nim, instead of the strong individuals, what we will find there are the weakest
people related to Cale Henituse, the people he needs to protect.”

Mock had enough information about Cale Henituse to know that he cherished his
friends quite a bit.
He also had this hero mentality of trying to protect the weak.

Mock ignored his wildly beating heart and calmly asked.

“…But Cale Henituse will not leave that place empty forever.”

“That’s why right now is the time!”

The boy raised his voice.

Mock's heart started to beat even louder than before.

"Count-nim, Cale Henituse must have decided that it was okay to leave the castle
empty for a bit because he thinks we have not discovered it! But based on his
personality, he will soon send people back to protect his weak but precious people!”

Boom!

The boy slammed his hands on the table.

Mock and the boy looked at each other.

“Count-nim, so, before that happens!”

The boy's eyes looked extremely heated.

The boy, Cale, strongly thought about smacking this guy from behind as he shouted
each word one by one.

“Count-nim, you and I. And a select few from the 96 noble awaiters. We can take
control of this castle.”

We.

The secretive nature of that word filled Count Mock.

Count Mock started to heat up. He slowly lifted himself away from the back of the chair
and started to organize his thoughts.

‘His majesty is more likely to approve of this because it is not an all-out war nor a
large-scale battle.

‘No.

‘This plan Naru brought is something his majesty might desire as well.’

It seemed like a better and better plan the more he thought about it.
It would calm the noble awaiters who wanted to achieve merit while landing a blow
on Cale Henituse at the same time.

Mock nonchalantly asked Cale who looked like Naru.

“Taking control of Cale Henituse’s black castle. Are you satisfied with just that?”

“Not at all.”

The boy smiled.

Mock could feel anger within that smile and believed it to be anger directed at Cale.

‘Do you know how many times he’s screwed me over?!’

However, Cale was filled with anger against the White Star.
He continued to speak.

“Taking control of that castle will be step one to drag Cale Henituse in. And then-”

“Take it to an all-out war?”

“Yes, sir. Even a small flame can end up burning down an entire mountain.”

Mock quietly asked.

“His majesty won't want that.”

Smile.

The boy just smiled.

‘…This punk!’

Mock realized that what Naru wanted, in the end, was an all-out war.

‘He has no hesitations about it.’

Was it because he didn’t know the ways of the world?

Or was it because dirt was finally starting to get on his innocence?
Either way, it wasn’t bad for Mock.

Push.

He could see the document being pushed toward him.

“Please let me give this to you.”

Cale started to speak to the greedy old man.

“Please use it to gain merit yourself.”

His voice was calm but held a quietly suggestive tone.

“And please make your decision and pull them in.”

“…What?”

“Only a few of the 96 people will be able to participate in this plan. We cannot make it
a large-scale situation.”

“……!”
“Please choose the chosen ones yourself. Then they will follow you, Count-nim.”

Mock slowly started to smile again.

“Count-nim, you will gain more people within your faction. At least, for when the
Endable Kingdom is revealed to the continent, that is.”

“Ha, hahahahaha-”

The old man ended up laughing out loud.

He could not hold back his laughter anymore.

The boy calmly spoke at that moment.

“I do not need anything as long as I can get revenge for my father.”

Mock stopped laughing.

“Is that really all you need?”

‘This punk doesn’t seem stupid enough to let such an opportunity go and give it to me
instead.’

Mock’s sharp gaze headed toward Cale.

Smile.

Cale started to smile.

“It’s time to show my abilities since my father will be in bed for a long time. I plan on
involving half of the Vampires’ strongest individuals for this task.”

Tap!

Mock slapped his knee with his hand.

“You plan on showing the Vampires your leadership skills.”

“That’s right. Shouldn't the leader's position be set in order to have a war?”
“Kehehehe-”

Mock did not stop himself from laughing.

“Sounds good!”

He stood up from his seat. Naru stood up as well and faced him.

“Your grandfather will help you.”

"Thank you, grandfather.”

Mock and Cale had turned back into a friendly grandfather and child at some point.

“Then I will trust you and wait.”

“Yes, just trust your grandfather.”

Mock walked the boy who covered his face with his hood once again all the way to the
front door.

“I will be on my way now.”

Click.

The old and simple carriage door closed and Naru and Solena left the mansion as
stealthily as they had arrived.
Mock waited until he could not see them anymore before he gave his butler an order.

“Prepare the carriage. I need to go to the white castle.”

His gaze was directed at the white castle.

It was still bright over there.

It was because the master of that place never slept.

“…This time!”

The old man’s eyes were full of a greedy fire.

A moment later, Cale was hiding within a shadow as he observed a single spot.

Clack clack.

He saw a carriage leave Count Mock's residence and head toward the white castle.

Cale heard Solena’s voice next to him.

“He’s fallen for the trap.”

“Yes, although he doesn’t know that that is the case.”

Cale stopped crouching and headed toward the carriage which was also hidden.
He started to speak as he got on the carriage.

“I'm curious to see how Count Mock will convince the White Star.”

“I'm sure that he will be able to convince him.”

Cale and Solena made eye contact.

She smiled brightly as she continued to speak.

“It is for his own greed.”

“That makes sense.”

The old and simple carriage finally headed home.

“Count Mock. What is going on?”

“Your majesty. I apologize for visiting you so late.”

Count Mock bowed toward the White Star who was bathing in a tub full of a black
liquid.

“Your majesty. I have found Cale Henituse's weakness.”

The White Star turned toward Count Mock.

"What are you suddenly talking about?”

The White Star asked Mock as he observed him.

Mock became nervous after hearing his voice but quickly responded.

“I come with some useful information.”

“Information?”

“Yes, your majesty.”

Smirk.

A smile appeared on the White Star's face.

“Is it information that you gathered without my knowledge?”

Flinch.

Mock's shoulders slightly shook.

He slowly raised his bowed waist and looked at the White Star.

The White Star's non-masked face and his stoic eyes were looking at him.

‘…I feel this every time, but it’s too different.’

Mock became tense every time he saw the White Star’s face without a mask.
Of course, he had not seen it many times.

‘This is the third time.’

Even Mock who had served him as his liege for a long time had only seen it three times.
It was a special moment that came every so often on a schedule. His face was only
visible during those times.

It just happened to be right now when he visited this time.

When he had his mask on and when he didn't…

The White Star’s demeanor felt too different.

That was why Mock was daring enough to seek a Duke position but did not dare to
become king.

Peek.

Mock peeked toward the tub the White Star was dipping in.

It was full of a black liquid.

The White Star looked peaceful dipping in a tub of dead mana.

‘What a vicious human.’

Mock quickly stopped thinking that the White Star was a vicious human before bowing
again.

“My apologies, your majesty.”

There was no need to say anything else. It was better not to make excuses.

“So…”

The White Star opened his mouth again.

“What is this weakness of Cale Henituse that you brought me?”

“…Do you know about the black castle inside the Forest of Darkness?”

‘The Forest of Darkness.’

The White Star’s eyes sparkled the moment he heard that, but Mock who was bowing
could not see that.

“No, I do not know about the black castle.”

Mock continued to bow as he offered the document forward.

“Please take a look at this.”

The document that Duke Fredo had created that he had received from Naru…
Mock had used that information to create this new document.

It was so that he could get all the merits for it.

“Bring it here.”

Mock approached the White Star and handed him the document.

“Hmm.”

Flip, flip.

The document was slowly flipped page by page and an odd smile was on the White
Star’s face as he read through it.

Mock could see the tired eyes of the man who had lived numerous lives for the past
1,000 years slowly starting to light up.

‘It worked!’

That made him certain that he could proceed with this plan.
It was based on his intuition from serving the White Star as his liege for a long period
of time.

Tap.

The document was closed.

"It looks good.”

The White Star handed the document back to Mock after saying that.
Mock carefully took the document and stood there with his head down.

The White Star looked out the window for a moment as he started to think.
“He is my fated enemy.”

One side had the Demon World. The other side had the gods.

“We are people who were chosen by different transcended beings.”

He stood up from the tub.

Chhhhhhhh-

The black liquid did not fall down and swirled around his body.

“But he and I are different.”

The White Star's eyes no longer looked tired.

“A transcended being. I will become a transcended being myself. However, he will not
be able to become a god.”

The White Star started to smile.

He turned away from the window and looked down at Mock.

“Count, proceed as you've planned, however.”

“Don't let it hinder my greater plan.”

“Thank you for trusting me, your majesty.”

Mock was truly thankful.

“Then I will take my leave now, your majesty.”

Mock started to walk toward the door. He heard the White Star’s nonchalant voice as
he walked.

“Did it say you were going to drag Naru into it?”

“Yes, your majesty.”

“Please make sure he does not get hurt.”

Mock looked toward the White Star.
He had a picturesque expression on his face.

“I understand, your majesty.”

“And also see if he can be a useful subject.”

Mock’s shoulders flinched. He looked back toward the White Star.

The White Star still had a warm expression on his face, but his voice just sounded cold
to Mock.

“Based on what I saw this time, he seemed to have the potential to become as strong
as Duke Fredo. That is why you should let him take charge when it is not dangerous in
order to see if he has what it takes.”

Mock started to think.

“Naru is the Endable Kingdom's future.”

‘You mean you need a strong subordinate rather than that he is the future of the
Endable Kingdom.’

Mock was the only old man among the first nobles.
He had lived for a long time.
That was why he had his years of experience.

“I will definitely keep that in mind, your majesty.”

He bowed to the White Star but did not trust him.

“I will definitely return with results to satisfy you.”

“Good. You may leave.”

“Yes, your majesty.”

Mock carefully opened the door and stepped out.

Click.
The door closed with a quiet noise.
The White Star looked at the closed door before dipping back into the tub.

“Chief Priest.”

One of the walls moved and created a path after he called out. Chief Priest Gersey
walked out of the path while carefully holding a white mask that was wrapped in a
white cloth.

“Yes, your majesty.”

“Didn't Count Mock come up with a good plan?”

“It does seem that way. We will be able to calm the noble awaiters’ complaints if we go
with the Count’s plan.”

Gersey and the White Star made eye contact.

A gentle smile appeared on the Chief Priest's face.

“We should be able to carry on with the festival without any issues as well.”

Gersey sternly added on.

“There should be no issues with our grand vision.”

The White Star started to close his eyes after hearing that and lowered his body deep
into the tub.
Gersey quietly moved back after seeing his action as he continued to speak.

“I will bring you the mask when it is time, sire.”

“Sure.”

The White Star closed his eyes completely once his body was deep inside the tub.

The night continued on that way.

Cale touched the top button of his shirt as his neck felt a bit stuffy.
A purple-eyed boy was frowning at him as he stood in front of the mirror.

“My son.”

And past the boy's shoulder… Duke Fredo was lying on the bed looking sick.
Fredo started to speak again after hearing no response from Cale.

“My son.”

“What?”

“Are you going to the grand assembly hall now?”

“Yeah.”

Fredo looked at Naru/Cale’s back and started to shake his head.

“My goodness, my son's answers are all so short.”

Cale just ignored him and headed toward the bedroom door.
He was pretending to be a filial son who had spent all night nursing his unconscious
father before finishing his preparations and heading toward the castle to see the
results of his motion.

Cale heard Fredo's voice again before he started to turn the doorknob.

“Do not look down on the White Star.”

“…What do you mean?”

“The mask that he is always wearing. That is an item from the Demon World. Only the
White Star and Chief Priest Gersey know about its powers.”

The mask truly did come over from the Demon World.

Cale who was looking at the door without turning around starting to think about the
excommunicated priestess Cage.

“However…”
Fredo continued to speak at that moment.

“The White Star is completely different with the mask and without the mask.”

Fredo's gaze sank as he looked at Cale’s back.

“His face without the mask shows the appearance of a man who truly has lived over
and over again for 1,000 years.”

His tired and stoic gaze truly revealed itself when he took the mask off.
That was when the White Star’s true self was revealed as well.

“Of course, he cannot take the mask off very often until he becomes a member of the
Demonic race. He can only take it off during special times. This is something the White
Star and Gersey know. The Deputy Chief Priest is the only one other than the two of
them who knows about this.”

Fredo also knew about this.

Basically, Fredo was saying that he knew about this because he was working with the
Deputy Chief Priest.

Cale’s gaze became sharp for a moment as he looked at the door before returning to
normal as he started to speak.

“I don't look down on anyone.”

After realizing this new side of Duke Fredo as it related to the members of the Ranger
Brigade, Cale was now paying attention to everything.
Cale turned around and looked at Fredo.

“Anyway, I will keep what you just said on my mind.”

Fredo just laughed and said goodbye as if he could not do anything about Cale who
had nonchalantly responded to his warning.

“Okay then. Have a safe trip, my son.”

Cale ignored him and walked out of the bedroom.

Click.
The bedroom door soon closed and Fredo started to mumble to himself while looking
at the door.

“Hmm. I hope he really does keep it on his mind.”

The masked White Star and the unmasked White Star.

The difference between the two was something you had to experience yourself to
know.

They truly were different.

“It feels as if they are different people.”

Fredo decided he would describe it better for Cale once he returned before getting out
of bed.
He lightly stretched before heading toward a wall without a mirror.

Click.

His finger pushed on a part of the wall.

There was someone who was secretly watching him while invisible.
That being recalled what Cale told him early that morning.

‘I really can’t trust him. He seems like a good bastard to his subordinates, but I don't
think he is a good person.’

His invisible chubby front paws quickly covered his mouth.

The owner of those paws… Raon held back the words that he accidentally almost
blurted out and just said it to himself internally.

‘Our human truly is smart when it comes to things like this!’

Boooooooom-

An arch-shaped path appeared on the wall Fredo pressed on.

Tap. Tap.
Fredo walked down the staircase inside the path.

‘Human! I, the great and mighty Raon Miru will figure everything out!’

Raon made sure Fredo walked all the way down before stealthily heading toward the
mirror.

Tap.

He tapped on it very quietly.

It was so quiet that someone with higher than normal hearing would need to be
focusing very hard in order to hear it.

Raon then quickly but carefully started to follow Fredo down the stairs.

‘Raon. Of course, your safety is the top priority.’

Raon clearly remembered Cale’s words so he prepared a spell in order to escape at

any moment if needed before flying down.
A moment later…

Shhhhhh-

The mirror opened.

A person who had higher than normal hearing and was focusing harder than ever
before came through the mirror and into the bedroom.

‘Raon gave me the sign properly. There really is nobody in here.’

That person was Choi Han.

Choi Han confirmed that nobody was in the bedroom before quietly looking at the
open path and stealthily starting to move.

‘Choi Han. You find an opening to search the bedroom. Gather any and all useful
information.’

Choi Han followed Cale’s order to search the bedroom without making any noises.
His movements were so stealthy that even the butler outside the door did not realize
he was there.
As for Cale, he followed Fredo's trusted subordinate Solena and got on the carriage.
Cale leaned on the seat of this now-familiar carriage as Solena started to speak.

“To the castle.”

Solena ordered the driver who started to lead the carriage to the white castle.

Clack. Clack.

Cale leaned on the back of the seat and looked out the window.

‘When he is wearing the mask and not wearing the mask… He seems very different?’

He was thinking about what Fredo had told him.

Fredo didn’t know this, but Cale saying, ‘I will keep that in mind,’ meant that he would
remember it more seriously than anything else.

It meant that he would record it.

‘An item from the Demon World… ’

The White Star and his white mask.

‘Looks like I need to investigate a bit.’

Cale started to think about the excommunicated priestess Cage with whom he was
supposed to chat later tonight.
She should know something about it.

The carriage slowly approached the castle as these plans moved together to create a
picture in Cale’s mind.

“I will now announce the results of the motion brought forth by Naru Von Ejellan!”

Count Mock shouted inside the grand assembly hall louder than ever before.
100 peoples’ gazes were focused on him right now.

“The result is the ‘Destroy the Black Castle’ plan.”

The grand assembly hall became rowdy at that moment.
Most of the people could not hide their shock at this unexpected revelation of a plan
that seemed odd to be the results of a motion.
However, the people who knew about what happened last night were all looking at
Count Mock with different gazes.

There would be no more grand assemblies after this one until after the festival.
This was the last grand assembly before the festival.

“The details of the plan are simple.”

Count Mock revealed this ‘festival’ of a battle that 96 people had been wanting for a
long time.

“We will destroy Cale Henituse’s base.”

The assembly, well, Count Mock's lone declaration, continued quickly.
Cale quietly sat there listening to the things he discussed last night being reported just
as he had said them.

‘Nothing’s changed.’

The White Star seemed to have approved of Count Mock's suggestion as is.

Cale looked at someone at that moment.

Smile.

Chief Priest Gersey was smiling gently toward him.

‘What the…?’

Cale instantly felt annoyed but just smiled back.

He heard Count Mock's firm but excited voice at that moment.

“And with that, we will end our meeting!”

Count Mock was smiling as he addressed the noble awaiters.

“Any esteemed noble awaiters who wish to participate in the Black Castle destruction
plan please come to my office in the castle.”

The noble awaiters peeked at each other with nervous gazes.

‘My chance is here!’

‘He said gaining merit here could mean becoming a Baron at the bare minimum, and
a Count if everything goes well!’
‘…I will participate in this Black Castle destruction plan no matter what.’

However, only 48 noble awaiters could take part in the Black Castle destruction plan.
It was exactly half of the 96 of them.

The noble awaiters were all looking at Count Mock.

He had full control over which 48 of them he selected.

‘This is great.’

Count Mock who saw their gazes expertly held back his laughter that wanted to burst
out.
On the other hand, there was one person who could undo her frozen expression.

‘…Everybody but me!’

The black knight. It was Count Hubesha.

She realized that she was the only one at the table who did not know about Count
Mock's Black Castle destruction plan.

‘What the hell happened in one night?’

Her sharp gaze headed toward Count Mock.

As fellow Counts, they had the most contentious relationship.

‘That old grouch did this behind my back!’

She stared at Count Mock without hiding her anger until she flinched and looked
elsewhere.
She was looking at Naru-Cale who was getting up from his seat and starting to walk
out of the assembly hall.

‘…Something is weird.’

Count Mock was the slyest person she knew.

She was certain that Count Mock was the one who dragged Naru and the Vampires
into this plan.

However, her intuition as a swordswoman…

Her senses as a person who fought in the vanguard…
‘…Why do I keep wanting to look at Naru?’

They were warning her.

They were saying that something was weird about this boy.

As Count Hubesha started to focus her gaze a little more on Naru…

“Naru.”

Cale flinched as a gentle voice called out to him as he tried to exit the grand assembly
hall.

‘…Damn it.’

Pat.

Someone gently placed their hand on his shoulder.

Cale slightly turned his head and looked up at the person who called him.

“…Your majesty.”

“You can call me uncle again now that the assembly is over.”

The White Star was smiling warmly.

‘…Fine… Let’s just think about the cookies and food this bastard gave me.’

He would think about those delicious things in order to hold himself back.

Cale smiled as brightly as possible.

“Oh my.”

The White Star looked sad after seeing Cale’s expression.

“Naru, you don’t need to force yourself to smile when things are hard.”

‘Damn it. It’s not like that, okay?’

“And as for your participation in this plan… It is weighing heavily on me. I'm worried
about you. However, I have decided to respect your decision.”

Chief Priest Gersey approached the White Star at that moment. The White Star started
to walk toward Chief Priest Gersey and said goodbye to Cale one last time.

“Don't get hurt. Don’t get sick. Make sure to eat every meal. Let’s meet again with you
healthy and having grown from the experience.”

The White Star then walked out of the grand assembly hall with Chief Priest Gersey.
Cale quietly watched them leave before exiting the grand assembly hall himself and
meeting up with Solena who was waiting.

“How was the meeting?”

She stood next to Cale and quietly asked so that nobody else could hear.
Cale started to smile as he got on the carriage that was waiting at the entrance of the
grand assembly hall.

“This is what his majesty told me.”

Cale leisurely leaned on the seat inside the carriage.

Solena sat across from him.

She could see the boy's twisted smile.

“ ‘Don’t get hurt, don't get sick, eat properly.’ He also said that he wants to see me
healthy and having grown from the experience.”

Pfft pfft.

The boy scoffed.

He then pointed at himself.

“He said that to me. His majesty said those things to me. What do you think? Solena,
what do you think about that?”

Solena closed the carriage door.

Clang.
She started to speak once they were alone inside the carriage.

“It’s funny.”

“Right?”

Both Cale and Solena started to smile.

However, the corners of Solena’s lips quickly went back down. There was a look of
uncertainty on her face.

“Young master-nim.”

“What is it?”

“…When will we know for sure about the issues related to the Roan Kingdom?”

Cale started to frown at that moment.

She flinched after seeing his upset expression, but Cale's expression returned to
normal as he asked Solena a question.

“I guess you’re antsy to hear from the Roan Kingdom?”

“…Only because of the issue we are waiting to decide together with the Roan Kingdom.
It is an issue regarding the safety of our Vampire knights and warriors after all.”

“Indeed.”

There were matters to decide together prior to the plan.

That was why Cale had called crown prince Alberu as well.

“Haaaaa.”

Cale let out a sigh.

He started to frown as he shook his head. His reaction worried Solena.

‘Did his conversation with the Roan Kingdom not go well?’

If that was the case, then they could not proceed with the Black Castle destruction plan
as Cale and Duke Fredo originally discussed.
Solena held back her uncertainty as she watched Cale's mouth slowly start to open.
“You should just need to wait a little longer.”

However, Cale’s response was positive.

“You shouldn't need to worry about it.”

“Yes, sir! I understand!”

Cale was not the type to say empty words.

Solena had realized this in the few days they had spent together, making her smile
after hearing Cale’s positive response.

The carriage soon started and Cale started to contemplate things while looking out
the carriage window.
He heard Solena’s cautious voice at that moment.

“But is it really okay for that many people to participate in the Black Castle destruction
plan? Dark Elves and the Vampires… Adding 48 noble awaiters to that is no small
number.”

"Are you worried about the Black Castle?”

“…Yes. The Duke-nim and you have come up with a brilliant plan, young master-nim,
but the number and quality of the people involved are very high. I am just worried.”

Cale quietly observed the Vampire who was worried about him and the Black Castle.

‘Can I trust Solena?’

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

“You don’t need to worry about it.”

He could not trust Solena.

Her eyes did not have the same emotion that people like Rosalyn or Choi Han had
when they were truly concerned. She was just saying that she was worried.

In fact, Solena’s eyes were observing Cale.

Her gaze was similar to someone who was trying to determine a rival's abilities.
‘My goodness. I really can’t relax anywhere here.’

In the end, she too was Fredo's subordinate.

‘She is one of the most trusted of all of his trusted subordinates and extremely
talented.’

Cale somewhat nonchalantly responded to Solena.

“Thank you for worrying about me.”

Solena flinched before gently smiling at him.

Cale smiled back and once the carriage arrived at the Fredo mansion…
He returned to his room and closed the door.

Tap!

The door closed and Cale started to speak.

“Did you find it?”

He started to smile after seeing the way Choi Han and Raon were looking at him.

“Looks like you found it.”

Cale had told Choi Han and Raon to look into Duke Fredo.

‘I was a bit worried about the two of them, but they always do a good job with the
things I tell them to do.’

Cale confirmed that Choi Han and Raon looked fine before walking toward them with
a satisfied smile.

“H, human!”

“Why, why are you acting like this?”

However, Raon was faster.

Raon flew over to Cale and grabbed one of his sleeves.

“H, human!”

“…What’s wrong with you?”

Raon’s eyes were open very wide and shaking.

“Cale-nim.”

Choi Han then walked over and put his hand on Cale’s shoulder.

“Please don’t be shocked.”

“…What the hell did you guys find that’s making you act like this?”

Raon and Choi Han’s reactions seemed serious.

“Cale-nim, please don’t be shocked.”

“I don’t think there’s a need for you to say the same thing twice? And based on what
I'm seeing, Choi Han, it seems like you need to calm yourself down.”

“…That’s true.”

“Huuuuu.”

Choi Han took a deep breath.

He then focused on Cale with a piercing gaze as he started to speak.

“I did not find anything useful in Duke Fredo’s bedroom, however, Raon saw Duke
Fredo entering a secret passage and stealthily followed behind him.”

That passage supposedly headed to the basement.

“And he found a normal study.”

“That’s right! It was just a normal study! It was small too!”

“However, there was information about the White Star there.”

Raon gripped Cale’s sleeve even tighter.

“Human! I couldn’t look through things because Duke Fredo was there as well, but! I
took a clear look at all the papers that were hanging on the walls!”

“……I see. You did something amazing, so how about you let go of my sleeve?”

“Human!”

Raon clenched his sleeve even tighter.

‘Oh, come on.’

Cale started to frown. He was in a young boy's appearance so he was about to be

dragged around by Raon without being able to resist.
The young Dragon was stronger than Naru.

“Raon. Let go-”

“Human! Cale Barrow!”

“…Hmm?”

Cale stopped talking and looked toward Raon.

He could see that Raon and Choi Han’s eyes were shaking as they looked at him.

Choi Han started to speak.

His voice was slightly shaking.

“The White Star's first life. His name was Cale Barrow.”

‘…Huh? Cale? His name is the same as mine?’

“He received the God of Death’s curse after breaking the oath with Sheritt. I can’t be
certain, but Cale Barrow is suspected of being in his early twenties. However, I was
able to accurately determine the day he was cursed. He was cursed on November 8th.”

Cale could see Choi Han's eyes shaking as he said the date.
Cale’s heart started to beat wildly as well.

‘Is it a coincidence? That day is my birthday, Kim Rok Soo’s birthday. Choi Han and
Choi Jung Soo. Nelan Barrow as well. It’s all of our birthdays.’
The man who had spent his twenties as Kim Rok Soo and was now starting his
twenties again as Cale Henituse could not forget the fact that the day that Cale Barrow
who was in his early twenties was cursed by the God of Death on November 8th.
November 8th was also the date that the twenty-years-old Cale had to make a decision
between the options that the God of Death gave him.

“Human.”

Raon let go of Cale’s sleeve.

“I stealthily stole one of the papers on the wall once Fredo turned around to leave that
secret room.”

Cale could feel Choi Han tensing up even more.

“Human, I had to steal this.”

Raon voice was shaking as well.

“Here, take a look.”

Raon pulled a rolled-up paper out of his spatial dimension and pushed it toward Cale.
Cale took it and opened it.

Chhhhh-

The paper was opened.

Cale’s gaze was focused on the picture on the paper.

“Human! I brought the picture of the ‘present’ White Star's face without his mask!”

Raon's voice was shaking at the serious situation he faced, as well as pride and
satisfaction at what he had done.

“Fredo had drawn a picture of the White Star's face without the mask! There was a
memo next to the picture that said that this was his face ‘one month ago’!”

He then quickly added on.

“Ah! Human, he drew your face next to the White Star's as well! However, I didn't bring
that with me since I know your face!”

The White Star's portrait was not as detailed as a picture taken with a camera or a
video, but it was still pretty detailed.

“Based on how detailed and accurate your portrait on the wall was, I believe that this
portrait or the White Star is accurate!”

Raon puffed up his chubby belly.

“I did a good job! I am amazing!”

He praised himself while waiting for Cale to respond.

It was at that moment.

“Cale-nim.”

Choi Han walked a bit closer to Cale.

He put his hand on Cale’s shoulder as Cale stood there unable to look away from the
White Star’s portrait.

Choi Han started to speak with a stiff expression on his face.

His voice sounded chaotic.

“Asians and Westerners may have different facial structures. Our hair color and eye
color might all be different, but…”

Choi Han recalled the moment he saw the portrait Raon had brought back.
He had been so shocked.
His gaze moved to the portrait as well.

Choi Han opened his mouth to speak and his voice unintentionally cracked.

“…Doesn’t it look oddly similar?… The mood and the overall feel of the face.”

Cale turned toward Choi Han.

Choi Han looked into Cale’s shaking pupils and quietly whispered as if he was afraid
someone might hear.

“…Kim Rok Soo. He looks like you.”

Cale looked at the portrait as he touched his face with his hand.
He looked like Naru right now, but he was thinking about his past appearance.

“…We do look similar, right?”

The person in the portrait looked oddly similar to Kim Rok Soo.

Hair color, eye color, nose, facial structure…

Everything was different, however, for some odd reason, the overall feel of the face
was almost identical to Kim Rok Soo.
He looked like Kim Rok Soo with different hair and eye colors and slightly thicker eyes,
nose, ears, and mouth.

Cale turned toward Choi Han.

“…Yes, he does seem very similar. I've seen your face.”

Choi Han agreed without any hesitation.

He recalled how Kim Rok Soo had looked in Choi Jung Soo's memories.
The White Star’s portrait reminded him of exactly when Kim Rok Soo had been in his
early twenties.

“That’s right. You've seen my face.”

Cale looked back at the portrait.

“Cale-nim. Do you think that this is a coincidence?”

Cale could not respond to Choi Han's question right away.

November 8th was an important date for a lot of people already.

Then there was how Kim Rok Soo and the White Star looked and felt similar.
Furthermore, the White Star and Cale Henituse's hair and eyes were similar in color.

‘All of us also have some sort of relationship with the God of Death.’

Cale sighed after suddenly having a thought.

‘If Choi Jung Soo had come here as the God of Death originally intended instead of me,
Choi Jung Soo would have found it quite difficult after seeing the White Star’s face.’

Based on Choi Jung Soo's personality, he would have been shaken after seeing the
White Star’s face.
However Cale, well, Kim Rok Soo, was not as soft.

Especially when it came to dealing with himself.

It didn’t matter whether their faces looked similar.

“I don’t give a shit whether it was a coincidence or inevitability.”

Raon who had been focused on Choi Han and Cale shouted energetically at that
moment.

“Human, I don’t think Fredo felt that way!”

“Why?”

“Fredo had written something underneath where he placed your portrait and the
White Star's portrait side by side!”

"What did he write?”

Raon had a stiff expression as he sternly repeated the words.

“Coincidences happening over and over must mean that they were inevitable.”

“Hmm.”

Choi Han quietly groaned.

Raon and Choi Han both heard Cale's firm voice at that moment.

“What bullshit about inevitability when even fate can be changed.”

The corners of Cale’s lips started to twist as multiple emotions roared inside him.

Lee Soo Hyuk and Choi Jung Soo had died instead of Kim Rok Soo who was supposed
to die.
Fate could be changed.

As someone who was the result of a changed fate, Kim Rok Soo didn't care about
inevitabilities nor fate since he just had to change it again.
He just had to change it in a way he thought was right.

“Human, something is weird.”

“That’s true.”

He nonchalantly responded to Choi Han and Raon who seemed worried about him.

“There's no need to think that it is weird. Just continue doing what we’ve been doing.”

“…But.”

Choi Han could not let it go as easily as Cale had done.

An odd sensation overwhelmed him.

It felt as if death was near him. It was peaceful right now, but the tension of standing
in the vanguard and facing the enemy pushed down on his shoulders.
However, Choi Han could not share his sentiments properly.

Beeeeeeep-

It was because a sharp noise started to ring.

That was the beginning.

Beeeeeep- Beeeeeeep-

Beeeeeeep-

Multiple other noises filled the room as well.

Cale looked toward the table.

Four of the five video communication devices on the table were glowing.
“Let’s take care of those first.”

“…I understand.”

Choi Han decided to share his sentiments later and stepped back.

‘I'll need to talk to Miss Cage about it since it relates to the God of Death.’

Choi Han decided that he needed to meet up with Cage on his own at least once. Cale
tended to be slow when it came to things related to himself, so he had to do something.

‘I'll need to discuss it with Rosalyn too.’

Someone like Rosalyn who was knowledgeable but did not blab about things was the
perfect type of person to discuss this kind of issue.

Cale gave an order to Raon as Choi Han was organizing his thoughts.

“Raon, connect them.”

“Alright!”

Video communication devices soon surrounded Cale, who was sitting on a chair.

Ooooooong-

The four video communication devices started to vibrate before screens popped up
on top of them.

“Human, I connected all of them!”

He heard Raon’s voice followed by different voices coming from the video
communication devices.

 It’s been a while.

The ancient Dragon, Eruhaben.

 It’s our first time gathering like this.

The mage, Rosalyn.

 It’s been a while. It is nice to see everyone. I am happy.

The necromancer, Mary.

 Hoho. I'm glad to see everyone looking healthy. Although one sir’s face is unfamiliar.

The shaman, Gashan.

His friends’ faces started to appear on the screens.

 We’ve all been split apart for a while.

Rosalyn smiled as she said that and the others nodded their heads in agreement.
She looked at Cale's face and the others’ faces visible on the screens as she continued
to speak.

 Young master Cale, that look seems to suit you well too.

“Not really.”

Cale shrugged his shoulders at Rosalyn’s comment.

Mary chimed in at that moment.

 You look cute. You look young enough that you won't look like a jackass even if you
frown. It looks great.

“……”

Cale pretended not to hear what Mary said.

 I guess he is cute. Haha!

 Tsk. You unlucky bastard.

Cale pretended not to hear Gashan and Eruhaben either.

Rosalyn who had been smiling while looking at Cale suddenly became serious.

 So, you are saying that our future Vampire leader is going to charge into the Henituse
territory?

Cale looked into her now cold eyes and started to speak.

“To be more specific, into the Black Castle in the Forest of Darkness.”

 I guess that is why it is a problem.

That was the case.

That was the reason it was a problem.

The Forest of Darkness was pretty much home to Cale.

Furthermore, Sheritt and the Dragon half-blood were currently in the Black Castle.
The non-warrior Tigers and the still young Blue Wolf children were at the nearby
Harris Village as well.

Cale recalled the conversation he already had with Sheritt.

Rosalyn looked at Cale and continued to speak.

 Young master Cale, there must be a reason we’ve all gathered together, right?

Everybody could see Cale starting to smile at that moment.

“Please come to our house that’s been there for a while.”

Our house that's been there for a while.

Before the Black Castle moved to the Forest of Darkness…

The house located underneath that area…

He heard the Scary Giant Cobblestone's voice.

 Are you talking about my house?

Everybody return to the Super Rock Villa.

Cale smiled as he added on.

“Let’s see everybody face to face for the first time in a long while.”
‘Hey White Star, do you think you guys are the only ones with an underground house?
Do you think the Endable Kingdom is the only thing underground? I have one too.’

“Human! You look weird having such an expression on your face while looking like a
kid!”

Cale let Raon’s comments in one ear and out the other.

Beeeeeeeeeeeeep- beeeeeeeeeeeep-

The fifth video communication device that had been left alone on the table started to
glow at that moment.

“Human! It’s a call from the Roan Kingdom!”

Cale stood up from his seat at that moment.

The preparations were ready.

Paaaaat-

He saw the center of the room glowing and started to speak.

“I guess it’s time to go see Duke Fredo.”

Knock knock knock.

Solena looked toward the door and then to the bed after hearing someone knock.
Duke Fredo who had been leaning on the head of the bed immediately lay down and
closed his eyes.

Click.

The door then opened.

“Young master-nim.”

“Isn’t it annoying to greet me every time you see me?”

Solena stopped the greeting she was about to give and welcomed Naru/Cale in an
awkward position.

Click!

The door closed and Duke Fredo who had his eyes closed started to speak.

“My son, you’re coming so often.”

“Duke.”

Fredo opened his eyes and looked toward Cale after hearing Cale calling him in a low
voice.
Although Cale looked like his young self, it felt different looking at him as someone
else was on the inside.

“My son, what is it?”

“You see…”

Cale sat down on the chair right next to Duke Fredo's bed where Solena had been
sitting earlier.

“Hey Duke, do you know who the scariest person is?”

It sounded like a random question, but Fredo played along.

“Who is it?”

Smile.

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

He pointed to Fredo who was lying on the bed.

“The person who knows everything you know.”

Fredo's mouth instantly shut.

‘What does he mean by that?’

Fredo’s eyes were thoroughly observing Cale’s expression.

“Why do you keep observing me like that?”

Fredo stopped observing Cale after hearing that. Instead, he bluntly asked.

“What are your intentions behind saying that?”

“What are my intentions?”

Cale got up from the chair.

Screeeech-

He grabbed the chair and dragged it with him.

Thud.

The chair stopped moving. Cale stopped there as well.

He had moved to the wall without a mirror.

He then raised his hand and started to touch a spot on the wall.

‘Human! I saw everything!’

Cale pushed the part Raon described without any hesitation.

Boooooooom-!

A hole appeared on the wall and the passage started to open.

“This!”

Cale could hear Solena’s shocked voice behind him. However, Cale just stood there
with his arms crossed and quietly waited for the passage to open completely.
And once the passage fully opened… The moment he saw the stairs heading down…

Tap!

The chair was moved right in front of the passage.

Cale looked toward Fredo and sat down on the chair.

He then quietly observed Fredo.

“…Shit.”

Fredo started to frown.

“I guess I was too relaxed since it was my house.”

“I benefited a bit thanks to that.”

Cale started to smile.

“…What do you want?”

Fredo asked the smiling Cale who shook his head and started to speak.

“There’s something we need to do before that. We discussed deciding on this prior to

the start of the Black Castle destruction plan.”

Fredo opened his mouth to respond, but Cale continued to speak without giving him
an opening.

“The Black Castle is located in the Henituse territory. It is on the Roan Kingdom's land.
Attacking this place could be seen as creating a hostile relationship between the
Endable Kingdom and the Roan Kingdom.”

A foreign kingdom’s troops entering another kingdom’s land without prior discussion
was a declaration of war.

"We are crossing a bridge, a river that cannot be reversed.”

It was quite difficult to return to a positive relationship after creating a hostile

relationship even once.

“The Endable Kingdom's Duke Fredo who loves peace did not want to become enemies
with the Roan Kingdom that is the strongest kingdom on the Western continent.”

Fredo had agreed with Cale's plan but had expressed his concerns for attacking the
Roan Kingdom.

“As a result, we decided to come to an agreement with the Roan Kingdom prior to
commencing with the plan.”

Cale's voice was the only voice talking inside the bedroom.

"Furthermore, he wanted to confirm that the Vampires who will be part of the Endable
Kingdom’s troops invading the Henituse territory's Forest of Darkness would be safe.”

According to Cale’s plan, the Endable Kingdom’s forces that would invade the Henituse
territory would not be able to return as they pleased.
That was why Fredo was worried about his subordinates’ safety.

“In addition, he wanted to ask for help regarding the Vampires living on the Western
continent.”

The Roan Kingdom had pretty good relationships with the other kingdoms throughout
the Western continent.
That was why Duke Fredo wanted to discuss the Black Castle destruction plan while
also asking for the Roan Kingdom’s assistance in matters related to the Vampires living
on the Western continent.

Duke Fredo listened to Cale before starting to speak.

“…And the Roan Kingdom agreed to inform me of its desired compensation for working
with me with all those issues. However, they have yet to tell us what they would like
in return.”

Cale looked at him after hearing that comment.

“Yes, but all of this is also based on you becoming the king.”

In other words, everything they were discussing revolved around the White Star not
becoming king and being taken out.

Fredo's side had shared these things through Cale who had discussed it with the crown
prince.
Fredo and Solena were waiting for the Roan Kingdom's response regarding their
cooperation and their requested compensation in return.
‘The Endable Kingdom cannot continue on its own.’

The Roan Kingdom’s cooperation would be quite beneficial for the Endable Kingdom's
future as Fredo planned.
It was a strong kingdom that had favorable views regarding races with the darkness
attribute and had good relationships with other kingdoms.

That was why he had purposely discussed a lot of things in order to find a way to create
a connection with the Roan Kingdom.

“…Did the Roan Kingdom issue their list of desired compensations?”

Fredo asked with a stiff expression and Cale nodded his head in response.

“Yes, The Roan Kingdom has shared what they would like in return.”

“What is it?”

Cale put up one finger at Fredo's question.

“The first thing you must provide…”

If there was a first, then that meant that there were more after that as well.
Fredo wondered what they would ask for and how many things were on this list as he
waited for Cale to explain.

Cale opened his mouth to speak at that moment.

“A Duke position will become vacant once you become king, right?”

‘…Perhaps?’

Cale continued without any hesitation as Fredo's eyes started to shake.

“Promote that to an Archduke. And then you'll need to give that Archduke position to
us.”

Fredo instantly started to frown.

"Are you planning on planting someone from the Roan Kingdom? Is the Roan Kingdom
planning on interfering with the internal affairs of the Endable Kingdom?!”

His eyes were full of rage.

An Archduke.

That position was lower than the king but had a lot of power and influence depending
on the situation.

“I am not trying to sell the Endable Kingdom to the Roan Kingdom!”

“We have no plans on doing that.”

Fredo flinched after hearing Cale’s stern response.

“What?”

“The person is not from the Roan Kingdom nor are they even a person.”

“…What do you mean?”

‘They aren’t even a person?’

“I mean that they are not human. The person who will obtain the Archduke position
is a Dark Elf.”

Fredo listened to Cale's calm voice before thinking about the Dark Elves related to Cale
and the Roan Kingdom.
Those strong individuals had shown themselves many times in the battles against the
White Star.

“…Are you talking about the Dark Elves who cooperated with the Roan Kingdom? The
woman who was the leader of those Dark Elves?”

“That Dark Elf is already a citizen of the Roan Kingdom.”

Tasha was a Dark Elf whose merits were already accepted at the Roan Kingdom's
awards ceremony after the war.
She did not fit the condition that Cale was talking about.
“You don’t need to know who it is right now.”

“…Are you saying you will not tell me right now? Do you think we can have a proper
discussion like that?”

Fredo could see Cale staring at him with a piercing gaze after hearing that question.

“Duke Fredo, you've been hiding a lot of things from me too.”

Fredo finally saw the passage behind the sitting Cale’s shoulder.
He then clearly heard Cale's voice again.

“The White Star and I are an inevitable pairing. Is that how you phrased it?”

Fredo looked troubled.

“I'm quite suspicious about your intentions about bringing me into this.”

Fredo started to frown as Cale continued to speak in a gentle voice.

“Huuuuuu.”

He let out a deep sigh.

“I'll hear you out first.”

He stopped being angry at Cale and looked ready to listen.

“Good. You need to listen first so that we can negotiate any excessive demands.”

‘Negotiate? Not force, but negotiate?’

Fredo's eyes clouded over. He looked back at Cale who nonchalantly commented.

“Of course, not with me.”

“I'm not going to negotiate with you?”

“Yes. Someone is here as the envoy to the Dark Elf who will take that Archduke position
and as the proxy for his highness the crown prince to lead this discussion. Discuss the
rest with that person.”

“What?”

A shocked Fredo noticed Cale looking away from him and looking toward the mirror.

Cale started to speak again while looking at the full-body mirror on the wall.

“I thought you wanted to quickly take care of things so I brought a talented proxy -
cum-diplomat.”

“…Ho!”

The moment Fredo scoffed in disbelief…

Clunk.

He heard a noise coming from the mirror.

Duke Fredo looked toward the passage that appeared once the mirror disappeared.

“My goodness. My son keeps pulling one over me.”

The anxiety was gone from Fredo's face and he now looked calm.

‘He’s really setting the field for me.’

Cale had told him to negotiate.

He had thought that he would get to chat with a strong kingdom like the Roan
Kingdom with Cale as the middleman, but the fact that he said to negotiate meant that
they were considering him to be on equal footing.

‘Should I be thankful? Or am I being dragged into his plan?’

However, it was an opportunity.

It was a chance to speak with the person at the center of the Roan Kingdom’s power,
the crown prince's proxy.

Fredo then heard a voice that seemed to be made extremely low through magic.

“What an interesting passage.”

Fredo could see someone walking out of the secret passage.
Duke Fredo thoroughly observed him before starting to speak.

“…A Dark Elf half-blood?”

“No. My mother was the half-blood and I am her son.”

The quarter Dark Elf who crossed over with Choi Han guiding him was wearing a mask
that covered from his nose to his forehead.

“Nice to meet you. My name is Bob and I am his highness, the crown prince’s proxy
and also the person in charge of the crown prince’s information network.”

Cale pushed the corners of his lips down with his hand as he looked at the quarter
Dark Elf wearing a mask that covered half his face who was speaking elegantly and
respectfully.
His voice that was lower than usual thanks to Raon’s magic sounded quite serious,
unlike his usual self.

‘…What’s with his name?! Why is it Bob?!’

Cale worked hard to hold himself back from sighing. He pointed to the quarter Dark
Elf Bob.

“This is Bob hyung, one of my close hyungs. He is a talented hyung who works behind
the scenes so nobody knows about him. You can consider Bob hyung to represent the
will of his highness, the crown prince.”

Cale and the now Bob Alberu warmly smiled at each other.
Choi Han lowered his head to avoid seeing the two of them.
“I didn’t know I would be welcoming an esteemed guest all of a sudden.”

Fredo said that while looking at Cale.

Cale shrugged his shoulders and pointed at Alberu.

“His highness the crown prince is the antsy type who likes to get things done quickly.
Bob hyung is pretty antsy too.”

Alberu’s eyebrow slightly twitched, but Cale smiled and ignored it. Fredo thoroughly
observed Cale and the now Bob/Alberu before starting to speak.

“I guess this esteemed guest has a pretty high position too.”

“Yes.”

Cale nodded his head without any hesitation and continued to speak.

“He just doesn’t have an official title. Our Bob hyung has been like his highness the
crown prince’s twin brother since they were young.”

“Hooo.”

“It’s normal that you wouldn’t know about him, Duke.”

Cale looked toward Alberu who started to speak as if he was responding to Cale’s gaze.

“I've lived my entire life as his highness the crown prince's shadow.”

It was not a lie.

Alberu in his quarter Dark Elf form…

That appearance was pretty much crown prince Alberu’s shadow.
‘How amazing.’

Choi Han was quietly looking away from Cale and Alberu who could lie so well without
any issues.

Fredo looked toward the man whose face was covered from the nose up by a mask and
started to speak.

“…That must be why this sir is responsible for the information network.”

He was speaking respectfully to Bob.

Part of it was because Bob was the crown prince's proxy, but it was also because there
was a mysterious aura about this Bob person as well.

Fredo recalled how Bob had introduced himself.

‘Nice to meet you. My name is Bob and I am his highness, the crown prince’s proxy and
also the person in charge of the crown prince’s information network.’

The part about how he was in charge of the information network stuck out to Fredo.

‘He is the person at the center of the information.’

Fredo's gaze stealthily became sharp as he looked at Bob.

Information was sometimes more important than diplomacy, administration, and

troops.
But the fact that someone in charge of that was this young must mean that this person
was quite skilled.

Fredo saw Alberu Crossman as a talented but calm and collected person, so there was
no way that Bob, someone that Alberu had selected, would be useless.

‘I guess he is a vassal who has grown up and studied together with the crown prince
since they were young?’

The part about how he was the crown prince’s shadow was memorable as well.
It made it sound as if he had been guarding the Roan Kingdom while hiding in the
darkness and transforming the Roan Kingdom into a strong kingdom.
Furthermore, it was shocking that he and Cale were calling each other brothers.
‘Crown prince Alberu Crossman and Cale Henituse are sworn brothers too.’

Had the two of them and this Bob person who lived in the shadows created this sworn
brotherhood between the three of them?

Alberu Crossman would handle things at the front end.

Cale Henituse would take care of the dangers throughout the kingdom and the
Western continent.
Finally, Bob would take care of a lot of different things without showing himself in
order to protect the kingdom.

‘But it is shocking that this Bob is quarter Dark Elf.’

He thought that this might have been how the Roan Kingdom was able to connect with
the Dark Elves.

‘Shocking, truly shocking.’

Fredo tensed up.

He could not look down on this person.

Fredo stood up from the bed.

“I can't welcome you to such an important meeting looking like this.”

“The place and your appearance are not important. The contents of the discussion are
what are important.”

Alberu was speaking gently and respectfully, but what he was saying was pressuring
Fredo.

‘Hand over proper compensation for the Roan Kingdom.’

Alberu was giving off that kind of aura without any concern.

Smile.

Fredo started to smile.

“Solena.”
“Yes, sir.”

“Tell the butler to bring some warm tea for our guest.”

“Yes, sir.”

Solena cautiously started to leave the bedroom.

However, she was looking at Fredo as if she was worried about leaving him alone.
Fredo who noticed her gaze nodded his head. It was a sign letting her know that there
was no need to worry.

Click.

Cale got up as soon as the door closed.

"Are you leaving?”

“There’s no need for me to be here when two representatives of their respective

kingdoms are chatting.”

Fredo's expression turned off after hearing Cale's response.

He had felt this since earlier, but Cale was treating the Endable Kingdom as a formal
kingdom.
Fredo who knew how hard it was to be accepted couldn’t help but be a bit emotional
at Cale’s demeanor.

Alberu approached Cale who was trying to cross through the path in the mirror.
He had his back toward Fredo as he put his hand on Cale’s shoulder and warmly
started to speak.

“Okay, little brother. You go get some rest.”

‘Aigoo.’

Cale could see Alberu’s eyes under the mask wickedly starting to curl up.

Cale really had no reason to be here.

Someone who was more of an expert in the Roan Kingdom's issues than Cale was
personally here.
Cale recalled the conversation he had with the crown prince a few days ago through
the video communication device.

‘I want to go there.’

‘…Haaaaa.’

‘Don’t sigh like that. There’s something I want to see. I will go.’

‘Looking like that?’

‘No, I'll be in disguise. Just wait and see.’

‘Huuuuuu.’

That call had ended with Cale sighing.

Cale patted the crown prince's shoulder as well. When else would he be able to be this
rude to him?

“Okay.”

Pat. Pat.

His patting oddly became stronger.

“Hyung, do a good job. Shouldn't you do a good job since you came as the Roan
Kingdom's representative?”

“Haha. My dongsaeng's cheering is giving me strength. Sure, don’t worry.”

Cale held back his sigh after hearing Alberu’s cheesy response and took a step into the
passage.
He turned around and said something to Choi Han before he was completely through.

“Guard it well.”

“Yes, Cale-nim.”

Choi Han immediately headed to where Cale had been sitting.

He was walking toward the chair that was placed in front of the path heading
underground.

“Mm.”

Duke Fredo groaned.

Cale turned toward Duke Fredo and the two of them made eye contact.

“Duke, our side will guard that entrance from now on.”

“…How amazing.”

“What’s so amazing? You know the current situation too.”

Smile.

Cale started to smile.

“You need to offer me some sort of compensation. Think about what to offer me based
on the current situation.”

Fredo heard Cale's quiet voice.

"What would I want? Think hard about it.”

Cale then exited the bedroom without any hesitation.

Shhhhh-

The mirror path closed behind him. It was Cale's way of saying that he was not going
to get involved with it any longer.

Fredo quietly observed the closed path before looking at the path to the underground
study that Choi Han was guarding.
He was slowly starting to get a feel for what it was that Cale wanted.

It was at that moment.

Tap. Tap.
He heard someone lightly tapping on the table.

“Duke-nim.”

Fredo turned toward the source of the noise to see Bob, the person in charge of the
Roan Kingdom’s crown prince’s information network, smiling at him.

“Why don't we have a nice chat?”

Alberu had a refreshing smile on his face, but his eyes were not smiling.

Fredo straightened himself out. He should focus on what this proxy of the Roan
Kingdom’s crown prince had to say right now.

“Of course.”

Fredo and Alberu’s discussion soon started.

Choi Han sat on the chair and looked at the closed mirror instead of at the two of them.
He could see his reflection, but he was thinking about what was going on past the
mirror.

“Raon.”

“Yeah! Human, what’s up?”

The secret area between Fredo and Naru's bedrooms.

Cale patted Raon's head and started to speak while in that middle room connecting
the mirror passages.

“Choi Han will be guarding outside that underground passage for a while.”

“That’s right! I said I'll help him out and we will take shifts here and there! Didn't you
tell us to do that?”

“Yes, yes. But you see…”

Raon could see the corners of Cale’s lips started to go up as he patted him.

It was the look he had when he was plotting something.

“Turn invisible and go down there while Choi Han is guarding.”

“Are you talking about the place with the White Star’s portrait?”

“Yes.”

“Secretly?”

Cale looked toward Raon.

“Yes, secretly. And make a copy of all the information down there. You should be able
to just record it all with a video recording device.”

Raon nodded his head.

“Alright!”

“Good, good.”

Cale was sure that Fredo was currently thinking about whether he should offer
information on the White Star to Cale as his compensation.

‘But that’d be disappointing.’

However, Cale had no intention of accepting that as his compensation.

It was to stop the White Star.

Forget it being for the greater good of the world, it was beneficial for Fredo as well.

‘That’s why he should provide information about the White Star for free.’

Cale's group was fighting in his place, but forget giving him information that could
help that battle, he was going to offer that as compensation?

Such things did not exist in Cale’s mind.

However, Fredo probably thought that Cale wanted information on the White Star
based on his gestures and would offer that information as the compensation for this
Black Castle destruction plan and for destroying the facility that will turn the White
Star into a member of the Demonic race.
‘I'll have to reject it.’

He would then ask for something else.

Cale started to smile.

“Human! You look weird smiling like that!”

Cale slightly lowered the corners of his lips after hearing that.

“Much better!”

Cale sighed at that comment and headed into his, no, Naru’s bedroom.

‘The White Star who looks similar to Kim Rok Soo…… ’

However, he looked full of concerns as he walked.

“Raon. Have you tried contacting Miss Cage?”

He had scheduled to video chat with the God of Death's excommunicated priestess
Cage tonight.
But he had received a message from Cage earlier.

‘Young master-nim! I don’t think we can chat tonight! I'm sorry! Something urgent
came up!’

They could not contact her after getting that message.

“Human! Cage is still not picking up! She must be busy!”

Cale's gaze sank lower after hearing Raon respond the same way again.

Shhh.

Cale entered Naru’s bedroom through the open mirror passage and looked out the
window.

It was currently the middle of September.

It would soon be October.
November was not far away after that.
"Something’s iffy.”

Cale quietly started to think while standing by the window.

The White Star looked similar to Kim Rok Soo.

The White Star's life was cursed by the God of Death.

“They're similar.”

For some reason, he had a feeling that the White Star’s life was similar to Kim Rok
Soo's life.

It was similar to how anything they started to cherish ended up disappearing.

“There’s something there.”

Cale’s gaze was cold but nervous.

Alberu who entered Naru's bedroom through the mirror passage subconsciously
started to speak.

“Aigoo?”

“Hyung, you’re back?”

The twelve years old boy lying on the couch was casually waving his hand at Alberu.

“Hey, crown prince!”

The young Dragon who was similarly lying down next to him patted his belly that was
chubby from eating too much food as he smiled brightly at Alberu.

“Raon-nim, I'm Bob.”

“Ah, right! Nice to meet you, Bob!”

“Yes sir.”
“Heh.”

Alberu turned around after hearing that scoffing laugh.

The twelve years old boy had a smile that arrogant was not enough to describe its
rudeness. Alberu looked down at Cale and started to speak.

“Your position is amazing.”

"What’s wrong? You want me to be respectful?”

“Whatever.”

Alberu scoffed.

‘He’s milking the fact that I said he could speak informally to me.’

Raon fluttered his wings and flew up at that moment.

“I’m sure Choi Han is bored alone! I'll go stay with him!”

Raon then flew through the secret passage and headed for Fredo's bedroom.
He didn't need to be invisible right now because he was just going to be next to Choi
Han.

Of course, Raon was holding a box of cookies the White Star had given Naru.

“Hey.”

“What?”

“You sound rude.”

“…I thought you told me to be fully invested in the act.”

Pfft.

Alberu chuckled at Cale who was warily looking at him and tapped the foot of the boy
who was lying down.

“What is it?”
Alberu calmly responded to the question the person who looked annoyed at the fact
that he was tapping his foot asked.

“Let's go outside.”

“…Outside?”

“Yeah.”

“Do we have to?”

Cale looked extremely annoyed. He heard Alberu’s calm voice at that moment. Maybe
it was because of Raon's magic, but his voice that was lower than usual sounded
extremely calm.

“Yes, I want to go outside.”

He looked outside the window. Alberu's gaze was complicated as he looked out at the
Endable Kingdom.
Although his face was covered by a mask, his visible eyes held multiple emotions.

“Hmm.”

Cale had sat up at some point and was now leaning back on the couch as he looked at
Alberu. Alberu noticed his gaze and asked.

"What’s wrong? You don’t want to go outside?”

“I'm debating.”

“Debating what?”

Cale answered with a serious expression.

“Won’t we have to eat and drink things if we go outside?”

“…Huh?”

Cale was debating what to do regardless of Alberu’s confused response.

He did not have any of the Endable Kingdom's currency.
Cale recalled the allowance he had received from Count Deruth the first day he became
Cale.
He remembered how shocked but happy he had been.

Cale had a serious thought as he nostalgically thought about that moment.

‘I'm sure Naru must receive an allowance from Duke Fredo, right? Especially if he's 12
in human years?’

“Hyung. How much should I ask for an allowance?”

“…Huh?”

“Hmm. How much would twelve-year-olds usually get? Would it be enough to get as
much as I give On?”

“…Why? Why would Duke Fredo give you an allowance?”

“Because I'm his son?”

“…I, is that so?”

Alberu looked toward Cale in shock.

Cale didn't care and headed for the bedroom door.

“Just wait here. I’ll go loot some allowance money from Duke Fredo.”

Tap!

The door opened and closed.

Cale had really gone over to Duke Fredo.

“…Ho!”

‘He's not going over to receive allowance but to loot it?’

Alberu who was left alone scoffed in disbelief but nobody heard him.
A moment later…

“Wow! Hyung!”
Cale entered the room with a shocked expression.

Bang!

He quickly slammed the door shut and could not hide his shock.
He then held up a bundle of bills toward Alberu.

“Duke Fredo's generosity is no joke! He gave me a ton of money! Let’s go outside!”

Alberu could see a boy who looked happier than ever as he tightly held the bundle of
bills in his hands.

“…My goodness. I have something like this bastard as a dongsaeng……”

Cale walked over to Alberu who was looking at him with disbelief.
He looked up at Alberu and quietly whispered.

“I asked Solena for a good restaurant too. We'll go eat there. And then I need to buy
something for Raon and Choi Han too.”

“…Hey, you-”

Did you come here to play? Why do you look so excited?

Alberu who was about to say something then heard Cale quietly whisper something.

“The facility that will turn the White Star into a member of the Demonic race. We'll go
take a look around there too.”

Alberu who was about to say something closed his mouth. He looked down at Naru-
Cale for a moment before starting to smile.

“That’s a good plan. Dongsaeng.”

“Right? Hyung, let’s use all the money and ask Duke Fredo for more.”

Alberu was at a loss for words again, but Cale did not know this as he carefully put the
bundle of bills in a small spatial pocket bag.
Alberu Crossman was quietly looking down at the view from the second-floor terrace.
Although his half-mask was covering everything from his nose up, his eyes were taking
in the sight of the Endable Kingdom's Section 1 with his quarter Dark Elf appearance
out in the open.

“Bob hyung, are you not going to eat?”

Alberu slowly turned his head after hearing the voice.

A boy wearing a dull grey hooded cape was looking at him.

Nobody else other than Alberu who was sitting across from him could see how he
looked because he had his hood on.

Alberu looked into the eyes of the boy looking at him before turning back toward the
view outside the terrace.

His mouth slowly opened to speak.

“I keep wanting to look.”

"Why?”

“In some ways… This place means a lot to me.”

The boy's confident voice struck Alberu’s heart like a hook at that moment.

"Why? Because of the Dark Elves?”

He really couldn’t trick this punk.

Alberu looked at the boy in front of him. He realized that it really was hard to hide his
feelings from Cale.

‘That also means that he knows a lot of my secrets.’

Sharing a secret that could not be openly shown with someone could at times bring
comfort and peace, however… It could also make someone feel awkward as if their
innermost thoughts were being revealed.

Alberu was feeling both the former and the latter right now.

He opened his mouth to speak.

“Well, I guess you could say that.”

He kept looking because of the Dark Elves, as Cale had mentioned.

“Isn't it nice?”

Alberu slowly nodded his head at Cale's question.

“It is nice.”

He then quickly added on.

“It’s better than I thought it would be.”

The Endable Kingdom's scenery was better than he thought it would be and better
than he could have ever imagined.
Although the sunlight only shined down at the center, the capital was not dark at all
probably because they used a lot of magic devices.

The restaurant Cale brought Alberu to at Solena’s recommendation only had two
stories, so the second-floor terrace was not high enough to see everything in the
Endable Kingdom.

‘But that’s why I can see the faces of the people living here.’

It was not very high, so Alberu could get a good look at the expressions and emotions
of the individuals living here.
Just as his eyes landed on a fruit vendor’s energetic smile…

“Hyung, isn't it similar? Here and the Roan Kingdom.”

“…It is.”
Peek.

Cale, who was putting a piece of steak in his mouth, peeked toward Alberu after
hearing an oddly weak voice.

He looked somewhat dispirited and tired.

Alberu was indeed a bit tired as Cale was thinking.

‘It existed on the Eastern continent. A place where races with the darkness attribute
could live freely.’

Alberu’s mouth felt bitter for some reason.

He was happy and welcoming of such a place, but for some odd reason, his mouth felt
bitter and hot.

It was at that moment.

He heard Cale’s casual voice.

“Hyung, you can probably come here to relax whenever you are frustrated from work
once everything is done.”

‘What?’

Alberu looked toward Cale.

He could see Cale pointing at him with his fork.

“Looking like that.”

Cale smiled.
Alberu quietly stared at him for a while before turning back toward the outside and
nodding his head.

“That’s right. I can come here every so often when I'm feeling frustrated.”

If he did that…

“I think that’ll be great.”

Alberu subconsciously chuckled.

This was the Eastern continent.
Even if he was going to be a king on the Western continent in the near future, there
won't be many people who know who he is over here.
Furthermore, there was nobody here who would know of his quarter Dark Elf
appearance.

It wouldn't be weird at all for him to walk around freely in this place.
He might even be able to walk around without a mask later on.

‘Walking around in my human form might catch more attention here instead.’

Alberu had been walking around in his quarter Dark Elf appearance ever since they
left Duke Fredo's residence.

There were people who peeked at him every so often, but their gazes were on his
mask.
But those gazes soon disappeared as well.

‘There are many half-bloods and a lot of people with scars. There are also a lot of
people wearing masks like me.’

Alberu’s appearance did not stick out.

That was so shocking that Alberu’s mind was roaring the whole time they walked.

He started to think about the future when he could freely walk around here without
his mask.

“That sounds fun. That’d be a fun future.”

In addition…

‘I hope something similar can happen in the Roan Kingdom.’

Even if he could not enjoy the Roan Kingdom’s streets, he hoped that people similar to
him could walk freely through the kingdom.
He wanted the same thing to occur in the Roan Kingdom.

A refreshing smile appeared on Alberu’s face.

He turned his head with that smile still visible.
“……”

But that smile disappeared the moment he saw Cale.

He started to frown as he watched Cale thoroughly enjoying his food.

“You… I think you’ve gotten fatter?”

Cale slightly raised his head after hearing Alberu’s comment.

Cale slightly tilted his head to one side before responding.

“Mm… I guess so?”

He wasn’t sure because he looked like Naru right now, but Naru’s cheeks had gotten
chubbier in just a few days.
He was certain that he would be fatter than before when he returned to his original
appearance.

“…I have nothing to say.”

Alberu shook his head from side to side.

“Hyung.”

Cale looked around before leaning forward toward Alberu.

“…What is it?”

Alberu tensed up and leaned forward toward Naru-Cale.

Cale started to whisper.

“You know that white thing, the white thing.”

Alberu immediately understood what he meant by the white thing.

He must be talking about the White Star.

Alberu immediately recognized that Cale could not say, ‘White Star,’ out here in public.

“What about it?”

Alberu’s heart was beating fast as he asked.

The facility to turn the White Star into a member of the Demonic race existed underneath
Section 1.

He had realized that the White Star was not just a slightly crazy bastard once he heard
that.
He was an extremely crazy bastard.

‘And we are going to go take a look at the facility that would turn that crazy bastard
into a member of the Demonic race.’

Was Cale trying to talk about that right now?

Alberu started to tense up.

Cale slowly started to speak.

“You see… The White thing. He gave me some delicious food.”

“What?”

The corners of Alberu’s lips twisted down.

Cale didn't seem to notice as he looked back at his food and continued to speak.

“The cookies were better than yours too, hyung.”

“…Is that so?”

“Yeah.”

Alberu was in disbelief and shocked.

However for some odd reason…

“Hmm… That’s upsetting.”

“Huh?”

“Nothing. Keep eating.”

Alberu crossed his arms as he told Cale to keep eating.

He remembered how Raon had flown toward Choi Han with a box of cookies.
‘The White Star must have sent that box of cookies too, right?’

For some odd reason, Alberu felt as if he had lost to the White Star.

“No, I'm done.”

Screeeech.

Alberu saw Cale push his chair back and stand.

Cale who still looked like that foreign young master looked down at him and continued
to speak.

“Hyung, shall we go take a look?”

Screech.

Alberu got up as well.

"Sounds good.”

“Duke-nim. I brought some of the tea you usually enjoy.”

“Thank you.”

Butler Melundo carefully put a teacup down at the table Fredo was at and observed
his complexion.

Fredo noticed his gaze and gently smiled to say he was fine.

“What are you looking at?”

“Well… It’s just…”

Melundo stopped for a moment before peeking toward Choi Han and then continuing
to speak.

“You look very tired, sir.”

“I'm fine.”

Fredo did not say anything else.

The butler understood that Fredo was saying that he would not take any more
questions.

He carefully walked away from Fredo and approached Choi Han.

“I heard that you prefer fruit juice to tea, so I prepared some for both of you, sirs.”

Two cups of fruit juice were placed next to Choi Han and Raon.

“Thank you very much.”

“Thanks, butler!”

The butler bowed and left Fredo's bedroom.

Click, click!

Choi Han started to speak as soon as the door closed.

“There shouldn't be a reason for you to be tired.”

Fredo turned toward Choi Han.

Choi Han calmly met his gaze and continued to speak.

“I can’t understand the Roan Kingdom's thoughts nor Cale-nim’s thoughts at all.”

Choi Han had watched Alberu chat with Fredo.

The weight of the conversation felt differently to Choi Han, who, unlike Fredo who
thought Alberu was a proxy, knew Alberu’s identity.

He looked at Fredo who was still looking back at him and continued to speak.

“The Roan Kingdom conceded quite a bit.”

Smile.

Fredo started to smile as he responded.

“That’s why it is weird.”

“What?”

Fredo admitted that the Roan Kingdom had conceded a lot but was saying that it was
weird. Fredo continued to speak as Choi Han started to frown at what he said.

“To be more specific, the deal with the Roan Kingdom was one where each side gave
something and then took something. Of course, the fact that the Roan Kingdom made
an even deal with the Endable Kingdom could already be considered to be conceding
a lot.”

Fredo hesitated for a moment before starting to speak again.

He then observed Choi Han.

Choi Han was Cale’s closest trusted subordinate who was the easiest to read.

Fredo shared his inner thoughts to figure out Choi Han's inner thoughts.

“What I find weird is crown prince Alberu Crossman's thoughts.”

The Roan Kingdom did not necessarily lose out as a result of the conversation.
However…

“His highness the crown prince personally gave a lot of consideration to me and the
future Endable Kingdom.”

Alberu’s considerations as shared by his proxy Bob was what was making Fredo's
mind chaotic.
Fredo recalled what Alberu’s proxy Bob had said.

‘Now then, I guess this is good for the deal between the two kingdoms.’

As the discussion was coming to an end…

‘I will now share with you something his highness the crown prince ordered me to tell
you, coming from him as a person.’

‘…His highness the crown prince as a person?’

‘Yes, sir.’

‘What is it?’

‘His highness said that if Duke Fredo wishes to grow the Endable Kingdom as an
upright king… Depending on the situation, his highness will not spare any ‘personal
advice’ that may assist you in getting the independence of the kingdom, setting up an
administrative system, and building connections with the kingdoms of the Western
continent.’

Fredo had truly been shocked to hear that.

He was about to say something because of that, but Bob had continued to speak first.

‘Of course, only if you wish for it, Duke Fredo.’

‘…You’re saying that he would give me advice and chat with me?’

‘Yes, sir. Whenever you want without holding anything back.’

Alberu Crossman.
The person who was turning the Roan Kingdom into a strong kingdom and would
become its king was willing to give Fredo advice.

‘However, it is not as the representative of the Roan Kingdom but his highness, the
crown prince as a person.’

Bob drew a line to make it clear once again, but Fredo found this shocking as well.

Leading a kingdom…
Especially a new kingdom at that and leading a kingdom as a Vampire that humans
were prejudiced against…

There were many concerns that could not be resolved with troops or money.
But the person who was seen as the most talented administrator and politician would
personally give him advice?

This was a precious gift for someone like Fredo who would be a new king.

‘May I ask why he is showing me such goodwill?’

‘I'm not sure. I do not know the reason either.’

Bob had smiled and shaken his head.

His gentle smile that clearly drew the line made it so that Fredo could not ask specifics
about Alberu Crossman's intentions anymore.

Fredo snapped out of his thoughts and returned to reality as he looked at Choi Han
and started to speak.

“Why is his highness the crown prince showing such goodwill to the Endable Kingdom?”

Was it because they were on the Eastern continent and not the Western continent?
Or was it because it was a kingdom that he could control because he knew of its
weaknesses?

His goodwill had too many good intentions for it to be the latter.

Pfft.

Fredo could hear Choi Han scoff at that moment.

"Why are you worrying about goodwill?”

“…I am in a spot to question everything.”

Fredo had many people he had to protect.

Furthermore, the Endable Kingdom was bound to have many moments they must
survive.
That was why he had to suspect and be careful of even the smallest things.

Alberu’s reasonless goodwill was another thing to worry about and tire Fredo out.

Fredo looked toward the quiet Choi Han and continued to speak.

“It looks like you know something but have no plans to tell me.”

“…There is no reason for me to give you any help.”

“How cold.”
Choi Han ignored Fredo's comment and turned away from him before picking up the
cookie crumbs Raon dropped.
His eyes slightly sank as he did that.

‘…Alberu Crossman.’

It was possible that Choi Han was the human to know the most about Alberu’s secrets
after Cale.

He could understand why Alberu, as Bob, would show such goodwill to the Endable
Kingdom.
Maybe that was why, but Choi Han wanted to help Alberu even more than before.

‘I need to teach him sword arts.’

“Hyung, what’s wrong?”

“I suddenly got the chills. Is someone talking shit about me?”

Cale blankly stared at Alberu who was touching the back of his neck.
Alberu noticed his gaze and slowly looked away.

“Ahem, but why are we in Section 2?”

They were supposed to go under Section 1.

Cale and Alberu who were going to go to the facility that will turn the White Star into
a member of the Demonic race were current a level above Section 1. They had come
to Section 2.

Smile.

Alberu could see Cale start to smile.

“This is where our mole is.”

Cale was smiling like an experienced adult while looking like a little boy.
Alberu looked at that smiling boy and started to speak again.

“We sure look terrible for having come to meet a mole.”

Cale could not say anything this time.

Alberu looked at him and nonchalantly continued to speak.

“Why do I have to crouch in the corner of a wagon while being pushed around by piles
of rice straw?”

Alberu's cold gaze was directed at Cale.

“Especially as young master Naru-nim’s loyal servant?”

Cale kept his mouth shut.

He was choosing to use his right to remain silent.

Clack clack.

The wagon with the piles of rice straw and hay was continuing down the main road of
Section 2 at that moment.
In a corner of the wagon that was covered in thick cloth… Cale was crouching while
observing Section 2 through a small hole in the cloth.

“…I guess you are just going to ignore my question.”

Alberu was glaring at him while crouching in a tight spot as well.

“Ahem.”

Cale fake coughed at Alberu’s statement and avoided his gaze. However, he felt
Alberu’s burning glare and ended up speaking.
“Section 2 is where the Deputy Chief Priest who is working with Duke Fredo resides,
sir.”

“You’re suddenly speaking respectfully.”

“Ahem, anyway!”

Cale observed Section 2 as the wagon traveled across a major road and continued to
speak.

“The grand assembly that took place in the White Star's castle… An extremely weird
and suspicious motion passed during the meeting.”

“You told me about it.”

Alberu repeated the information he had heard from Cale.

“It was a motion from the Chief Priest, Marquis Gersey, regarding the priests in Section
2 conducting a large ritual on the last day of the festival, correct?”

“Your highness, the sun of the Roan Kingdom truly has an amazing memory.”

“Enough with the sucking up.”

Alberu sat next to Cale and looked out through a hole as well.

“Is my dongsaeng saying that that motion feels suspicious?”

“Yes, sir. Duke Fredo found it suspicious as well. Duke Fredo and I became certain we
were right because the Deputy Chief Priest didn’t know about that motion.”

Cale and Alberu made eye contact.

“We realized that the White Star and the Chief Priest are planning something big for
the last day of the festival.”

“Is the mole the Deputy Chief Priest?”

“As expected, you figured it out right away.”

“You said it yourself that the Deputy Chief Priest didn’t know about that motion.”

“I did.”

Cale smiled at Alberu who was easy to chat with and continued to speak.

"We can get to the Demonic race creating facility from Section 2.”

“Didn’t you say that it was located under Section 1?”

“It is, but the entrance is in Section 2. We go in through the Temple of the Demonic God
that Chief Priest Gersey is the overseer for and the Deputy Chief Priest is the deputy
overseer.”

Alberu realized something odd at that moment.

"A Temple of a Demonic God?”

‘The Demonic race is one thing and gods were another, but a Demonic God?’

“Shall I tell you something funny?”

Cale sighed.

“The Demonic God they serve at that temple is named Barrow.”

“…Barrow is the name you told-”

“Yes, sir. It is the last name of the first Dragon Slayer and the last name that each
generation of Dragon Slayers took on after giving up their own last name.”

That was why, although the White Star's original last name was different, he took on
Nelan Barrow's last name the moment he became the Dragon Slayer and ended up as
Cale Barrow.

“Your highness, there is no Demonic race called Barrow. It is a Demonic race that will
be created in the future.”

“…Do the citizens of the Endable Kingdom know about that?”

“Of course not. Well, other than a portion of the Chief executives, of course. They all
think that it is a Demonic race that has been around since the beginning.”

“…Ho.”

There was a reason Duke Fredo had learned the name, ‘Cale Barrow.’

Of course, he claimed that he learned of that information through a mole he placed by

Bear King Sayeru.

‘My son, for your reference, Bear King Sayeru and Lion King Dorph are not nobles like
us. They are just the White Star’s subordinates. That is why you must be careful. They
must be hiding a lot of different things.’

Cale recalled the information Fredo gave him and organized his thoughts.

“Hmm.”

Alberu also looked deep in thought at what Cale just said as he looked out.

“I thought it would look a bit unique because it is a building to serve a Demonic race,
but it looks similar to a regular temple.”

“They are all slightly different in size, shape, or symbol, but are all clean and give off a
feeling of reverence.”

“…You said Section 2 has a lot of humans, right?”

Alberu could see the priests walking around Section 2.

They had different symbols on their clothes but were all mainly wearing grey robes,
the same robes Alberu had seen at the Stan territory's battle.

“Yes, the people all over the Eastern and Western continents who serve the Demonic
race came here to build their respective buildings.”

“I see.”

Alberu nodded at Cale's explanation and continued to speak.

“But you know…”

“Yes, sir?”

“Must I be your servant?”

Alberu had a rare upset gaze as he looked at Cale.

Cale put on a more serious expression than ever in response.

“Your highness, this is an important issue. Please think about it.”

Cale then pointed at himself.

“This Naru Von Ejellan is a beloved young master in the Endable Kingdom. What I
mean is that I am very popular.”

Alberu’s expression turned stoic.

“…So?”

“So, this beloved young master has a weak body and has had to live his life resting
outside the capital ever since he was young.”

"These are all things that I’ve already heard. So what?”

“That is why there aren’t many people who would suspect you if I said I was walking
around with a loyal servant who took care of me in the villa. They will suspect you
even less since you are a member of a dark attribute race as a mixed blooded Dark Elf.”

Alberu's mouth closed shut.

Cale realized that Alberu had accepted this to be the case and barely held the corners
of his lips from going up as he continued to speak with a sad expression.

“Your highness. Please be a little understanding.”

“Are you happy?”

“I never said that I was happy, sir. In fact, my heart is beating wildly thinking about the
things that would happen once we make contact with the mole. I am weak, you know?”

“Hoo- your tongue is getting more oiled-”

Clunk!

The wagon clunked loudly before stopping.

Alberu stopped talking and looked at Cale.

“I guess we are here.”

The plan Fredo mentioned before he left the house had started.
Cale quickly whispered to Alberu before the wagon door opened.

“Your highness, the Deputy Chief Priest is the only outsider who knows that Duke
Fredo is actually awake.”

There was also something for Alberu to keep in mind.

“In addition, the Deputy Chief Priest thinks that ‘Fredo Von Ejellan’ and ‘Naru Von
Ejellan’ are two different people and that Naru really is Duke Fredo's son.”

Pffft.

Alberu chuckled as he whispered.

“Duke Fredo is even tricking his only co-conspirator?”

Duke Fredo had not told everything even to the Deputy Chief Priest.

Cale smiled back and responded.

“That is why he is an entertaining Vampire.”

Click!

They heard the lock to the wagon door unlocking at that moment.

“Did you bring everything?”

They could hear voices outside the wagon.

This building… It was the voice of the guard for this warehouse.
Cale recalled what Fredo had told him.

‘You will approach in a supply wagon. Everybody is on our side, so don't worry.’

Cale then heard the wagon driver's voice.

“Of course I brought everything! Am I the type to screw something like this up?”

Cale heard the warehouse guard's voice again.

“Kehehe, then I'm going to move things right away without checking.”

“Of course! Hurry up and move them! I need to go back soon!”

Screeeech.

The wagon door slowly opened.

The warehouse guard shouted energetically.

“Okay, you two newbies! You guys move the goods from this wagon!”

Cale made eye contact with the driver through the slightly open door.
The warehouse guard started to speak as the Vampire driver respectfully greeted Cale
with his eyes.

“I'll be watching you, so don’t even think about being lazy!”

“Yes, sir! I will work hard!”

“Yes, sir, just tell me what to do!”

They then heard two energetic responses.

Screeeech-

The driver opened the door a little more.

Clunk. Clunk.

Two muscular humans entered the wagon.

They looked at the piles of rice straw that filled the wagon and walked in farther.

“Young master-nim. We came here to escort you.”

They then stopped in front of Cale.

Cale could see Alberu stepping in front of him at that moment.

“Please tell us the password first.”

Both humans started to speak at the same time after hearing Alberu’s low voice.

“For the future of the Endable Kingdom.”

“For the future of the Endable Kingdom.”

Alberu looked toward Cale.

“Young master-nim.”

Cale nodded his head.

Alberu then moved behind Cale and looked like a humble servant.

‘Wow. He’s doing a good job.’

Cale almost shared his amazement at how Alberu had instantly shifted to a servant
role but held himself back and asked instead.

"Are you two my escorts?”

‘Oh.’

Alberu had to hold back his gasp.

‘He’s doing a good job.’

Cale was new to something like this, but he was doing a good job showing a confident
demeanor as the future Duke of the Ejellan household.

The healthy young men bowed toward Cale as Cale and Alberu were amazed at each
other’s acting.
“Yes, sir. We are here to serve you.”

Cale saw the burlap bags they had at that moment.

Plop. Plop.

Two large burlap bags were placed in front of Cale and Alberu.
The youths opened the bags.

“Please go in.”

Cale held back a sigh while looking at the opening of the bag.

‘My son. There will be burlap bags waiting for you when you get there. The people who
have promised to be there will use the bags to move you to the Deputy Chief Priest.
They are the Deputy Chief Priest's people. By the way, they are humans.’

‘…A burlap bag?’

Fredo had warmly looked at Cale’s frowning face and responded.

‘We had no choice. According to the Deputy Chief Priest, even she cannot move freely
through Section 2 right now.’

‘Why?’

‘You can hear about that once you get there.’

Cale blankly stared at the bag.

‘Man, I'm doing all sorts of odd things in this life.’

He opened his mouth to speak.

“Do we just need to go in?”

The two youths nodded their heads and Cale walked into one of the bags.
Alberu then walked into the other bag.

The warehouse guard who was peeking inside raised his voice at that moment.
“Hurry up and move, hurry!”

“Y, yes sir!”

“Yes sir!”

The two youths quickly picked up the bags with Cale and Alberu.

Clunk, clunk.

Cale had to sit still inside the bag without being able to move at all.

‘Aigoo. My poor muscles and bones.’

He thought about the place Fredo described.

‘It won’t be far to the spot where you'll meet her. There is an abandoned building
connected to the backdoor of the warehouse. It’s temporarily empty for the
warehouse extension. It will be demolished soon.’

That was the meeting spot.

Screeeech-

He heard an old door being opened.

Cale then realized that the youth who was carrying him had stopped moving.

“Young master-nim, I am going to put you down now, sir.”

Cale then felt his body being lowered.

Plop.

The bag was carefully lowered and Cale saw it starting to open.

“We are here, sir.”

The youth then stepped back and Alberu, who had been lowered first and walked out,
quickly walked over to Cale’s side.
“Young master-nim. Please step out this way.”

He then helped Cale so that it would be easy for him to walk out.
Cale received his help as if it was normal and walked out.

“Then we will be on our way now.”

“Glory to the Endable Kingdom.”

The two humans then opened the door and quickly disappeared.
Cale looked around.

“It looks like a regular house.”

It was a small and simple house that the priests-in-training had lived in in the past.
Of course, it had been empty for a while and was soon to be demolished, so it looked
old and bleak.

“Young master-nim.”

Cale could see Alberu stand in front of him at that moment.

“I think you should look to your right, sir.”

Alberu’s respectful but wary voice made Cale quickly look to the right.

Clunk. Clunk.

The ground on the right was moving. He looked closer to see a small wooden door on
the ground.

Click!

The wooden door that was moving up and down soon opened.
Cale then saw a chubby hand holding the doorknob.

“Aigoo, so hard to open.”

A soft and gentle voice was heard coming from the open wooden door.
“Haiyah!”

A woman wearing an old grey robe pushed up from the wooden door and stood upon
the ground.
This round woman who seemed to be in her early twenties and resembled a baby
Polar Bear smiled with her chubby cheeks and waved at Cale.

“Young master Naru, long time no see. Are you here with a message from the Duke?”

Cale immediately recalled something Fredo told him.

‘My son, there is something you must say first when you meet the Deputy Chief Priest.’

Cale repeated those words.

‘Deputy Chief Priest-nim. Please get rid of the illusion first.’

Her eyes that had become as thin as a string because she was smiling focused on Cale.

“I guess Duke Fredo really is alive. How else would he have taught you to say that first,
Naru?”

Although she was smiling, her eyes did not feel warm at all.

‘My son, I think that the Deputy Chief Priest is scarier than Gersey. That is why I
partnered with her.’

Cale recalled Fredo's comments once more as he looked at her.

The Deputy Chief Priest extended her hand toward him.

“You did good making it here, little kid.”

The area then started to change.

Cale’s eyes were filled with astonishment.

Cale started to speak.

“…Gold!”

There was gold everywhere he looked.

“Young master Naru, this is your first time here, isn’t it?”

There was a halo behind the gently smiling Deputy Chief Priest.
Realistically, it was the gold behind her that was shining.

On a wall where there had been nothing until just a moment ago other than maybe
mold and spider webs suddenly had a glass box filled with gold bars.

“You can come this way if you want to look closer.”

The Deputy Chief Priest waved her hand with a warm smile on her face.

“Deputy Chief Priest-nim, are you sure you removed the illusion?”

The corners of her smiling lips twitched at Naru’s sharp gazes.

“You have quite a sharp gaze, but this is real. There's no need for me to keep up an
illusion.”

She then observed the slowly approaching Naru with a sharp gaze that was hidden by
her smile.

‘He really is similar to Duke Fredo.’

His thoroughness was exactly like his father.

‘No, maybe it is that they both have a lot of suspicions rather than that they are thorough
that is similar?’

She started to speak to Naru who had come to her side.

“Ah, by the way, do you see the magic flowing around the glass box? You'll get hurt if
you touch it. It’s set up so that anybody other than the authorized people who touch it
will instantly be teleported.”

She could see that Naru who had stopped moving after hearing her statement finally
start to speak after a while.

“…Deputy Chief Priest-nim.”

His voice was extremely low. Her gaze automatically headed for Naru’s eyes.

Flinch.

She subconsciously flinched.

‘…How could his gaze be so-’

How could it be so vicious?

She had been shocked by his vicious gaze.

‘No, it's shocking because it is Naru.’

To be more specific, she was shocked that this boy named Naru had such a gaze.

‘I guess the rumors are true that Naru caused a big issue this time.’

The Black Castle destruction plan.

The Endable Kingdom's chief executives had all heard about it by now.
The people at the center of that plan were Count Mock and young master Naru Von
Ejellan.

‘Of course, I'm sure Duke Fredo was giving him orders from the back.’

The Deputy Chief Priest who knew that Duke Fredo was actually awake believed that
Fredo was the mastermind behind all this.
‘He’s an amazing Vampire.’

Wasn’t he?

She was in awe of his ability and plan to draw in the Roan Kingdom and Cale Henituse
and made her feel that she had grabbed onto the right rope for success.

‘…I can't fall behind to Gersey.’

Greed was visible in her eyes. That greed was so strong that the boy looking at her
could feel it.

“Young master Naru, why are you not saying anything after calling me here?”

“…Deputy Chief Priest-nim.”

“Yes?”

“…I truly believe you are cool.”

‘Hmm?’

The Deputy Chief Priest suddenly became anxious.

‘Aigoo.’

Alberu who was watching from the back subconsciously clenched his eyes shut.
He instantly understood the meaning behind Cale's words.

‘His eyes have rolled over because of the gold.’

It made him wonder why such a rich punk would act like this.

Cale continued to speak at that moment.

“I truly respect you. How did you gain such wealth?”

“…Well, you know.”

The Deputy Chief Priest was anxious.

It could not be helped.

“…It’s shocking to hear that from you, young master Naru. The Ejellan Duchy's wealth
is incomparable to my own.”

She was asking why someone who was the son of Duke Fredo who had much greater
wealth than her was saying such a thing.

“Hooo.”

The Deputy Chief Priest noticed the boy's gaze becoming even more vicious at that
moment.
However, that viciousness quickly disappeared.

“Haha, I'm sorry for showing you such a sight. I’ve never seen gold piled up like this
before.”

Naru scratched the back of his head like an embarrassed boy as he responded.

‘Hmm? Did I see it wrong?’

The Deputy Chief Priest wondered if she had mistakenly seen the previous vicious
gaze as Naru returned to his usual self. Cale and Alberu exchanged glances at that
moment.

‘Hyung. You heard her, right?’

'Yes, I heard her.’

Cale and Alberu now knew that Fredo was extremely rich.

“Anyway, let’s get down to business.”

Cale turned back toward the Deputy Chief Priest after hearing her voice.

"We don't have much time.”

“Is Marquis Gersey keeping a tight watch?”

She quietly nodded at Cale’s question and took a sealed envelope out of her pocket.
“The basement of Section 1… This has a map and some information about the facility
located there.”

The envelope was quite thick. Cale carefully received it and put it in his pocket
immediately.

“I heard that you will be coming with us at that time, Deputy Chief Priest-nim.”

“That’s right. You won’t be able to come with us at that time young master Naru, but I
will be guiding the group through the facility.”

Young master Naru could not come with them.

Cale’s eyes clouded over before instantly returning to normal after hearing the Deputy
Chief Priest say that.

“And…”

She was silent for a moment as she chose her words. She then seemed to have made
up her mind as she pulled out a rolled-up piece of paper from her pocket.

“This is information about the ritual on the last day of the festival.”

Her expressions did not look good.

“I think that there has to be something hidden inside the ritual, but it just seems like
a regular blessing ritual no matter how many times I look at it.”

“Is that so?”

“Mm. I think Gersey's trusted subordinates know about it.”

The Deputy Chief Priest was the person right under Chief Priest Gersey, but he
supposedly had his own trusted subordinates who took care of things for him.
There were about five of them who only listened to Gersey.

“I haven’t been able to put one of my people there yet.”

“That’s okay. This information is already extremely beneficial, Deputy Chief Priest-
nim.”
“Then I'm relieved. Anyway, I put some notes down about my suspicions. Young
master Naru, you unexpectedly speak in a way that sounds nice to the listener.”

She was being respectful to Naru as if she had never called Cale a little kid.

“Thank you.”

Cale gently responded to her as if it was nothing.

‘It's over now.’

Information on the underground facility and the last day of the festival.
And ‘Cale’ confirming the Deputy Chief Priest's face.

Cale had confirmed everything he had come for today.

“Alright, now then!”

The Deputy Chief Priest smiled brightly.

Cale was starting to get ready to say goodbye.

She then started to speak.

"Alright, shall we go check on the hostages?”

‘What?’

Cale questioned his ears for a moment.

‘Check what?’

The Deputy Chief Priest didn't seem to have noticed Cale’s state as she headed toward
the door she came from earlier.
It was the door heading underground.

“Hmm? What is it, young master Naru?”

"Ah, you see…”

The Deputy Chief Priest went, ‘ah!’ and continued to speak as Cale was trying to figure
out what to say.

“Young master Naru, you must have been shocked because I called them hostages.
Don’t worry, it is not as cruel a situation as a little kid would be thinking about.”

“…Yes, ma’am.”

She continued to speak to the stiff Cale as if she pitied him.

“I'm sure that this is your first time conducting official business. It must be hard to
complete all of Duke Fredo's orders, isn’t it?”

She then looked toward the small set of stairs underneath the door heading
underground.
She jokingly grumbled.

“I was a bit annoyed at the fact that Duke Fredo wanted me to show the hostages again,
you know? I'm a very busy person. He’s so pushy about it because it is the deal
conditions with the Mercenary King or whatever.”

The deal conditions with the Mercenary King.

Hostages.

The hairs on Cale’s back started to stand up once he heard that.

‘That damn Duke Fredo!’

He was certain that the hostages were the Ranger Brigade members!

Cale and Alberu made eye contact.

The Deputy Chief Priest pulled the old door heading underground once more.

“This thing doesn't work properly because it's so old.”

Screeeech-

Alberu did not miss the opening from her grumbling and the screeching of the old
door to quietly whisper so that only Cale could hear.
“Did you know about it?”

Cale shook his head.

‘No.’

He had not heard anything about it.

Duke Fredo had not said anything about the Ranger Brigade members.

‘That bastard.’

Duke Fredo's intentions were obvious.

‘Do whatever you want.’

He had handed the issue of the Ranger Brigade members to Cale.

The corners of Cale’s lips twisted up.

‘I guess this is his way of apologizing for hiding information about the White Star.’

He truly was quite thorough about keeping things in balance.

Cale walked over to the Deputy Chief Priest who had her back toward him and was
heading to the stairs.

"Deputy Chief Priest-nim, do we just need to go down?”

“Of course! The hostages are down there.”

Cale was flabbergasted.

He had expected the Ranger Brigade members to be outside this sinkhole city.

But they were actually so close to Cale!

They were in Section 2 at that!

It wasn’t important to Cale how they brought them here or how they managed to trick
the White Star.
What was important to Cale were Duke Fredo and the Deputy Chief Priest’s amazing
abilities.

“Alright, let’s go down.”

The Deputy Chief Priest was in the lead as Cale and Alberu walked down behind her.

There was a clean and larger than expected hallway once they walked down the short
and narrow stairs.
There were rooms to either side of the hallway.
However, there were only iron bars the size of doors instead of doors.

“Alright, will you check on them? Duke Fredo said that you would take care of it, young
master Naru.”

“Of course.”

Cale started to walk toward the hallway.

Tap. Tap. Tap.

The hallway that was made of marbles made Cale’s footsteps echo.

“Young master-nim.”

Alberu followed behind him.

“Ha!”

Cale did not hide his scoff.

‘It’s too nice.’

Each room was quite large. Furthermore, they had marble floors and expensive carpets
everywhere.
There seemed to be ventilation as well as the air was crisp.

This was obviously expensive to build.

“To be honest with you, this is originally a hiding spot I had stealthily created.”
He heard the Deputy Chief Priest behind him.

“It’s temporarily been modified into a prison at Duke Fredo's request.”

Cale nodded his head.

As Duke Fredo mentioned last time, he was taking good care of the Mercenaries Guild’s
Ranger Brigade members.

‘I'm relieved.’

A genuine smile appeared on Cale’s face instead of a twisted smile.

He could see into the room through the door-sized iron bars.
The people inside each room had chains attached to one foot, but they didn't seem
injured and their complexions looked good.

Cale used, ‘record’ as he walked all the way down the hallway to the last room.

He then subconsciously started to speak.

“…Bud will be happy.”

It was at that moment.

Baaaaang! Baaaaang!

He could see two hands grabbing onto the iron bars.

He then saw a set of vicious eyes glaring at him from the last room.

“…How dare you bastards say our Mercenary King-nim’s name like that?”

The young man with a scar on his cheek looked as if he wanted to rip Cale apart.

‘Ah, right. I'm Naru right now.’

Cale realized that he mentioned the Mercenary King while looking like Naru and
gently spoke to the extremely angry young man.

“Calm down.”
“Calm down my ass!”

However, that made the young man who was most likely a member of the Ranger
Brigade become even angrier.

“What are you plotting while keeping us locked up here? And what the hell is a little
kid like you doing here? Are you looking down on us that much?!”

Bang! Bang!

People started to kick at the bars or grab at them and glare at Cale from the other
rooms as well.

Hundreds of eyes were now viciously glaring at Cale.

“Hahaha. They’re all so full of energy!”

Cale could not help but laugh at that sight.

‘Bud will be happy. Especially since they’re all so energetic.’

Cale was excited.

He had recorded the number of Ranger Brigade members he saw inside the rooms as
he walked down. The number seemed correct.

He put on a genuinely happy smile.

His gaze headed toward the Ranger Brigade members inside the multiple rooms.

“Stop wasting your energy for no reason and just sit back and wait.”

‘I will come save you.’

Cale was excited.

“…Amazing.”

Cale turned around after hearing the Deputy Chief Priest's voice.
She walked over to Cale with a look of admiration.
“I guess you truly do have Duke Fredo's blood.”

She was shocked at Cale.

‘He can look so relaxed and calm even while facing hundreds of hostile people.’

She could feel that the story about how Naru had flipped over the grand assembly hall
in the White Palace was true.

‘He’s only a child between 12-15 years old in human years, but to see him suppress
the enemies with his presence like this-’

She could have never imagined it.

“Haha, am I like my father? I don’t really know if that’s the case. Anyway, I am done
confirming the condition of the hostages.”

“Really?”

“Yes, ma’am. I will be on my way now.”

“That was quick.”

Cale smiled.

“I don't think there is a need to check anymore seeing that everybody is so energetic
like this.”

Boom- boom!

The iron bars started to shake again.

One of the Ranger Brigade members started to shout.

"Are you playing with us?! You bastard, I won’t leave you alone when I get out of here!”

“That’s right! You dirty bastards! You really think you can keep us imprisoned with
these chains forever?!”

“Take these off right now!”

Clang clang! Baaaaang!

The iron bars were shaking and the brigade members started to raise their voices.

The Deputy Chief Priest could see a boy walk over to her while ignoring all the noises.
The boy walked past her and headed to the entrance as he started to speak.

“Deputy Chief Priest-nim. This place is soundproof, right?”

He then started to smile.

She thought that he looked quite evil.

‘…He might be even crueler than Duke Fredo.’

She had heard that his body was weak.

But such a boy was able to look so confident in front of hundreds of enemies, no, he
was beyond confident as he suppressed them and sneered at them.

It was obvious why Duke Fredo would cherish him so much.

That was why she was enjoying herself as well.

She quickly started to walk to stand next to Cale as she responded.

“Of course. This place is completely soundproof and nobody can come in here without
me.”

“…Really?”

“Of course!”

She did not notice the boy's eyes sparkling as he looked up at her.

“Young master Naru, today was fun. It was really short though.”

She said goodbye to Cale once they came back up.

“I enjoyed myself too, Deputy Chief Priest-nim.”

“I'm relieved to hear that. Mm.”

She looked at a calendar inside the old house and continued to speak.

“I heard that the Black Castle destruction plan will take place on the first day of the
festival?”

“Yes, ma'am. I guess I will see you again after the festival.”

“Okay then. Have a safe trip.”

“Yes, ma’am.”

“Naru. The day you've been waiting for has finally come. Are you ready?”

The White Star raised both of his hands and placed them on Cale's shoulders with a
benign expression.
Count Mock was standing next to Cale with a serious expression.

The boy with purple eyes responded while standing there wearing a silver uniform.

“Yes, your majesty.”

“Just call me uncle.”

“I understand, uncle.”

Cale’s eyes were sparkling as he energetically responded to the White Star.

“We will definitely come back after turning Cale Henituse’s Black Castle into dust.”

Cale extended one arm.

“Together with our Endable Kingdom's warriors.”

There were many warriors standing behind Count Mock and Cale.
There were hundreds of warriors standing outside the White Palace.
The White Star looked happy as he looked at the people Cale was describing.

‘Not bad.’

The morale, nervousness, and excitement coming from the warriors were heating up
the air around them.

“Yes, I will trust all of you.”

Nobody cheered or responded to the White Star’s comment.

They just looked at him with firm gazes.

The White Star responded to those gazes.

“Everybody, head out.”

Clang!

Hundreds of warriors knelt down on one knee and bowed toward the White Star.

Smile.

The White Star smiled at this before turning around and heading into the White Palace.

“I will not see you all leave.”

The warriors raised their heads. They could see the White Star's back as he walked
into the White Palace.

The White Star's voice etched itself into the warriors’ ears.

“However, I will prepare a celebration for when you all return.”

He would not see them leave, but he would prepare a celebration for them.

The warriors’ eyes started to burn fiercely.

A celebration. That meant that the White Star was certain about their victory.
The rewards during that celebration would be things like noble titles, power, money,
fame, etc. They will receive many things.

“Have a safe trip.”

The palace door slowly started to close after the White Star’s final comment.

Screeeeeech- boom!

He did not turn back to look at the warriors as the door closed.

“All rise.”

The warriors stood up after hearing Count Mock's voice.

Count Mock turned around to look at them.

‘Kekeke.’

He was laughing internally.

Hundreds of warriors.
There were not too many of them.
However, they were headed toward an empty castle in the middle of a forest.

This was plenty of people to destroy a single person's castle.

‘They are of the highest quality.’

The 48 noble awaiters were all extremely skilled individuals.

And he was certain that the trusted subordinates that they brought for this battle were
all strong individuals as well.

‘Our kids are decent too.’

The Dark Elf warriors that Count Mock had brought with him were talented as well.
It could not be helped.

‘These punks need to earn some merits this time too.’

Count Mock was planning on making his subordinates achieve a lot of merit during
this Black Castle destruction plan so that they could at least get a Baron title.

Peek.

Mock peeked next to him.

‘Only then can I move past the others.’

Count Hubesha who would normally have appeared at the front in her black armor
was in regular clothes biting down on her lips.
Furthermore, Chief Priest Gersey was emotionless as if he was thinking about
something.

‘I guess he’s concerned because I am about to take another step forward.’

The corners of the Dark Elf old man's lips started to rise.

“Count-nim.”

His cute but useful cooperator spoke at that moment.

“Yes, young master Naru.”

The boy who suited the stylish silver uniform quite well was looking at Mock.

‘He’s still young. He’s also inexperienced.’

There would not be much for this bastard to do even though he was taking young
master Naru to the battlefield with him.

‘I will take it all.’

He was planning on making sure that the useful of the noble awaiters who said that
they would follow him and his trusted subordinates would gain most of the merits.
‘I also need to make sure to use the Vampires that that kid brought over.’

Mock’s eyes sneered at the Vampire knights and warriors Naru brought with him
before it quickly disappeared.

‘He really brought the core members so that he could get revenge for Duke Fredo. I'll
put them to good use.’

He would put them in dangerous situations where they couldn't gain much merit.
Count Mock decided on how he would use the Vampires before looking toward the
boy who was here to get revenge for his father and to steady his position as the leader
of the Vampires.

The boy started to speak as soon as he made eye contact with Mock.

“Everybody is waiting for you, Count Mock-nim.”

Count Mock barely managed to stop the corners of his lips from rising.

‘Everybody is waiting for me.

Everybody is waiting for my order.’

How sweet does that sound?

“And Count-nim, here you go.”

Count Mock received the map that Naru walked up and stealthily handed him.

He recalled a conversation they had prior to this.

‘…Duke Fredo has information from the Northern Alliance?’

Naru had shaken his head at that question.

‘To be more specific, during the Northern Alliance’s war, a Vampire informant
infiltrated the Paerun Kingdom and stole some information.’

‘And that information came from that Guardian Knight Clopeh Sekka’s office?’

‘Yes. That is how we were able to confirm the authenticity of the information.’
‘What is that information?’

Naru had quietly informed Count Mock.

‘It is a map of the Henituse territory. It had the coordinates of the Forest of Darkness
as well.’

Chhhhhhhh-

Count Mock opened the map in his hands without any hesitation.

‘It really is real.’

The map had the Paerun Kingdom's crest and Clopeh’s personal crest.
The authenticity of the map had gone up.

He opened his mouth to speak.

“Prepare the teleportation magic circle!”

Hundreds of warriors…
The mages and priests in grey robes behind them started to move following his order.

Mock watched them before shouting in a confident voice.

“I have the coordinates, so the person in charge of the teleportation should come over
to confirm!”

He purposely announced it like that in front of everyone.

He was telling them that he had all of the information related to this Black Castle
Destruction Plan in his hands.

He then quietly whispered to Naru.

“Just leave everything to me, Naru.”

The boy blankly looked at him.

“I will make sure to give you your piece.”

The boy then smiled as if he was satisfied.
Mock barely managed to hold himself back from sneering at Naru.

‘Hmph. This bastard is the same even if he pretends to be a good kid.’

If he really was a good little punk, or if he was full of courage, then he would be difficult
to handle.
However, Mock found it easy to handle Naru as he believed Naru had the same type of
greed as his own inside.

‘Of course, I still need to be wary of him.’

He was Duke Fredo's son after all.

“Commander-nim.”

A black mage approached Count Mock.

Mock became even more elated after hearing the title of commander. However, he
faced the black mage with a stern expression.

“Do you need the coordinates?”

“Yes, Commander-nim.”

“Look at this map.”

The black mage confirmed the coordinates on the map Mock pointed at before peeking
at him and cautiously starting to speak.

“Commander-nim, you are amazing. I am in awe of how you managed to prepare all
these things in advance.”

“Ahem.”

“I am envious of your insight.”

“…We have a big battle in front of us. Focus.”

“Yes, sir!”
The black mage could tell that Count Mock was pretending as if things were nothing
but was actually elated at his kissing up and responded energetically.

Count Mock had a good chance of moving ahead of Count Hubesha if this plan was a
success.

The black mage was energetic seeing that the person he needed to look good toward
was happy at what he said.

"Then we will activate the teleportation magic circle right away!”

“Yes. Make sure to teleport us to the right spot!”

“Yes, sir!”

Count Mock sternly looked at the black mage who respectfully bowed to him and
walked away before turning around and looking at the waiting warriors with a serious
gaze.

The boy looked at Count Mock and had the following thought.

‘He’s acting like a total fool.’

Cale was working hard to not smile while looking at the excited Count Mock.
That was why others thought that he just looked like a nervous boy.

Boom- boom- boooom-

Cale watched the large-scale teleportation magic circle shining even brighter as the
priests played the drums with a sharp gaze.

‘There really is something to it.’

The drums the priests were playing were normal, but he was certain that there was
an item from the Demon World among them.

“Young master Naru.”

He turned toward the voice that suddenly called out to him.

“Count Hubesha-nim.”

Cale walked over to Count Hubesha who had called him. She confirmed that Mock was
busy before quietly whispering to Naru.

“…Ha. I don't know if it is okay for me to say something like this, but… Since I have a
close relationship with Duke Fredo-nim…”

She seemed to be contemplating something, however, she sounded firm as she finally
stopped hesitating and said what she needed to say.

“Be careful. You never know what might happen in a battle.”

Cale's expression turned odd. However, Hubesha read it as nervousness and calmly
continued to speak.

“You need to take care of your own life. You also need to take care of your subordinates’
lives. That is the job of a leader. Got it?”

“I understand.”

Cale responded confidently before he heard Solena's voice behind him.

“Vice Commander-nim!”

Hubesha looked at Solena for a moment before talking to Cale again.

“Have a safe trip. I will stop by the Duchy every so often in order to check on your
father’s condition.”

“Thank you very much, Count-nim. But I will just receive your heart behind the offer.”

“…Why?”

“My father’s condition has worsened, so it will be hard to see him. Nobody other than
the healers can be around him right now.”

Cale answered as sadly as possible.

“That is why I barely managed to say goodbye to him this morning. It would have been
hard to do so if I was even a bit late because he would have been in the middle of being
healed. Of course, I have no idea whether father heard my voice or not.”

Hubesha could feel the emotions of the boy who said goodbye to his comatose father
before coming here.

“I guess I will only be a hindrance if I went to visit, so I will not go. Cheer up.”

Cale bowed and walked over to Solena.

Count Hubesha looked at the boy for a bit before looking toward where the boy was
going.

The large-scale teleportation magic circle was prepared to activate.

All of the warriors were already in place above the teleportation magic circle waiting
to move.

Cale stood in his spot as well.

“We need to hurry.”

“My apologies, sir.”

Cale lowered his head at Count Mock's comment.

“No. Don't be nervous.”

“Yes, Commander-nim.”

Mock peeked at Cale's complexion before whispering in a quiet voice.

“You said that there will be a guide once we get there, right?”

It was a guide to help them through the Forest of Darkness.

“Yes, sir. I sent someone in advance so that he could work as our guide. He was an
informant in the past, so he's quite knowledgeable of that area.”

"Sounds good.”

Count Mock had a satisfied smile on his face and he raised his voice after receiving the
signal from the black mage.

“Teleport!”

Boom boomboom- boooom-

As the drumming reached its zenith…

Paaaaat!

A bright light flashed and hundreds of the Endable Kingdom’s warriors teleported into
the Forest of Darkness.

The Forest of Darkness.

The forest did not have physical boundaries but was instead divided between the
inner and the outer regions with the strongest monsters roaming within the inner
region.

A bright light flashed in the boundary area dividing the two regions.

Ooooooong-!

Hundreds of warriors appeared throughout the forest once the light disappeared.
And at the center… Commander Count Mock took a deep breath.

“This forest truly does feel different.”

The Forest of Darkness was known as one of the Forbidden Regions.

It was a scary forest where monsters from both the Eastern continent and the Western
continent appeared, as well as mutants.

Count Mock looked forward.

“Welcome, Commander-nim.”

A masked person who seemed to be a Dark Elf half-blood bowed toward him.
“Young master Naru, is this person your guide?”

“Yes, sir. This is him.”

The masked Dark Elf half-blood bowed toward the boy this time.

“Your servant greets the young master-nim.”

Cale looked at the person bowing to him before looking toward Count Mock and
starting to speak.

“He is my precious subordinate as well as someone who is very well-informed of this

area.”

This guide obviously was knowledgeable of this region.

The guide introduced himself in a somewhat elegant manner.

“My name is Bob and I am young master Naru-nim’s servant and informant.”

Alberu Crossman who became Bob… He was obviously knowledgeable of the Roan
Kingdom's terrains.
He had a map of the Forest of Darkness that Cale had given him in his pocket.

Mock took a step forward and looked around before starting to speak.

“North, south, east, and west. We will surround the Black Castle from all directions.
We will then proceed to destroy Cale Henituse’s resting place.”

The warriors’ eyes sparkled at his firm voice.

Cale just stared at Mock’s back.

‘Welcome. This is your first time in the Forest of Darkness, isn’t it?’

The corners of his lips slightly rose before they instantly went back down.
Cale heard a welcomed voice in his mind at that moment.

 It’s been a while. You unlucky bastard, it must be hard acting like a little kid.

There was gold powder faintly spreading around the Forest of Darkness so that the
enemies would not notice.
The gold light that matched ancient Dragon Eruhaben's hair was starting to cover the
forest.

Count Mock started to shout.

“Everybody, move according to the plan! Squad 1 to the north! Squad 2 to the east!
Squad 3 to the west and squad 4 will move toward the castle from the south with me!
Move now! This is a fight against time!”

Cale quietly observed Count Mock who was walking into a Tiger's den, no, multiple
Dragons’ lairs with his own two feet.
Count Mock who had been heading toward the forest turned around before leaving
with Squad 4.

“Vice Commander!”

“Yes, Commander-nim!”

“You lead Squad 3.”

“Please leave it to me.”

Squad 3 consisted of Cale, the Vampire warriors, and the Vampire Knights.

“Guide!”

Alberu walked up to Count Mock and handed him four maps at his calling.
Mock handed those maps to the squad leaders leading the squads heading to the
north, east, and west.

“Everybody remembers the details of the plan?”

“Yes, sir!”

“Yes, sir!”

Count Mock made eye contact with each person responsible for a squad before saying
one thing.

“Vice Commander.”

Cale raised his hand at Mock's calling.

Three nimble-looking Vampires stepped forward.

Mock looked over them before nodding his head.

"They are informants and people who have each been to the Forest of Darkness at
least once.”

He motioned with his hand and the three Vampires moved so that one of them was
with Squad Leaders 1, 2, and 3.
Alberu moved next to Count Mock and Squad 4 at the same time.

Mock finally turned back around.

“Let’s go.”

Squad 4 that was made of Dark Elves headed toward the south side of the Black Castle.

“We will be on our way, sir.”

“See you soon, Commander.”

The noble awaiters who were serving as Squad Leaders for Squads 1 and 2 showed
the map to their respective Vampire informants and quickly started to move as well.

“Time for us to go too.”

Squad 3 that Cale was leading started to move toward the west side of the Black Castle
as well.

Cale made eye contact with Alberu Crossman who turned around and looked at him
before he left.

‘See you in a bit.’

‘Yes, your highness.’

The two of them communicated with a short eye greeting.

 I'll look after Alberu Crossman too.

Cale nodded his head after hearing Eruhaben’s voice and started to move toward the
west side of the Black Castle.
Shhhhhhh- shhhhhhh-

Squad 3 started to move while matching Naru’s movements.

“Everybody should have started moving by now.”

Cale changed directions as soon as he heard Solena's voice.

“We are heading north.”

He was going back the way he came even though his Squad 3 was responsible for the
west side.

Swiiiiiish- Swiiiiiiiish-

His ancient powers had been hidden thanks to Fredo's armband, but the Sound of the
Wind now swirled at the tip of his feet.
Although this power did not suit young master Naru-nim, no Vampires questioned this
right now.

Shhhhhhhhhhhhhh-

The Vampires silently followed behind Cale.

The slightly over 100 Vampires all headed north.
Cale served as their guide in the front.

Shhhhh- shhhhhhh-

They brushed past branches and bushes and immediately turned north once they
returned to the place they had teleported to.

Cale started to speak once they were following behind Squad 1.

“Come out.”

Shhh.

One of the large trees started to shake.

Boom!
Cale turned his head after hearing a loud noise.

“Welcome, young master-nim.”

Tiger shaman Gashan welcomed him.

Crunch. Crunch.

The large Tiger warriors slowly raised their heads from the shadows of the trees along
with the sound of crunching leaves.

‘Mm!’

Solena had heard about this, but her hands still became sweaty after looking into the
eyes of the Tiger warriors who had been hiding.

‘It's starting now.’

She tensed up after realizing that the true plan was starting.
She was excited as well.

Cale started to speak.

“The Dark Elves’ Elementals have headed south with Squad 4.”

The Elementals that Count Mock's subordinates controlled…

Those Elementals were said to eat other Elementals.

“So this is our chance.”

The golden top's whip was in Cale's hand.

‘Just tell me what to do. Chaos, destruction, happiness.’

‘It’s been a while! I've been so bored ever since you told me to wait in the Forest of
Darkness!’

‘Sigh. It was so hard hiding from the Dark Elves’ Elementals.’

Caw. Caw.
Cale lifted his head.

The three Wind Elementals and the crows started to appear one or two at a time and
started to cover the sky above the Forest of Darkness.

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“The operation name is ‘Hunt.’ ”

He ordered the first step of the operation.

“We will capture Squad 1 first.”

Squad 1's leader was swordsman Andrei who was said to be one of the strongest of
the noble awaiters.

“Move.”

The Vampires and Tigers started to move north.

Their movements were swift but stealthy.

Squad 3 started to chase behind Squad 1.

Squad 1's leader, swordsman Andrei.

"Squad leader-nim, it is to the left.”

“Okay.”

He followed the Vampire informant and turned left with a faint smile on his face.

‘Soon!’

He was one of the top noble awaiters.

He was lacking in comparison to the original nobles, but he was skilled enough to be
able to receive the best treatment if he had gone to any other organization.
This was because he was a sword master.
Ooooooooong-

His sword started to vibrate.

A faint aura smoke started to appear.

“Congratulations.”

He looked back for a moment after hearing a voice right behind him.
Another noble awaiter was smiling as he sucked up to him.

“What do you mean?”

Andrei looked stern as if to ask the person who spoke what they were talking about in
the middle of the plan.
The person who spoke smiled even brighter after seeing his expression.

"Aw come on, you know exactly what I mean, sir.”

“Ahem.”

Andrei let out a fake cough and turned around.

“…Please keep the useless chatter for later.”

“I'm only saying it because we are on our own now.”

Andrei peeked toward the Vampire informant after hearing that. It was his way of
telling the other person that they were not ‘on our own,’ with this Vampire here.

“Ah.”

The other noble awaiter finally closed his mouth.

However, he still smiled wickedly toward Andrei.

He was not the only one.

Andrei's subordinates, as well as the 24 noble awaiters who made up his squad, all
had bright expressions.

‘Hehe. It’s not like I don’t understand why he feels that way.’
Andrei understood the other awaiter quite well.

The Black Castle destruction plan.

The plan was to destroy the castle while Cale Henituse and his core group of friends
were not around and take the people inside as hostages.

‘It won't be easy.’

Even without Cale Henituse and the core individuals, the chances that Cale Henituse
left the castle empty because there were enough defenses set up were high.
That was why he thought that the difficulty of the plan would be considered high
between high, medium, and low.

‘But it is not so dangerous that I might die.’

That was what was making the members of Squad 1 all have bright expressions.
This was especially true for Andrei, who was full of anticipation.

If this plan was a success…

‘I should receive a noble title if we succeed.’

He was a squad leader after all.

He had to temporarily become Count Mock's subordinate because of it, but he wasn’t
planning on quietly staying there.

Andrei composed his expression and started to speak.

“Everybody focus!”

“Yes, sir!”

He then gave an order to the informant.

“We are increasing our speed.”

He was planning on quickly getting to the discussed location and surrounding the
Black Castle.

Andrei's desires were almost overflowing.

“Yes, sir. I will increase my speed!”

The informant quickly moved with the map in his hand.

Andrei followed behind him as well.

“Ugh!”

The informant's body suddenly fell forward at that moment.

"What is it?”

Andrei looked toward the informant in shock.

“M, my foot-!”

The informant reached for his ankle with a shocked expression.

“…Huh?”

Andrei’s eyes opened wide.

He saw a gold rope that shot out of the ground and grabbed the Vampire informant’s
ankle.

"A rope?”

‘Is this one of Cale Henituse's traps?’

His back suddenly turned cold as he had that thought.

‘No.’

He felt as if something was clenching him from all directions.

That was why he realized it.

‘This is not just a simple trap!’

He turned away from the Vampire who was still on the ground clenching his ankle.

He happened to see something land on his arm at that moment.

Andrei had been quickly charging forward until now. That was why he had not noticed
it earlier.

That thing had landed on the back of his hand silently and so gently that he didn't even
feel it.

“…Powder?”

Gold powder was surrounding him and the rest of Squad 1.

The amount of powder started to exponentially increase.

‘This is dangerous! I can tell that this is very dangerous!’

Andrei shouted as soon as he felt that way.

“…Dodge! Step back!”

He tried to move back as he shouted.

The gold powder.

He couldn’t tell what it was, but his intuition as someone who just barely made it past
the hump to become a sword master was telling him that this was a dangerous
situation.

But it was already too late.

“Ugh!”

“Ugh! My body!”

“Ahhh!”

The powder instantly gathered together and increased in size.

It then started to bind the bodies of Squad 1's members.

“N, no!”

“I can’t move my body!”

The shining golden rope was too strong to be a regular rope.

It was hard for them to even twist their bodies.

“Ugh! How is this so strong?!”

Andrei's body had been bound before he could even take out his sword.
It was so quick that he couldn't even dodge.

‘Is it a trap?’

That was not it.

He quickly got rid of the thought that these ropes were traps that Cale had left behind.

‘This is someone attacking us.’

This power had accurately aimed for all of them.

That was only possible if someone was looking at them right now.

There was also something else he realized.

‘This person is strong.’

He was able to become the squad leader because he was a sword master, but most of
Squad 1's members were quite strong as well.
There were mages in the group too, but this enemy had tricked all of them and had
instantly suppressed them.

Andrei started to sweat.

He held back his fear and raised his voice.

“Who are you?! Who dares to ambush us like this?!”

He looked around and raised his voice.

His hand was doing everything it could to get free and reach for his scabbard.

‘If I can just get my sword out!’

He could just slash away this stupid rope with his aura if he could pull his sword out.

It was at that moment.

“Where are you looking?”

Andrei heard a foreign voice.

“You should raise your head.”

Flinch.

Andrei's shoulders flinched before he looked up.

He could see an Elf sitting on top of a thick branch on a tree.

The beautiful Elf with white-gold hair started to smile.

“You wish to return alive after stepping into a Dragon’s lair?”

‘What? A Dragon’s lair?’

Andrei was definitely looking at an Elf, but his whole body felt chilly after looking into
the Elf’s eyes.

It was at that moment.

“Hmm. How disappointing.”

He heard a voice behind him.

Andrei slowly raised his head.

It was a familiar voice.

‘Whose voice is this?’

He soon remembered the owner of this voice.

He was confused because the way the person was speaking was completely different
than normal, but he remembered.

‘…Young master Naru Von Ejellan!’

They were allies.

His head that had been slowly turning quickly turned in joy about seeing an ally before
he could even question why Naru was here.
Naru was smiling and approaching him.

He opened his mouth to speak.

He didn't sound like the pure and brave boy who just wanted to get revenge for his
father. It was a cold voice that reached Andrei's ear.

“This is very disappointing.”

Naru was disappointed.

The boy's gaze headed toward the white-gold haired Elf sitting on the tree branch.

“How can you attack first like that, sir?”

‘…What?’

Andrei's questioned his ears for a moment.

However, that suspicion soon returned with a clear answer.

Naru looked at him and started to smile.

“I was supposed to get him first.”

Grrrrr-

Squad 1 quickly heard the roars of wild beasts surrounding them.

Crunch. Crunch.

However, the things that came out through the bushes were the Beast men of the Tiger
tribe who were much scarier than wild beasts.
Berserk Tigers completely surrounded them.

“What the hell!”

Andrei looked back and Naru and started to shout.

“Young master Naru! What the hell are you doing? Did you betray us?”

However, Naru did not respond.

Someone else responded in his place.

“Betray? How can you say such upsetting things?”

“…Who are you?!”

One of the Vampire knights who had been standing behind Cale walked forward.
The Vampires bowed their heads and made a path for him.

The knight removed the helmet on his head.

“You should know my face, right?”

“Uhh, uhh!”

Andrei could not continue speaking because he was shocked.

“H, how are you here?!”

Smile.

Duke Fredo was smiling after seeing his reaction.

Andrei could not believe what he was seeing.

“Y, you were supposed to be in a coma-”

He could not even finish his sentence.

‘Why is Duke Fredo here?!’

He had heard from young master Naru that Duke Fredo's condition was so serious that
nobody other than the healers could approach him.

But how was he seeing a completely fine Duke Fredo in front of him right now?

“You were in a coma!”

Andrei’s tone did not show any respect for the Duke.

That was how shocked he was right now.

This was true for all of Squad 1. None of them could speak properly due to their shock.

Fredo started to smile.

“Mm, that’s right. I was in a coma and woke up not too long ago.”

“What total nonsense!”

‘How was he here if he woke up not too long ago?!’

Andrei looked toward Fredo in disbelief.

He then made eye contact with Fredo. Fredo's gaze made him subconsciously shut up
while Fredo started to speak in a calm voice.
“Yes, it makes no sense. But you have to believe it because I am telling you that that is
the case.”

The Duke’s face turned cold.

Now that his lazy and bored expression was gone, all that was left was an emotionless
and cold face.

“Andrei, it would be best if you accept the situation without thinking nor saying
anything.”

Gulp.

Andrei subconsciously gulped.

He wanted to step away, but that was not easy because he was bound.

He quickly looked at Duke Fredo, who was walking toward him, as well as his
surroundings.

He finally started to understand what was going on.

He was a sword master.

That was not a level that could be reached through training alone.

He had been involved in numerous battles, large and small alike, and could come up
with a conclusion in his head.

“…Duke, did you decide to cooperate with Cale Henituse?”

The answer was obvious as soon as the Tigers had appeared in front of Andrei.

The story about how the Tiger tribe lived close to the Forest of Darkness and served
Cale was a famous story.

“Hehe.”

Andrei started to laugh.

“No wonder. I knew that there was no way that this kind of plan would come from that
old Count Mock's head.”

He recalled when he decided to follow Count Mock for this plan.

‘I plan on using Naru Von Ejellan. That is why there are no benefits to stick on Duke
Fredo's side for this operation.’

‘What do you mean by that, sir?’

‘Naru Von Ejellan is my informant. He’s perfect to use.’

He gazed past Naru and focused on Duke Fredo.

“You used your son to plot all of this.”

Andrei's shoulders started to move up and down.

The shock and disbelief were making him laugh.

“Kahaha, hahaha-”

However, his laughter could not continue.

“Ugh!”

His neck was instantly clenched by a Vampire.

“Sorry, things might get complicated if you let out any loud noises.”

He could see Solena who was smiling while clenching his neck. Duke Fredo's trusted
subordinate. She was clenching Andrei's life away.

"Solena, let him go.”

“Yes, Duke-nim.”

Solena instantly let go of her hand that was clenching Andrei’s’ neck.

Boom-! Boom-!
Andrei's body that was bound by the rope tilted to the side and fell to the ground.

“Ugh!”

Andrei who fell sideways could see a pair of shoes walking past his face.

He raised his head to see young master Naru looking down at him.

However, Naru then looked away from him and walked forward.

“Y, you bastards-!”

Andrei subconsciously started to speak.

Actually, he was shouting.

"What do you plan to do with us?!”

He looked around as he shouted.

Cale Henituse.

If Duke Fredo cooperated with him, then he should be somewhere nearby.

He could see a pair of shoes stopping in front of him.

“Please be quiet.”

He raised his head. Young master Naru was looking down at him with a nonchalant
gaze.

The Cale he was looking for was right in front of him, but he did not recognize Cale.

He just saw a new side to a boy he thought was just an innocent kid.

The boy said something else in a stoic voice.

“You'll be the first to die if you're loud.”

The boy started to smile.

“You can’t talk as you please in someone else’s yard.”

He then looked away.

“Father, shall we go?”

Fredo put the helmet back on.

“Sure. Is Squad 2 next?”

“Yes it is, Duke-nim.”

The Vampires walked past Squad 1's members and headed toward Squad 2 at Solena’s
response.

‘What is going to happen to us?’

Andrei's pupils started to shake as he watched them walk away without any hesitation.

He soon got his answer. That was why his shoulders started to shake again.

“Even a sword master should find it hard to break through these ropes.”

A large shadow appeared above him.

Andrei could see the old Tiger Shaman who was looking down and smiling at him.

However, that smile instantly disappeared and Tiger shaman Gashan started to speak.

“Move all of them.”

The Tigers approached Squad 1's members.

‘…How could this be?’

Andrei watched them with despair.

He never expected it to end like this without even being able to do anything!
Not only that, but he was also captured by the enemies and backstabbed by his allies!
‘Why the hell is this so hard to untie?!’

He could not undo the ropes.

He realized the secrets behind the rope after thinking about the whole situation.

‘…It’s a Dragon.’

This rope must have been made by the Dragon that is always around Cale Henituse.

He lifted his head up.

The white gold haired Elf who should have been on the tree had disappeared.

“Alright then, shall we go too, Mr. Squad Leader?”

His body was easily lifted by a Tiger warrior.

Caw, caw.

The crows were in the sky looking down at the entire Forest of Darkness.

‘I'm screwed.’

Andrei's then lowered his head.

He had to worry about his life now.

Count Mock started to speak while hiding his body within the shadows of the forest.

“Is it here?”

The person standing next to him responded.

“Yes, sir. This is it.”

Mock nodded his head at Alberu Crossman's response and looked north.
He started to frown after reaching the southern side of the Black Castle.

“…I hate to say this about the enemy, but it is amazing.”

His voice was full of admiration.

‘Seriously, it is amazing.’

This was true for Alberu as well.

He touched the mask that covered his nose to his forehead as he observed the Black
Castle in front of him.

‘He said that it was the last Dragon Lord’s castle, right?’

Count Mock quietly mumbled as Alberu was recalling the information he had heard
from Cale.

“I guess the Roan Kingdom really is nothing without Cale Henituse! They built this
kind of castle for a twenty years old or so little kid who hasn't even received a noble
title!”

Count Mock's face started to twist.

Anybody would be able to tell that he was jealous of Cale Henituse.

“Hmph! This castle looks even more stylish than Alberu Crossman's palace. The crown
prince leaves him alone even while knowing about this? The kingdom seems to be a
total mess.”

Alberu’s gaze turned cold as he looked at him.

‘…This bastard.’

Mock didn’t realize Alberu’s gaze as he sneered and glared at the Black Castle.

“Hmph! It doesn't matter since Cale Henituse will lose this castle today without being
able to do anything. Kehehe.”

Wicked laughter started to flow out of his mouth.

“It’s a shame to destroy it.”

‘Should I take it for myself?’

Count Mock's eyes were full of greed.

Alberu naturally knew this was the case.

‘…What a crazy bastard.’

Alberu’s gaze turned even colder as he looked at Mock.

Count Mock did not realize this as he started to speak.

“Have the other squads contacted you?”

“Not yet-”

Beeeeeep!

Alberu heard a quiet noise in his pocket as he was about to respond.

It was loud enough for Mock and the other Dark Elves in front with them to hear.

Alberu looked toward Mock with a stiff expression.

“We have, sir.”

Beeeee-, beeeeeeep!

He heard two more noises as well.

“Looks like the other three squads are all here.”

“Yes, sir.”

“Take out the video communication device.”

Alberu immediately took the video communication device out of his pocket.
“None of them are emergency signals, right?”

Alberu sternly shook his head at Mock's question.

"The first to arrive was Squad Leader 1 followed by Squad 3 and Squad 2.”

“I see.”

Mock sighed in relief internally.

‘I'm relieved.’

He looked calm on the outside, but he was actually extremely tense as this plan was
very important for his future.

That was why he had been very concerned that something would happen to the other
squads on their way to their spots.

But thankfully, everybody had arrived at their spots safely.

‘It’s time for the next step.’

Mock turned toward informant Bob and praised Naru.

“Your liege gave me very good information.”

Unlike how he had stealthily received the map from Naru in front of the Endable
Kingdom's white castle, he had openly taken the map from Naru once they got to the
Forest of Darkness.

He had also used the Vampire informants without any issues.

‘Everybody here is on my side.’

He had not clearly explained things to everyone other than Andrei, but he had shown
everyone that Naru was working with him.

He showed them that they shared information with one another.

‘This way, they will think that I have influence with the Ejellan Duchy as well.’
Mock hid his wicked thoughts to himself as he gave Bob an order.

“Connect the Vice Commander right away if he calls.”

“Yes, sir. I under-”

Wiiiiiiiiiiiiing-

It was a different noise than before.

“It’s young master Naru-nim.”

“Connect him.”

A black mage who had been standing with the Dark Elves walked forward and connected
the video communication device in Alberu's hand.

Alberu held the video communication device with both hands as he turned the screen
toward Count Mock.

 Commander-nim.

Naru’s face appeared.

 We are here.

Shhhhhhhhhhhhhh-

The trees surrounding the Black Castle shook because of the wind at that moment.

Count Mock looked toward the north, east, and west.

They must all be hiding properly, as he could not see them.

“Vice Commander.”

 Yes, sir.

Mock continued to speak to Naru with a serious expression.

“Get started.”

 I understand.

Naru’s voice sounded determined.

 Our Vampires will create a path first.

Mock had almost laughed after hearing that.

‘He truly is still young.’

He had given Naru and Squad 3 the privilege of attacking first.

The justification was simple.

It was his chance at revenge and a chance to be approved as the leader.

Everything had to do with those two reasons.

It was Naru’s chance to be in the front to attack the enemy and get revenge for his
father, which would allow him to be accepted as the future leader of the Ejellan Duchy
if they could take down the Black Castle with him fighting in the front.

‘But there are no benefits to being in the front for a plan like this.’

It was better to wait in the back and take the sweetest fruits of the battle.

Mock thought that it was really easy to handle this kid as he started to speak.

However, his expression was serious, unlike his inner thoughts.

“Go ahead. I will continue the attack as soon as you open a path.”

 Yes, sir.

“Duke Fredo will be happy to hear about your courage once he wakes up.”

 Thank you for your kind words. Then I will get started right away.
The call ended.

Mock's heart was beating fast.

It was his chance to achieve great merits.

He raised his hand.

Mock started to speak once the hidden Dark Elves saw his hand.

“Move the Elementals as soon as Squad 3 starts their attack. We will deliver our orders
through the Elementals.”

Ooooooo-

They started to hear quiet cries around them.

The Dark Elves were summoning the Elemental-eating Elementals.

As Alberu observed everything that was going on…

"They started!”

Count Mock shouted energetically as a large mana orb appeared on the west.

‘Count-nim, there is a shield surrounding the Black Castle. We suspect it is a shield

spell that can handle a set amount of damage, so our Vampires will use as many magic
scrolls as necessary to destroy it.”

‘Is that so?’

‘Yes, sir. That will signal the start of the attack.’

He heard a voice from the western forest at that moment.

“Go!”

It was Naru’s voice.

Count Mock stood up.

"Get ready.”

The moment he said that…

Ooooooong-

The large mana orb became even larger.

‘That thing is huge!’

He didn’t know that such a large mana orb could even be cast with a magic scroll.

Mock was shocked.

But he also realized that the Ejellan Duchy’s wealth was immense.

He then sneered at Naru who wasted that immense wealth on a mana orb like this.

‘Stupid fool who only does things to benefit others.’

The corners of Mock's lips went up.

He heard informant Bob's voice at that moment.

“Shall we go?”

He didn't even turn his head.

Screeeech-

It was because the Black Castle's gate was opening.

“No. The enemies seem to have noticed our attack. We will wait for now.”

“…Really? We’re going to wait?”

‘Hmm?’

Mock flinched at Bob's voice.

It was at that moment.

“Ugh!”

“Commander-nim!”

“Count-nim!”

Mock groaned as he felt his body being lifted up.

“Ugh, ugh. You bastard, this, cough!”

He couldn't breathe because someone was choking him.

His eyes opened wide as he looked at the person choking him.

Informant Bob was looking at him.

“How dare you speak so informally to me? You're just an old man and not my young
master-nim.”

Mock could see the Dark Elf half-blood smiling at him as his face was burning red from
being unable to breathe.

“Only our young master-nim can speak informally to me. I am a loyal servant who only
serves our young master-nim.”

Mock could see the completely open Black Castle behind the Dark Elf half-blood's
shoulders at that moment.

Count Mock’s expression changed as he was pulling on informant Bob's hand to get it
off.

“Cough, ugh- Choi, Choi Han-!”

The Black Castle’s gate had opened and Choi Han, Cale Henituse’s knight, was walking
out.
Count Mock could not believe what he was seeing.

‘What the hell is going on?’

His mind blanked out for a moment.

Choi Han, who was said to not be at the Black Castle, had shown up.

That alone was shocking, but this Bob bastard who was said to be young master Naru’s
trusted subordinate was choking him.

He could only come up with one conclusion.

“Ugh, were we b… betrayed?”

Were the Vampire bastards and Cale Henituse working together?

That was the only plausible explanation.

Count Mock got chills throughout his body after he barely managed to get that question
out.

‘The mana orb!’

If the Vampire bastards truly had betrayed them…!

If they really were working together with Cale Henituse…!

Then it was obvious where that mana orb would go.

Ooooooong-

The mana orb then slowly headed toward the Black Castle.
Then the being that had been covered by the large mana orb was revealed.

‘…The Black Dragon!’

Cale Henituse’s black Dragon that had been hiding behind the mana orb was revealed.

“…Ah.”

Mock's head started to hurt.

If Choi Han and the black Dragon were both here…

Then Cale Henituse was bound to be here as well.

“H, how-”

He could not speak properly as he was being choked.

However, the person choking him finished his sentence for him.

“ ‘How was this possible?’ ”

Mock who had been looking at Choi Han slowly looked toward Bob who was choking
him.

Mock's eyes were asking Bob for an answer. He wanted him to quickly tell him what
was going on.

Alberu slowly responded to him.

“What good will knowing how it happened do for you, you bastard?”

Mock suddenly felt like Bob was looking down at him from above instead of looking
up from below.

It was the unique type of pressure he had felt when in the White Star's presence.

Why was he feeling that type of pressure from a damn informant?

Mock’s body shot up into the air at that moment.

“Mmph!”

He could finally breathe properly for the first time in a few minutes.

“Ugh!”

However, he was still groaning.

Swooooooosh-

A chain made of wind appeared and bound him.

Baaaaaang!

Then, there was an explosion where Count Mock and informant Bob had been standing.

‘Shit!’

Choi Han, who saw the explosion, started to run toward Alberu contrary to their
original plan.

The people who launched the attack angrily started to shout.

“Change the target!”

One of the Dark Elves stood up and pointed toward Choi Han.

A few of the Dark Elves had stealthily planned a surprise attack the moment Mock
ended up in Bob's hand.

Their attack that was aimed at Alberu was what caused the explosion.

Rustle-

Black arrows that suddenly appeared were pointed at Choi Han.

“Rescue the Count-nim!”

Some of them shot up into the air as well.

Wind was swirling at the tips of their feet.

“Count-nim!”

One of the Dark Elves in the air flew toward Count Mock.

“I'll release you right away, sir!”

Count Mock whose neck was now free started to frown.

“It’s not over yet!”

“Excuse me?”

The Dark Elves who had jumped into the air had to hear the shouts of their Elementals.

Oooooong- oooooong-

The Elementals that had created the wind at the tips of the Dark Elves feet were
warning them.

They were telling them to look down.

The Dark Elves looked down.

Once the dust from the explosion disappeared…

The masked Dark Elf was pointing a large spear toward them.

“…Magic!”

As the Dark Elves shouted in shock after looking at the large magic spear…

“Go.”

That spear started to move toward the Dark Elves.

“Dodge!”

The Dark Elves quickly moved away from Count Mock.

“Ugh!”

Count Mock could feel the current fluctuating behind him.

Crackle. Crackle.

The spear of light stopped right behind Count Mock's back.

“Count Mock's body will be filled with electricity if you try to get close again.”

The Dark Elves did not dare to approach the chained Mock after hearing Alberu’s threat.

"Also, make your Elementals stop moving. Did you really think that I wouldn’t be able
to tell that they are moving?”

The Dark Elves had no way of knowing whether Alberu was lying or telling the truth.

But the chances of this half-blood’s statement being true were high as he still had some
Dark Elf blood, so the Dark Elves could not send the Elementals around the forest as
Count Mock had ordered earlier.

“I can’t ever put my guard down.”

Alberu finally waved his hand and pushed away the dust around him.

The Dark Elf who had given the command to attack was grinding his teeth as he glared
at Alberu.

“How dare you attack one of your own race even though Dark Elven blood flows
through your body! You're attacking those on the same side!”

“Ho, my goodness.”

Alberu shook his head from side to side.

“There’s no point to even answer.”

“What?”

Alberu ignored the Dark Elf.

‘Attack my fellow race?’

How many times had the White Star and Cale's respective Dark Elves clashed already?

Why had Count Mock and these Dark Elves not said anything and continue to serve
the White Star through it all?

‘It's not because of who is a Dark Elf and who is not, it's a matter of the difference in
what each group wants.’

Alberu did not say anything else.

Clang!

Instead, Choi Han pulled out his sword and stood next to Alberu.

The Dark Elf started to frown in response.

“Ha! You're betraying your race because of the human blood inside you!”

Alberu started to frown under his mask for the first time.

“Tsk.”

Alberu clicked his tongue and observed the Dark Elves in front of him.

He could feel their hostility. Alberu started to move toward his goal in front of such
hostile enemies.

“Your liege will die if you make any movements.”

The Dark Elf who was shouting toward Alberu shut up after hearing those emotionless
words.

He sounded like someone who would do as he said.

It was at that moment.

“Let's make a deal!”

Mock shouted at the top of his lungs.

“Hooo?”

Alberu looked up at Mock as if this reaction was unexpected.

Mock ignored Alberu’s gaze and twisted his body to look at Choi Han as he continued
to speak.

“There’s nobody who would destroy the area in front of their house. That Dragon
won't use the mana orb. He won't want to burn this area down to the ground.”

Choi Han started to frown.

The Dark Elf old man Mock's eyes sparkled after seeing this reaction.

‘I knew I was right.’

That large mana orb and the black Dragon.

There was no way that that thing would really attack this spot.

There would be too much aftershock for the Black Castle and the nearby area.

‘That means that I have no reason to fear that mana orb.’

Mock's mind started to clear up.

‘There’s still a chance.’

The Vampires’ betrayal was like a sharp dagger attacking him, but it was not an
extremely dangerous attack to the point that he would die yet.

‘Squad 1 and 2 are still there.’

He still had allies to the North and East.

‘I’ll need to look for an opportunity while talking about making a deal.’

He just needed to flip this situation over when he saw an opening.

Mock immediately started to speak.

“Choi Han, deliver this message to Cale Henituse. Tell him that I want to make a deal.
I'm sure you guys don't want to fight us in front of your territory as well, right?”

He continued to speak to Choi Han who was quietly looking at him.

“No matter how strong you guys are… There are bound to be injured people if we fight.
And we will go until the very end if we start to fight.”

‘Then this area in front of the Black Castle will become a mess.’

That was the meaning behind Mock's words as he looked at Choi Han.

Choi Han responded to him.

“…Keep talking.”

Mock resumed speaking at this gesture that showed that Choi Han was willing to at
least listen to what he had to say.

“The Vampires.”

That word caused some rustling in the forest to the west.

Mock ignored that and continued to speak.

"We will return if you let us take care of the Vampires.”

“…The Vampires have agreed to cooperate with us.”

“They betrayed us to work with you. Why are you trying to fight us until the end while
tightly clutching onto them?”

It was at that moment.

“Count Mock! What nonsense are you spewing now?"

The western forest…

Solena stepped forward from the forest where Squad 3 was stationed.

The corners of Mock’s lips started to twist. Solena was the person who was serving
Naru right now and one of Duke Fredo's trusted subordinates. Mock resumed speaking
after she made her appearance.

“What do you mean by nonsense?! We are negotiating a peaceful resolution to end this
issue!”

He looked toward Choi Han.

“Choi Han. Think about it. Isn’t it beneficial for you guys if we make a deal like that?”

“I guess so. There would be no need to fight if we agreed.”

“Exactly! Furthermore, the Dark Elves and everybody on our side will all cooperate
with you guys from here on.”

Mock’s heart was beating wildly as he said that.

‘This could be extremely beneficial the more I think about it.’

He had a lot to gain between Cale Henituse and the White Star if he used this situation
properly.

If he would get past this current predicament, pretend to cooperate with Cale Henituse,
and then tell the White Star everything!

‘And if I report Duke Fredo's betrayal as well…! If I take that open Duke position for
myself……!’

Could there be a more beautiful conclusion?

Mock ordered his subordinates.

“Lower your bows now! Stop attacking!”

The arrows pointed at Choi Han instantly disappeared.

The Dark Elves quietly stood there while peeking toward Mock.
“Choi Han, I am being serious.”

Count Mock looked toward Choi Han with a serious and honest expression.

He truly wanted to make a deal.

Choi Han was quiet for a moment. He then raised his head and looked at the black
Dragon.

The black Dragon moved away from the mana orb, came down, and put his mouth by
Choi Han’s ear.

He then started to speak using magic.

 Choi Han! The human says don’t act, just repeat the words the human tells you to
say!

Raon delivered Cale’s message and Choi Han finally started to speak.

“Fine. We will gather all of the representatives.”

“Choi Han!”

Solena shouted but Choi Han did not show any reaction.

 Good job, Choi Han! The human said not to do anything!

Raon praised him and Alberu started to frown as he moved away from Choi Han.

“There’s nobody you can trust.”

Alberu raised his wariness toward Choi Han.

Choi Han started to speak again.

"Cale-nim said that he wishes to chat with the Vampire representative as well. He said
all representatives should meet to discuss a deal.”

“Damn it!”
Solena started to frown and headed back toward the western forest.

‘Kehehe, I guess she's going to get Naru.’

Count Mock started to sneer as he responded.

“We will call the leaders of Squads 1 and 2 as well!”

“Fine.”

He watched Choi Han head toward the gate to the Black Castle and then turned his
gaze over to informant Bob.

“How about you let me go?”

Informant Bob moved his hand.

The spear of light disappeared and Mock landed on the ground.

“I will not release the chains.”

However, he did not release the chains.

“You arrogant-!”

Mock started to frown but internally, he was at least happy to be back on the ground.
He then raised his voice.

“Squad 1 and 2 leaders, come on out! We are making a deal!”

Rustle, rustle.

There was movement in the eastern and northern parts of the forest.

It was the sign that Squads 1 and 2 which were hiding and waiting were starting to
move.

Squad 1's leader Andrei and Squad 2's leader should come out soon.

‘One is a sword master while the other is a talented assassin.’

Mock's eyes had a wicked glare to them.

‘If the negotiation goes bad, then I'll use the two of them to capture Cale Henituse.’

He would take Cale Henituse hostage while everybody had their guards down.

A clear plan started to form in Mock’s mind.

Screeeech-

The Black Castle’s gate started to open wider than before.

Rustle, rustle.

He continued to hear footsteps coming through the forest.

Mock could feel his plan slowly starting to become completed.

‘I will turn this around.’

He would definitely flip this situation around.

Mock confirmed these thoughts as he relaxed his tense shoulders.

“I guess I have to come out since they asked for all representatives.”

It was at that moment.

‘Huh?’

Mock who was starting to relax had to question his ears.

Step. Step.

Mock looked to the west after hearing footsteps.

“…How-”

He could see the person walking out of the western forest.

It was the person who represented Squad 3 and the Vampires.

This person should have been Naru Von Ejellan, but…

“Why, why is Duke Fredo-?”

“What’s wrong? Is there a reason I can't come out?”

Fredo was walking forward while wearing armor.

Choi Han started to walk back out of the castle as well.

“Ugh!”

“Ugh!”

Mock heard some suppressed groans.

Mock did not dare to look toward Choi Han. He felt chills on his back. He felt as if there
were goosebumps all over his body.

“…C, Count-nim!”

“My apologies, sir! Ugh!”

However, he had to turn after hearing someone calling out to him.

“Squad 1 and 2 leaders are here.”

However, what he saw were the two squad leaders who were bound and carried out
by Choi Han.

Their titles of sword master and assassin seemed laughable right now.

If they were here, then what were the noises he heard coming from the east and north?

Mock looked toward the north and east.

“Hohoho. I guess I will come out as the representative since I am a resident here as
well.”
“Do you think I'm a representative too?”

Gashan walked out of the northern part while laughing out loud. As for the east side…
Lock walked out while scratching his head with an embarrassed expression.

“Ah……”

Mock felt as if all of blood was draining from his body.

However, the most important representative had not come out yet.

“The last representative is coming out.”

Mock started to think about Cale Henituse after Choi Han said that.

However, he heard an unfamiliar voice instead.

“You dare to set your eyes on our house?”

Mock turned after hearing a woman’s voice.

He looked toward the Black Castle… And saw a white-haired woman flying up above it.

“How laughable that you tried to destroy my home.”

Lord Sheritt landed on the highest spot on the Black Castle and opened her arms.

“A deal? I do not negotiate with the enemies. I only destroy those who try to attack
me.”

Oooooo- oooooo-

Hundreds of white shields started to appear in the air.

Mock's face turned pale.

“W, where is C, Cale Henituse?”

He subconsciously turned toward Choi Han.

But someone else answered his question.

“He…”

Fredo started to laugh as he recalled what happened a few moments ago.

‘I'm heading out then.’

‘Goodbye, my son.’

Fredo continued to speak while looking at the confused Count Mock.

“He went to our house.”

“The preparations are completed, young master-nim.”

"Solena, isn’t it confusing to call me that when I don’t look like Naru anymore?”

“I guess I just got used to calling you young master-nim, Cale-nim.”

Cale nodded at Solena and looked out the window.

“How energetic.”

He could see the vibrant Endable Kingdom’s capital excited for the festival.

“Eruhaben, shall we go?”

“Yes.”

“Miss Rosalyn, you too.”

“Of course.”

Eruhaben and Rosalyn covered their faces with their hoods and walked up next to
Cale.

Sparkle sparkle.
The video communication device in Cale’s hand started to glow and then he heard
someone’s voice.

 All preparations are completed.

Cale motioned to Rosalyn with his eyes and Rosalyn walked up to Cale in order to turn
the video communication device off.

Cale observed the screen as she did that.

‘This should be enough.’

He saw Bud, numerous mercenaries, and his friends who were at the Molden Kingdom
through the screen.

"See you guys soon.”

The call ended after Cale said that.

“Let’s go out.”

Solena opened Fredo's bedroom door once Cale said that.

Operation Hunt’s second step had started.

The white castle that was located at the center of the sinkhole and the only place that
received direct sunlight in the Endable Kingdom.

The White Star who was looking out from the highest point in that castle started to
speak.

“Looks like everyone is enjoying themselves.”

He then turned and looked toward a video communication device.

 My liege!

Dark Elf Count Mock was visible on the screen with a stiff expression on his face.

He seemed to be in a section of the forest as he started to speak in a low but confident

voice.

 It looks like we will be able to conquer Cale Henituse's base soon!

“You’re working hard.”

Count Mock was still busy looking around him rather than at the White Star as he
continued to speak.

 We don’t see the Tigers here, as I confirmed in my information.

“I see.”

The White Star noticed that Count Mock was not saying anything and just quietly
looking at him after hearing his reaction.

The White Star laughed internally seeing the slightly nervous and desperate gaze.
‘I guess he really wants me to approve of his merits.’

The White Star held back a sigh as he started to speak with a serious expression.

“Work hard. I trust you.”

 T, thank you very much!

Count Mock did his best to smile before bowing to the White Star.

“Then I'm hanging up now.”

 …Yes, sir.

The video communication device was immediately turned off.

The White Star looked toward the deactivated video communication device and started
to speak.

“His face was quite stiff.”

Chief Priest Marquis Gersey who had been in the corner started to smile.

“He is probably nervous about achieving great merits and moving up to a higher
position, my lord.”

“I guess that’s true. Count Mock is extremely greedy for title and power.”

The White Star started to shake his head.

“He needs to be more relaxed.”

He then looked toward the Chief Priest.

“Gersey, how about you relax a bit too? You can’t have any fun just staying here. Why
don't you go out and enjoy the festival?”

“That’s okay, sire. I can't really relax and enjoy the festival right now.”

“I guess that’s true. You and your people are extremely busy right now.”
Each demonic temple had to hand out a lot of things to the citizens during the festival.

Furthermore, many of the citizens came to visit the temples and look around.

That was why the priests were busier than usual right now.

Gersey started to speak after seeing the White Star’s gaze that seemed to be asking if
it was okay that he was here when it was such a busy time.

“I left the festival-related tasks with the Deputy Chief Priest so that I can slack off like
this.”

“Ha! The Deputy Chief Priest will be upset if she hears that.”

“Hahaha, do you think so, sire? But I'm just so full of anticipation. I can't focus on
anything else right now.”

Gersey smiled brightly.

“I am extremely looking forward to the true day of the festival.”

The White Star’s gaze sunk down.

Gersey looked at him and continued to speak.

“The last day.”

The last day of the festival.

“That day will be a festival for me.”

Pfft.

The White Star chuckled at Gersey's comment.

“Gersey, half the people here will die. Is that entertaining?”

“But that means that you will be that much closer to becoming a transcended being,
my liege.”
The two of them looked at each other and their smiles became thicker.

The White Star started to speak again in a low voice.

“ ‘Those things’ are safe, right?”

“Yes, sir. They’re fine.”

"And their feed?”

“We are feeding them properly. I do need to go feed them again in an hour though.”

Gersey continued to speak with an expression that seemed to be saying that he was
extremely fidgety from excitement.

“I can’t do it, sire. I must go check on the ‘feed.’ Those terrible things cause such a
ruckus when we don't feed them and they are very scary to look at.”

“Aren't you usually the type to follow the rules?”

The White Star looked at Gersey as if this was odd.

Gersey was the type who was always strict about being on time and following the
rules.

He would normally move according to the schedule.

“I'm not sure. I can’t sit still today because I'm so excited. It must be because the
moment I’ve been waiting for is one step closer, my lord.”

The White Star chuckled.

“That is called being capricious.”

“Is that so, sire?”

“That’s right. You are being capricious. Mm, I feel bad for making you take care of the
feed. It must be hard.”

“It is doable as I am doing it with my trusted subordinates instead of alone. Plus, who
else can do it other than me? I have to do it.”

Gersey walked to the door and bowed.

“My liege, please excuse me as I go check on the feed and go underground prior to
returning.”

“Sure.”

“Until later then, my liege.”

Gersey quietly opened the door and disappeared.

Silence filled the area now that the White Star was alone.

The White Star continued to look out the window once Gersey left.

It was pretty empty around the palace.

However, he could see the citizens of the kingdom enjoying the festival in all directions.

“Hmm.”

Their excited faces did not bring any joy to the White Star.

It wasn’t as if he could feel or taste anything anyway.

A smile appeared on his face.

“It’ll soon be hell for them.”

The White Star started to imagine his kingdom that will turn into hell.

It would be a glorious step toward the future he desired.

At that moment, in the Roan Kingdom's Forest of Darkness…

Pat. Pat.
Count Mock turned toward the hand patting his shoulder.

“Good job.”

Informant Bob was smiling warmly.

Choi Han who was standing behind Bob started to speak to Alberu who was still Bob.

“Let's go in.”

“Yes, yes. We have a lot of things to do.”

Alberu sounded gentle as he started to speak to Mock again.

“Shall we go?”

Mock started to frown.

Alberu slowly whispered to him.

“Respond.”

“…Yes, sir.”

“Ah, I only feel relaxed when people speak respectfully to me.”

Alberu laughed and picked Count Mock up by grabbing the back of his collar.

‘This evil bastard! Does he not know anything about respecting his elders?!’

Mock looked away from Alberu in disgust. It was a small gesture to say that he did not
want to speak to this bastard who was drying out the Dark Elf blood.

Of course, there was nobody here who respected his desires.

Cale was looking at an old house he visited once before at that moment.

“…He was telling the truth. I guess everything Duke Fredo said was true.”
He approached the woman who was truly wowed to see him.

“You are the Deputy Chief Priest?”

“Yes, I'm Deputy Chief Priest Cotton.”

Cotton offered her hand.

“I'm sorry, I don't dare to grab the enemy’s hand even if we are working together.”

“Is that so?”

She smiled at Cale’s response and lowered her hand.

She licked her lips with her tongue as she did that.

‘Fredo. That Vampire really does his job properly.’

Cale Henituse was next to Solena who brought him here.

Cotton could also see two people behind him who were covered from head to hip with
a robe.

She was looking at them while trying to figure out who they were.

“Enough observing. Shouldn't we get to work?”

She could see Cale's stoic gaze looking down at her.

‘So, this guy is the one who has been giving the White Star the most trouble? Should I
try casting an illusion on him?’

As Cotton had that thought…

“I think we’ve shown enough trust on our side by ignoring the illusion cast on this
place. What are you suspicious about that you keep observing us like that?”

“……!”

Cotton's eyes opened wide.

‘He realized that there is an illusion?’

However, Cotton was truly shocked at what Cale said next.

“I wish to rescue the Ranger Brigade members as well.”

“…How did you know about that? Did Duke Fredo tell you?”

“Do I need to have heard that from that bastard?”

Cale’s expression was saying that he didn’t need to hear from such a bastard to know
that.

‘I saw them with my own eyes instead of hearing it from Fredo. You showed them to
me yourself.’

He walked past Cotton who was looking at him in shock, crouched down, and tapped
on the ground.

Tang. Tang.

It sounded empty inside.

“I knew this spot seemed weird. I can sense people underground over here.”

Cotton kept her mouth shut.

She didn’t trust everything Cale was saying.

‘Duke Fredo must have told him about it.’

The fact that he knew the exact spot must mean that he knew about it prior to coming
here.

She quietly sighed.

“You can rescue them on the way back from destroying the facility. It's impossible to
move so many people even if you rescue them now.”

“But I don't want to.”

“Huh?”

“I'm going to save them now.”

The people standing behind Solena removed their hoods as Cotton started to frown at
Cale's response.

Cotton's eyes opened wide.

“…Rosalyn! The ancient Dragon!”

The person and Dragon whom even she knew about as they were individuals of
interest revealed themselves.

Cotton immediately read Cale's thoughts.

“…Are you going to teleport them away?”

“Yes.”

“…I understand. We will rescue the Ranger Brigade members as you wish, however!”

Cotton continued to speak with a stiff expression.

"We need to get in and destroy it within the hour. Gersey is going to head to the
underground facility in one hour.”

“I got it. It won’t take long.”

“……Okay.”

She opened the door leading into the underground hideout after seeing Cale’s
extremely relaxed demeanor.

“The Ranger Brigade members are down here.”

“Thanks.”

Cotton had an odd expression after hearing Cale thank her, but Cale did not notice as
he followed behind Cotton down into the underground area. Solena was behind him
while Rosalyn and Eruhaben came behind her.

Bang, baaaaang! Bang!

Unlike last time, the underground area was loud as soon as he walked down.

“You evil bastards! Let us go!”

“Damn it! These chains won't come off!”

The Ranger Brigade members who saw Cotton through the bars were shouting in
anger.

“What the f*ck are you planning to do?!”

“How long are you going to keep us here?!”

They did not hesitate to bare their fangs at Cotton, unlike last time.

It was because it was weird.

She had not responded and continued to feed them properly and let them rest no
matter how they reacted.

But that just made them feel even more ominous.

‘She won’t harm us for most actions.’

The Ranger Brigade members who came to that decision were raising their voices
because of the fear this weird situation brought them.

One of the members in the cage closest to the hallway shouted toward Cotton who got
closer.

“Take these off right now! We will never submit no matter what you do-uh?”

However, his voice trailed off in the end.

“Huh?”
He saw a familiar face behind Cotton.

Well, it wasn’t familiar to be accurate. However, he had heard about this person so
much from Bud that his ears almost bled and he had seen a picture of this person's
face.

He looked somewhat disrespectful and had bright red hair.

“…Hero Cale Henituse-?”

The brigade member could see the red-haired man starting to frown after hearing his
comment.

Cotton responded on his behalf.

“Yes, that hero came here for you guys.”

Silence filled the hallway.

Both the banging on the bars and the shouting had disappeared.

‘…A hero?’

Cale wanted to sigh at how the brigade member addressed him, but he held himself
back. Maybe that was the reason, but his lips were tense and his face looked stiff.

He looked around the hallway with that stiff face.

“…Ah.”

The Ranger Brigade members gasped in admiration as he looked at each of them with
a firm gaze.

‘In order to save us-’

He came to the center of the enemy territory to save them?

The hearts of the Ranger Brigade members who had lived peacefully but full of
uncertainty in these small cages started to beat wildly.
Cale started to speak at that moment.

“Deputy Chief Priest, open all of the doors. Remove their chains as well.”

It was a firm but calm voice.

However, that made the Ranger Brigade members’ hearts beat even wilder.

However, Cale was not done talking just yet.

“Eruhaben-nim, Miss Rosalyn.”

He said two names the Ranger Brigade members were familiar with and they could
see a magic circle that filled the hallway.

Ooooooong-

The air underground started to shake.

“It's connected.”

The magic circle Rosalyn cast with Eruhaben supporting her started to glow.

Paaaaat-!

A bright light filled the hallway.

“Ugh!”

“Mm.”

The Ranger Brigade members subconsciously closed their eyes after seeing the bright
light.

However, they had to quickly open their eyes again.

“What the hell? Why did these punks get so fat? Why do they look so healthy?”

They heard a voice they’ve longed to hear so much.

It was the light voice they always heard.

However, that voice was slightly shaking.

“Why do you look so shocked?”

Mercenary King Bud and Glenn had appeared together on the teleportation magic
circle and were looking at them.

“L, leader!”

“Leader-nim!”

The Ranger Brigade members’ eyes started to tear up. It was the same for Bud who
was looking at them.

‘Damn it.’

Bud bit down on his lips realizing that he was tearing up.

‘They're all healthy.’

The kidnapped Ranger Brigade members looked healthy and did not seem injured at
all.

A deep sense of relief filled Bud’s body and the ominous feeling that had been filling
his mind started to disappear.

It was at that moment.

Clap!

Cotton clapped once.

Screech- screech-

The bars imprisoning the Ranger Brigade members started to open.

Cotton took a key out of her pocket and handed it to Cale.

“You can release the chains with this key.”

Cale handed the key to Bud.

Bud grabbed Cale's hand that was holding the key with both hands.

“Thank you. I really mean it.”

He truly meant it.

“Shut up with such useless comments.”

Cale grumbled as he slowly removed his hand from Bud’s grasp.

Bud chuckled at Cale who was avoiding his gaze and lightly responded.

“Good. Then let’s quickly get the work started.”

‘Work?’

Solena walked over to the confused Cotton and handed her a document.

“There’s been a change of plans.”

“What?”

Cotton heard Bud’s voice as she responded to Solena in shock.

“I’ll bring Miss Tasha and everybody who is waiting to this spot.”

‘What? The people who are waiting? Who else was coming here?’

Cotton looked toward Cale.

She could see that Cale was smiling.

The second step of Operation Hunt was infiltration.

Tang! Tang! Tang!

The chains fell to the ground.

The Ranger Brigade members started to stretch their bodies that felt light after finally
having their chains come off.

Peek peek.

They continued to peek somewhere as they did that.

They were peeking at Deputy Chief Priest Cotton.

Flip, flip.

She was quickly flipping through the document in her hand.

Her chubby hands that were holding the document were shaking.

Tap!

She finished reading and handed the document to Solena as she turned toward Cale.

She then started to speak.

“Such crazy shit……!”

“Can a Deputy Chief Priest talk like that?”

Cale gently smiled. However, Cotton's gaze was fierce.

‘…He got it good.’

She wanted to grab Duke Fredo by the collar and shake him right now because of this
sudden change in plans.

However, it had already happened. She had no choice but to go along with this new
plan.

‘Most importantly, it’s not a bad plan.’

She looked away from Cale Henituse who had a sly expression on his face.

Cale chuckled in response and turned toward Bud.

“Let's go.”

“Okay.”

Bud walked toward Cale, Rosalyn, and Eruhaben.

“Leader?”

Bud smiled at the Ranger Brigade members who were looking at him in confusion.

Sniff sniff.

He sniffed with his nose like a dog.

“They need my power.”

Rosalyn walked past Bud and stood next to Glenn.

Bud pointed at Rosalyn.

“She’ll be taking my place.”

Rosalyn smiled and shook Glenn's hand.

She looked toward the Ranger Brigade members and Cale as she started to speak.

“We will finish all preparations so that we can move as soon as we get your signal.”
Cale slightly bowed toward her.

“I’ll leave it to you.”

“Thank you. See you later.”

Rosalyn waved her hand while Cotton's baggy priestess robe fluttered as she headed
toward the entrance of the underground hideout.

“Follow me.”

She handed priest robes to the people who followed her.

“These are my trusted subordinates’ priest robes.”

There were small markings on the shoulder of those robes.

She handed them masks and hats as well as she continued to speak.

“It should be easy changing your hair colors with magic, right?”

She was talking to Cale but her gaze was focused on Eruhaben.

Eruhaben lightly snapped his fingers.

Snap!

Cale, Bud, and Eruhaben’s appearances changed with that small snap.

They all now had the common brown hair. Of course, the shades of the hairs were all
different.

Cale brushed his light brown hair back and put the priest robe over his clothes.

Screeeech.

Deputy Chief Priest opened the door.

"We are heading to the Temple of the Demonic God. Follow me closely.”
The Deputy Chief Priest's true trusted subordinates were already waiting outside.

Cale, Bud, and Eruhaben headed to the center of those trusted subordinates.

“Let’s go.”

Cotton took the lead and the trusted subordinates followed.

Cale, who was standing at the center of the formation, looked toward the center of
Section 2.

He could see the oddly-shaped white marble temple.

That was the Temple of the Demonic God.

“I, I cannot do that!”

Count Mock shook his head with a pale expression.

However, the person standing in front of him slightly tilted his head to the side.

“Are you in a position to say that you can’t do something right now?”

“What kind of-”

“You’re dead if you can't do it.”

Smile.

The lips underneath the black half-mask smiled as beautifully as a painting.

‘This crazy-!’

Count Mock glared at Informant Bob who was smiling at him.

“Ugh!”

However, he soon groaned as the rope binding him tightened.

He then heard a firm voice behind him.

“Can't we just kill him?”

Count Mock's face turned pale.

He wasn’t afraid of the Dark Elf half-blood in front of him. This bastard was unique
because he could use magic, but that wasn’t a big obstacle for Mock.

However, he could not say the same for the woman behind his back right now.

“I just want to get rid of anything related to the White Star.”

The pressure she then gave off was even stronger than Dragon Fear.

Mock was sweating bullets because of this pressure that was focused solely on him.

“Hoo hoo. Count Mock, you look terrible.”

Mock started to frown at Duke Fredo who was smiling at him.

“…You damn traitor-”

Clang!

A sharp sword appeared in front of him.

“You talk too much. Just hurry up and answer whether it is possible or not.”

Choi Han’s sword was pointed at him.

‘Motherf*cker!’

Mock truly felt upset at this situation.

‘How did I, the great Mock, end up like this?!’

His insides felt like they were flipping over.

Nobody cared and the weakest but most heinous bastard pushed a document toward
Mock.

“Here, that’s your script.”

Alberu gently continued to speak to Count Mock who was glaring at him.

“Just report to the White Star following the script when I give you the signal later.”

“…How can I lie to my liege that I conquered this Black Castle?”

"What's wrong? It’s not that hard.”

Mock was at a loss for words at Informant Bob's response. Alberu didn’t care as he got
up and patted Count Mock's shoulder.

“You're dead if he finds out because you're so stiff like earlier. Let’s practice a lot so
that you look natural. You have to do it naturally. Got it?”

Mock’s shoulders slumped down.

Alberu left him in the room and walked out with Duke Fredo and Choi Han.

It was because Lord Sheritt said that she would watch over Mock.

The three of them walked into the next room.

Raon, who was sitting in front of a video communication device, fluttered his wings as
soon as they came in.

“The human hasn’t contacted us yet!”

This was the strategy room.

Alberu pointed to a seat in the strategy room next to Duke Fredo, who still thought
that he was actually Bob.

“Why don’t we sit down and wait?”

Alberu, Choi Han, and Fredo all sat down inside the strategy room.
They just had to wait for Cale to contact them now.

“Deputy Chief Priest-nim.”

A priest slightly bowed toward Cotton with a solemn expression.

“Please work hard a little longer as it is a tiring but happy day.”

She gently cheered on the priest whose arms were full of gifts for the citizens and
entered the Temple of the Demonic God.

Her trusted subordinates were walking right behind her.

Of course, her trusted subordinates were holding gifts and other items as well.

“Ah! Deputy Chief Priest-nim! Did everything go smoothly with what you needed to
do?”

“Of course. I brought back everything we needed.”

“Oh! I'm relieved!”

Every priest they passed talked to her or respectfully greeted her.

Cotton heard someone right behind her start to whisper.

“Amazing.”

Cotton quietly whispered with a smile.

“Shut the hell up.”

“You're quite an amazing talker, Deputy Chief Priest.”

“This much is good for the enemy.”

Cotton lightly responded to Cale who was following behind her while disguised as a
priest.
Cale was stealthily looking around rather than looking at her.

 The atmosphere here is not as evil as I had expected it would be.

He heard Eruhaben's voice in his mind. Cale nodded his head without making it look
too visible.

The Temple of a Demonic God.

This place that the Chief Priest was said to take special care to maintain was pretty
empty even though it was festival time.

‘Most of them are in the garden outside the building.’

The Temple of the Demonic God had set up close to a hundred long tables in the garden
to treat the visiting citizens.

Sniff sniff.

He heard Bud sniffing behind him.

Cotton headed deeper into the Temple as Bud’s sniffing became more frequent.

“Let’s stop here.”

Cotton stopped walking.

“Those who are carrying things, deliver the goods to their respective locations. The
rest of you come with me.”

She gave orders to her trusted subordinates and over half of them started to move
elsewhere.

Cotton only took Cale's group and a few of her trusted subordinates as she walked
forward again.

 It must be over there.

Cale heard Eruhaben's voice and observed the large door in front of him.
A black door that did not fit this white building was blocking their way.

“Deputy Chief Priest-nim.”

Multiple priests stationed outside the door holding swords and spears recognized her.

“You are working hard even during a day like today.”

“Not at all. Deputy Chief Priest-nim, did you come to pray?”

Cotton nodded to the priests who were serving as the guards.

“It’s a joyous day, so I wanted to show my respects before it became busier.”

“I understand.”

The priests opened the door.

The door seemed to be so heavy that multiple people had to push it.

Screeeech-

The door slowly opened.

‘Ho-’

Cale barely managed to hold back his gasp.

‘What is that?’

In the large empty area…

There was a seriously heinous looking human sculpture on the high platform at the
center.

“Let's go in.”

Cotton walked into the area.

Cale matched the trusted subordinates’ movements as he walked in as well.

‘…It's cold in here.’

This area was cold unlike the outside.

The air in here was colder than in the other parts of the temple. That temperature and
the heinous human sculpture together gave him the chills.

Boom!

The black door closed again.

Cale turned toward the closed door. He heard Cotton’s voice at that moment.

“Nobody bothers my prayer time.”

He turned toward Cotton. Her trusted subordinates quickly walked over to the black
door and stationed themselves there as she motioned with her hand.

Clang.

Of course, they took weapons out of their pockets.

“Since this place was created, the rule is that nobody opens the door while Gersey, the
White Star, or I am praying in here.”

Smile.

Cotton started to smile.

“That was the only way for the White Star to progress with becoming a member of the
Demonic race without any disturbances. And that is going to be advantageous for us
right now.”

She finished speaking and started to head toward the sculpture.

“We are going to go underground using the hidden passage in this sculpture. Just wait
a little bit.”

Cale looked at the sculpture as he waited.

Bud walked up next to him.

“Who is that?”

“I'm not sure either.”

Eruhaben was the one who answered.

He was looking at the sculpture as if he found it odd.

“This human's face looks extremely heinous and as if he has fallen into despair. But I
cannot tell who it is.”

“Me neither. But it must be someone related to the White Star if he would create this
sculpture.”

Bud agreed with Eruhaben's assessment before turning toward Cale.

“Do you know who that is?”

He was just asking.

“Sort of.”

“…What?”

Bud, Eruhaben, and Cotton all looked toward him in shock.

“You know who that is?”

Cotton was the one with the most shocked reaction. She stopped opening the passage
and turned toward Cale in shock.

“When did you see him?”

“I have no plans on telling you, so just open the passage.”

“Ha………”

Cotton started to frown as she resumed moving the device to open the passage. It
seemed to require a special power to activate, as the ring on her finger was giving off
some kind of power.

“Who is it?”

Cale shook his head at Eruhaben's question.

“The White Star’s face without a mask.”

“Ho-”

Eruhaben gasped in shock.

‘How shocking.’

Eruhaben who had been looking at the sculpture while wondering if a human being
could have such a heinous expression had to look at the sculpture in a different light
now.

‘What… is making the White Star have such an expression?’

He felt an odd sensation as a question filled his mind.

As the Deputy Chief Priest had mentioned…

‘How does Cale know about the White Star’s bare face?’

Eruhaben had not heard about the information Cale had gathered from Duke Fredo
yet.

“He has such a vicious expression. He wouldn't look so heinous if he had a regular
expression on his face.”

That was Bud's assessment of the sculpture.

As for Cale, he was looking at the sculpture of the White Star’s bare face with an odd
sensation.

‘My face really looks despicable with that kind of heinous expression.’
Seeing this face on a sculpture made him really think that Kim Rok Soo and the White
Star looked quite similar.

‘I need to make sure to destroy this thing.’

Kim Rok Soo never had such an expression.

Cale walked up to the sculpture with an iffy expression.

‘Did the White Star want people to worship him?’

Cale found it laughable that such a sculpture existed at the center of the Temple of the
Demonic God.

It made him think that the White Star really was out of his mind.

Cale walked a little closer. He wanted to take a closer look.

Screeeeeeeech, screeeeech-

Cale saw the sculpture move up at that moment. He stopped walking and turned
toward Cotton.

Cotton pointed to the passage that appeared now that the sculpture had moved up.

“I’m going in, so follow me closely.”

She walked into the passage without any hesitation.

“We need to hurry because you wasted some time with the hostages.”

“Isn’t it still plenty of time before one hour is up?”

“…Did you not look at the information Duke Fredo gave you?”

“I did.”

Cale responded as he walked down.

It seemed like a typical underground passage, however, it was extremely large. It was
wide enough for ten adults to walk side by side.

‘Something is weird.’

The coldness he felt in the area above became even colder.

He could clearly tell that the temperature here was much lower than outside.

‘…This is weird.’

For some odd reason, it made Cale start to have an ominous feeling.

This unexplainable sense of uncertainty swept over him. It gave him the chills.

‘Why do I feel this way?’

He heard Cotton’s voice at that moment.

“As the information Duke Fredo gave you should have said, the underground facility is
divided into three locations.”

She quickly walked down.

“Gersey and the White Star can go to all three places. I am only allowed in two.”

Tap. Tap.

The sound of the four people walking down echoed through the passage.

“But the most important place is the third location. The place I can't go. We must go in
there and destroy it today.”

“What proof do you have that the third location is the most important?”

Cale asked since the reasoning was not mentioned in the information he received last
time.

Why was Cotton emphasizing that the third location was the most important?

They reached the end of the staircase.

Cotton started to speak with a serious expression.

“We don't have time, so I’ll explain on our way over. I definitely have proof to back me
up.”

Her eyes seemed confident that the proof she found was reliable.

“This is the first location.”

At the end of the staircase… This place looked like a naturally constructed cave.

However, the things inside were not natural.

“It is a dead mana storage facility. The White Star absorbs the dead mana here
periodically.”

The numerous large beautiful glass containers were full of black liquid.

“These were all someone’s life in the past.”

Bud had a bitter expression on his face.

However, Cale calmly counted the number of glass containers as he started to speak.

“We should move all these black liquids elsewhere.”

“Looks like I need to step in.”

Eruhaben walked toward the glass containers.

“Please.”

“It’s easy.”

Eruhaben said it was easy, but it was actually difficult. There were quite a lot of them.

Shh.

Eruhaben put his hand on one of the glass containers.

It was at that moment.

Beeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeep- beeeeeeeeeeeeeep-

A sharp noise echoed around them.

“…Shit!”

Cotton turned pale.

“They found us!”

“What?”

Cale walked over to her in shock.

Cotton took an orb out of her pocket.

“This is the signal my trusted subordinates were to send if they were caught! Who is
it? Who found us? It’s not the White Star!”

She looked at Cale and urgently continued to speak.

“Gersey! I'm sure Gersey is the one who found us! My trusted subordinate would not
have been able to send me a signal if it was the White Star! They’d be dead long before
they could do that!”

She bit down on her lips.

“Why? Gersey was supposed to come an hour later, so why did he come here earlier?
He’s kept this rule for many years, so what changed?”

Her eyes looked chaotic.

Beeeeeep- Beeeeeeep-

The alarm started to get louder.

Bud who was watching this walked over to Cale in shock.

"Hey, what do we do?”

It was at that moment.

Crack!

Cracks were starting to appear on the orb.

“Damn it!”

Cotton threw the orb into the air.

Baaaaaang!

The orb then exploded.

“…This orb is connected by the power of those who serve the Demonic race. Only
another priest could destroy it.”

Cotton's eyes filled with fear and urgency.

“I’m certain. Gersey has found us.”

She looked at Cale.

“He will chase after us.”

Cale quietly observed the fear in Cotton's eyes.

'Why is she so scared that Gersey is chasing us?’

Eruhaben started to speak as Cale remained quiet.

“Will we need to capture Gersey?”

Cotton shook her head.

“That is not a good idea, sir.”

She was speaking respectfully to the ancient Dragon.

“Based on Gersey’s personality, he would have immediately contacted the White Star
after suppressing my subordinates. He will only enter the underground passage after
doing that. He does not make rash movements. He is the thorough type.”

Eruhaben understood the meaning behind those words.

“You're saying that it is better to destroy this place before the White Star comes rather
than handling Gersey?”

“Yes, sir, that’s right.”

Cotton took a map out of her pocket.

“In order to destroy the cave, it is best to destroy it from the innermost area.”

She looked at the map as she started to walk to the inner area of the cave.

No, she was running.

“The third location is the most important place, so it is most effective to destroy that
spot!”

Not getting all this dead mana was a pity, but it was not a facility that needed to be
destroyed.

It was at that moment.

Boom! Boom! Boom!

They heard noises coming from the top of the stairs.

“…It must be Gersey's trusted subordinates! Hurry up!”

She became anxious and started to move even faster.

“Aaaaah!”

She suddenly felt as if her body was starting to float up.

Her two feet actually did leave the ground.

“What the hell?”

She looked toward Cale who was now next to her.

"We need to go quickly if we need to hurry. We’ll be late if we ran.”

There were whirlwinds at the tips of Cale's feet and her feet.

Bud and Eruhaben looked ready to quickly shoot forward as well.

Cotton looked down at her feet for a moment before nodding her head.

“Okay! I'll guide you!”

She started to move even faster.

Cale was up there next to her.

His eyes observed the numerous glass containers full of dead mana.

He could feel the numerous lives that were lost in order to create this much dead
mana.

‘That is why I need to completely destroy this facility.’

Cale made up his mind as he started to speak.

“Why are you in such a rush? You seem extremely scared.”

Cotton stopped biting down on her lips.

“…I told you that the third location was the most important, right? I also said I have
proof that is the case.”

“Yes.”

Boom. Boom. Boom.

They could still hear people rushing down behind them.

Who the hell were Gersey's trusted subordinates that they were making so much noise
heading down?

Cale noticed a wall and door at the end of the glass containers.

Cotton started to speak while looking at that door.

“We received dead mana from many places.”

“The Mogoru Empire?”

“Yes, The Mogoru Empire was one of those places.”

Bud asked in shock.

“You received it from other places too?”

Cotton started to frown as she turned her head toward Bud.

“I don’t have time to explain all of that right now!”

She looked at the map over and over as she continued to speak.

“The underground facility was created when the white castle was created. I
participated in its creation, but the innermost area of this facility… I couldn’t hear
anything about the third location.”

Cale's expression turned odd.

He had heard that it took a long time between the beginning of the Endable Kingdom's
construction and the end.

But the Deputy Chief Priest who seemed to be in her twenties had participated in all
of it and was still alive?

‘…I guess I can't trust her appearance.’

Cale finally fully understood that she was an illusionist.

“I did think that it was an important place at first, but I didn’t suspect anything after
that.”

Cale focused on what Cotton had to say again.

"But once our grasp on the Mogoru Empire ended, Gersey started to enter the third
location very frequently.”

“It hasn’t been that long then.”

“Haaaaa.”

Cale could see Cotton sighing in response.

She quietly looked at Cale and responded.

“Was it short even if 24 lives disappeared every day?”

“…What?”
Cale's face stiffened as Cotton started to speak faster.

“It happens every eight hours. Gersey brings his trusted subordinates with him and
brings 'feed’ to the third facility.”

“That ‘feed’ was humans?”

“…Sometimes it was humans, but there were other living beings as well. Regardless of
their origin, they brought eight living beings three times a day.”

Cotton who was extremely sensitive to Gersey's movements and had been observing
his daily routine had picked up on this odd routine at some point.

“How did you know that if you can’t go to that area?”

"His subordinates find the feed from outside. Gersey isn’t with them at that time.”

It seemed that although Gersey was always with his subordinates to come in here and
deliver the feed to the third location, only his subordinates went out to find the feed.

“Once I figured that out, I cast an illusion and stealthily followed them once.”

Cotton let out a small sigh.

“I heard one of the subordinates talking at that time. He’s the only one of Gersey’s
trusted subordinates who can talk. This is what that bastard said.”

Tap.

Cotton's feet landed on the ground.

She grabbed the lock on the door to the second location as she continued to speak.

She was repeating the things Gersey’s subordinate said at that time.

“He said, ‘we need to hurry up and find the feed for those monsters!’ ”

“…Monsters?”

“Yes. He then quickly added on.”

Cale made eye contact with Cotton.

“ ‘The day those terrible things are no longer sealed… We must give everything we
have to fulfill our liege's orders as that day will be the day our liege and our majesty’s
dreams all come true!’ ”

“…And then?”

“I got caught.”

Ooooooooong-

The ring on her finger started to shake along with the lock.

Click click.

She started to move the lock around.

“I had to quickly run away because Gersey's subordinates found me. I barely made it
back alive.”

Bud, who had been thinking about what she just said, started to speak.

“All of their dreams will come true on the day the seal is removed. It seems like… the
third location is very important as the Deputy Chief Priest mentioned.”

Cale nodded his head and started to speak.

“I have a feeling that the seal will be removed on the last day of the festival.”

Cotton started to frown.

“I was thinking the same thing. That is why we need to hurry up and destroy that place
first.”

Bud hesitated for a moment before asking a question.

“Do you think we can destroy it if those terrible monsters are there? Aren't we in
danger?”
“Do I look weak?”

Bud flinched and waved his hands around after hearing Eruhaben’s question.

“Ah, Eruhaben-nim, It’s not like that.”

Eruhaben chuckled at Bud’s reaction and added on.

“It shouldn't be too dangerous if they are still sealed and Gersey and his subordinates
are able to freely come and go to give the feed.”

“I was thinking the same thing, sir.”

Cale started to speak.

“And that is why we have to hurry.”

He made eye contact with Cotton again.

Cale then continued to speak.

“It’ll get complicated if Gersey undoes the seal first. That is why we have to move
before he gets here. Am I right?”

“That is the most important of the reasons we need to hurry.”

Cotton could not stop frowning as she said that.

“Damn it, why the hell isn’t this unlocking?!”

Cotton seemed frustrated as she messed with the lock.

“Move.”

“What?”

Cale put his hand on her shoulder and pulled her back.

Cotton's hand moved away from the lock.

“What the hell are you doing when every second counts-?”

“Eruhaben-nim.”

Cotton could see Eruhaben moving forward at that moment.

“Step back.”

Cotton was moved back with Cale and Bud each grabbing one of her hands.

She could see a gold powder covering the wall.

It was there for only a moment.

But her eyes soon opened wide.

Baaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaang!

“…Holy shit!”

The entire wall was breaking.

Pat. Pat.

Cale patted her shoulder as he whispered to her.

“I think it’s time to blast our way forward since they already know we’re here?”

“…Crazy bastard.”

‘You destroyed the wall because of that? What if the cave starts to crumble?!’

Cotton had a lot of things she wanted to say, but just quietly stepped forward again.

Cale followed behind her and he noticed numerous machines and magic circles that
filled this large area.

Cotton started to speak after seeing Cale’s gaze.

"The White Star had to go through many purifications with Gersey here.”
“Purification?”

“His human body needed to be purified in order for it to become a body that was
suitable for a member of the Demonic race.”

Cale pointed to the northern part of the large hall.

There was a small door there.

“Is that it?”

“Yes, that is the third location.”

Cale nodded his head and looked toward Eruhaben and Bud.

“Let's destroy them as we go.”

Ooooooong-

Blue aura started to shoot out from the tip of Bud’s sword.

His blade was pointed toward the devices.

It was at that moment.

“They're here.”

Eruhaben looked toward the stairs at the first location that was visible through the
destroyed wall.

Boom!

Cale could see the things that made loud noises as they entered the underground area.

He could not see them clearly as they were too far away.

However, he could vaguely make them out.

“They’re so big.”
Bud could see five large robed priests entering the underground facility.

“Mm, I can't smell them because they’re so far away. But there doesn’t seem to be a
mage and they don’t seem that hard-”

“Shut up!”

Cotton shouted and Bud’s eyes turned wide.

Bud was not shocked because of what Cotton just said.

“Son of a-!”

Baaaaaang!

Baaaaang- Baaaaang! Baaaaang!

He heard multiple explosions.

Bud's pupils started to shake.

“T, the glass containers-!”

Four of the large priests destroyed a large glass container.

They then welcomed the dead mana flowing out with their whole bodies.

The group heard Cotton’s voice at that moment.

“All of them are corpses except for one! They are dead corpses with dead mana bombs
inside them!”

Cotton looked disgusted as she had not expected Gersey to tell them to destroy the
glass containers.

The four priests became even larger.

They looked like bombs that had become even bigger after absorbing more dead
mana.
Boom. Boom. Boom.

The four priests started to walk toward them.

“…There’s no life in their eyes.”

Eruhaben could tell that they really were corpses based on their lifeless faces.

“That’s right! They have no free will! They just obey everything Gersey tells them to
do!”

Cotton pulled at Cale's clothes.

“Follow me! The second facility isn't the problem! We need to get to the third location
right now!”

Cale followed her as he asked a question.

“Why are you so scared of Gersey’s subordinates? Aren’t you fine even if the dead
mana bomb goes off?”

Cotton flinched for a moment.

“I.”

She hesitated before she continued to speak.

“I cannot absorb dead mana. I'm different.”

“Aren’t you an illusionist?”

“…This is a secret that nobody knows.”

Cale had a lot of things he wanted to ask after seeing her hesitate. However, he pushed
those questions aside for now after hearing Bud’s voice.

“Holy crap! Why the hell are those things so fast?!”

Cale turned his head.

Boom-! Boom-!

The large things that looked like balloons covered in dead mana were rushing toward
them extremely quickly.

“Shit! Those corpses!”

Cotton started to frown.

Shaaaaaaaaaaa-

Cotton’s body shot forward at an explosive speed at that moment.

“Ahhh! Hey!”

“Be quiet!”

A whirlwind was surrounding the two of them. Cale had grabbed Cotton's collar and
thrown her into the wind.

The two of them had almost instantly arrived at the door heading into the third
location.

They heard someone shouting from behind them.

“Block them!”

Gersey was pointing at Cale with his fan.

His eyes were extremely red.

Chhhh!

Grey aura started to gather above his head as he opened his fan.

“That is!”

Bud, who had seen that power in the northern mountain, channeled more of his aura.

His aura that was now shooting up over 3 meters long was pointed at the approaching
subordinates and Gersey.

It was at that moment.

“Bud, destroy the machines and the magic circles.”

Eruhaben stepped forward.

He then stomped with his foot.

Boom!

Gold powder scattered in front of Eruhaben.

“Block them.”

A half-transparent gold wall instantly appeared and blocked the cave path.

The spot where the wall dividing the first and second locations had been was now
filled by Eruhaben's gold wall.

Eruhaben started to speak to the others behind him.

“I will hold on for as long as possible, so hurry.”

His eyes looked toward the grey aura gathering above Gersey as he said that.

‘That is not from this world.’

It was highly likely that this was a power from the Demon World as Saint Jack
explained to Cale.

‘…I’ll hold on for as long as I can.’

Could a Dragon win against a power from the Demon World?

Especially when that Dragon could not use his full power because he was close to the
end of his lifespan?

Eruhaben pushed aside these questions he had about himself. He could not show any
weakness right now.

“Hurry up and open it.”

Cale put Cotton in front of the small door.

It was just a black door with nothing else.

Cotton didn’t even respond to Cale as she put her ring up against the black door’s lock
right away.

Cale suddenly thought of something and asked.

“…You know how to open this door even though you can’t go inside?”

“I don't know.”

‘What?’

Cale's eyes immediately looked concerned.

He was feeling Bud and Eruhaben's movements behind him.

Baaaaaang! Baaaaang!

“Shit! Why are there so many damn machines?!”

Bud was destroying every machine he came across while Eruhaben was making his
golden wall even sturdier while sweating.

‘Eruhaben-nim!’

Cale could not let Eruhaben push himself too much.

‘…Should I not have brought him?’

The reason Cale brought Bud and Eruhaben with him was because he thought that
Bud could use his sense of smell to figure out the identities of the mysterious things
from the Demon World while Eruhaben's wisdom would be extremely helpful.
But she didn't know how to open this lock?

As Cale quickly started to frown…

“I'm going to rip this door.”

He heard Cotton’s voice.

“Rip?”

‘How do you rip a door?’

Cale started to look confused before he saw Cotton take something out of her pocket.

It was a small dagger marked with odd markings and covered in bandages so that the
blade could not be seen.

Boom! Boom! Boom!

The spatial pocket bag inside Cale's inner pocket started to rumble.

‘What’s going on?’

Cotton started to speak as Cale started to think about each item that was in his pocket.

“I can't open this door because the power of the Demon World is infused in it. However,
I can rip it with this item.”

“…What is that item?”

“A divine item.”

Cale took a deep breath.

Cotton removed the bandages.

The dagger appeared and she walked toward the door with the dagger in her hand.

Her voice reached Cale’s ears.

“The God of War.”

The watering can.

Cale immediately thought about that item.

That was the God of War's divine item that he found in the storage room by the field
in Clopeh Sekka's residence.

“…Why do you have that?”

Cotton had that god's other divine item?

Cotton just smiled at Cale’s question before starting to speak.

“Those who serve the God of War always hide themselves in the midst of wherever
there is a war.”

She then swung the dagger.

Riiiiiiiiiiiip!

Cale could see the firm door starting to rip as if it was made of paper.

“Mm!”

Cale subconsciously stepped back.

The ripped door slowly spread apart as a cold aura flowed out through the gap.

“Gasp!”

Cale body curled forward.

“Hey! Are you okay?”

A shocked Cotton tried to support him.

Swipe!
But Cale pushed her hand away and walked over to the widening gap.

Boom. Boom. Boom.

Cale could feel his heart beating wildly.

The cold and ominous air that he had felt ever since walking into the area by the
sculpture in the Temple of the Demonic God…

That air had become even worse once he got underground.

However, Cale pushed this ominous feeling aside.

He just had to take on each danger as they arrived.

But the moment he felt the thing flowing out through the gap in the door…

Cale, no, Kim Rok Soo immediately realized what that ominous feeling had been.

Smell, touch, and sight. This was an ‘emotion’ from the past that even his ‘Record’ that
recorded everything could not remember.

It was the emotion of fear and helplessness.

Cale looked inside the black door.

There was a large area with stones giving off light in the ceiling looking like stars.

There was a tall and wide octagonal platform in there.

There were eight eerie octagonal altars on top of the platform. Those altars were large
enough that three humans would need to hold hands in order to fully surround it.

Then there was a black sculpture on top of each of these altars.

All of them looked different.

They weren’t humans.

They weren’t animals either.

Cale moved closer to the black door to see what they were.

Boom. Boom.

His heart was beating fast.

“Ah.”

Cale, no, Kim Rok Soo’s hand that was on the gap of the black door subconsciously
tensed up.

In the past, Kim Rok Soo had used his ability to anticipate the arrival of the second
strongest monster to invade earth one hour prior to its arrival.

And Kim Rok Soo had said the following after he was the only survivor after team
leader Lee Soo Hyuk and Choi Jung Soo had died.

‘Reporting in about the current situation. I will now start explaining about the battle
patterns of this unranked monster.’

Cale’s pupils started to shake as he looked at one of the black sculptures.

“…Why?”

Why was the monster he had seen in Korea over here?

How could this be?

The monster that had killed all of his teammates was visible as a statue in front of him.
“Cale Henituse, what is it?”

Cotton anxiously looked at Cale.

‘Why is he suddenly acting like this?’

Cale was completely pale and sweating.

He didn't even seem to hear Cotton calling his name as he just stared inside the black
door with a piercing gaze.

“What is inside that is making you react like this?”

Cotton slightly pulled on Cale’s shoulder and tried to look inside.

Cale’s gaze moved to Cotton potentially because of her action.

‘Why does he look so vicious-’

Cotton couldn't help but flinch at Cale's gaze that looked ready to beat someone to
death.

Cale pulled her arm.

“Hey!”

He pulled firmly enough that Cotton frowned before her eyes opened wide.

‘He's shaking?’

Cale’s hand that was pulling her was shaking.

Cotton finally realized that there was something else in Cale’s eyes in addition to this
anger to beat someone to death.

“Hurry up and look inside.”

Cale sounded stoic as usual, but his tone sounded urgent.

Cotton looked inside the door at his urging.

She could see an octagonal platform, eight altars, and eight sculptures.

“Deputy Chief Priest, do you know what those sculptures are?”

Cale waited for Cotton's response with a shaking heart.

Boom. Boom. Boom.

His heart was slowly starting to beat faster.

‘Why, just why?!’

Why were the monsters he saw in Korea here as sculptures?!

Cale's mind moved past complicated to chaotic.

‘…Six of them.’

Cale had records of six of those sculptures, no, six of those monsters, in his mind.

They were the monsters that were evaluated to be the six strongest monsters in Korea
and the world. The ones on the altar looked exactly the same as the ones recorded in
his mind.

‘My record is never wrong.’

When he was in Korea, the records of these unrankable monsters had been shared via
video throughout the world and Cale was the person in his company who remembered
the most information about these monsters.

‘I memorized every single piece of information about them.’

Once Team Leader Lee Soo Hyuk, Choi Jung Soo, and his other team members had died,
Kim Rok Soo had recorded every piece of information he could find about monsters.

He couldn't let something like that happen ever again.

It was his duty as the new team leader to keep his team members safe.

This was especially true because his new team all had family members waiting for
them, unlike himself.

That was why Kim Rok Soo had gathered more information about monsters than
anybody else.

Foreign records, research, videos… He found anything he could get his hands on and
recorded them in his mind.

Monster rankings, appearances, battle patterns, attacks, he didn't even disregard the
trivial information.

That was why he knew very well.

He knew how terrible these monsters were.

He also knew how many lives they had taken in Korea and the world.

‘Motherfucker!’

Cale started to frown while looking down at his shaking hands.

He heard Cotton’s voice at that moment.

“…I don't know. I've never seen those before.”

Cotton looked toward Cale.

She started to speak.

“Those creatures do not exist in this world.”

Cale clenched his shaking hands into fists. He shared the thoughts that had been on
his mind since earlier once his hands stopped shaking.

“…Are they monsters from the Demon World?”

Something that Gersey and the White Star might be preparing that wasn’t from this
world.

Wasn’t the Demon World the only explanation?

‘Does that mean monsters from the Demon World appeared on Earth? Why?’

Cale’s mind started to become complicated.

He could see Cotton hesitate for a moment before responding to his question.

“I don't know. There’s a chance that that is the case, but I can’t be sure.”

“Huuuuu.”

Cale subconsciously let out a deep breath.

He turned back toward the gap in the black door that was wide enough for a person
to walk through.

“Deputy Chief Priest, according to what you said earlier, the White Star and Gersey
brought them ‘feed.’ They brought feed for monsters, but I don't see any living
creatures inside there.”

“…That’s right.”

Cotton's heart started to beat with an ominous feeling.

‘What if it really is a monster from the Demon World?’

That terrible thought made her stomach churn.

Cotton and Cale made eye contact. The two of them realized that they were thinking
about the same thing.

She was the first to speak.

"Those sculptures are probably those monsters. This sculpture state should be the
seal. The White Star and Gersey are planning on removing those seals… During the
ritual on the last day of the festival.”

Both of them imagined the terrible sight that would happen after that even without
discussing it.

Of course, Cale imagined a much worse situation.

The disasters that had struck Earth rushed past his mind like a movie.

“By the way…”

Cale turned toward Cotton after hearing her voice.

“…The altars with the sculptures are all slightly different in height. Do you think there
is a reason for that?”

“What?”

Cale looked back inside the black door.

‘They’re different!’

The altars were different in height as Cotton mentioned.

“…Hey. You don't look very good.”

Cotton could see that Cale was starting to look even worse.

‘Shit!’

However, Cale couldn’t even hear Cotton's voice.

The altars were different in height as Cotton mentioned. That was why they looked so
uneven.

‘I missed that because I was too focused on the monsters.’

Cale focused on the parts he missed before getting the chills.

The sculpture on the lowest altar…

That monster was the unranked monster that was ranked sixth of the group.

The next lowest altar had the monster ranked fifth.

And the monster that was said to be the strongest monster in the history of Earth…
was on the third highest altar.

“…Does the height of the altar show the strength of the monster?”

In that case…

‘…There are two altars higher than the highest-ranked monster on Earth.’

That meant…

“…Those two are even stronger?”

Cale got the chills. The strongest monster in the history of Earth was truly a calamity.
But there were two that were even stronger than that one?

“Cale Henituse. What are you planning on doing? Should we go in first?”

He could hear Cotton speaking to him.

Cotton was worried about Cale's complexion but continued to speak as they needed
to take care of this problem first.

"We need to destroy that seal, well, this facility. We don’t have much time. We have no
time to hesitate. You know that too.”

“…That’s right. I know tha-”

Baaaaaang!

Cale turned around in shock after hearing an explosion that was loud enough to make
his ears go numb.

Craaaackle, crackle.
The half-transparent gold wall was starting to shake while being hit with a grey
current.

“Eruhaben-nim!”

Cale could see the bleeding Eruhaben.

He subconsciously started to move toward Eruhaben.

“Don't come here!”

However, he soon had to stop walking because of Eruhaben's shout.

Eruhaben glared to the other side of the gold wall.

Gersey was on the other side of the half-transparent wall, removing his fan that was
covered in grey aura.

“You’re enduring better than I expected.”

One corner of Gersey’s lip twisted up while looking at Eruhaben.

Oooooo- oooooong-

The grey aura was gathering above Gersey’s head and forming a large orb.

Peek.

Eruhaben peeked toward the grey orb.

‘…This is bad.’

Gersey had attacked the gold wall just now with about one-third of the aura from this
grey orb.

He somehow managed to block it, but Eruhaben was worried about what came next.

‘I can’t hold on if he uses the rest of that aura to attack.”

The wall would fall.

Eruhaben knew that that would be the case, which was why he started to shout.

"Why are you all standing around like idiots?!”

His voice thundered down on the others.

 Cale, why aren't you going inside? You need to hurry up and destroy it so we can
teleport and run away!

He was preparing for the worst and thinking about running away.

Cale headed back to the black door after hearing that. Cale had to show decent results
when Eruhaben was pushing himself so hard.

“Hurry up.”

Cale put a leg through the gap in the black door. His foot touched the bottom of the
large hall.

Shaaaaa-

An ominous chill immediately overwhelmed him, but Cale had to go in.

‘I must know.’

He needed to know what was going on.

Cale grabbed and then let go of the golden top's whip before pushing the rest of his
body through.

‘I'll let them know!’

‘Chaos, destruction, peace. Don’t worry.’

Cale who confirmed that the Elementals who had stealthily followed them were there
and then motioned to Bud with his eyes.

“I'll help you, sir.”

Bud walked next to Eruhaben and pointed his aura sword at Gersey who was on the
other side of the wall.

Cale heard Gersey shout behind him at that moment.

“The seal will be released if you destroy it!”

Eruhaben who had been listening to Cale and Cotton's conversation started to shout
again.

“Shut up! It seems like you are trying to summon a monster from the Demon World
based on their conversation, but the summoning should be impossible if we destroy
the location of the summoning! How dare you try to lie!”

Smirk.

Gersey sneered at Eruhaben and opened his fan again.

Chhhhhhhh-

“Who said anything about summoning? Those sculptures are prisons with the
monsters sealed inside. The moment you destroy that prison…”

The open fan started to absorb the grey orb.

"Hell will start in this world.”

The fan that absorbed over half of the orb was pointed at the wall.

Gersey calmly added on.

“Tsk. It’s not yet time. All that’ll be left is destruction.”

‘He’s being serious.’

Eruhaben could tell that Gersey was telling the truth.

‘It’s bad news for both the White Star and us if we destroy the seals!’

What could they do?

As his mind became complicated…

“Then, what if we don’t destroy them?”

He heard Cale’s calm voice.

Cale was looking at Gersey.

“I guess it’s fine as long as we don’t destroy them?”

Gersey kept his mouth shut. The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

His body was already over halfway into the room.

He then moved completely in through the black door. He looked at Gersey through the
crack in the black door and continued to speak.

“What if I don’t destroy them and just steal them?”

“…What?”

Gersey's pupils started to shake.

Cale did not miss that reaction.

Smirk.

The corners of Cale’s lips started to rise.

“If they are prisons holding the monsters captive, then I just need to run and take the
prisons with me.”

“Y, you crazy bastard-”

Ooooooong-

The fan started to shake furiously.

 Cale! That’s enough provoking! I don’t care if you steal it or whatever, just hurry!
“If you don't push yourself too hard, sir-”

 Sure, sure! I won't overdo it and I will get out of here alive! So hurry! We can just
leave everything and run away if all else fails!

“As long as you promise, sir.”

Cale leisurely responded to Eruhaben's urgent voice before he quickly started to head
toward the octagonal platform.

His expression was completely different than when he had just leisurely responded.

Boom. Boom. Boom.

His heart was beating fast.

Why had the monsters suddenly appeared on Earth?

Furthermore, why were those same monsters here, and what was their relationship
with the Demon World?

The truth seemed to be in front of his nose.

“Haiyah!”

Cale heard Cotton climb through the door behind him as well but did not have the time
to look back.

He needed to hurry.

Tap.

Cale stepped on top of the platform.

He then quickly started to compare the sculptures’ appearances with his records.

He also looked around.

“…There’s nothing else here.”

The sculptures were the only things in this place.

The eight sculptures were positioned in a circle on top of the platform and the center
was empty without any sort of magic circle.

There were no traces of a magic circle ever being there.

‘…How did they provide the feed?’

“Ah!”

A thought flew past Cale’s mind like a streak of lightning.

He looked back.

Cotton.

He also looked at Gersey who looked like he would swing his fan to attack him but was
instead just glaring at him.

“Did you find something? Do you think we really can't destroy these things?”

Cotton stepped on top of the platform and walked toward Cale.

Cale pushed her back.

He was using the Sound of the Wind.

It was at that moment.

Chhhh, Gersey’s fan shot out grey light.

“Creatures born in the darkness, hunt down your feed!”

Ooooooong-

Black smoke started to rise from the empty center of the platform.
A dull noise echoed in the hall along with the black smoke.

Boom! Boom!

The two people’s bodies slammed into the wall.

“Ugh! Why did you suddenly use your wind, w, what the…?!”

Cotton groaned at the sudden impact and her eyes opened wide as she tried to look at
Cale.

Her eyes were focused on the black smoke on top of the platform.

The black smoke was spreading thick and quickly, looking as if it could fill the whole
area in an instant.

“Damn it.”

As for the other person who also crashed into the wall… Cale glared at Gersey who
was on the other side of the black door.

“I was almost tricked.”

He then looked back at the black smoke.

This black smoke must have been the way to provide the feed to the monsters.

“It can't get out of the platform.”

The black smoke only roamed around the platform and did not flow out of it.

Cotton walked up to the platform and tapped on the air.

Tang tang.

“It looks like there is a transparent barrier separating the platform and the area
underneath the platform once the black smoke came out.”

She roamed around the platform and nodded her head.

“I guess it needs to be like this so that Gersey can provide the feed and then he and his
subordinates could safely get out.”

“But doesn’t it seem like it would be impossible to steal the sculptures like this?”

Cale got up and headed next to Cotton. He was now underneath the platform.

Gersey who was outside the black door could not see him.

However, Gersey clicked his tongue as if he could see what was going on. He had more
blood flowing out from his mouth than Eruhaben did.

“How disappointing. I guess I have no choice but to overdo it a bit.”

“Hehehe.”

He turned his head after hearing someone laugh.

Bud was laughing.

“Are you sad that you failed to give the feed to them?”

The corners of Gersey’s lips started to go up.

“But thanks to that, you are unable to steal nor destroy the sculptures.”

“…What do you mean?”

Bud who didn't know about the black smoke and the transparent barrier started to
frown while Gersey laughed and turned around.

“Ah, you're here, your majesty?”

Eruhaben’s eyes started to sink.

The White Star was walking over in the distance.

He spoke to Bud in his mind while Gersey greeted the White Star.

 This is bad. Looks like we need to escape.

Bud silently nodded his head.

He heard the White Star's voice at that moment.

“It’s so noisy starting the first day of the festival.”

Eruhaben retorted back.

“It’s only loud because you are making it that way, isn’t it?”

“Hahaha, is that so? Well, it looks like I need to get rid of you first before Cale Henituse
can steal those things.”

Chhhhhhhhhh-

A red sword shot out from the White Star’s hand.

“I will destroy the wall, your majesty.”

Gersey grabbed his fan and charged toward the gold wall.

Tatap!

He lightly kicked off the ground, jumped up into the air, and struck down with the hand
holding the fan.

The fan touched the gold wall.

It was at that moment.

Baaaaaaaaaang-!
The fan started to shake.

“Ugh!”

Gersey stumbled as he landed on the ground.

The large cave started to shake.

“What the hell!”

That shaking had started from inside the black door.

Gersey instantly thought about something.

Based on Cale Henituse's past actions…

Is he using his ancient powers to destroy it-?!”

He might have used his ancient powers to their limits.

Would the barrier be able to withstand his attack?

Was he planning on destroying this whole cave at the same time?

“Chief Priest!”

He heard the White Star scold him at that moment.

"Can’t you even feel what power it is?!”

‘Power?’

Gersey looked back toward the black door.

There was a gap on the door, but it was not wide enough to see everything.

However, he could feel the aura flowing out through the door.

“…P, perhaps-”
“That ‘perhaps’ seems to be the case.”

Gersey turned pale after hearing the White Star's response.

“W, why is that honorable power coming right now-”

It was no longer an issue of their big plan being destroyed.

The honorable power had responded to Cale.

‘Why? That power should not be able to respond to Cale Henituse?’

Gersey's mind started to turn white.

It looked like both their big plan and the current situation might end up twisted.

“I'll go first.”

The White Star walked past Gersey who was somewhat out of it and swung his sword
toward the gold wall.

He started to frown.

‘I never expected that power to respond to Cale Henituse!’

His relaxed expression had turned urgent.

That was why he was using the sword at full power.

Slash.

The wall was easily split.

“Ugh!”

Eruhaben coughed up blood and moved back.

Thankfully, he had been preparing to escape, so he was not injured too much from the
wall breaking.
However, he had no choice but to open his eyes wide and turn around.

‘How could such an enormous amount of power-!’

He could feel a strong power behind his back.

“Fuck!”

He also heard the White Star’s angry shout.

Eruhaben could see the black door and the wall exploding.

Baaaaang!

“Ugh!”

Cotton’s body was curled up as she was flung out of there.

“Shit!”

Bud caught Cotton as he shouted in shock.

"What the hell happened?!”

“T, the barrier broke and a weird power- a scary power-”

Bud was about to urge her to respond until he realized that her body was shaking.

He quickly looked toward where the door had been.

Bud subconsciously started to speak.

“…What the?”

He then took a step back.

He had chills all over his body.

It was a natural reaction.

“Cale!”

He could see Eruhaben stumbling as he charged forward.

Bud had never seen Eruhaben moving so urgently before.

“Damn it! No!”

The White Star was also shouting as he urgently rushed forward and passed Eruhaben.

His face showed both anger and anxiety.

‘Ah!’

Bud finally thought to look for Cale. Cotton had been flung out, but Cale had not.

He overcame the fear that was filling his body and looked back toward that direction.

He saw Cale there.

Cale had plopped on the ground right in front of the thing that was giving him such
terrible fear.

“…What the hell is this?”

Cale’s eyes opened wide as he sat there on the ground.

He had not been flung out with that explosion just now, but he was on the ground
because he fell down.

He lowered his head.

‘What’s going on?’

His whole body was shaking.

The unranked monster that had killed all his teammates… A pressure that was much
worse than when he had gone up against that monster was overwhelming him.

Cale lifted his head.

The thing giving him that fear was right in front of him.

It was a black hand.

The hand was so large that it could almost touch the ceiling of the hall.

What could be going on?

‘What is happening all of a sudden?’

Cale recalled his actions just now.

‘All I did was get close to the platform.’

All he did was move toward Cotton who was observing the black smoke and the
transparent barrier.

But the black smoke inside the transparent barrier… That had suddenly disappeared
and a large black hand shot up from the platform.

The power of that hand made the transparent barrier explode.

And Cale was looking at that black hand right now.

The eight sculptures?

He wasn’t paying them any attention right now.

He thought it was weird that they didn't have a scratch on them after such a large
explosion, but he had no time to look into that right now.

Boom. Boom. Boom.

His heart was beating as if it wanted to explode and he had chills all over his body.

Kiiiiiiiiiiiiiii-

The black hand started to move while making that odd noise.

The palm stopped in front of Cale.

 You disturbed my slumber.

‘What?’

Before Cale could even think about the meaning behind those words…

“Cale! Dodge!”

Cale's mind was filled by a voice that seemed to come from the black hand as Eruhaben
shouted.

 Here is another punk who has found a way out of god’s hand and escaped his fate.

The black hand reached out and surrounded Cale while making an eerie noise.

Cale had instantly fallen into darkness.

Bang, bang bang!

Lock had a confused expression after hearing someone banging on the door.

The Tiger warriors stationed outside would not knock like this.

"Who could it be?”

Lock debated whether he should open the door or not. He wondered if he should call
the adults who were all gathered in the strategy room.

He heard a voice from the other side of the door at that moment.

“Please open the door!”

‘Huh?’

He recognized the voice.

It made sense why the Tiger warriors would have let this person through.
Lock quickly opened the door as he was relieved that it was someone he knew and
welcomed the person.

“Cage-nim!”

“Huff. Huff. Huff.”

Cage was outside the door trying to catch her breath.

“It’s been so long!”

Lock warmly welcomed her but Cage didn’t even respond to his greeting as she
urgently rushed into the black castle.

“Did something-”

Lock was trying to ask what was going on in shock before stiffening up after seeing
what, no, who, was in Cage’s hand.

“W, wait- this person is?”

Lock who barely managed to get some words out looked toward the person who was
being dragged by the collar.

“It’s been a while.”

This person was Saint Jack who looked as if he didn’t know what to do.

“I was suddenly dragged here and I don't even know wh-”

"Dragon!”

Saint Jack gave an awkward greeting, but… His greeting was drowned out by Cage’s
shout.

Cage looked toward Lock and started to speak.

“Where is the Dragon? The Dragon?!”

“Excuse me?”
"A Dragon that can cast long-distance teleportation! Or at least Miss Rosalyn! No, it
needs to be a Dragon, a Dragon!”

“Just what-”

“Young master Cale was cut!”

“Excuse me?”

Lock became anxious after suddenly hearing her mention Cale but Cage looked around
as if things were urgent before running toward the stairs.

Lock followed behind her as Cage continued to speak.

“You know about the vow of death, right?”

Cage continued to look around as if she couldn't even see Lock who was anxiously
following behind her and then resumed speaking.

She seemed to be looking for someone.

“Young master Cale and I made a vow of death, you know? There’s a power you feel
gathering around your hand when you make a vow. It is the power that lets you know
whether that person kept or broke the vow.”

It was the eerie feeling that seeped into the bodies of the people making the vow of
death.

"But that was just cut off.”

“Really?!”

Jack who had been dragged here without knowing why looked toward her in shock.

However, Cage didn’t respond to his question and just continued to speak.

“There should be someone else who is feeling this right now. He should be feeling that
something is weird.”

Screeeech.
They then heard a door opening on the second floor.

Lock turned toward the door.

Choi Han was walking out of the strategy room with a confused yet serious expression.

‘Didn’t hyung say that he had a lot of things to do?’

Choi Han who said he had important business to take care of was coming out with a
serious expression before finishing his work.

"Ah, Miss Cage!”

He looked extremely happy to see Cage. It was as if he had found the person who could
answer his question for him.

Choi Han stepped onto the stairs and walked toward her.

“Miss Cage, when did you get here? You see, umm, I made a vow of death with Cale-
nim once-”

“The presence that entered your body when you made the vow disappeared, right?”

Choi Han flinched and looked at her.

Cage let go of Saint Jack's collar and continued to speak.

“People who make a vow of death are able to tell whether the vow was kept or broken
by that power in their body.”

Death was the result if the vow was broken.

The presence inside the body would tell the other person that the vow was broken
and that the other party was dead.

“But there are times the presence itself disappears from a person's body. That means
that the vow of death is cut.”

Cage slowly walked over to Choi Han.

Her voice echoed through the staircase.

“There’s only one reason that a vow of death would be cut.”

Her face stiffened.

“That is when the vow becomes useless.”

There was only one reason a vow of death would become useless.

“That means that the other person is dead.”

All expressions disappeared from Choi Han's face.

"What do you mean by that?”

Choi Han heard a voice behind his back.

Alberu was standing there.

“…Who?”

Cage did not recognize Alberu who was wearing a mask and changed his voice and
looked at him with wariness.

Choi Han started to speak at that moment.

He sounded almost as if he was shouting.

“There’s no way that-!”

“Lower your voice.”

Alberu squeezed Choi Han's shoulder.

Peek.

Alberu then peeked toward the closed strategy room door.

He had followed behind Choi Han because he found it odd that Choi Han suddenly left
the room with an odd expression and managed to hear part of what Cage said.

‘…Their vow of death with Cale disappearing means-’

It meant that he was dead?

Alberu quietly whispered to Choi Han who was looking at him.

“Do you want Duke Fredo to hear everything? You want the enemies to hear everything?
You want them to know about this situation?”

Choi Han’s open mouth closed shut.

Choi Han then peeked toward the closed strategy room door.

Alberu continued to whisper.

“I closed the door as soon as Cale was brought up, so they shouldn't have been able to
hear inside.”

Choi Han finally sighed in relief after hearing Alberu’s comment.

But then he immediately started to frown.

“We need to go to the Endable Kingdom. We need to hurry over to the Endable Kingdom.”

Choi Han’s fingertips were shaking. The same words continued to come out of his
mouth.

“We need to hurry over to the End-”

“Be quiet!”

Choi Han could see Alberu’s expression after hearing him shout in an annoyed voice.

Choi Han's eyes opened wide.

‘…Has Alberu Crossman ever been so openly annoyed or angry before?’

Never.

Choi Han realized that Alberu was stressed out as well.

Alberu continued to mumble in an annoyed voice.

“I'm thinking. Thinking. I'm thinking about what to do.”

‘Cale Henituse died? He suddenly died like that? He died even with Eruhaben and Bud
by his side? Was that possible?’

Bang!

Alberu heard the strategy room's door slam open.

“Mm.”

He then groaned.

Alberu could see a shaking black Dragon.

“T, the human!”

Raon approached them while holding a video communication device with his shaking
paws.

Crackle. Crackle.

Black mana was fluctuating in an irregular manner around Raon.

Crackle!

The video communication device was starting to crack because of the mana. The mana
continued to get bigger and stronger as it fluctuated around Raon.

Raon barely managed to speak after seeing Alberu’s stiff expression.

“…T, they said that the human d, disappeared. G, Goldie gramps- gramps, he-”

Alberu took a deep breath after seeing Raon being unable to speak.

He looked inside the strategy room past Raon.

Lord Sheritt, Duke Fredo, and the Dragon half-blood were inside the strategy room.

Fredo had his arms crossed as he observed them with an odd expression.

Alberu started to speak.

“…You son of a bitch.”

‘Cale Henituse. Just what the hell are you going around doing? Did something happen
to you?… First of all.’

Alberu thought about Eruhaben's description of how Cale had disappeared.

‘We don’t know if he is dead.’

In that case…

“Choi Han.”

“Yes, sir.”

“You go to the Endable Kingdom.”

Alberu looked at Fredo and took off his mask.

His skin, eyes, and hair color all changed at the same time.

“……!”

Alberu continued to speak as Duke Fredo's eyes opened wide and his jaw dropped in
shock.

“I will go to the palace first and then head over too.”

Choi Han and Alberu made eye contact.

Choi Han started to speak.

“Then I will be heading out first.”

Choi Han and Alberu started to walk in different directions after that.

Cale couldn’t breathe.

‘…It’s hard to breathe…… ’

He wanted to breathe, but he could not take a breath properly.

He couldn’t open his eyes and his ears felt numb.

He couldn't even smell anything.

‘I remember getting caught by the black hand and being dragged somewhere… ’

But he couldn't remember anything after that.

For some odd reason, Cale was breathing even though he felt as if he was suffocating.

As Cale tried his best to move his body in this situation…

‘Damn it! What the hell is going on?’

It’d be one thing if he could even squirm, but his body wasn’t allowing him to make
any movements at all.

 Child who has escaped the hand of god and his fate.

Cale felt his heart sink after suddenly hearing the chilling voice.

The first of his senses to be permitted back to him was his hearing.

Boom. Boom. Boom.

His heart was beating wildly.

 Humans, no, living beings are meant to be born and then eventually die. That is the
law of nature and their fate. You've gone against that.

‘Who is this? Is the black hand talking? What is the black hand?’

 Furthermore, time is warped for you as well. You are you, but also not you.

His body started to shake.

The second thing Cale was permitted to do in this situation was to shake.

It was an instinctual fear.

 Cale Barrow. I thought that only that child was qualified to carry on my powers. But
you are the same.

Cale suddenly felt as if his ears suddenly opened.

He then had a strong urge to talk.

His mouth then opened.

“Who are you?”

 Me?

He heard a low laugh.

 Just as the Divine race worships the gods, there are beings the Demonic race worships
as well. I am a being the Demonic race worships.

‘A being the Demonic race worships?’

 I've been in a deep slumber, waking up for a short duration of time over and over
after being sealed by the gods a long time ago.
 “…So, who the hell are you?”

Cale suddenly felt a large hand caressing his back.

But a terrible fear filled his body each time the hand touched him.

That voice whispered in Cale’s ear at that moment.

 I am wickedness.

‘What?’

Cale took a deep breath.

The voice continued to speak.

 I am solitude. I am despair.

A being that was wickedness, solitude, and despair.

 I am all things that humans like you do not want.

This was a being that brought out a human's instinctual fear and anxiety.

 A being whose presence itself turns into fear, but something that still exists
somewhere.

Cale's eyes suddenly opened.

He made eye contact with the thing.

 That is who I am.

Blood-colored eyes were looking at him.

‘Mmph!’

He instantly felt as if he could not breathe again.

 You have faced solitude, resigned in front of despair, were in pain, and had to face
the wickedness surrounding you many times. Furthermore, you escaped your fate and
the hands of a god, your time is warped, and you are you but not you at the same time.

As Kim Rok Soo, he had lost all things that were precious to him and escaped his fated
death.

Now, he was both Kim Rok Soo and Cale Henituse.

 Child.

The blood-colored eyes smiled as it whispered.

 Do you want me as well?

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

His lips were shaking.

He managed to speak even as they shook.

“Are you crazy?”

The corners of Cale’s lips were shaking as one corner started to rise.

“My dream is to be a rich slacker. You crazy bastard.”

‘I'm a human who even rejected becoming the Saint for the God of Death.’

 Hahahaha-

“Ugh!”

Cale felt as if his ears would rip apart at this laughter that was shaking the area. It felt
as if his eardrums would truly burst.

However, the other being seemed to enjoy this situation quite a bit.

 Funny, very funny.

The eyes got closer to Cale.

 You are more entertaining than the other child.

Cale and the eyes looked at each other.

 How could the two of you have moved in such different directions while being
placed in the same situation?

“So what?”

 I also find it entertaining that you keep talking back without giving up.

The blood-colored eyes moved back.

Cale suddenly felt as if his body was being pressed down from all directions.

“Ugh!”

The eerie voice whispered to him at that moment.

 I will make you want me.

‘What?’

 Call me when you need me. Only I can destroy your despair for you.

Cale then felt as if his body was being sucked away.

The blood-colored eyes started to become distant.

‘Where am I going?’

Cale started to frown.

‘Ugh!’

He then clenched his eyes shut after feeling terrible pain.

His senses became paralyzed again.

All connections he had with the world started to break once again.

Cale desperately moved in order to try to breathe.

“Huuuuuuu!”

And once he could breathe again…

“Ugh!”

Cale felt a terrible pain at his stomach.

His body flew up into the air before falling down to the ground.
Boom!

“Ugh, ugh!”

Cale’s body rolled backward on the ground.

‘What is going on?’

Someone had hit his stomach as soon as he returned to his senses, making him fly up
before rolling on the ground.

“Ugh!”

Cale reached his hand out and grabbed the ground.

His eyes focused again and he realized something was odd.

‘Cement?’

It was cracked and partially destroyed, but he could see the cement floor.

This material was something that did not go with Cale Henituse's world.

“Hey! You bastard, can’t you even stand up straight? Where did that arrogant attitude
of yours from just now go? Hmm?”

“Kekeke! Hey, hey, control yourself. You kicked him so hard that he can't even get up.”

They were speaking in Korean.

“Uggh………!”

Cale tried his best to hold back his groan as he flipped his body over.

He could see a grey ceiling.

‘…When was it that my body was this weak?’

He had no strength in his body.

He could see his thin wrists.

Cale then saw people step between him and the grey ceiling.

“Hey, this bastard looks like a mess.”

“That's why he should have just done what we told him to do, instead of acting up!”

These people who were sneering at him and looking down at Cale with scorn…

They were Korean.

“Ha!”

Cale remembered them.

He remembered their faces… He remembered this situation.

It was a time when it wouldn't be weird for him to be beaten up.

“…It’s those bastards.”

‘It's one of those bastards who hit me at that time.’

Cale started to laugh.

“He… hehe.”

“What the hell? Did this bastard go crazy after getting hit once?”

This was less than 1 year since the world was flipped over.

The winter of the cataclysm had passed, spring and summer had come by, and then it
was fall.

It was that first fall.

It was late fall when the unranked monster appeared in Seoul and filled the world with
fear.
It turned the world into chaos and the largest number of people died at that time.

“How dare a young bastard like you glare at me like that?”

This was the fall when the pretty useless Kim Rok Soo was the most useless in his life.

Cale had opened his eyes as Kim Rok Soo at the end of that fall.

The blood flowing out of the corner of his mouth told him that this situation was real.

“…Damn it.”

‘Whether you are wickedness, despair, or solitude… That black hand bastard… ’

Cale’s eyes were full of fire.

“How annoying.”

The people surrounding him started to frown after hearing that.

“What? What nonsense is this lunatic spewing now?! Do you want to die?”

“This bastard! How dare a bastard who could easily die at any moment look at us with
such a gaze?!”

Cale let those comments in one ear and out the other.

The place the unranked monster first appeared…

Many people died at that location.

Death and fear that could not be compared to what they faced since the cataclysm had
swept the area where that unranked monster had appeared.

That was why the world started to gather together again.

In fact, that terrible incident let the world create societies again and stand back up.

A few of the people who made it back alive from that incident location ended up
becoming the central figures of the Korean society.
“…Team leader.”

Team leader Lee Soo Hyuk was one of the people who had experienced that incident.

‘Hey, do you know where I saw our team leader in the past? I'm someone who survived
that incident as well. You remember that terrible incident? I survived that incident. I
also saw our team leader fight.’

Choi Jung Soo had been there as well.

The two of them managed to survive that situation, but many lives were taken by that
unranked monster.

Choi Jung Soo had spoken with a teary expression in the past.

‘I really thought that I was in hell when I saw that.’

The fire in Cale's eyes started to burn even brighter.

But he didn’t have time to sit around with a burning gaze.

Cale immediately raised his body.

“Ugh.”

He couldn't help but groan because of the pain he felt throughout his body.

One of the people looking down at him started to smile.

“Hey. Why did you have to run your mouth instead of doing what we told you to do?”

Cale, no, Kim Rok Soo ignored that comment that was directed at him.

‘I don’t have time for this.’

He put some strength into his shaking legs in order to stand up little by little.

This was when Kim Rok Soo's body was weaker than ever.

Maybe that was the reason, but this weak ass body of his was this helpless after only
being kicked once by an ability user.

“Ugh!”

As he heard someone sneer…

“Ugh!”

Cale fell on the ground again after someone kicked his calf.

He was flat on the ground looking up at the sky again.

“Hey.”

Someone crouched down beside him and made eye contact.

“Why do you think you’re being beaten up like this?”

Cale recalled the name of the man looking at him from deep inside his memories.

‘Was his name Park Jin Tae?’

This bastard was the leader of this shelter.

Shelter.

A shelter was a place in the early days of the cataclysm where monsters never
approached, a safe place in this hell where monsters could appear at any moment.

People considered the shelters a gift from ‘some being’ to allow them the chance to
fight against the monsters, similar to how that being had given some people abilities.

‘And Park Jin Tae is the ruler of this shelter I'm in right now.’

This bastard was a tyrant who did everything as he pleased.

He clearly treated the ability users and regular people differently, treating the ability
users much better.

Furthermore, he would approve of you even if you were not an ability user, as long as
you were useful.

That was why people who were on Park Jin Tae’s good side got to rest peacefully inside
this shelter.

Kim Rok Soo's early twenties started at the lowest spot in Park Jin Tae's shelter.

He was hated by Park Jin Tae.

“Kim Rok Soo, are you not going to answer me?”

Although Park Jin Tae was smiling gently and speaking in a warm voice, he was coldly
staring down at Cale.

Cale looked into those eyes and started to think.

‘What is going on right now? Is it an illusion? Was it one of those dreams he’s had until
now whenever he fainted?’

That didn't seem to be the case, as he could move as he wanted.

He then thought about those blood-colored eyes that called itself solitude and despair
and had sent him here.

‘I will make you want me.’

That was what the bastard had said.

‘Call me when you need me. Only I can destroy your despair for you.’

It sounded as if it was going to show Cale despair.

It was telling him to follow it if he didn't like that despair.

It made him want to laugh.

The God of Death…

This blood-colored eyes bastard…

‘Why do they all do whatever the fuck they feel like doing?’

It made him annoyed.

“Hey, Kim Rok Soo. Did you not hear the leader-nim telling you to answer him?”

One of the men behind Park Jin Tae scolded Cale. He lifted his foot up and looked ready
to kick Cale again.

“Huuuuuu, enough. That bastard might die at this rate.”

“Yes, Leader-nim!”
Park Jin Tae shook his head before starting to speak again.

“Hey, Rok Soo.”

Cale stopped looking at the sky and looked around him.

He could see buildings.

Most of the building walls were crumbling or cracked, and they were barely standing
with their tall shapes mainly gone.

There were many buildings where the metal frames were barely standing as well.

Among those buildings…

He could see a three-story building with one corner destroyed.

But the rest of it was fine.

It didn't seem very different compared to the other buildings.

Park Jin Tae whispered to him while laughing.

“Yes, that building you are looking at right now. Don’t you want to go back to the
shelter?”

That building was the shelter.

It didn’t look special or different even though it was a shelter.

But humans barely managed to find that shelter to continue living.

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“…The shelter that has been maintained for the longest time in this area since the
cataclysm.”

“Yes, that is why it is the most comfortable place.”

The damn shelter locations changed every so often.

A shelter with no monsters one day could become overloaded with monsters the next
day.

When that happened, a different building became a shelter.

Even the shelters continued to bleed the humans, as if to tell them that there was no
eternal sanctuary.

But this place…

The three-story building Cale was looking at had remained a shelter since the first day
of the cataclysm.

‘Each area had one of these locations.’

That was why people called these shelters the ‘Central Shelter.’

Park Jin Tae continued to whisper.

"And I am the owner of that central shelter.”

Cale turned toward Park Jin Tae.

‘You weren’t the owner from the beginning.’

Cale went through his memories one by one before saying one of the facts he recalled.

Kim Rok Soo's calm voice flowed out.

“Park Jin Tae is the king of this place right now.”

Park Jin Tae's expression turned odd.

He would normally have been angry at the fact that Kim Rok Soo called him Park Jin
Tae instead of leader, but Park Jin Tae's anger subsided because Kim Rok Soo had
accepted him as king in his calm and confident voice.

Kim Rok Soo.

This was the first time that this arrogant and venomous bastard had accepted Park Jin
Tae as the owner of this place.

“How dare you call the leader-nim by his name? Do you really want to die, you
bastard?!”

Park Jin Tae continued to look at Kim Rok Soo who was looking at him even as his
subordinate started to shout.

“…Jin Tae.”

A grandma walked out of the shelter building at that moment.

Park Jin Tae’s subordinates started to frown at her appearance.

They seemed more uncomfortable than angry or annoyed.

The white-haired grandmother cautiously walked over to Park Jin Tae and Cale.

“Why don't you stop? I'll make sure to talk to Rok Soo.”

Cale’s eyes teared up at that moment.

This was someone whom he could never see anymore except in his distant memories
because she had passed away.

Grandma Kim.

Nobody knew her first name. They just knew that her last name was Kim and called
her Grandma Kim.

She was the only person Park Jin Tae could not treat horribly in this shelter.

Cale avoided Grandma Kim’s gaze as she looked at him with concern.

More than getting kicked in the stomach as soon as he opened his eyes…

More than having his calf kicked…

This hurt more.

Cale then heard Park Jin Tae’s low voice.

“…Looks like you finally realized the reality of the situation.”

The reality that Park Jin Tae was the king.

Park Jin Tae did not say that latter part out loud while Cale calmly agreed with him.

“That’s right. I need to accept my reality.”

Cale was thinking to himself without realizing that Park Jin Tae was looking at him
with an odd gaze.

‘Yes, let's consider this to be real.

Whether it is the blood-colored eyes’ test or whatever…
Whether this situation was an illusion that’ll disappear later… ’

Cale slowly raised his body.

‘Let’s get rid of any regrets.’

He would get rid of all of his regrets during this chance.

He looked into the eyes of Grandma Kim who was looking at him with concern.

He then recalled one very important fact.

‘This shelter will be destroyed soon.’

He didn’t know when exactly it was right now, but…

It was around the end of fall and the start of winter.

As if it was an alarm announcing the appearance of the unranked monsters…

All central shelters that existed on earth during this time lost their special properties.

That meant that the central shelters were attacked by monsters and destroyed.

And they would attack differently than normal, as if they were trying to invade the
shelters.

These monsters would attack the central shelters in waves.

‘That also means that there will be new central shelters.’

Central shelters that looked different than before would appear exactly 24 hours after
the first central shelters were destroyed.

He did not like Park Jin Tae and his lackeys.

But he could not let the people here die.

Himself, Kim Rok Soo.

Then, there was Grandma Kim. Oh, there were some other people as well.

People that team leader Lee Soo Hyuk had saved were here.

Before Park Jin Tae showed his greed…

Lee Soo Hyuk was in charge of this shelter.

‘But the team leader has already left.’

Team leader Lee Soo Hyuk who had now left for more dangerous places had been the
‘center’ of this central shelter before Park Jin Tae.

‘And the team leader left this place in Grandma Kim and Park Jin Tae's care.’

Both Grandma Kim and Park Jin Tae were good people at that time.

‘Of course, Park Jin Tae revealed his true nature as soon as the team leader left and
started to rule over this central shelter like a tyrant.’

The central shelter had to create a new system under the person who was the
strongest attack-type ability user after Lee Soo Hyuk.

And that system was one that Park Jin Tae wanted.
‘…But even Park Jin Tae found it difficult to handle Grandma Kim.’

Park Jin Tae could not treat Grandma Kim, who had healing abilities, rudely.

He slightly bowed to the grandma and looked toward Cale.

“It’ll be smart to act with that reality in mind next time.”

Park Jin Tae offered him his hand.

Cale grabbed that hand and stood up.

Park Jin Tae watched Kim Rok Soo sit back down before letting go of his hand.

He then turned around and walked away from the shelter building.

“We are going to hunt.”

His subordinates followed behind him.

Lee Chul Min who was Park Jin Tae's right-hand man caught up to him and started to
speak.

"Are you going to let Kim Rok Soo go like this? Shouldn’t we beat him to a pulp when
we have the chance?”

Park Jin Tae's fox-like eyes turned sharp.

Lee Chul Min's shoulders slightly shook after seeing that gaze.

Park Jin Tae quietly looked at him for a while before finally starting to speak.

“That bastard was the only one.”

“Excuse me?”

“…Kim Rok Soo is the only initial shelter member who still considered Lee Soo Hyuk,
the person who has still not returned, to be this shelter's king.”

Many people came and went from the central shelters since the beginning of the
cataclysm.

There were some people who had survived since then.

These people were called the initial shelter members and Park Jin Tae just considered
them ‘Lee Soo Hyuk's people.’

But it had been over 10 months.

Lee Soo Hyuk who left to help a different region that was having difficulties had not
returned, and Grandma Kim, as well as the rest of Lee Soo Hyuk's people had started
to accept Park Jin Tae's system one by one.

They probably had no choice.

They wanted to survive as well.

But Kim Rok Soo…

This useless bastard without any abilities never accepted Park Jin Tae as the owner of
this place.

“No, that bastard is someone who didn't accept the concept of, ‘king’ in the first place.”

Honestly speaking, Kim Rok Soo's acceptance did not matter.

He was the same as the other useless parasites that were surviving in this shelter.

But he found that venomous gaze annoying.

That was why even an ability user like Lee Chul Min was worried that he got on Park
Jin Tae's nerves just now.

But Kim Rok Soo was different.

“Ha, haha-”

Park Jin Tae started to refreshingly laugh out loud for the first time in a long while.

He did not look toward where Kim Rok Soo was anymore and headed for the hunting
ground.

Hunting.

That's what it was called, but it was more of a difficult battle for food that could result
in them losing their lives.

But it was his responsibility.

Grandma Kim confirmed that Park Jin Tae was moving away before putting her hand
on Cale’s shoulder.

“Aigoo, why didn't you just run the errand for him?”

Cale slowly remembered why he had been beaten up.

Errand. In other words, starting shit.

As Grandma Kim mentioned, Park Jin Tae always made Kim Rok Soo, who didn't accept
him as king, to run errands for him.

He seemed to have been beaten up today after trying to not do that errand.

‘Whether this is an illusion or whatever… ’

Cale touched his stomach.

It hurt.

Anything that hurts was real.

‘Let’s change it.’

It was at that moment.

 Do you think it will go as you please?

Flinch.

Cale’s shoulders shook.

It was that bastard.

The blood-colored eyes. It was the voice of the bastard who sent Cale into this
situation.

 Look for me if you want to escape this despair. Then you won’t have to face these
past despairs any longer.

Cale responded internally.

‘…Is he plotting something? I need to go back quickly.’

The other being must have heard it as it responded.

 I will not plot anything.

‘…Then you'll just sit back and watch?’

 Yes, I'll just watch. Until you ask me for help, that is.

‘…Will this situation end if I ask you for help?’

 Yes. And you will need to let me in if you receive my help.

‘Let you in?’

 I mean that you will become a member of the Demonic race and carry on my will.

Cale started to frown.

‘Become a member of the Demonic race?’

He heard the blood-colored eyes’ voice at that moment.

 I'm sure you don't want that right now.

 But will that continue to be the case? Will you be okay while you are helpless and
facing these despairs again?

 I will just sit back and watch all that. I will wait for the day you come to me with
delight.

Cale quickly asked after hearing the voice become faint.

‘Is this real? Did I return to the past?’

 I do not have the power to turn back time.

The voice sounded as if it was laughing.

 This is just an endless despair that will repeat itself without ever ending, and a test.

The voice sounded as if it was looking forward to something.

 Flail around in despair. I will give you the power to escape from despair.

He did not hear the blood-colored eyes’ voice any longer.

“Hey, Rok Soo.”

Cale felt a warm hand over his hand that was on his stomach.

Grandma Kim cautiously continued to speak.

"I like your temperament, but can’t you be a little more flexible?”

She knew that Park Jin Tae was in the wrong, but she could not attack him.

All she could do was treat the injured with her healing abilities.

She might be the reason Kim Rok Soo managed to survive under Park Jin Tae since
team leader Lee Soo Hyuk left.

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“I'll need to stay on good terms with Park Jin Tae for now.”

Grandma Kim's eyes opened wide.

“…Do you mean that?”

Cale slowly nodded his head and looked toward Park Jin Tae's back in the distance.

That bastard was a dictator and treated people differently based on their abilities,
however…

On the day the central shelter was destroyed…

‘He protected this place until the end.’

Park Jin Tae fought until the last moment.

That was how Kim Rok Soo and some other people who had no abilities were able to
escape.

‘What are you doing? Why the hell are you so slow? A bastard like you without any
abilities should at least run! Get lost! You're in my way, so hurry up and run!’

Cale recalled the things Park Jin Tae had shouted to him in the past.

Park Jin Tae ended up dying while fighting to the end.

Grandma Kim had lost her life in that battle as well.

Park Jin Tae was a bad bastard and he hated him, but…

‘In some ways, he saved my life.’

Kim Rok Soo was able to survive in the past thanks to him.

Cale looked toward the shelter.

He would erase his regrets one by one.

He would save this shelter, and then…

‘I'll go meet the team leader and Choi Jung Soo.’

Seomyeon, Busan.

That was where an unranked monster first appeared.

Cale subconsciously blurted out loud.

“I wonder if everybody is okay-”

He started to recall the faces of his friends one by one, starting with Raon.

How would he be in the real world right now? Would he have fainted?

He started to become concerned about his friends.

Honestly speaking, he was most worried about them.

That was why…

‘I need to find a way out of here first.’

There had to be a way to get out.

There had to be a way to get out of here without accepting the blood-colored eyes’ offer.

He recalled the last thing the blood-colored eyes told him.

‘Flail around in despair. I will give you the power to escape from despair.’

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

Cale clenched his skinny hands into fists.

‘Flail around in despair? That won’t happen. I’ll just make it not a despair anymore.’

He had no way to know for sure, but he felt as if he would only be able to return if he
destroyed the despair.

‘It’s just a feeling.’

It was his intuition.

However, there was a good amount of analysis in it as well.

It was because of what the blood-colored eyes told him.

‘I will give you the power to escape from despair.’

Didn't that sound like he would be able to get out of this situation and return to the
real world if he had the power to destroy the despair within it?

It had also called it a test.

Cale thought that it was a reasonable thought.

And looking at this situation with that in mind…

‘It’s doable.’

The current Cale was able to destroy these despairs.

It was worth trying.

He needed to first figure out today's date.

‘I also need to check who is here.’

He needed to figure out the people who would fight based on the present and his
information of the future.

And most importantly.

‘I need to change myself first.’

He needed to get his abilities awakened.

However, an ability awakening was something nobody could predict.

Cale’s abilities were only awakened after he started working for his company.

That was why, realistically speaking, it would be close to impossible for Cale to awaken
his future abilities as he pleased.

‘…But I’ve experienced the sensation that comes with abilities being awakened.’

It felt as if he was seeing a new world.

If he thinks about that sensation and does similar things as to when his abilities
actually awakened, couldn't he potentially get them awakened sooner?

‘…It’s fine if my abilities don’t awaken while I'm at the central shelter, but it would be
great to have them when I go up against the unranked monster.’

Cale's expression stiffened and Grandma Kim tightly grabbed Cale’s hand that was
over his stomach.
Shaaaaaaaaaaa-

Cale then saw a yellow light surround his stomach.

He subconsciously started to speak with urgency.

“Grandma, I'm okay!”

“You’re not okay.”

Cale could feel the pain in his stomach disappear.

Any bruises or injuries on his stomach probably healed right away.

This was grandma’s healing ability.

“…How can you use your power for such a useless thing?”

Grandma Kim's abilities could only heal external injuries and had limited uses per
week.

She could use it as many times as she wanted for small injuries such as bruises, but
she had a strict limit for injuries such as bone fractures or significant blood loss.

The amount of healing power necessary was different based on the type of injury.

That was why Park Jin Tae wanted Grandma Kim to use her powers for healing his
precious attack team members who could fight against monsters.

Grandma Kim smiled gently after hearing Cale's comment.

“This is not useless, it is important.”

The grandma got up and motioned for Cale to get up as well.

“Hey, Rok Soo. Let's go inside.”

Cale slowly raised his body after seeing that warm smile.

He didn't have any pain anymore.

“Hey, you stupid idiot!”

“Hyung!”

Cale turned toward the voice calling out to him.

He could see people rushing out of the shelter.

Two students, one who seemed to be in college and the other in high school, rushed
over and started to support Cale.

“Hey, are you okay?”

“Hyung, are you okay?”

“Ah.”

These people were here as well.

Lee Jin Joo. Lee Seung Won.

These two were siblings and ability users.

‘Of course, they have abilities that other ability users look down on.’

Their abilities were seen as useless abilities right now.

‘…And these two.’

They also died.

Cale suddenly felt as if someone was clenching his heart and found it hard to breathe.

“I'm fine.”

But his face and voice did not show any signs of it.

“Aigoo. Look at you acting all tough!”

Lee Jin Joo snorted, but her eyes were full of concern as she checked to make sure Kim
Rok Soo was okay.

Cale gently pushed Lee Jin Joo and Lee Seung Won away and walked in front of them.

“Let’s go inside.”

The siblings blankly looked at Cale for a moment before shaking their heads and
following him inside.

“You should just let us support you. Why are you walking so slowly?”

“Hyung, we're going to go back in first! We came in the middle of work!”

The people inside the central shelter all had work they needed to complete every day.

Of course, those jobs were only given to people who had Park Jin Tae's approval.

Kim Rok Soo did not have his approval, which was why they always tried to start shit
with him in the name of running errands.

“Isn't it so nice to see them relying on each other?”

Grandma Kim smiled while looking at the siblings who were walking away.

Cale looked at the siblings instead of responding.

It made him think of On and Hong.

“Grandma.”

“Hmm?”

"What is today's date?”

“Today?”

“Yes, ma’am.”

Grandma Kim looked at him with confusion while wondering why he was asking such
a thing before answering in a soft voice.
“Today is the 24th.”

“October?”

“Yes? Why are you suddenly asking about the date?”

“Just because.”

October 24th.

Cale recalled today's date.

“…Fuck.”

“…Hey, Rok Soo.”

“I'm sorry. I just suddenly thought of something that made me angry.”

He smiled toward Grandma Kim who was looking at him with concern after hearing
his coarse language.

Grandma Kim, who had not seen Rok Soo smile in a while, opened her eyes wide in
shock for a moment before gently smiling and nodding her head.

Cale repeated the word in his mind as he continued to walk next to her.

‘Fuck fuck fuck!’

The only thing on his mind was swearing.

In one day…

During day time on October 25th…

Central shelters around the world will be destroyed.

It was the start date of the incident that would fill the hearts of the people who barely
started to adjust to the changes since the cataclysm with despair.

‘I only have one day?’

Cale walked into the central shelter.

“I'm going to go work now too.”

Grandma Kim headed for her post while Cale took in the sight inside the central
shelter.

‘It really is the early stages.’

There were a lot of different people doing their jobs on the first floor of the building.

None of them paid any attention to Kim Rok Soo.

‘They’re all busy doing their best to survive.’

Cale continued to walk and headed for his spot.

There was a fake wall that came up to his waist once he got past the entrance area.

He could see people pretty much right next to one another once he got past that fake
wall.

These people were in a similar situation as Kim Rok Soo.

They had not awakened their abilities and didn’t have any skills nor techniques that
were necessary in the world right now.

'Of course, people will realize that is not the case later on when society is revitalized.’

They were also doing the work assigned to them.

Step step.

Cale walked past them and kept moving.

The second floor of the central shelter was where the ability users and useful humans
resided.

The Lee siblings had a bedroom on the second floor.

‘Well, it’s too shabby to call it a bedroom or lodging.’

It was a time when any spot that allowed someone to escape the rain and wind was
considered lodging and any nice cloth they could find was used as blankets.

They were lucky to find enough food for one day.

‘The Park Jin Tae group did share though.’

Park Jin Tae and his lackeys went out to find food for the group.

They did it while dodging and running away from monsters.

‘They did fight against some, but unlike the future, this was a time when even grade 3
monsters were difficult to handle.’

People had awakened their abilities but still could not use them properly.

Abilities could be used for many things, and this was called 'development.’

‘But right now is not the time to attempt that.’

The foundations of society had crumbled.

There wasn't even any electricity.

They were surrounded by darkness every night.

The only things that kept it from being completely dark at night were the fireplaces
around the shelter that had fires that never went out.

Cale looked down at his hands as he walked.

‘They’re so skinny.’

His body was extremely skinny right now.

Park Jin Tae's lackeys only gave just enough so that they did not die.

‘That’s the only way they can spread it out to everybody inside this shelter.’
It was not easy to find food.

Kim Rok Soo managed to survive on the bare minimum.

‘The people of value received more food.’

That was why the ability users who had good relationships with Kim Rok Soo would
offer him some of their shares from time to time.

‘…The world is not bleak.’

Even though the times seemed hopeless, the hearts of the people living through it had
not gone completely dark.

That was why Cale didn't think Park Jin Tae was a bad person.

‘There are many places that don't even give out food like this.’

A lot of people didn't care whether others starved to death.

In such a situation, although Park Jin Tae looked down and messed with people like
Kim Rok Soo, he still gave them enough food to survive.

‘Well, he does beat up resistant people like me though. No, he just really hated me.’

But he still gave out enough so that their legs would have enough strength to run away
if they ever ran into a monster.

The bastard had turned this central shelter into his own kingdom, but he still kept
himself humane.

He did not cross the line a fellow human should not cross.

He at least gave them their share of food.

Cale had realized something about it once he became older.

‘The fact that Park Jin Tae pushed the skillful people up might have been the reason
this system was able to be maintained.’
All societal systems had been destroyed at that time.

How many ability users would want to share the food that they worked so hard to
find?

But since Park Jin Tae treated the ability users well, they stayed with this food sharing
system.

‘And Park Jin Tae is currently a very strong attack-type ability user.’

There was a reason team leader Lee Soo Hyuk left the place to Park Jin Tae.

Park Jin Tae was a very strong dealer and a decent tanker.

Lee Chul Min and the others who followed Park Jin Tae were not bad for the early
stages either.

‘I will use Park Jin Tae.’

Cale was slowly planning things in his mind.

‘There’s also Grandma Kim, Jin Joo noona, and Seung Won.’

There were also many other people he needed for this task.

Cale returned to his spot.

Kim Rok Soo’s spot in this central shelter…

It was at the edge of the first floor.

It was right next to a crumbling ceiling.

It was right by the back door of the first floor.

“…The rain leaked here.”

Kim Rok Soo’s spot was the only spot in the building where rain leaked through the
cracked ceiling.
“Why are you talking to yourself like that?”

He heard a voice at that moment.

It was a husky and aged man's voice.

“You chose that spot.”

That was the case.

Cale had chosen this spot as that person mentioned.

Park Jin Tae placed the ability-less Cale to the first floor and he chose this leaking spot
as his spot.

"What's wrong? Do you suddenly want to move elsewhere? What happened to

pretending like you were sacrificing yourself for the others?”

Cale sighed and turned his head.

“Hey mister. Why don't you go elsewhere if you want to talk shit?”

“Kekeke! Who says I'm talking shit?!”

Cale looked toward the middle-aged man lying on the next spot.

There was nothing under his knees.

He was one of the people that team leader Lee Soo Hyuk had saved.

His name was Jang Man Soo.

“Hey! I heard you got beat up by Park Jin Tae and his gang. Are you okay?”

Jang Man Soo raised his neck and leaned on the wall.

“Those terrible bastards. Where is there even to hit such a skinny kid? They’ll be
punished by the heavens!”

“It's fine. Grandma healed me.”

Cale looked next to Jang Man Soo… and sat down in his spot.

“Hmm? Grandma did? Aigoo, why does that grandma care about you so much? Why
did she heal a good for nothing like you?”

“Are you saying you're upset that I got healed?”

“Oh come on~ Of course not. Kehehe! I just said it! It was a joke, a joke!”

Cale quietly looked at Jang Man Soo who was joking with him.

Jang Man Soo.

He was someone who lost his entire family because of the cataclysm.

He had a wife and two kids and was on his way to work when it happened.

He barely managed to get back to his house only to see that all of them were already
dead.

He saw the monster that had killed his family there.

He apparently ran for his life from monsters to get to his house.

There had only been one thing on his mind as he did that.

He was thinking that his family was alive at home and that he would take his family
somewhere safe.

But he charged toward the monster the moment he saw that his family was dead.

The thought of running away never ever crossed his mind.

He just felt as if he could only continue to live if he ripped the monster in front of him
to pieces.

The monster took both of his legs and Jang Man Soo was planning on dying.

He didn't think there was a reason to live in this world without his family.
But the team leader saved him and Jang Man Soo was someone who was barely alive
and living on.

“Hey mister.”

"What is it?”

Cale quietly observed him before lowering his body.

He got closer to Jang Man Soo.

“Hey mister.”

“Why are you suddenly acting like this, you punk?”

As Jang Man Soo looked toward Kim Rok Soo who was acting differently than normal
with confusion…

Cale quietly whispered.

“Please help me out.”

Jang Man Soo looked confused.

“Me? You're talking to me? What help can I be? Did you go crazy after getting beaten
up?”

“Mister.”

Cale whispered quietly so that nobody else could hear.

“Your ability awakened not too long ago, didn’t it?”

Jang Man Soo's pupils started to shake.

His jaw dropped and he looked astonished.

Cale started to smile while looking at his reaction.

It seemed to be a sad smile.

Jang Man Soo also died in the past when the central shelter disappeared.

He died fighting.

‘Kehehe! I'm relieved! This time, I'm going first after protecting people!’

His ability apparently awakened not long before the central shelter was destroyed.

His memory of Jang Man Soo remained with Kim Rok Soo that once he became Cale…

The first thing he chose to get was a shield.

“Mister, your ability is a shield, right?”

Jang Man Soo stiffened up and could not say anything.

‘How did he realize that my ability awakened?’

People didn't look different even after awakening their ability.

That was why there was no way to tell unless they saw the person using the ability or
the person told them.

There were some ability users whose appearances changed with it, but Jang Man Soo's
case wasn’t like that.

‘But Kim Rok Soo realized that? And he knows what my ability is as well?’

How could he not be astonished in such a situation?

Cale whispered to him.

"The central shelter will be destroyed soon.”

“W, what?!”

His mouth that had closed back in shock dropped once more at this even more
shocking comment.

Jang Man Soo raised his voice with an extremely shocked expression.
“Shh.”

Cale quieted him down and whispered very quietly.

“And I know where the new central shelter will appear.”

‘What is this punk saying right now?’

Jang Man Soo was looking at Kim Rok Soo as if he was looking at someone he had just
met.

“Mister.”

But Kim Rok Soo's eyes were more serious than ever.

One word after another.

Each word that Kim Rok Soo said to him struck Jang Man Soo’s ear.

“I plan on letting everybody here move to the new central shelter without dying.”

Jang Man Soo barely managed to speak.

“You- you, how do you know about those……?”

Smile.

Kim Rok Soo started to smile.

“I got an ability too.”

It was a very strong ability where he knew the future.

Jang Man Soo could only respond in one way to Kim Rok Soo's comment.

“Y, you're lying……!”

He then quickly added on.

“N, no! Rok Soo, I'm not saying you're lying about having an ability! It’s great if you got
an ability! You’re qualified to get one! But, that-”

He could not speak properly. He then continued to speak after seeing Kim Rok Soo’s
firm gaze.

“…Knowing people's abilities and the future… it’s hard to believe that such an ability
exists.”

Jang Man Soo said that and then lowered his head for a moment.

He then raised it back, looked at Kim Rok Soo's gaze, and sighed.

“…You’re being serious.”

Kim Rok Soo's gaze did not seem as if he was lying.

“I guess that you aren’t the type to lie.”

Jang Man Soo didn’t know what else to say. Of course, there were a lot of things he
wanted to say.

In fact, he had too many things he wanted to say.

‘He figured out my ability? Did he awaken an ability that lets him know other people's
abilities? No.’
That would not explain everything.

‘He also prophesized the future.’

He said that the central shelter would be destroyed soon.

‘He guessed my ability correctly, so there's a good chance he’s telling the truth about
the central shelter too.’

He was living life day by day without thinking much about it, but that was why Jang
Man Soo had been able to observe the people in this shelter while sitting off to one
side.

‘Kim Rok Soo is not the type of person to lie about something that involves people's
lives.’

If he was to do something like that, then it would have to be someone else wearing
Kim Rok Soo's skin.

“…Are you really Kim Rok Soo?”

“Hey mister, do you want me to say the things you say when you sleep? Or maybe you
want me to imitate your snoring?”

“Ahem. I guess you really are Kim Rok Soo based on how you are nagging me like that.”

Jang Man Soo continued to sigh in disbelief.

“…Haaa.”

He looked toward Cale with a complicated expression.

“…The cent-”

Jang Man Soo stopped midsentence and looked around. Everybody seemed to be doing
their work as nobody was paying any attention to them.

He continued to speak quieter and stealthier than Kim Rok Soo had done.

“The central shelters are really going to end up like that?”

“Yes.”

The response was simple.

Jang Man Soo's lips started to shake.

He was thinking about the terrible scene that would play out if the central shelter was
destroyed.

Pat.

Cale then put a hand on Jang Man Soo's shoulder.

“Hey, mister. Please help me.”

Jang Man Soo was necessary for this task.

“…I probably won't be much help-”

“That’s not true. Mister, you still don’t know the strength of your ability.”

As Cale mentioned, Jang Man Soo knew that his ability had awakened but had never
used it before.

He was thinking that a shield was useless for someone like him who couldn't even
walk.

‘…More than that… I just didn’t want to live a fierce life.’

Jang Man Soo did not want to say this thought out loud.

His mind started to become complicated.

‘Everybody here might die.’

He didn't care if he died alone. But to watch someone die again?

Especially people who had helped him even when he couldn't walk properly?

He then recalled something Kim Rok Soo had just said.

‘I plan on letting everybody here move to the new central shelter without dying.’

Without anybody dying.

Those words struck deep inside Jang Man Soo’s mind.

He thought of his dead daughter. His daughter would have started college and showed
the world everything she had if the world didn't end up like this.

That daughter and Kim Rok Soo were the same age.

That was why he wanted to give even one thing extra to Kim Rok Soo who was trying
his best to survive after having already lived a difficult life.

“…I.”

He asked Rok Soo a question.

“Will I be of any help?”

He could see Rok Soo smiling at his question.

He truly seemed to be happy.

“Yes, sir. I definitely need your help.”

Jang Man Soo.

Cale really needed this man.

‘The mister doesn’t know yet.’

He didn't know the strength of his ability.

“…It’ll be hard for me to even move properly if a battle breaks out……”

“That’s not important.”

Jang Man Soo could feel Kim Rok Soo's hand that was on his shoulder pushing down.
Kim Rok Soo's hand seemed to be cheering him on while his voice was full of certainty.
“Shields are only cool if they stand firm without moving.”

Jang Man Soo suddenly felt his mind start to fluctuate.

His mind that had been still without any movement was causing small waves every
time Rok Soo said something.

“And don't worry, I'll carry you around, mister.”

Jang Man Soo chuckled at that and joked back.

“Bad! How can a stick like you carry a husky person like me?”

“I guess that is true.”

Jang Man Soo could see Rok Soo chuckling as well.

“Hey, Rok Soo.”

“Yes?”

“I will also help you.”

“Thank you very much.”

“No, thank you.”

Jang Man Soo truly meant that.

He finally realized it.

‘My time is finally starting to move again.’

The time that had stopped on the day of the cataclysm, no, the moment he got home
and saw the terrible state of his family members, was starting to move again.

‘I will create a different result this time.’

He had made up his mind.

Cale started to think while looking at Jang Man Soo.

Jang Man Soo didn’t know about his ability yet.

Cale was going to make it so that he could use his power effectively and efficiently.

If that could happen…

‘Then I’ll definitely be able to save over half of the people.’

Jang Man Soo working with Cale meant over half of the people here could live.

“Hey, mister. I will give you a detailed explanation now.”

“Hmm? Yes, yes. I should listen.”

“Yes, sir. So, let’s go talk outside the back door.”

There were no monsters there because it was right by the shelter, but more importantly,
there were no people there. It was a perfect spot to have a secret discussion.

“Okay. I’m going to need you to help me though.”

“Of course.”

Cale carried Jang Man Soo on his back and walked out the back door.

Of course, Cale’s body staggered a bit.

“…I'm sorry.”

“…No. You know I've always been weak.”

“…I guess that is true.”

He staggered at first, but they were quickly able to get outside as their spots were by
the door. Thankfully, nobody seemed to be paying attention to the two of them.

Cale put Jang Man Soo down on a flat area of the destroyed building next to the back
door.
Click.

The old back door was closed and Cale started to speak.

“You must listen carefully to everything I'm about to tell you.”

“Okay.”

Jang Man Soo looked at Cale with both nervousness and determination.

Cale started to speak at that moment.

“The central shelter will be destroyed tomorrow.”

“What?!”

Jang Man Soo’s eyes opened wide.

“Tomorrow? It’s happening tomorrow?”

“Yes, sir.”

“T, This! It's going to suddenly happen like that?!”

“I did say it would be soon, didn’t I?”

“Hooo!”

Jang Man Soo patted his thigh with his hand over and over as if he didn’t know what
to do.

“Oh, and the new central shelter will not open until 24 hours after this central shelter
is destroyed.”

“…Huh?”

Cale looked at the blankly staring Jang Man Soo and calmly continued to speak.

“Basically, to put it in the simplest of terms… a maximum of 24 hours. That’s how long
we need to survive in this building that will no longer be a shelter.
"Wait, what kind of-”

“That also means we need to spend one night.”

Jang Man Soo was at a loss for words.

His eyes looked at Cale who seemed completely calm.

That calmness made Jang Man Soo barely able to speak.

“…W, what is the plan?”

“The first goal is achieved since you said you will help me out, mister.”

“…What is the second goal?”

The second goal was simple.

“It’s the same as the first goal.”

Cale looked toward the third floor of the building.

“I need to convince other people.”

“…Are you planning on meeting with Park Jin Tae? Do you think that bastard will believe
you?”

Cale looked back toward Jang Man Soo.

Smile.

He then started to smile.

Jang Man Soo realized that Kim Rok Soo had changed after seeing this smile every so
often.

It made him think that this punk really might have gotten an ability.

“Yes, sir. He will believe me.”

Jang Man Soo could not help but nod his head after hearing this voice that was full of
confidence.

Drip. Drip.

A drop of blood flowed down to his chin and fell to the ground.

“…Huuuuuu.”

The man took a deep breath before looking down at the person blocking his path.

“What do you want?”

Park Jin Tae who had returned from hunting was looking at Kim Rok Soo.

“I have something to say.”

Lee Chul Min, one of Park Jin Tae's subordinates, started to frown.

“Hey! You mindless bastard! Can't you see that we just got back from hunting? Hmm?
Can’t you see our conditions?”

Cale slowly looked around at the people who had gone hunting.

All of them looked like messes.

There were many injured people as well.

That was why he could tell that this hunt was neither a game nor predators hunting
easy prey.

It was a desperate hunt to find food for survival.

Cale could see a few bags in their hands.

They probably went to a mart or grocery store to gather the food that was still edible.
It was usually canned food or ramen, but those were very precious as well.
Cale responded to Lee Chul Min who was glaring at him as if he wanted to pierce a
hole through his head.

“I can clearly see it. That’s why I'm thankful.”

Park Jin Tae's eyes clouded over.

But Lee Chul Min's face turned red.

“Wow. Did this bastard speak informally to me?”

He seemed to have gotten angry at the fact that Kim Rok Soo who was two or three
years younger than him spoke informally to him.

But Cale’s gaze was cold as he looked at him.

‘Lee Chul Min, this bastard was the first to run away.’

He had run away while Park Jin Tae was helping the weak and useless people escape
first.

The weak who were being led by Lee Chul Min became frantic when Lee Chul Min ran
away and the situation turned even more chaotic.

Cale had made up his mind as he clearly remembered that moment.

‘You won't be able to run away this time, you bastard.’

Lee Chul Min had the third strongest attacking ability in this place.

Shouldn't he properly use such a precious asset?

Smile.

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

“Please and thank you.”

“What? Did this bastard go crazy?”

Lee Chul Min's face viciously scrunched up.

Seeing a normally vicious bastard’s face becoming vicious made him seem very heinous.

Park Jin Tae raised his hand at that moment.

“Enough.”

Lee Chul Min shut his mouth. Of course, Cale didn’t.

“I have something I need to tell you, sir.”

Park Jin Tae carefully looked at Kim Rok Soo.

He was very tired after coming back from the hunt, but…

“You said something you ‘need’ to tell me?”

“Yes, sir. Something I must tell you.”

Park Jin Tae nodded his head.

“Fine. Let’s go to my room.”

Lee Chul Min was shocked at this response, but Park Jin Tae started to walk toward his
room on the third floor as if he said everything he needed to say.

He heard Kim Rok Soo's voice behind him at that moment.

“We need to call a few other people over as well.”

Park Jin Tae looked back toward Rok Soo.

Park Jin Tae started to walk again in a few seconds as he responded.

“Call them all over.”

“Yes, sir. I will be up shortly.”

Cale turned away from Park Jin Tae and motioned to Grandma Kim and the Lee siblings
who were anxiously watching him chat with Park Jin Tae.

“Let’s go up.”

They needed to hear as well.

He needed them to be with him as well.

“So, what is it you need to tell me?”

Park Jin Tae sat down on a couch that was extremely rare in this world and looked at
Cale.

Lee Chul Min, Grandma Kim, Lee Jin Joo, and Lee Seung Won were in Park Jin Tae's
room.

Grandma Kim sat down on the chair to Park Jin Tae’s right, but everybody else was
standing as they looked at Cale.

Their gazes were all full of questions.

However, Cale paid no attention to the gazes focused on him and just made eye contact
with Park Jin Tae.

“I awakened my ability.”

“……!”

Park Jin Tae's eyes opened wide almost instantly.

He then started to smile.

“…That is completely unexpected.”

Even Lee Chul Min looked at Kim Rok Soo up and down in shock.

‘This bastard got an ability?’

However, Grandma Kim's face was glowing. It was the same for the siblings as well.

“My goodness, Rok Soo! That’s wonderful!”

“Wow, Kim Rok Soo!”

“Hyung!”

Cale started to speak again.

“That is why I am able to see the future.”

“…What?”

Silence almost immediately filled the area again.

“Ah, of course, I'm also able to see a few pieces of information other people are not
able to see.”

Lee Chul Min mouth opened without him thinking about it.

“What nonsense-”

Cale walked toward Park Jin Tae at that moment.

“Hey!”

Lee Chul Min tried to keep Cale away, but Park Jin Tae raised his hand to stop him.

Cale walked right up to Park Jin Tae without any hesitation.

“…Kim Rok Soo.”

Cale lowered his body and whispered quietly so that only Park Jin Tae could hear as
Park Jin Tae quietly said his name.

“You’re an ability user with multiple abilities, right?”

Until Park Jin Tae died…

This was his secret that nobody else in the world knew about.

“…You-, you!”

Park Jin Tae's pupils started to shake.

Cale took one step back at that moment.

He then continued to speak in a calm voice.

“Tomorrow at noon. There will be a moment when the sun is covered by a shadow.”

The room was chaotic because of Cale’s revealed ability and his interaction with Park
Jin Tae.

“It will last one minute.”

Cale was the only calm person here.

"After that one minute, all central shelters around the world would become ineffective.”

His voice stabbed into everyone else’s ears.

“The nearby monsters will all start to attack the central shelters that are no longer
useful.”

Cale was the only one speaking in this terrible silence with all eyes focused on him.

“The monsters will come charging forth like a tsunami.”

A suffocating silence filled the room.

Lee Chul Min was the one to break the silence.

“…A, are you out of your mind?”

He could speak easily now that he opened his mouth to speak.

His voice slowly started to get louder.

“I always thought this son of a bitch was crazy! How dare you spew such bullshit
without knowing what you should and should not say? Huh?”

Lee Chul Min approached Cale.

He looked ready to grab him by the collar at any moment.

“Enough!”

Park Jin Tae's loud voice filled the room at that moment.

“That’s enough, Lee Chul Min.”

“Leader-nim!”

“Be quiet!”

Lee Chul Min's anger instantly subsided after hearing Park Jin Tae get angry.

Park Jin Tae looked toward Kim Rok Soo.

“…Explain it in detail.”

Cale turned away from Park Jin Tae and looked at Grandma Kim and the siblings.
“…Hey.”

“Hyung… this-”

The siblings looked at Cale with flustered expressions

On the other hand, Grandma Kim was the calmest person in the room.

She gently smiled toward Cale. However, Cale could tell that this was a forced smile.

She didn’t want to show that her mind was completely chaotic.

She was putting on a front for Kim Rok Soo who was speaking.

She smiled as best as she could before starting to speak.

“Hey, Rok Soo. You know the weight of your words, right?”

That was why Cale had no choice but to respond.

“Yes, ma’am, I do.”

He looked back toward Park Jin Tae.

“It is exactly as I said, sir.”

Tomorrow at noon.

A solar eclipse would happen throughout the world at the same time.

That alone was enough to realize that this was no regular solar eclipse.

And one minute later…

Once the sun shone down on the world again…

Every central shelter on Earth would disappear.

Park Jin Tae recalled what Cale said word for word before repeating the last part.
“…Finally, the monsters will charge in like a tsunami and attack the central shelter.”

They all heard Kim Rok Soo's voice again.

“The monsters will not randomly attack together. They will attack based on their
Grade.”

“…Grade?”

“Yes, sir. Grade. It is based on a monster’s strength and abilities.”

Park Jin Tae started to frown.

“…Monster Grades-”

Grades had yet to be determined at this time.

Cale knew this was the case as well.

However, people had investigated the issue of the central shelters and the monsters
later on.

It had been based on what people remembered, but they were able to gather a lot of
information that way.

One of them was the Grades of the attacking monsters.

“It starts with those at Grade 3 and below. Then the Grade 2 monsters will come.
Finally, the Grade 1 monsters will attack. Of course, Grade 1 monsters are the strongest.”

That was why there was talk in the future about whether this pattern was some sort
of training for humans to be able to fight against the unranked monsters.

Of course, the reality was hell for it to just be training.

Park Jin Tae looked toward Kim Rok Soo with difficult emotions.

‘I definitely felt that something seemed different, but… ’

Kim Rok Soo had felt different than normal after being hit earlier.
That was the reason he had chosen to chat with him, but…

This was too difficult to accept.

Park Jin Tae opened his mouth to speak.

“…Are you out of your mind?”

That was the only way he could ask.

He then heard a response.

“Are you questioning my ability? Would you like me to tell you more?”

That response made Park Jin Tae shut his mouth.

‘You’re an ability user with multiple abilities, right?’

He heard the thing Kim Rok Soo whispered in his ear once again.

It was such a large secret that he couldn’t even get angry at the fact that Kim Rok Soo
was speaking informally to him.

Park Jin Tae looked toward Cale again.

He pointed to himself.

“Tell me one more thing.”

Tell him one more of his secrets.

Cale chuckled at the gesture and walked over to Park Jin Tae.

Park Jin Tae's grip tightened on the couch as he watched Cale walk over.

‘He'll definitely tell me about the ability I'm hiding.’

Park Jin Tae started to get nervous.

Kim Rok Soo whispered at that moment.

“You are going to fight in the frontlines, putting your life on the line, if danger arrives
at this place.”

Park Jin Tae's pupils shook even more than before.

“You’re going to say that the old and weak people are getting in your way of fighting
and evacuate them first. Then will be people like me who don’t have any abilities.”

His voice was extremely calm as if he knew he was telling the truth.

Kim Rok Soo had already experienced it once before.

“The last. Once it is the last moment and everybody else is gone… That’s when you will
run away.”

Cale moved away from Park Jin Tae's ear and looked at him.

The two of them made eye contact and Cale started to speak again.

“That's the kind of person you are.”

Park Jin Tae slowly started to speak.

“Ha, hahaha-”

His laughter filled the room.

He was laughing so hard that he was starting to tear up.

“…Haaa.”

He then caught his breath…

And started to speak with a smile also as if he was sighing.

“Looks like I had an even bigger secret found out.”

He then heard Kim Rok Soo's voice again.

“I'm going to save you too.”

Park Jin Tae's eyes opened wide. He looked at Kim Rok Soo with a piercing gaze before
finally starting to speak.

"What is your plan?”

“Leader-nim!”

Lee Chul Min who had quietly been standing there raised his voice as if he couldn’t let
this continue, but Park Jin Tae didn't even give him a glance.

He was only focused on Cale’s lips.

Cale slowly started to speak as if to respond to that focused gaze.

“We must create an attack team. We will then initiate a defensive battle. The center of
the defensive battle will be-”

Cale could not continue speaking.

“Leader-nim, are you really going to believe this bastard-”

“Silence!”

Tap!

The sound of his hand slapping down on the wooden armrest sharply echoed in the
room.

Lee Chul Min looked toward the person in shock.

Grandma Kim.

She was the one who had told Lee Chul Min to be quiet.

“Rok Soo, keep going.”

“Yes, ma'am.”

Park Jin Tae showed his agreement with Grandma Kim by remaining silent.
Cale continued to speak.

“The center of the defensive battle will be Jang Man Soo. It needs to be him.”

Everybody in the room flinched at this sudden name that was mentioned.

This was not a name they had expected to hear at all.

“The mister’s ability specializes in defense.”

Park Jin Tae subconsciously started to mumble after hearing what Cale said.

“…Mr. Jang Man Soo awakened an ability?”

“That’s right. You can confirm it tomorrow.”

The extremely calm voice made it seem as if he was telling the truth.

Cale then continued to speak to Park Jin Tae.

“And Park Jin Tae, you will be the center of the attack team.”

Park Jin Tae gulped and started to speak.

“But isn’t it better to go to a different temporary shelter rather than protecting this
central shelter?”

He thought it would be better to move to a temporary shelter and avoid the monsters’
attacks that way instead of defending if a horde of monsters were going to attack.

“Well, we would need to go to multiple temporary shelters to fit everyone.”

The central shelters were much larger than the other shelters. That was why they
would need to split up and go to different shelters.

They would then have to keep moving to different temporary shelters.

They had no idea when any temporary shelter would disappear.

They were not going to stay safe forever.

Cale shook his head.

“That is not a good idea.”

“…Why?”

“Unfortunately, the monsters will attack the temporary shelters as well. Of course, the
number of monsters attacking those shelters will be less than here at the central
shelter, but it will not be a small number as it will be based on the number of people
who will be at the temporary shelter.”

“Ho.”

Someone let out a gasp.

But what Cale said next put the people even more at a loss for words.

Cale calmly stated the things that ended up happening.

“Furthermore, the temporary shelters will gradually lose their abilities once the
central shelters disappear.”

Even Lee Chul Min did not bare his fangs at Cale this time.

“…So, you’re saying that in the end, all shelters will disappear?”

“Yes.”

Lee Chul Min's voice was shaking after hearing Cale’s firm response.

“…That will be hell.”

His voice could not help but shake as he imagined hell on earth.

“The world will only be without any shelters for three hours.”

Park Jin Tae looked toward Cale again.

Cale continued to speak as everybody's gazes were focused on him.

“A different looking central shelter will appear one day after these central shelters
disappear.”

“Then we can go there!”

Cale nodded his head at Lee Jin Joo's statement.

"As long as we can survive one night that is.”

Park Jin Tae brushed his face with both hands.

He didn't question whether Cale was telling the truth or not anymore.

They had all faced this unbelievable situation known as the cataclysm already.

They always had to prepare for the worst.

That was especially the case if the worst-case scenario was going to be hell.

Park Jin Tae opened his mouth to speak.

“Does a Grade 1 monster have to be as strong as the bastard with three horns?”

Monsters did not have names yet and were called out by their characteristics at this
time.

Cale nodded his head.

“That monster is one of the Grade 1 monsters.”

“And those things will come attacking like a tsunami?”

“After the Grade 3 and Grade 2 monsters go by.”

Lee Chul Min subconsciously started to speak.

“O, our attack team can’t handle it if more than four of them come at once! We will die!
But they're going to come like a tsunami? How is that possible?”

“Of course, there will be less of them than the Grade 3 and Grade 2 monsters.”
“That’s obvious! There aren’t as many of those strong bastards! Even still, even still,
there has to be at least more than ten of them, right? Especially if all of the ones around
us come to attack!”

“Definitely more.”

Lee Chul Min's eyes were full of fear.

He heard Park Jin Tae's stern voice at that moment.

"We can’t last through that.”

He continued to speak.

“It is impossible. All of us can't survive.”

“No.”

Cale was stern.

"We will persist.”

“…How are you so sure about that?”

Unlike Park Jin Tae's voice that was full of hesitation, Kim Rok Soo’s voice had no
hesitation at all.

“We can move to the new central shelter without any of us dying.”

“…How?”

‘How are you able to say such things?’

That was what Park Jin Tae’s eyes were asking.

Smile.

Kim Rok Soo started to smile.

The skinny young man with a sharp gaze started to smile brightly.
The blood-colored eyes bastard had made a big mistake.

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“Data.”

Park Jin Tae subconsciously asked back.

“…Data?”

The ability that Cale had awakened while he was Kim Rok Soo could not be used ‘right
now.’

But that did not mean that the memories he had gathered had disappeared.

His power came not from the present nor the future, but from his experiences in the
past.

It was important to awaken his ability, but there was a reason he thought that this
battle at the central shelter was doable even without it.

Cale had a power that came from experience.

“I have all of the data regarding those monsters.”

Cale who was in Kim Rok Soo's body right now, the man who had lived as Kim Rok Soo
until he was thirty-six and then lived as Cale continued to speak.

“Weaknesses, movement patterns, attacking styles, and destructive force. I also know
the order in which the monsters will attack.”

His voice was starting to get stronger.

“All of that information is in my head.”

The records he had gathered while facing despair in the past.

That was a way to have hope right now.

“We can win because we have data.”

Data.

That had been the foundation for how humans were able to create societies on Earth
again, the thing that allowed them to go from being weaklings to proper opponents of
the monsters.

“Please trust my data. Then we will all survive.”

All of them looked toward Kim Rok Soo with complicated expressions.

But at that moment…

“I have always trusted you.”

One person walked over to Kim Rok Soo and grabbed his hand.

“…Grandma.”

“You're a good kid. You also have a strong will. Who would I trust if I can't trust
someone like you?”

He heard Park Jin Tae’s voice.

“Lee Chul Min.”

“Y, yes sir?”

“We are changing to emergency status immediately.”

Park Jin Tae got up from the couch.

He looked out the window.

The sun was already setting.

He walked past Cale and headed out the door.

“We don’t have much time so we will trust your prophecy for now, Kim Rok Soo. Lee
Chul Min!”
“Yes, sir!”

“Call over all of the ability users with attacking abilities.”

Lee Chul Min opened his mouth to speak as if he was a trained soldier.

“Yes si-”

It was at that moment.

Baaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaang!

They heard a loud explosion.

They could feel the old building slightly shaking.

“Aaaaaah!”

Lee Seung Won plopped down on the ground in shock as he shouted.

“O, outside!”

“What? Did a monster already appear?”

Lee Chul Min who was also shocked responded to him.

‘What is going on? I don’t have any memories of this happening.’

Cale looked out the window after hearing this sudden explosion as well.

This was the first time.

This was the first time he heard an explosion like this since coming here.

He could see the sunset outside the window.

“…T, this crazy!”

Cale started to frown.

He quickly rushed toward the door.

“Hey, what’s going on?!”

Park Jin Tae was shocked at his action but Cale pushed Park Jin Tae aside and ran out
the door.

He heard Lee Jin Joo mumbling behind him.

“…A black dragon?”

Cale started to frown even more.

‘Why is that here?! Why is that here right now?!’

The black Yong shooting up into the sky was the culprit behind the explosion.

It was a sparkling black Yong.

“Why is this punk, why, why?!”

Cale didn’t have any time to think.

He quickly ran down the stairs and headed outside the building.

“Hey, hey! Kim Rok Soo!”

He heard Jang Man Soo who was waiting on the first floor calling his name, but Cale
didn't have any time to look back.

He heard Park Jin Tae and Lee Seung Won’s voices behind him as well, but he still could
not look back.

Cale ran outside the building.

The sparkling black Yong that was shooting up to the sky was turning faint and
disappearing.

However, Cale ran in the direction of the Yong.

Cale could run without worrying about anything as there were no monsters near the
central shelter.

He heard Park Jin Tae's voice far behind him.

“Hey! You're about to step outside the boundary!”

That was the case.

He would soon be past the boundary and it would not be weird if monsters appeared
at any moment to attack Kim Rok Soo.

But Cale could not stop.

He opened his mouth to speak.

“Hey!”

He could see someone walking over to him in the distance.

“…You-”

Cale slowed down.

He could not believe what he was seeing.

However, the distance between him and the approaching person slowly became smaller.

The person had started to move faster as Cale slowed down.

And finally, the person stopped in front of Cale.

Cale started to speak.

“…You… why are you?”

The other person started to speak.

“You seem to be around my age right now, when is this?”

Cale finally managed to open his mouth that was difficult to open.

“Choi Han.”

Choi Han was standing in front of him.

The sparkling black Yong.

That was Choi Han’s skill.

“…How did you……?”

“I found a way to squeeze in.”

“What?”

Choi Han quietly looked at the skinny and shabby Kim Rok Soo as he continued to
speak.

“Cale-nim, you are currently unconscious and imprisoned inside a black orb.”

His voice was calm.

“I went to the Endable Kingdom, but I was unable to get near it. It is impossible to get
near it.”

What was he talking about?

Cale’s mind started to become complicated.

‘I'm imprisoned inside a black orb right now?’

His gaze was focused on Choi Han.

His clothes did not match this world, but his physical appearance that was perfect for
Korea was looking at him, at Kim Rok Soo.

“That is why I found a way to squeeze into Cale-nim’s mind, into the test.”

Cale was shocked that Choi Han knew about the test.
“How can you get involved-”

“I made a deal with the God of Death.”

“…What?”

Choi Han started to smile.

“I made a deal with the God of Death so that I could get involved with this test.”

He then quickly added on.

“I needed to help you, Cale-nim.”

Cale started to frown even more.

Choi Han calmly continued to speak while looking at his frown.

“Isn't it better to do it together than to do it alone?”

Cale suppressed his emotions that were trying to make him tear up and opened his
mouth to speak.

“…What did you offer him?”

What did he offer the God of Death to make the deal?

Cale asked and Choi Han answered as if it was nothing.

“He said that I would live longer than Raon. I didn't want that. I didn't want to be left
alone. So, I matched my lifespan to Raon's.”

“…You offered a part of your lifespan to the God of Death?”

“Yes. Only the time I would end up living alone.”

Cale couldn't help but say the following.

“You crazy bastard!”

“That’s what I wanted because I didn't want to be left alone. I didn't want to experience
solitude anymore.”

"Are you crazy?”

An innocent smile appeared on Choi Han's face.

“Unfortunately, I haven’t been normal for a long time.”

Cale heard people approaching behind him.

“Who is this?”

“Hyung, who is this person?”

Choi Han smiled brightly and responded once he heard Park Jin Tae and Lee Seung
Won who had followed Cale.

“I'm someone who came to pay for his meals.”

Cale had to bite his lips after hearing that because of the emotions filling his body.

He barely managed to speak.

“I'm sorry.”

That was the only thing he could offer Choi Han right now.

"And thank you. Really, thank you very much.”

Choi Han looked at the weak and skinny hand on his shoulder before smiling toward
Cale.

“What’s there to smile about?”

Cale was grumbling, but his face was unable to contain the emotions flowing inside
him.

Lee Seung Won who walked up to Cale looked at this with shock.

It was extremely rare for Kim Rok Soo to show his emotions like this.

But Park Jin Tae was even more shocked than Lee Seung Won.

‘For Kim Rok Soo to have such an expression-’

The fact that Kim Rok Soo was trying his best to get rid of the gratitude and emotions
visible on his face was shocking.

There had been many things to be shocked about thanks to Kim Rok Soo today, but
nothing was as shocking as this look right now.

‘Who is this? Is it someone he knew before? He seems extremely happy to see him.’

Park Jin Tae's eyes started to shake.

He was shocked by Kim Rok Soo, but he was also shocked at this new person that had
shown up.

Park Jin Tae barely managed to open his mouth to ask the same question again.

“…Kim Rok Soo, who is this?”

Kim Rok Soo, who was trying to calm his emotions, looked toward Park Jin Tae.

Kim Rok Soo's eyes clouded over at that moment.

Park Jin Tae was cautiously looking at Choi Han without being able to directly look at
him.

Smile.

Park Jin Tae could see Kim Rok Soo smile while looking at him.

Park Jin Tae realized it after seeing that smile on Kim Rok Soo's face.

‘Ah. This bastard really does know.’

This bastard really knew about his other ability.

Kim Rok Soo launched a confirming blow.

"What's wrong? Are you scared, sir?”

Park Jin Tae’s mouth opened and closed without being able to say anything.

Cale chuckled at this response.

Park Jin Tae's second ability.

That ability was quite abstract but in some ways, extremely detailed.

‘Pressure based on the opponent’s strength.’

Park Jin Tae could tell whether an opponent was stronger or weaker than him based
on the pressure he felt.

There was less pressure if they were weaker and stronger pressure for stronger
opponents.

That was why he had quietly done his job without complaining while Lee Soo Hyuk
who was stronger than him was at this central shelter.
‘That’s also why the death rate during Park Jin Tae's hunts was 0%.’

There were times when they came back without any food, but at least nobody who
went hunting with Park Jin Tae ever died.

It was because Park Jin Tae avoided all the strong enemies.

‘But he hid this from everyone.’

He hid his second ability from everybody else.

But Cale knew about this special ability.

It was because of the past when the central shelters were destroyed.

Grandma Kim had said the following to Park Jin Tae as the shelter was falling.

‘Jin Tae! It will be fine if we all fight together!’

‘No! It won't matter!’

Park Jin Tae had opposed it very firmly.

“Why are you saying that without even trying?’

Grandma Kim asked back and Park Jin Tae looked around at Grandma Kim and the
others who didn't want to run before almost shouting at them.

‘I can tell!’

Park Jin Tae was extremely annoyed.

Actually, thinking about it now, it was fear.

‘…It’s doable now, but we can't deal with the bastards behind these bastards! We must
run away!’

‘How would you know that-?’

‘I told you I know! It’s my ability! I'm able to tell whether something is strong or weak
based on the pressure I feel!’

Park Jin Tae had shouted at the top of his lungs.

‘I’ve never felt such pressure before! We’ll all die if we don't run!’

But the punk who said that didn't run away until the end.

He did that even though he should have known that he was going to die.

Based on Park Jin Tae's strength at that time, the pressure he felt was probably
extremely heavy to the point of death.

He would have felt the strength of the Grade 1 monsters charging at them like a tsunami.

Cale had only one term to describe Park Jin Tae.

‘Crazy bastard.’

Park Jin Tae was quite a crazy and funny bastard, but Cale could now understand why
he had not run away.

He was planning to do the same thing himself.

Cale quietly observed Park Jin Tae who was quietly staring at him with a piercing gaze.

Park Jin Tae's clenched fists were probably full of sweat right now.

Based on the cold sweats on his forehead, his back was probably covered in sweat as
well.

“He must be feeling an overwhelming pressure right now.’

The pressure that the current Choi Han gave Park Jin Tae must be severe.

Cale put some strength into the hand placed on Choi Han's shoulder.

He looked at Park Jin Tae and Lee Seung Won as he started to speak.

“This is my dongsaeng.”
Choi Han looked toward Cale.

“His name is Choi Han.”

Cale pretended not to see Choi Han's gaze and continued to speak.

"And he’s the strongest person here on this ground.”

Park Jin Tae's Lee Seung Won eyes opened wide.

“We will definitely not lose if this punk is with us.”

Cale had a bright smile on his face.

Park Jin Tae and Lee Seung Won could see the total trust in Kim Rok Soo's eyes.

“You can chat here.”

Park Jin Tae was peeking at Choi Han even as he said that.

‘…The strongest person on this ground?’

He wondered whether Kim Rok Soo was telling the truth, but he had no choice but to
accept it.

‘He's definitely stronger than anything I've seen.’

Park Jin Tae had felt an incomparable pressure coming from Choi Han that was worlds
apart from the Grade 1 monsters they discussed earlier.

‘Even Lee Soo Hyuk can’t match him.’

Lee Soo Hyuk would be nothing in front of this punk named Choi Han.

‘How could such a person-’

He thought that they might be able to survive through the horde of Grade 1 monsters
as Kim Rok Soo expected, especially with such a person here.
‘Of course, I don’t know for sure.’

This Choi Han character was stronger than one Grade 1 monster, however…

Grade 1 monsters were going to come at them like water flowing through.

He couldn't expect how Choi Han would compare to a large number of monsters.

“Thank you very much.”

He looked away from Choi Han after hearing Kim Rok Soo's voice.

“…Enjoy your conversation.”

Park Jin Tae then closed the door and left the room.

The space Park Jin Tae provided for them was quiet.

It was good enough for the two of them to chat.

“Sit.”

Cale sat down on a chair and pointed to the chair across from him while saying that
and Choi Han sat down.

The two of them silently looked at each other until Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“Tell me in detail about what happened.”

Choi Han started to speak as if he was expecting that question.

“Currently, the Gate to the Demon World… Well, the Endable Kingdom is impossible to
approach right now.”

The sinkhole. The entrance to that hole was covered by a black barrier right now.

“Naturally, it is impossible to teleport into the Endable Kingdom as well.”

Cale immediately started to speak after hearing that it was not possible to teleport.
“What about Eruhaben-nim and Miss Rosalyn? What about Bud?”

“I knew you would worry about the others first.”

Choi Han shook his head while looking at Cale.

“How can I not be worried? Hurry up and tell me.”

Choi Han resumed speaking at Cale’s urging.

“You remember Deputy Chief Priest Cotton, right?”

“Yes.”

“That person was the God of War's Holy Maiden.”

‘…Ho. She was a Holy Maiden?’

Cale didn't think Deputy Chief Priest would be a simple priestess as she could use the
God of War's divine item, but he had never expected that she would be the Holy
Maiden.

“There was a shelter that she had created.”

“…The place she had kept the Ranger Brigade members imprisoned?”

“Yes, that place. Eruhaben-nim and the others are currently sheltering there. It is
apparently not budging even at the White Star's side's attacks.”

Choi Han recalled the conversation he had with Eruhaben.

“According to Eruhaben-nim, that place has the God of War’s blessing, so it should be
able to last for at least three months.”

Originally, the Temples of the God of War were shelters for the weak during times of
war.

They were said to have extremely strong defensive capabilities.

Although that place was not an official shelter, it had the god's blessing and was
created by the Holy Maiden, so it should be able to last three months as Eruhaben
mentioned.

Cale started to speak.

“…Something is weird.”

But Cale felt that something was weird.

The Gate to the Demon World was one of the Eastern continent's Three Restricted
Areas.

“I thought the hands of the gods couldn't reach there?”

That was what Duke Fredo had said.

“Originally, that is the case.”

“…Are you saying that there are exceptions?”

“Yes.”

“…Like what?”

Choi Han hesitated for a moment. Cale became tense while wondering what he would
say and Choi Han finally started to speak.

“I don’t know.”

“What?”

Cale started to frown. Choi Han avoided Cale's gaze.

“I’m sorry. I didn’t have time to hear about it. I had to rush here.”

Cale was at a loss for words.

What could he say when Choi Han didn’t hear the explanation because he came to save
him?
But Choi Han peeked at Cale before quickly adding on.

“You should be able to hear about that from Eruhaben-nim or Deputy Chief Priest
Cotton once we return.”

“Okay. I can hear about it later.”

Choi Han continued to speak as Cale accepted the situation.

“Yes, Cale-nim. Based on what Eruhaben-nim told us, you've been unconscious inside
the black orb for three days so far.”

“Hold on!”

Cale stopped Choi Han.

“Did you say three days?”

“Yes.”

“…But I've only been here for about a day?”

Was time flowing differently here?

“…I don't know much about that part, however…”

Choi Han hesitated for a moment before starting to speak again.

“…The White Star and his subordinates have a tight formation around the black orb
you are stuck in, making it impossible for Eruhaben-nim nor anybody else in the
Endable Kingdom to approach.”

Choi Han held back a sigh.

“Similarly, the others and I tried to approach from outside the sinkhole, but we could
not break the black barrier covering the sinkhole. And then-”

Choi Han stopped for a moment.

‘Don’t tell him.’

He remembered what Alberu told him.

‘Don’t tell him too much about what is going on over here. He’ll definitely push himself
too hard because he is worried.’

Alberu was the busiest person around Choi Han right now. He was doing a lot to make
up for Cale's missing spot.

‘Choi Han. Yes, first of all, you… You go and help Cale. Help him with that test or crap
or whatever. I don't know the contents of it, but I want you to help him quickly finish
it and prevent him from becoming a member of the Demonic race.’

Choi Han had told Alberu about what he was going to offer the God of Death.

Alberu had added on to Choi Han who was walking away.

‘I'm sorry. You, you really are an amazing instructor.’

Choi Han knew why Alberu was apologizing to him.

He looked at Cale.

“Anyway, that was the situation before I came here to rescue you, Cale-nim.”

Cale brushed his face with both hands after hearing that.

“I'm sure that’s not everything. I guess you don't plan on telling me what else is going
on?”

“…Yes.”

“The others told you not to tell me?”

“…You're very astute.”

A bitter smile appeared on Choi Han's face.

He had not said it because Alberu told him not to say it, but Cale already seemed to
have an idea about what was going on.
Choi Han made eye contact with Cale as he was getting upset.

“…Tell me. Tell me what the God of Death told you.”

Choi Han closed his eyes for a moment before opening them and starting to speak.

"According to Miss Cage, Cale-nim is currently inside the ‘Enemy of the gods’ who is
the ‘nameless god’ and also the 'sealed god’s test.’ ”

‘…The enemy of the gods? The sealed god?’

Cale thought about those blood-colored eyes that said it was wickedness, despair, and
solitude.

“I was able to chat with the God of Death after that.”

Choi Han started to reveal the conversation he had alone with the God of Death.

“He said that you must overcome the test in order to survive that god’s test.”

He hesitated for a moment before adding on.

“But nobody has been able to overcome the test without that god’s help until now,
which was why I came here to help.”

“Why you of all peo-”

“Because I have the longest lifespan. I had extra lifespan that I could use to make a
deal.”

“…There’s no such thing as extra lifespan.”

“I had it.”

Choi Han smiled at the frowning Cale.

“The God of Death said he needed compensation in order to get involved in the affairs
of another god, even if that god is sealed. That is the rule.”

“ ‘Rule’ my ass. They do whatever the hell they want whenever they want.”
Choi Han shook his head at Cale's comment.

“Miss Cage said that the God of Death needed to make a sacrifice as well. This god is
strong even if he is sealed, so the God of Death had to pay a steep price to meddle in
that god’s test. Don’t hate the God of Death too much. That is what Miss Cage said.”

“Don’t worry. I hate both the God of Death and the sealed god equally. There’s no hating
one more than the other.”

Choi Han awkwardly chuckled.

Cale nonchalantly asked the laughing Choi Han a question.

“…By the way. Can that sealed god bastard change this test as he pleases?”

“That is not possible.”

Cale looked toward Choi Han in shock after hearing such a confident response.

“I asked. I wondered if that was possible since it was called a test.”

Choi Han had asked the same question to the God of Death.

“He said that there are rules for a god to approach a human. Those rules are absolute
and even gods cannot change them, although the method a god uses to approach
humans is all different.”

Cale suddenly recalled how the World Tree told him that the gods share their will with
this world by making deals or contracts with humans.

“One of the absolute rules for the God of Death is to make a vow of death. Similarly,
this sealed god can create tests per his absolute rule, but he cannot mess with the
contents of that test.”

Choi Han held some information back.

The God of Death told him not to mention it for now.

‘That sealed god was sealed because he broke a rule once. Of course, it was not a test-
related rule.’
That was the reason the God of Death cooperated with Choi Han who said he wanted
to come here.

“Cale-nim. What is the test?”

Choi Han had not clearly heard about the test from the God of Death.

He just came to help Cale.

“The background seems to be Cale-nim’s past.”

“That’s right. This is my past. It’s when I was twenty years old.”

Cale looked deep in thought as he continued to speak.

“…I don't know for sure, but… I think I just have to overcome my past despair.”

Choi Han nodded his head.

“Cale-nim. The God of Death told me to tell you this if it seems as if you don't know
much about the test.”

Choi Han’s quiet voice reached Cale’s ears.

“The past cannot be changed. However, you can overcome the despair of the past that
remains in your heart.”

Cale subconsciously started to speak.

“…Ha! The despair that remains in my heart.”

“The God of Death seems to know about the test.”

Cale was silent after hearing Choi Han’s comment before he nodded in agreement.

He then hesitated for a moment before starting to speak.

"Choi Han, we are going to be fighting quite a bit here as well.”

“I'm aware.”
“I can't use any powers here to battle. You will have to do everything.”

“I'm aware.”

Cale couldn’t help but grumble at Choi Han’s calm response.

“…That makes you happy?”

“Yes. I'm very happy.”

“You crazy bastard.”

Choi Han innocently smiled back.

Cale shook his head.

‘I don't know everything for now, but… ’

It was obvious that Choi Han had not told him everything he knew.

‘I’ll need to focus on overcoming this test first.’

He was worried about the others.

He felt the need to move efficiently.

But he still had no plans on rushing things.

He would take care of things one by one in order, just as he had planned.

Cale stood up from his seat.

“There will be a big battle tomorrow. Many people's lives depend on the results of that
battle.”

“Yes, Cale-nim.”

Choi Han stood up from his seat as well.

"We are going to head to Seomyeon, Busan after that.”

“I understand.”

“You’ll be able to meet Choi Jung Soo.”

Cale could see Choi Han’s shoulders shake a bit.

“And there will be an unranked monster there.”

There was a reason the unranked monsters brought fear into the world.

The unranked monsters were capable of destroying the new central shelters.

That was why the future society that used the central shelters as its foundation feared
the unranked monsters the most and considered them their biggest enemies.

Seomyeon, Busan.

That was where the new central shelter would appear and the unranked monster
would try to destroy that central shelter and kill all of the humans in the nearby area.

“That monster is extremely strong.”

“Even stronger than me?”

“Of course.”

He was certain about that.

“You won’t be able to defeat it alone.”

He then quickly added on.

“And that monster might appear in our world as well. The chances of that are high.”

Choi Han's face stiffened.

Cale looked at the stiff face and continued to speak.

“Along with seven even stronger monsters.”

The two of them looked at each other.

“I'm going to kill that monster.”

Cale was planning on saving the central shelter in Seomyeon, Busan.

“Choi Han.”

“Yes, Cale-nim.”

‘We are guaranteed to defeat the first unranked monster if you are by my side.’

Cale held back what he wanted to say and said something else.

“I can't even feed you properly here.”

“Cale-nim, I-”

“Call me hyung. Everybody will think it’s weird if you call me Cale-nim.”

Cale reached his hand out to Choi Han who flinched.

“You are older than me, but… I'm twenty years old.”

Choi Han quietly looked at that hand before reaching his own hand out.

“I understand. I will call you hyung. Rok Soo hyung.”

The two of them shook hands.

Cale felt as if he could finally breathe a little better and felt relief from the sense of
responsibility and burden he felt here for the first time.

11 am.

The central shelter would lose its powers in one hour.

“October 25th, 11am.”

Cale quietly watched Lee Seung Won who was peeking at him while speaking.

“Keep going.”

Lee Seung Won hesitated before responding to Cale.

“Hyung, will this really be useful?”

Cale looked up after seeing the uncertainty in Lee Seung Won’s eyes.

He could see the clear sky.

He was currently on the roof of the central shelter building.

‘Cale-nim.’

Cale recalled the conversation he had with Choi Han last night.

‘What is it?’

‘The God of Death said this in passing… But either way, this is what he said.’

Choi Han had wondered if it was important, but he still said it as if it was nothing.

‘The sealed god is not able to return to the past, but he is able to push his way into a
different dimension.’

Choi Han then shrugged his shoulders, saying that was it.

Cale, who had been extremely busy since last night, was finally able to think about it
now that he had some time.
‘He's able to open a path into a different dimension?’

Did that mean that this place was not a test created with his past as the background?

“…Could this be a different place?”

Or was it just an illusion created for his test?

“Rok Soo hyung.”

Cale turned his gaze.

"Can I ask you what you mean by that?”

Cale shrugged his shoulders at Choi Han's question.

“Hmm? Oh, nothing much. I was just thinking about the dimension thing you mentioned
last night.”

“Ah.”

Choi Han instantly understood what Cale was thinking.

“Are you thinking that a different dimension-”

He peeked at Lee Seung Won for a moment before shutting up.

Lee Seung Won was looking at Choi Han with interest.

‘He said that he was Rok Soo hyung’s close dongsaeng?’

They were said to be like blood siblings.

‘He’s the same age as me.’

They were the same age, but Lee Seung Won found it difficult to speak to Choi Han for
some reason.

Choi Han also stayed next to Rok Soo hyung and did not try to chat with the others.
Cale nodded his head at Choi Han who had stopped speaking after peeking at Lee
Seung Won.

“Yes, I'm just thinking about that statement.”

“But I came into your consci-, mm, anyway, that was the condition.”

Since Choi Han had come into Cale's consciousness, he didn't think it was a different
dimension or anything like that.

“I'm not sure.”

Unfortunately, Cale didn’t trust either the God of Death nor the sealed god.

Gods. He had never seen them lie, but he had seen them not tell the entire truth many
times.

‘Either way, whether this world is an illusion or a test or whatever… ’

He was going to treat it as if it was real.

Cale had already made up his mind.

He looked toward Lee Seung Won and started to speak.

“You asked if this will be useful?”

That was the question Lee Seung Won had asked Cale just now.

‘Hyung, will this really be useful?’

Lee Seung Won cautiously nodded his head.

“…Yes. Do you think it’ll be useful?”

Cale nodded his head at the question.

“It’ll be useful.”

The more that this world was real to Kim Rok Soo and Cale Henituse…
Lee Seung Won’s ability was necessary.

It didn’t matter whether this world was an illusion or a test.

He needed to create a future for them.

He needed to give them hope.

Wouldn't that be the best way to get rid of his despair?

If getting rid of Cale’s, or actually, Kim Rok Soo's despair was the conditions for passing
this test…

That made it more important for Cale to create a future for them.

That way he could… Wash away the despair he had for not just this one moment, but
the future that would come.

“I told you, right?”

He put his hand on the shoulder of Lee Seung Won, the boy who was only three years
younger than him in this place.

“Data is the future. Even weak humans are able to defeat a monster if they know its
weakness. Being able to think. That is the greatest strength humans have.”

Lee Seung Won’s ability.

‘Recording.’

Cale looked at the small badge in Lee Seung Won’s hand.

It was a random badge that had been rolling around inside the building.

“Seung Won. The information you create with your abilities will become the hope for
this world.”

“…To survive-”

“You’re saying that it’s a useless power for survival?”

Lee Seung Won nodded his head and quietly responded to Cale who cut him off and
asked.

“…Yeah.”

“There’s no such thing.”

Cale disagreed with Lee Seung Won without any hesitation.

There were no abilities that were useless for survival.

They needed every ability.

However, it was just the difference of whether it was needed now or for the future.

Cale looked down from the roof.

Lee Seung Won also looked down at the ground as well.

They were looking at the area inside the boundaries where monsters did not come.

Lee Seung Won took in all of it.

More people than ever were standing inside the boundaries.

He could feel the rowdiness inside the building right now.

Lee Seung Won heard Cale’s whisper.

“Seung Won. Take a good look at today's battles.”

That whisper was very confident as if he was telling the truth.

“You'll see how even people without abilities can fight and win.”

Lee Seung Won looked back toward Cale.

Cale was standing up at that moment.

Screeeech.
Cale looked toward Park Jin Tae who had opened the door to the roof and was walking
in.

Park Jin Tae was with Lee Chul Min as they walked over to Cale.

He opened his mouth to speak.

“I delivered your message to the other central shelters. We went to more temporary
shelters as well.”

“Didn’t they call you crazy?”

“Pfft.”

Park Jin Tae chuckled.

“Of course they did. Who wouldn’t? We were telling them that all of the shelters would
be destroyed and that monsters will come charging in.”

From last night until this morning…

Park Jin Tae and a few others had urgently gathered teams to go visit the two central
shelters close to this one.

They also stopped by the temporary shelters they knew of along the way as well.

They had informed all of those shelters about the things Kim Rok Soo had told Park
Jin Tae.

They also handed them the things Kim Rok Soo told them to deliver.

“We also brought the people who believed us back, just as you wanted.”

One corner of Cale's lips went up after hearing Park Jin Tae’s comment.

“Was it just because I wanted it? Didn’t you bring them because you wanted to save
them? Isn’t that why you kept doing it all morning even though it was supposed to end
at dawn?”

Park Jin Tae had been busy since last night and all morning today bringing people over
from many places.

Park Jin Tae avoided Cale's smile.

“…Don't speak such nonsense.”

Smirk.

Cale smiled once more and Park Jin Tae started to frown as he started to speak again.

“I handed out all of our food except for one day's worth.”

Park Jin Tae did not give out all of the food they had gathered during the hunts.

They always put aside a portion of the food with long expiration dates.

They did it for the days that they couldn't hunt.

But he had given out a majority of their reserves today.

“Everybody must have eaten until they were full.”

“Yes. That’s the only way for them to be able to deal with your plan.”

Park Jin Tae took a step toward Cale. He then started to speak in a concerned tone.

“We will starve in one day if you lied.”

Cale's calm eyes looked toward Park Jin Tae.

“Do you not believe me?”

Park Jin Tae looked past Cale and at Choi Han.

He then looked at Lee Seung Won as well.

Park Jin Tae then started to speak again.

“…I haven't seen any monsters nearby since last night. It’s quiet even when we are out
past the boundary. It looks as if the monsters are hiding from the humans.”
“It’s the calm before the storm.”

Park Jin Tae nodded his head.

“I don’t have foresight, but I do have my intuition. It seemed as if there would be a

storm soon.”

Lee Chul Min had a stiff expression while standing behind Park Jin Tae as well.

He seemed to have felt the eerie fear surrounding them as well.

“Grandma Kim told me to give you a message. She said that the things you asked for
are all prepared.”

“Then I guess I should go down now.”

Cale headed toward the door.

He then headed down.

Park Jin Tae and Choi Han were right behind him.

Lee Seung Won watched them for a moment before starting to speak.

“The current time is 11:45 am on October 25th.”

His voice sounded slightly anxious.

“All central shelters will be destroyed at 12:01 pm. The temporary shelters will slowly
be destroyed as well. The monsters will continuously attack for 24 hours.”

Lee Seung Won closed his eyes for a moment before opening them back.

“However.”

Lee Seung Won's voice started to sound more energetic.

“A new central shelter will soon appear.”

His voice was being recorded.

“We plan on heading there.”

Lee Seung Won hesitated before continuing to speak.

“Kim Rok Soo has prophesized all of this and I, Lee Seung Won, believe everything he
said. We will now start the first record.”

Lee Seung Won clenched the badge and headed down from the roof.

It was so that he could follow behind Kim Rok Soo.

‘Hmm.’

Cale looked around as he headed to the bottom of the building.

He could feel the whispers and anxious gazes being focused on him.

It was not very loud inside the building because everybody was speaking quietly.

That made people even more anxious.

But Cale's eyes were looking at something else instead of that anxiety.

‘We did as much as we could.’

It was only one day, but there were many things prepared throughout the building that
Cale had asked for.

“Hey, Rok Soo.”

“Grandma.”

Grandma Kim was in charge of everything inside the building while Park Jin Tae was
going to the nearby shelters last night.

Park Jin Tae told people that he was leaving everything to her, so everything was able
to quickly proceed as Grandma Kim had a good reputation with everyone.

Cale headed for the main door on the first floor.

“Mister.”

Jang Man Soo who was sitting on a chair near the door waved at him.

“Here. Take this.”

He took the item Jang Man Soo handed him.

It was a watch.

It was one of the few devices that still worked.

Tick tock.

Time was flowing by.

A lot of time had passed as he slowly came down while looking around.

The current time was 11:55 am.

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“Choi Han, move the mister.”

“Yes, hyung-nim.”

Jang Man Soo got on Choi Han’s back.

Cale headed out the door.

In the open area outside the building… There were many ability users gathered in this
area inside the boundaries of the central shelter.

They were looking at Cale with anxiety, distrust, confusion, and all sorts of other
emotions.

Cale walked past them toward the edge of the boundary.

“You're here?”
Lee Seung Won's older sister, Lee Jin Joo, awkwardly smiled and greeted him.

“Is this my spot?”

“Yes, sir. Choi Han, put the mister down.”

Jang Man Soo was now next to Cale. He had been lowered right in front of the boundary.

He felt the soft blanket under him as he looked up at Cale.

‘…I didn't know he had this side to him.’

He was looking at Kim Rok Soo, who was standing up straight despite the anxious,
fearful, distrusting, and angry gazes focused on him, in amazement.

Cale started to speak at that moment.

“There's 1 minute left.”

Park Jin Tae quickly raised his voice.

“Everybody, get to your stations!”

People quickly moved to their stations at Park Jin Tae's order.

Park Jin Tae could see some distrusting gazes as he watched them move.

‘You trust what Kim Rok Soo said?’

‘What the hell are we doing so early in the day?’

That was what their gazes were saying.

Those were the grumbles and questions directed toward Park Jin Tae, the leader of
this central shelter, who had been moving around because of Kim Rok Soo since last
night.

‘This is driving me nuts.’

Park Jin Tae was actually feeling the same way.

He wondered if they really should be doing this.

However, he decided to wait as well since he said he would trust Rok Soo.

Soon.

The moment Kim Rok Soo described would be here soon.

They heard Kim Rok Soo’s nonchalant voice at that moment.

“3.”

The sun was still bright and the sky was clear.

“2.”

Everybody inside the central shelter looked up at the sky.

Their hearts were beating wildly.

“1.”

And at that moment…

The world turned dark.

Everybody felt as if they were losing strength in their arms and legs.

Their bodies felt as if they were going cold.

It was because they could imagine the terrible nightmare that was to start.

‘Kim Rok Soo was right!’

From inside the darkness…

Park Jin Tae started to frown in this world where he could not see anything.

It was at that moment.

“Noona!”

He could hear Kim Rok Soo's voice through the darkness.

He was calling for Lee Jin Joo.

“Noona! Speak as loudly as you can!”

Cale put his hand on Lee Jin Joo's shoulder as she was curled up in fear from the
darkness.

Maybe it was because of his body heat…

Lee Jin Joo started to speak.

{This is a message from the Park Jin Tae shelter.}

She had supposedly majored in Music.

Maybe that was the reason.

{Last night, or maybe early today. You should have received information from the Park
Jin Tae shelter.}

Her voice echoed through the dark world.

Her ability was ‘amplification.’

Her voice was loud enough to reach the nearby shelters and the other two central
shelters.

Normally, she would not use her ability as it would draw monsters to them, but it was
different if the monsters were going to come anyway.

{Please use that information to persist.}

To the people in the other shelters who had not believed Cale’s words that Park Jin Tae
had delivered to them…

Her voice would be like a lighthouse.

{As mentioned in the information we delivered, a new central shelter will appear.}

The new central shelters would be the size of 3 - 5 current central shelters combined.

‘But that means that 3 - 5 of the original central shelters will disappear.’

3 - 5 of the original central shelters would disappear and a large central shelter would
take their place.

She continued to speak.

{You will hear my voice once every hour.}

It was about time for that voice to stop talking for a moment.

{I hope to see you all at the new central shelter. Let's all survive together.}

Cale who was listening to the ticking of the watch that still had batteries started to
speak.

“10 seconds.”

‘9, 8,… 5, 4.’

{Good luck.}

As Lee Jin Joo's first amplification came to an end…

‘3, 2.’

“1 second.”

The world brightened up again.

“Ho!”

Step.

Park Jin Tae subconsciously took a step back.

He had the chills.

Intense pressure was bearing down on him from all sides.

He felt as if he was going to be suffocated to death from the pressure.

Park Jin Tae stopped walking back after looking out in front of him.

“…F*ck……”

He could not see the end.

There were so many Grade 3 monsters that Kim Rok Soo mentioned moving toward
them that he couldn't see the end.

The Grade 2 and Grade 1 monsters would be waiting their turn behind them.

“…My goodness! I, it really-!”

Park Jin Tae could hear Lee Chul Min's astonished voice.

Everybody couldn’t help but feel fear and despair at the reality of the situation.

They had prayed that it wouldn’t happen, but this nightmare, no, this real situation,
was suffocating them.

They heard a sharp voice at that moment.

"Everybody snap out of it!”

Everybody turned toward Cale who was standing right in front of the boundary.

They were all looking at his back.

Cale had not even turned around.

But he needed to do something about the people who were afraid of the reality of the
situation.

He needed to tell them they didn’t need to be afraid.

“Choi Han!”

Cale and Choi Han made eye contact.

“Sweep them away!”

Choi Han started to run toward the Grade 3 monsters charging toward them.
Jang Man Soo subconsciously grabbed Cale’s clothes.

“T, that-”

He could feel the vibrations from the ground he was on.

Boom. Boom. Boom.

The ground was shaking because of the monsters moving toward them.

Jang Man Soo started to shout.

“I, is it okay to send him in there alone?! What if-”

‘What if he ends up dying?!’

Jang Man Soo looked at Choi Han who was heading out on his own and then at Cale
without knowing what to do.

His face was already covered in sweat and his pupils were shaking in fear.

Cale made eye contact with those shaking pupils.

‘He was like this in the past too.’

The moment the central shelter was destroyed, Jang Man Soo could not act properly
at first because he was suppressed by chaos and fear.

He was someone who had lost both legs to a monster.

He said that his knees got cold whenever he saw a monster.

He felt the same fear that he had felt when he had lost his legs and feet even though
there was nothing underneath his knees.

That was why Cale needed to show him.

“Mister.”

“Huh, huh?”

Cale started to smile while looking at Jang Man Soo's eyes that were full of fear.

“It’s okay.”

Cale pointed to the front.

“Take a look.”

Jang Man Soo slowly looked forward.

He could see Choi Han kick off the cement ground and jumping up into the air.

“…Ah.”

The tip of Choi Han’s sword pointed toward the sky.

Jang Man Soo had seen many sword-using ability users such as the former shelter
leader Lee Soo Hyuk, but he had never seen a sword like Choi Han’s.

It was a different style of sword.

But he was familiar with the thing coming out of the tip.

“…A Yong.”

The sparkling black smoke gathered together to create a large Yong.

The tip of the sword moved from the sky to the left.

The black Yong started to squirm.

The sword slashed from left to right.

The black Yong seemed to roar as it followed the path of the sword.

Baaaaaaaaaang!

The black Yong gobbled up the monsters.

The footsteps of the monsters disappeared from the spot the sparkling black Yong had
passed by.

All that was left were the corpses of the dead monsters that fell to the ground.

“…Ah-”

He couldn't say anything else.

Jang Man Soo felt as if electricity was flowing throughout his body.

Was this really a human’s strength?

All of the Grade 3 monsters in the front had been killed.

Silence filled the area.

People were even quieter than when the world had been covered in darkness.

This darkness that appeared in front of them under the clear eye and in the face of
despair was sparkling brightly in everyone's eyes.

Jang Man Soo's eyes headed toward the back of the boy who had landed on the ground
again.

It was a young boy with a slightly unique outfit and sword.

The boy was calm.

He just stood there with his back facing toward them.

“Kekeke-”

The silence was broken.

Jang Man Soo looked behind him.

“Kahahahaha!”

Park Jin Tae was laughing so loudly that his shoulders were moving up and down.

He had no choice but to do so.

“Keke, this is driving me crazy.”

He really felt as if he would go crazy.

He had felt suffocated looking at the Grade 3 monsters approaching them.

He had thought that he might even die from the pressure.

But the moment this Choi Han punk used his powers…

The pressure he felt from the Grade 3 monsters had all disappeared.

‘This is not human strength!’

He now felt an even stronger pressure suffocating him.

‘Lee Soo Hyuk?’

Lee Soo Hyuk was nothing compared to this guy.

That person could have gotten stronger by now as well, but he still could not compare
to Choi Han.

“…Kim Rok Soo was right.”

He was certain.

He believed that he could survive if he listened to Kim Rok Soo.

No matter what.

He then started to speak loudly.

“Snap out of it if you don’t want to die!”

It was at that moment.

“Roooooooooooooooar!”

“Rooooooooar!”

New monsters came forward while stepping on the corpses of the dead monsters in
front of them.

Choi Han's black Yong had stopped the monsters in the front, but he couldn't stop the
hundreds of monsters all on his own.

“Roooooooooooooooar!”

“Screeeeeeeech!”

They heard monsters shouting behind the building as well.

North, south, east, and west.

Monsters were coming at them from all sides.

Park Jin Tae raised his head.

He could feel Kim Rok Soo looking at him.

He seemed to be saying, ‘It’s your turn.’

“Heh. Funny bastard.”

Park Jin Tae started to laugh as he moved his hand.

He then took out the entire holster at his hip.

He then released his grip.

Tang.
The holster fell to the ground.

“Leader-nim.”

Lee Chul Min and the other members of the attack team all looked toward him.

But Park Jin Tae was looking at Kim Rok Soo.

"We will follow Kim Rok Soo’s orders.”

He walked toward Kim Rok Soo, Jang Man Soo, and Lee Jin Joo.

“For at least 24 hours.”

For one whole day.

“Kim Rok Soo over there is the king of this shelter.”

That was their only way to survive.

He could not feel any type of pressure from Kim Rok Soo.

But Park Jin Tae felt a different kind of pressure while walking toward him.

‘Yes, that gaze.’

The way Kim Rok Soo was looking at him…

That turned into pressure.

His gaze seemed to have complete confidence that he would be able to do something.

That gaze felt like pressure to Park Jin Tae.

He started to laugh.

He was used to it.

He was used to this kind of expectation-filled pressure.

Pressure was something that had accompanied Park Jin Tae for most of his life and he
enjoyed this type of pressure.

He put his hand inside his shirt.

He wrapped his hand around the cold item in his pocket and grabbed it.

Click.

A small pistol revealed itself to the world in Park Jin Tae’s right hand.

Park Jin Tae, National Team member for Shooting.

Guns, swords, missiles, etc.

Most of the weapons used by humans prior to the cataclysm were still useful.

However, they were not useful compared to the abilities used by ability users.

Weapons from prior to the cataclysm were not very useful against these monsters.

A monster they might barely be able to kill with almost a hundred missiles could die
easily from an ability user’s odd ability.

But such irregular things had become the new normal in this world.

This gun was a new weapon in ability user Park Jin Tae’s hand.

Jang Man Soo started to speak while looking at Park Jin Tae who was walking toward
them.

“Ah, whatever! I have no idea!”

He clenched his eyes shut after seeing Kim Rok Soo smiling at him.

He then tilted his body to one side. He spread out his arms.

His hands were pointing to the north and south.

“…Hey, Rok Soo.”

He quietly started to speak with his eyes still closed.

“Will I be of any help?”

“Of course you will. We can’t do this without you, mister.”

Jang Man Soo started to smile.

“Really? That’s really the case?”

‘It won't work without me? I'm useful? I can do something?’

Jang Man Soo's lips were shaking.

“Alright then, why not?!”

Jang Man Soo's hands started to glow.

Jang Man Soo.

He had a defensive ability.

He had lost his two legs, but his two arms were fine and could use this power still.

Walls started to appear in both of his hands.

They were thick, wide, and tall half-transparent walls.

Drip.

The moment a cold sweat flowed through Jang Man Soo’s forehead and fell to the
ground…

"Fucking crazy!”

Park Jin Tae was laughing as he swore.

Cale’s head started to move.

The three-story building that had been the central shelter.

It was now just a building with one side of it broken.

Wall rose up on the southern and northern sides of this square building.

The walls were approximately 1.5 stories in height.

They were much higher than even the monsters that were taller than humans.

Cale clenched his fists.

‘It worked!’

Jang Man Soo's power was the same as in the past.

Cale lowered his head.

“Hehehe.”

Jang Man Soo was laughing.

He slightly opened his eyes and looked at Cale.

“Hey, did I do it right?”

“Yes, mister.”

“But I think I can only hold this up for about two hours.”

Cale started to laugh.

“That’s enough.”

He looked away from Jang Man Soo and raised his head.

The smile disappeared from his face.

The Grade 3 monsters would attack from the east and west since the southern and
northern sides were blocked.

Choi Han had come back and Cale patted his shoulder instead of telling him, ‘good job,’
and started to speak.

“Squad 1 to the east.”

Choi Han started to move to the monsters charging in from the east.

Cale then patted someone else’s shoulder.

"Squad 2 to the west.”

Park Jin Tae started to move west.

“Hyung.”

Cale had to listen to Lee Seung Won who had walked up behind him.

The uncertainty was somewhat gone from Lee Seung Won’s eyes now.

“Grandma said everything is ready.”

Cale turned around after hearing that.

The three-story building.

They had pulled off all of the doors and windows of this building last night.

Grandma Kim was looking down at Cale from the top of the roof.

Cale’s gaze started to move.

He looked toward the building's eastern and western sides.

He could see people in those windows.

They were not ability users.

But they would all participate in this battle.

Cale raised his hand.

He then started to look elsewhere.

First, he looked to the west.

He was looking at Park Jin Tae.

“Leader-nim.”

Park Jin Tae did not respond to Lee Chul Min.

“Keke.”

He just continued to laugh.

“It was real.”

It really was real.

“It’s just as Kim Rok Soo said it would be.”

Kim Rok Soo had said the following.

‘North, south, east, and west. The Grade 3 monsters approaching on all sides will be
different.’

‘If we block the north and the south, the monsters coming toward those directions will
end up divided and follow behind the monsters to the east and west. The monsters at
the front of the eastern and western sides are slightly more difficult to handle.’

‘First, the western side.’

‘The Grade 3 monsters coming from the west are poisonous monsters.’

The monsters in the front right now were poisonous monsters Park Jin Tae had faced
before, just as Cale had said.

Boom. Boom. Boom.

So many monsters were coming toward them that the ground was shaking.
Park Jin Tae stood in front of those monsters.

Cale lowered his hand at that moment.

Lee Jin Joo started to speak only loud enough for the people in their central shelter to
hear.

{Fire!}

Park Jin Tae could see flaming arrows flying above him.

He raised his head.

People were throwing items that were on fire out of every building window.

Some of them were shooting arrows, but most of them were just throwing stuff while
trying to make sure that they wouldn’t hit Park Jin Tae's group with it.

Kim Rok Soo had said the following.

‘They are poisonous, so let’s burn them all right away.’

‘You and the shelter people fight together.’

Burn the monsters.

“…Fire.”

Park Jin Tae quietly mumbled to himself before turning his head.

Tilt.

Cale tilted his head to one side.

‘Fire.’

Park Jin Tae's hand started to move after seeing Cale mouthing for him to fire.

"Ah, this is so fun.”

He instantly finished loading the gun.

The others could not see any bullets.

But he could see the bullets.

He pointed the gun toward his targets.

The targets were the monsters spewing poison in the front as well as the fire thrown
by the others.

Park Jin Tae pulled the trigger.

Tang!

A small bullet shot out through the barrel.

Park Jin Tae opened his mouth to speak.

“Explode!”

The small bullet that was quickly flying suddenly exploded.

Fire shot out and spread in all directions.

Attack-type ability user, Park Jin Tae.

His attribute was fire.

The fires that the others threw touched his fire.

Baaaaaaaaaang!

A large explosion occurred.

Park Jin Tae looked toward the non-ability users on top of the building and started to
shout.

“Throw some more! Throw out more fire!”

He was speaking to the people of the shelter who were looking at him.

“Let’s burn these motherfucking monster bastards to death!”

Click, click!

Park Jin Tae’s gun pointed at the targets again.

Tang! Tang! Tang!

The fire-spewing bullets were flying toward the monsters.

Lee Seung Won quietly mumbled at that moment.

“…The battle for everyone to move to the new base together has started. Approximately
24 hours remain. We must survive here for 24 hours.”

Baaaaaang!

Lee Seung Won turned his gaze.

A black sword was chopping down Grade 3 monster after Grade 3 monster on the east.

Tang!

He turned again after hearing a sharp noise.

Fire was burning on the west. The fire was burning the monsters to death.

Lee Seung Won then looked forward.

He could see Kim Rok Soo looking around at the battlefields while standing next to
Jang Man Soo.

Lee Seung Won moved his hand that was clenching the badge up to his mouth and
continued to record.

“…the current states of the battlefields look hopeful. It seems doable.”

However, there was still a long time for them to survive.

Lee Seung Won continued to mumble.

“…I wish that night would not come.”

Cale did not hear that whisper.

However, Cale started to frown while looking at the battlefields.

‘We need to keep as many of our fighting-capable people safe until night time.’

The first crucial moment.

Nighttime would be that moment.

Night had arrived.

The night sky looked as if the stars would rain down as if they were snowflakes.

Rustle.

“Alberu.”

Alberu Crossman turned his head toward the voice behind him.

“Aunt.”

Tasha walked toward him.

She was one of the few people here who knew of Alberu in his current appearance.

"Why don’t you sleep for a bit?”

Alberu shook his head while looking at Tasha’s concerned gaze.

“I slept a bit earlier.”

“Are you talking about the one hour you slept?”

Tasha clicked her tongue and stood next to Alberu.

Tasha’s eyes looked at her nephew whose face was covered by a mask as he was in his
quarter Dark Elf appearance.

She could feel the fatigue and pressure on her nephew even with the mask covering
half of his face.

She looked down to look at where her nephew was looking.

“I don’t know when that black barrier would disappear.”

The black barrier that was covering this large hole was visible even underneath the
night sky.

It could not be helped.

There were numerous people gathered a bit away from the black barrier.

The Mercenaries Guild without the Mercenary King.

The Dark Elf and Elf Alliance.

The mages who follow Rosalyn.

The people from the Molan Household.

There were numerous other people gathered by the black barrier as well, and the
lights were not going off even in the middle of the night.

Tasha started to speak while looking at that.

“They will only become more chaotic as time passes by.”

Alberu started to frown.

Tasha noticed his gaze and opened her mouth to speak again.

“Your majesty.”

But someone speaking stopped her from talking.

“I’ll be heading out now.”

Tasha left so that the two people could be alone.

The other person walked up to where Tasha had been standing.

“Your majesty.”
He started to speak again to Alberu who did not respond.

“Bob.”

“Do you want to die?”

Pfft.

Duke Fredo chuckled.

He started to speak to Alberu who was glaring at him.

“The Western continent is quieter than I expected. The Eastern continent as well.”

“Is there any reason for it to not be quiet?”

“…Mm, Cale Henituse's absence?”

Alberu looked away from Fredo.

‘Damn it.’

He actually did not have time to chat with Fredo nor even his aunt.

Cale Henituse's absence.

The fact that the vow of death was cut.

Choi Han and Alberu were not the only ones who knew about this.

There were a lot of people.

There was a meeting that took place in the Jungle's Section 7 shores in the past.

At the end of that meeting, the representatives of four kingdoms and one tribe
gathered together and made a vow of death.

Prince John of the Breck Kingdom.

Litana, the Queen of the Jungle.

Witira, the future Whale Queen.

Harol, the Whipper Kingdom's Toonka’s chief advisor.

And Alberu and Cale, as the representatives of the Roan Kingdom.

All those people had made a vow of death in order to maintain the secret.

‘The Western continent is quiet, as Fredo mentioned.’

At least that was how it seemed on the outside.

Alberu knew that his tent would be extremely loud with video communication devices
going off with calls from the Breck Kingdom, Whipper Kingdom, the Jungle, and the
Whale tribe once he went in.

Alberu had to explain things differently to all of them.

There were not many people he could trust enough to tell everything.

The reason the Western continent was quiet was because the leaders were keeping
the fact that Cale Henituse was missing because of the Demonic race a secret.

Alberu and the Roan Kingdom’s chief executives were busy controlling the information
going out with the other kingdom’s chief executives nonstop.

Alberu escaped from there for a moment.

He was a bit tired.

He was a bit worn out.

He wanted to relax and rest for a bit.

‘…Damn it. Even that doesn’t work.’

He couldn't relax and catch a breath.

It was not because there was too much work.

‘My shoulders feel heavy.’

Underneath that black barrier…

He had no idea what might pop up from the Endable Kingdom.

Raon had told him some of what was going on after chatting with Eruhaben earlier,
but Eruhaben's side was still unable to properly deliver any messages about the
Endable Kingdom right now.

He always had to prepare for the worst.

The weight of having to do so was heavy.

But Alberu was thinking that it would have been okay if that was the only thing.

“…Cale Henituse.”

That bastard.

And one other bastard.

‘I decided to make a deal. I’ll be back soon.’

Choi Han.

Alberu’s heart sank while thinking about these two people.

“It feels so stuffy.”

“Hmm? Isn't it cool in here?”

Alberu ignored Fredo, turned around, and headed toward his tent.

He started to pray.

Whether it is a test or whatever, just destroy it all and come back. You bastards.’

Alberu stiffened his tired face.

Chhh.

He closed the tent entrance after coming in and looked around.

Beeeeeeeeeeeeeeep-

Beeeeeeep-

Beeeeeeeep- beeeeeeeeeeeep-

Alberu took his mask off while listening to the video communication devices going off
all around him.

He returned to the blonde hair and blue eyes crown prince Alberu Crossman and
touched the corner of his lips with one hand.

 Your highness!

“Yes. What is going on?”

Alberu Crossman had a relaxed smile on his face as he greeted people again while
hiding his fatigue and the pressure he was feeling from the situation.

He was hoping for time to pass.

He knew that those bastards would definitely come back if he waited.

“Damn it, how much time has passed?”

Park Jin Tae wiped some blood off of his mouth.

“I don’t know, sir!”

“Hey, what the hell do you know? Hmm?”

“…Umm!”

Lee Chul Min looked as if he had been unfairly treated, but Park Jin Tae didn’t even
look at him.

He was only looking forward and his hands were quickly moving.

Aim.

Fire.

Tang!

Another bullet shot out.

Baaaaaang!

There was an explosion with the bullet at the center. A monster's body that was burnt
to a crisp joined the pile on the ground.

There were corpses like this piling up on the eastern and western sides of the building.

“Ugh.”

Park Jin Tae bit down on his lips, but blood still managed to drip out.

Lee Chul Min started to frown.

‘I’ve never seen the leader use his ability so much before!’

One of the attack team members stepped forward.

“Leader. Why don’t we fight too-”

“No!”

Park Jin Tae sternly shook his head.

“Did you forget that we are following Kim Rok Soo's orders? You guys just support
me!”

He could see more balls of fire flying toward the monsters.

Park Jin Tae looked toward the building windows.

Some people noticed his gaze and shook their heads.

‘Shit!’

That was the signal that the ingredients for the flaming arrows and fireballs were gone.

He frowned and looked at the approaching monsters with disgust.

“Why do these damn Grade 3 monsters keep coming with no end in sight?!”

“Leader-nim, why are you laughing while saying that?”

The corners of Park Jin Tae's lips started to go up after hearing his subordinate’s
comment.

“Hey! Of course I'm laughing, should I be crying when everything is going exactly as
Kim Rok Soo said it would?”

He looked toward Jang Man Soo's shields.

Bang! Baaaaang! Bang!

The monsters were still trying to break them.

Jang Man Soo was sweating bullets but was still capable of fending off their attacks,
forcing the monsters to gather to the east and west to attack the now-defunct central
shelter.

But that shield would only last for two hours.

Park Jin Tae looked toward the only person on this battlefield who seemed to be
surrounded in peace and silence.

Baaaaang! Baaaaang!

Kim Rok Soo was focused on the shield that seemed to be barely holding on.

The moment Park Jin Tae looked at him…

Kim Rok Soo lowered his head.

He then raised his wrist.

Park Jin Tae's heart started to beat faster.

‘Run when I tell you to do so.’

He recalled what Kim Rok Soo had told him.

Cale opened his mouth at that moment.

“Run!”

Cale started to run into the building once he said that.

Craaaaaaack. Craaaaaaack-!

Park Jin Tae could see cracks starting to appear on Jang Man Soo’s shield.

“Hurry!”

He urged on his subordinates who were already running away after hearing Rok Soo's
order.

Park Jin Tae saw a black-haired punk running very quickly at that moment.

It was Choi Han.

The attack team members on the eastern side had already headed for the door and
Choi Han picked Jang Man Soo up.

“Huff. Huff.”

As Jang Man Soo barely managed to open his tired arms and got on Choi Han’s back…

Park Jin Tae took something out of his pocket and put it in his ears.

He then stepped back.

“Roooooooooar!”

“Screeeech-!”

The monsters were charging in from the now defenseless eastern and western sides.

Park Jin Tae tightened his grip around his gun.

It was at that moment.

Slam!

Cale slammed the roof door open.

“Huff, huff.”

“Rok Soo!”

Cale made eye contact with Grandma Kim as he was catching his breath and
immediately headed toward the ledge.

Lee Jin Joo was standing there.

Cale looked down.

“I, I'm at my limit.”

Jang Man Soo's two arms slumped down.

Baaaaaaaaaang!

The shields were destroyed.

The shields on both the northern and the southern sides crumbled.

That made the furious monsters explosively charge forward in their place.

“Go!”

Park Jin Tae shouted to Choi Han and Choi Han quickly headed for the door.
Park Jin Tae was covering Choi Han's back as he shouted.

“Kim Rok Soo, what is that bastard doing?!”

The monsters almost instantly got up to the building.

“We had a plan! Why isn’t he going through with it?!”

It was the moment he shouted in anger.

{It is now the promised time.}

He heard Lee Jin Joo's voice.

Park Jin Tae covered his ears.

They had discussed this in advance.

Her voice would reach everything within its range.

Cale raised his hand.

Lee Jin Joo nodded her head and Cale lowered his hand.

{Aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaah!}

An extremely loud and high-pitched voice shook the area.

It felt as if the world was rumbling.

“Roooooooar!”

“Cooooooooooooo!”

“Screeeech-!”

The charging monsters reached for their ears.

There was blood dripping out of all of their ears. Some of the weaker Grade 3 monsters
started to stumble and fall as well.
The charging monsters stopped moving for a moment.

And at that moment.

They could see some human hands on top of the roof.

There were extremely weak psychokinesis or weak gusts of wind coming out of the
tips of those hands.

There were others with very weak abilities as well.

Finally, there were some strong people without any abilities.

All these people who were not much help during hunts were on the roof ledge with
earplugs in.

They looked to see the silent order.

Cale's hand moved down once again.

“Drop them all!”

They started to push with everything they had once Cale gave the signal.

The ability users activated their abilities to their fullest extent.

Plop.

The items they had moved to the roof since last night without stopping started to fall.

Boooom!

A large piece of a building fell down.

“Roooooooooar!”

“Crooooooooo!”

Three monsters fell after being hit by that large piece of a building.
That was the beginning.

Pieces of the buildings and all sorts of things started to fall on the Grade 3 monsters
behind them.

“Rooooooooooar!”

“Screeeeeeech!”

They continued to hear the monsters screaming.

“Rooooooooooooar!”

Park Jin Tae watched a monster in front of him falling over after a sharp chunk of
cement landed on its head.

“Kahahaha!”

Park Jin Tae started to laugh.

He turned around after feeling someone pulling him at that moment.

"What are you doing?”

Choi Han had pulled him in and the people inside the building quickly started to close
the door.

Screeeeeech- boom!

The door was closed.

They then almost instantly piled heavy things in front of the closed door.

The first-floor windows were boarded with wooden planks and other items as well.

Park Jin Tae ignored all of this and immediately started to run to the roof.

‘Kim Rok Soo, this bastard, he really… ’

He had quickly run up to the roof and started to speak while looking down.
‘This bastard, Kim Rok Soo, he really-’

“He really knows how to use his head!”

Grandma Kim looked down as well.

She then walked over to Cale who was standing by Lee Jin Joo and grabbed his hand.

“Rok Soo, some walls were created as you said.”

Monsters were piling up around the square building.

Pieces of buildings were piling up with them.

This was another wall that would protect the central shelter.

Park Jin Tae walked over to Cale.

“This should make it difficult for the other monsters to approach.”

Grandma Kim nodded her head.

“Yes. It should take some time for them to climb over these monsters and debris to
attack. Good job.”

But the smile quickly disappeared from Park Jin Tae's face.

“Kim Rok Soo, everything happened just as you said it would.”

Cale started to look elsewhere.

Park Jin Tae continued to speak while looking at him.

“Some Grade 1 monsters should attack soon if things go as you said, right?”

Park Jin Tae could see the Grade 2 monsters slowly revealing themselves behind the
Grade 3 monsters.

“You said that Grade 1 monsters would appear after the Grade 3 monsters disappear
but before the Grade 2 monsters start coming.”
Cale closed his eyes and then reopened them.

In the past…

As there was a shift from the Grade 3 monsters to the Grade 2 monsters…

A small number of Grade 1 monsters had appeared.

It was as if they were tasters, giving a taste of the true attack from the Grade 1
monsters that would soon come.

‘At that time.’

Cale made eye contact with Park Jin Tae who was looking at him.

“Is it doable?”

Cale continued to think while listening to Park Jin Tae ask him a question.

‘You died at that time.’

The people who protected this building and tried to buy the others time to escape had
all died because of just a few Grade 1 monsters.
It was a funny story.

It was back when Kim Rok Soo was looking up information on the unranked monsters
and their appearances and recording everything that he found.

There was something eye-catching regarding this destruction of the original central
shelters and the monster attacks prior to the appearance of the first unranked
monster.

‘It was the appearance of the taster monsters.’

From Grade 3 to Grade 2…

And again from Grade 2 to Grade 1…

The taster monsters appeared at each switch between grades.

Cale couldn't forget the word, ‘taster.’

It remained on his mind even without using his record ability.

The first taster monsters.

The Grade 1 taster monsters that appeared during the shift from Grade 3 to Grade 2
monsters were what had destroyed Kim Rok Soo's first central shelter.

Many people had died.

‘It was difficult to fight against even one Grade 1 monster during this time.’

People didn't know how to use their abilities properly yet.

They didn't have enough information.

Kim Rok Soo had seen the people die by these taster monsters as he ran away.

That was why he didn't like them being called tasters.

But the scary part was…

‘They really were tasters.’

The upcoming Grade 1 monsters’ attack and the invasion of the unranked monster in
the near future.

These were definitely tasters in comparison to those two incidents.

They needed to overcome it.

They needed to do it without taking much damage.

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“The overall situation is that the monsters will attack by their grade, but as I
mentioned before, there are some special moments in between.”

“Hey, Rok Soo.”

Jang Man Soo and Choi Han who was carrying him on his back walked over to Cale.

“You worked hard, mister.”

“No, I should be okay again after resting an hour or two.”

“I understand. Please get some rest.”

The shield would be usable again in two hours.

Jang Man Soo hesitated for a moment before starting to speak.

“…Will we be able to defeat the Grade 1 monsters? Especially when there will be 7 of
them?”

Everybody around Cale suddenly became quiet.

Seven Grade 1 monsters.

That number made everybody feel as if they would suffocate.

A fierce battle was continuing on the roof as that was going on.

“Keep dropping things!”

“Keep it up!”

“Use a little more of your psychokinesis!”

The people on the roof ledge were throwing everything they had, including weak
attacks, toward the Grade 3 monsters trying to climb over the wall of fallen monsters
and debris.

That was why they could not tell these people.

They couldn’t know that seven Grade 1 monsters would soon appear.

They would lose their will to fight.

Even Jang Man Soo was this scared.

It was at that moment.

“It’s possible.”

Someone other than Cale had responded.

It was Park Jin Tae.

He was looking at Choi Han who was carrying Jang Man Soo with a piercing gaze.

“We can manage to deal with seven of them.”

Smile.

Park Jin Tae smiled toward Choi Han who was looking at him.
Cale started to speak at that moment.

“Choi Han will not be participating this time.”

“…What?”

Park Jin Tae and the others all opened their eyes in shock.

“How can we do it without this bastard-”

“Night.”

Park Jin Tae shut up after hearing Cale say one word.

“You remember what I said, right?”

Night.

“The moment the sun goes down… The moment the sunset completely disappears…”

The moment that darkness falls over the world…

“The monsters will go crazy. They will become much more violent than before and
their attack strength will multiply by 1.5 times.”

That was why night was the first crucial moment.

“The Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters will attack together.”

Kim Rok Soo who had run away with the crumbling central shelter behind him
remembered that night clearly.

He had crawled into a gap between some building debris and watched while keeping
quiet.

He had seen how the night was turned into hell by those crazed monsters.

Numerous humans had died.

That night was brutal for the humans who could not gather together and had to split
up because the central shelter crumbled down.

“Choi Han needs to stay out of this battle for us to be able to survive the night.”

Cale and Choi Han would not be able to get any sleep during the night.

“This punk needs to get some rest right now.”

“…Then-”

Park Jin Tae bit down on his lips. He barely managed to ask.

“Then how will we fight them?”

Park Jin Tae was certain.

“I'm sure you already have the answer.”

He should know how to kill seven Grade 1 monsters.

It was at that moment.

“Leader-nim!”

He heard Lee Chul Min's voice.

Everybody looked toward Lee Chul Min who was standing on the ledge and pointing
somewhere.

“The Grade 2 monsters are starting to get closer!”

The Grade 3 monsters around the building were doing everything they could to get
inside the building and kill the humans.

But the Grade 3 monsters in the distance that had not gotten close yet were slowly
moving away.

It was as if there was a baton pass.

“…They’re making way for the Grade 2 monsters.”

As Park Jin Tae mentioned, the Grade 3 monsters were moving back as the Grade 2
monsters got closer.

More Grade 2 monsters were starting to appear.

A completely different type of pressure than the Grade 3 monsters was starting to
overwhelm the people.

Tick tock.

Cale looked at the watch.

It was past 2 pm already.

It would be 3 pm soon enough.

The taster Grade 1 monsters would appear at 3 pm.

“A, and-”

Lee Chul Min’s voice was shaking.

From within the Grade 3 and Grade 2 monsters that were similar in height…

There were oddly tall monsters appearing here and there.

“T, they appeared!”

The others shouted along with Lee Chul Min.

“Gasp! G, Grade 1……!”

The people on the southern ledge slowly started to move back.

They recognized the Grade 1 monsters.

Park Jin Tae started to mumble.

“I'm relieved. At least the Grade 1 monsters are all coming from one direction.”
The seven monsters would appear from the south.

Only three were visible right now.

A monster with a snake head, a monster that seemed to be a mix of a lion and a tiger,
and a skeleton-like monster.

They were all very different monsters.

Park Jin Tae observed the monsters as he started to speak.

“Kim Rok Soo, you said that seven of those bastards would come attacking from the
south at 3 pm?”

“I did.”

His voice was extremely calm.

Park Jin Tae became annoyed at his calmness and looked toward Kim Rok Soo.

“Hmm?”

He then flinched.

“Hey, you-”

It was because Kim Rok Soo was looking somewhere else and smiling.

The others who looked toward Cale as Park Jin Tae did flinched.

Cale started to speak at that moment.

“I told you I had foresight, right?”

Foresight.

Everybody shut up after hearing that word.

They had to feel the greatness of Kim Rok Soo's foresight ability. They recalled how
Kim Rok Soo had been right about everything until now.
“Choi Han will not fight.”

There wasn't even the slightest of openings in his stern voice.

‘Do we need to take care of it on our own?’

Park Jin Tae started to frown.

He knew Kim Rok Soo must have a way for them to defeat them on their own, but he
was worried.

He heard Kim Rok Soo's parched voice at that moment.

“But there are others who will fight with us.”

‘What?’

Park Jin Tae's eyes opened wide.

However, Cale was still looking to the north as he put a hand on Lee Jin Joo's shoulder.

“Noona.”

“Hmm, hmm?”

“Repeat what I say loud enough so that it can reach that building.”

Cale was pointing to a building to the north.

It was a pretty tall building that was barely standing up as half of it was broken.

‘Hmm?’

Park Jin Tae could see human-like figures where Cale was pointing.

‘Two people?’

He could see two people.

‘This bastard, perhaps?’

Were these the people who would fight with them?

Park Jin Tae got chills and looked toward Cale, but Cale was just telling Lee Jin Joo what
to say.

“Stop peeking glances while running away. Come here if you want to survive.”

Cale recalled a conversation in his mind even as he told Jin Joo what to say.

‘Team leader-nim, team leader-nim! Are you not going to wake up?’

When he had to face his despair while under Elisneh the First's illusion in the Molden
Kingdom…

Of the two people who had appeared in his illusion…

One of them was Jung So Hoon.

‘…Should I make a cup ramen?’

The rookie Jung So Hoon had asked if he had wanted some ramen.

And the other person…

‘Team leader-nim! Is this the time to be eating ramen? Are you eating one too because
that punk is eating one?’

Assistant Leader Kim Min Ah.

She was one of the vanguard members for Cale’s attack team.

She was married and had a cute daughter named Bae Eun Soo.

Cale recalled a conversation he had with Kim Min Ah while he was Team leader Kim
Rok Soo.

‘…You were there?’

‘Yes, sir. I was running away, saw that place, and ran away again. I'm more shocked that
you were from there. You managed to survive even without any abilities at that time.’
She had mentioned that she had visited the central shelter where Cale had been.

In fact, she was there on the day the central shelter crumbled.

‘Around what time?’

‘Probably around 2 pm or 3 pm on the first day? The taster Grade 1 monsters appeared
not too long after I got there.’

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

She had said the following.

‘I was with the punk who would become my husband at that time. I dragged him
around. Ahahahaha!’

Cale called out toward the two people who were in that building up north and looking
toward them.

“Kim Min Ah, Bae Puh Rum. Come join us here.”

Cale looked toward Lee Jin Joo.

“Noona, are you not going to say it?”

“Huh?”

Lee Jin Joo blinked in shock before starting to speak.

“Do you know them?”

“No, I don’t.”

“…Then?”

“Didn't I tell you I have the power of foresight? The two of them are strong.”

Park Jin Tae quietly mumbled at that moment.

“That crazy foresight ability.”

Cale completely ignored him and looked at Lee Jin Joo.

Lee Jin Joo snapped out of it and started to speak.

{Stop peeking glances while running away. Come here if you want to survive.}

The two people's bodies shifted significantly at that moment.

They seemed to be shocked.

Lee Jin Joo watched their reaction as she continued to speak.

{Kim Min Ah, Bae Puh Rum. Come join us here.}

Cale started to speak again.

“Bae Puh Rum. Fly over.”

{Bae Puh Rum. Fly over.}

Park Jin Tae walked over to Cale after Lee Jin Joo said that.

“Hey! He’s an ability user who can fly?”

This was his first time hearing about such an ability.

“Yes, sir. Look over there.”

Cale motioned to the northern building with his chin.

“He’s flying over.”

“…Ho.”

A man was flying with a woman on his back as Cale had mentioned.

He could see the woman pointing to this side and shouting something.

‘This crazy Kim Rok Soo!’

Park Jin Tae couldn’t help but be astonished while looking at him.

He was thinking that Kim Rok Soo was scary.

The ability to fly?

The ability to tell the strength of their opponent?

Kim Rok Soo had an ability that was much scarier than either of those kinds of abilities.

“Hey!”

The woman who was on the man’s back pointed to where Cale was standing.

She then started to speak.

“Who the hell are you guys?! How do you know who we are?”

Wave wave.

Cale motioned to them as if telling them to hurry up and get here.

Bae Puh Rum and Kim Min Ah chatted with each other for a bit before getting closer
to the roof.

Cale started to speak at that moment.

“Kim Min Ah.”

“Who are you and how do you know my name-”

“We’ll heal your brother’s injuries.”

“…What?”

Both Kim Min Ah and Bae Puh Rum looked toward Cale in shock.

“Your older brother is in that building over there. He’s in a terrible state right now
because of the large injury on his side.”
Cale recalled how Kim Min Ah had looked sad in the past.

‘I fought with my brother there. He told me to leave him behind and fly away with Bae
Puh Rum.’

Kim Min Ah had tried her best to smile.

‘But I stayed with him until the end. I was relieved I got to spend my brother’s last
moments with him.’

She had then added on in a joking tone.

‘Of course, Bae Puh Rum had to work his ass off to carry me and run away after that.’

Cale put a hand on Grandma Kim's shoulder.

"We will heal your brother’s external injury. In return, I hope that the two of you can
fight with us at this shelter.”

Grandma Kim placed her wrinkled hand on Cale’s hand.

Cale felt the warmth of her hand as he continued to speak.

“Then the two of you, and Kim Min Ah, your brother as well… All of you will survive.”

Kim Min Ah and Bae Puh Rum were high school students at this time.

The two of them were silent.

Bae Puh Rum started to speak at that moment.

“Hey, Min Ah. Should I go bring big bro over?”

Kim Min Ah started to speak.

“Let me down first.”

Bae Puh Rum and Kim Min Ah landed on the roof.

Lee Chul Min shouted at that moment.

“Seven of them! All seven of them have appeared!”

The people who were standing on the ledge lowered their hands and looked toward
Cale.

It was okay for them to do that.

“…The monsters are retreating.”

The Grade 3 monsters were retreating.

They moved farther back than where the Grade 2 monsters were standing. They
looked like actors moving off stage after the first act was completed.

Boom.

A Grade 1 monster with a Bear’s body and purple tiger stripes stomped and shook the
ground.

Just one monster moving forward felt as if tens of Grade 3 monsters were moving
toward them.

This was the impact of a Grade 1 monster coming close.

“Kim Min Ah.”

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“Your brother has the message ability right?”

Cale walked past Kim Min Ah as her eyes opened wide.

He then stood at the door heading down from the roof and pointed to some people.

“Park Jin Tae, Kim Min Ah, Lee Chul Min, Bae Puh Rum. The four of you will fight with
me.”

Park Jin asked in shock.

“Y, you're fighting too?”

He looked at Kim Rok Soo’s feeble body.

Cale confidently responded while looking at this gaze.

“Yes, sir. I am fighting as well.”

Cale pointed to himself with his finger.

“Park Jin Tae, Kim Min Ah, Lee Chul Min, and Bae Puh Rum will each take care of one
monster.”

That was a total of four monsters.

“And I'll take care of three of them.”

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

Park Jin Tae questioned his ears.

“What? Three of them?”

He rubbed his ears and walked toward Kim Rok Soo.

“You saying that I can take care of one by myself is already not understandable. But
what? Three of them? You?”

He started to frown.

“Do you want to die?”

He could accept this unbelievable ability of foresight.

Actually, he trusted it now.

‘But what? He’s going to take care of three Grade 1 monsters? With his feeble body?’

Park Jin Tae was frowning as he walked toward Cale looking as if he would grab Cale
by the collar at any moment.

However, Choi Han got in his way.

Park Jin Tae felt so much pressure after seeing Choi Han quietly stare at him.

‘This crazy bastard!’

Both Kim Rok Soo and this Choi Han bastard… They both seemed crazy.

Park Jin Tae started to speak.

“You cannot die.”

He then quickly added on.

“For all of us to survive.”

Kim Rok Soo dying would make it very difficult for them to survive.

“…Hyung.”

“Hey.”

The Lee siblings were looking back and forth at Cale and Park Jin Tae and didn't know
what to do.

Someone stepped forward at that moment.

“U, umm, hyung-nim?”

It was Bae Puh Rum.

He was scratching his head as he awkwardly started to speak.

“Min Ah and I will lose if we fight against a Grade 1 monster.”

“Hey, Bae Puh Rum. Shut up for a moment.”

“…Okay.”

Bae Puh Rum who had taken a step forward took two steps back at Kim Min Ah’s
comment.

However, his eyes were still full of uncertainty while looking at Cale.

Cale started to speak to Bae Puh Rum.

“Go bring her brother over.”

“Excuse me?”

Bae Puh Rum looked toward Kim Min Ah. Kim Min Ah slightly nodded her head and
Bae Puh Rum immediately flew up and headed toward the building they had been at.
Kim Min Ah's older brother was there.

Kim Min Ah wasn’t looking at Bae Puh Rum as she was quietly looking at Cale with her
arms crossed.

Screeeeeeeeeech-!

A sharp noise rang through everybody's ears at that moment.

Boom!

The ground started to shake as well.

“T, the monsters are approaching!”

They then heard Lee Chul Min's urgent voice.

Cale started to speak at that moment.

“The seven monsters won’t attack the building all at once.”

Kim Min Ah could see two Grade 1 monsters approaching them from behind Cale's
shoulder.

One was a skeleton monster.

The other was a wolf monster that looked as if it had a black snakeskin on its head.

She heard Cale continue to speak.

“Two of them, two of them, and then three of them. They will come in that order.”

The reason behind it was simple.

These monsters were tasters.

They stuck to that theme.

“Of them, the Grade 1 monster that seems to be a mix of a lion and a tiger… The Dark
Tiger. That bastard is the leader of those seven monsters.”
Park Jin Tae looked past the two monsters in front and toward the Grade 1 monsters
behind them.

‘Mm.’

The Tiger’s black eyes were looking right at the roof.

The gaze was too sharp for monsters they had thought lacked intelligence or had very
low intelligence even if they had any.

He instantly got the chills.

But Park Jin Tae could not stay like that.

“They’re Grade 1s!”

“What do we do? H, how do we stop them?!”

The shelter people on the roof were starting to get scared and frantic.

Park Jin Tae could feel the fear of death and the hopelessness on their faces.

‘No!’

It couldn't continue like this.

They still needed to last for over 20 hours.

Night had not come yet either.

It would probably be the longest night of their lives.

But to spend that night without any hope and full of fear?

That could not happen.

“Me first!”

Park Jin Tae started to speak.

“I'm going first!”

All of them looked toward Park Jin Tae.

But Park Jin Tae was looking at Cale as he continued to speak.

“You said I was strong enough to take one down, right? So, I will take care of one.”

Boom. Boom!

The two Grade 1 monsters that were slowly approaching as if they were initiating a
battue made Park Jin Tae's palms become sweaty.

He could feel the pressure.

“However, you need to tell me how to do it right now.”

But he would not be able to do anything if he could not overcome this pressure.

At the time he had become the youngest person to win an Olympic Gold Medal…

Park Jin Tae had realized something.

However, Park Jin Tae’s eyes opened wide as he looked at Cale.

"This is why I needed to save Park Jin Tae.”

Cale started to laugh while looking at Park Jin Tae.

He then turned his back to Park Jin Tae and looked south.

He was looking at the two approaching monsters. He then looked toward the five
monsters quietly observing the people at the shelter.

Cale quietly observed all seven of them.

He then started to walk.

Lee Jin Joo urgently blurted out.

“Rok Soo! What are you going to do-”

“I have…”

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“Even if they are only half of what they could be…”

Actually, it wasn’t even half right now.

He then started to smile.

“There are powers embedded in my soul.”

He couldn't hear their voices, but these powers let him know from the moment he
opened his eyes that he had come here as Cale.

Cale walked toward the roof’s ledge.

“I will fight first.”

Cale could see someone walking next to him at that moment.

It was Choi Han.

“You can’t cough up blood.”

Cale quietly looked into Choi Han’s eyes before nodding his head.

“…I'll try my best.”

Choi Han stopped walking once he heard that.

However, Cale’s did not stop there.

He continued to walk.

“Kim Rok Soo!”

Park Jin Tae and the Lee siblings ran toward Cale in shock.
“Hey, are you crazy?! Stop!”

Park Jin Tae could see Cale's foot step into the air at that moment.

“Rok Soo!”

Lee Jin Joo shouted as Cale disappeared.

Cale’s body had walked off the roof ledge and fallen down.

Park Jin Tae and the Lee siblings frantically ran over and grabbed the roof ledge.

“Hey, you bastard-”

“Hyung!”

They looked down with urgent expressions.

It was at that moment.

Shhh.

Lee Jin Joo's hair fluttered in the wind.

Her jaw naturally dropped.

“…Huh?”

There was wind blowing from the bottom.

Her hair fluttered in the wind.

Park Jin Tae started to speak while looking down.

“…The wind-”

The wind was surrounding Kim Rok Soo's body.

Park Jin Tae subconsciously said something.

“M… multiple ability user?”

He made eye contact with Kim Rok Soo who looked up at that moment.

Cale shook his head.

‘No.’

He was not a multiple ability user right now.

In fact, the current Kim Rok Soo had not awakened any abilities at all.

Swoooooooosh-

Cale closed his eyes while feeling the wind surrounding him.

Cale recalled what the White Star had said a long time ago.

‘My goodness. Cale, you don't even know how to use your ancient powers properly.’

The White Star had said that Cale didn’t know how to use his ancient powers properly.

He then recalled the conversation he had with Mercenary King Bud on their way to
Wind Island.

‘…Cale. Why would an ancient power talk?’

‘Don't the owners of the ancient powers usually talk to you?’

‘What are you talking about? You can hear the voices of the ancient powers? How does
that make any sense?’

Bud had said that they could not hear the voices of ancient powers.

Cale’s body that had been quickly falling started to slow down.

He recalled the other conversations he had had since that conversation with Bud.

The Scary Giant Cobblestone had said the following.

‘Ancient powers are powers that are embedded in a person's body and soul.’

That was why the Super Rock had said that the White Star kept the strong ancient
powers in his soul and carried them with him with every reincarnation.

His powers became stronger and more complete as time passed because of that.

The Super Rock had also said the following.

‘Do you wish to defeat the White Star?’

Cale had wanted back then and still wanted to do so now.

‘I will teach you the easiest way. ‘

Wind, water, fire, earth, wood. All five of them had chimed in at the same time.

‘Get rid of us.’

Powers that are embedded in a person's soul.

Ancient powers were powers that had become embedded in the 35+ years old Kim
Rok Soo's soul, powers embedded in Kim Rok Soo who had suddenly woken up in Cale
Henituse's body.

And ancient powers only became complete once they became fully absorbed by the
soul.

However, Cale did not want to do that.

He had not completely absorbed the ancient powers into his soul.

The wills of multiple ancient power owners were still with him.

That was not having complete ownership of the powers.

It was only having a portion of the ownership.

The Indestructible Shield. The glutton priestess had said the following.
‘Eat us. Gobble up our existences. Each time one of these voices disappears… ’

Each time he got rid of the former owner’s will and made them disappear…

The cheapskate, Super Rock, glutton, thief, and the Sky Eating Water. Each time one of
them disappeared…

‘You'll become stronger.’

That would mean that Cale's soul had full ownership of that ancient power.

“I finally understood what that meant.”

Cale understood the meaning behind those words once he came here.

He could not hear the voices of the ancient powers when he opened his eyes here.

But he could feel the portion of power that was embedded in Kim Rok Soo, in Cale's
soul.

‘It’s not even half.’

He could only feel about half of the strength of his normal ancient powers.

Of course, even this much was a significant burden to the weak twenty years old Kim
Rok Soo’s body.

But these powers were the reason he made up his mind that it was worth trying to
fight and to save everyone even without Kim Rok Soo's abilities being awakened.

Similar to how his life as Kim Rok Soo was extremely helpful to him right now…

So was the time he had spent as Cale.

‘I was also able to come up with a hypothesis thanks to this.’

The powers embedded in his soul, as well as Choi Han being here, made him become
more certain.

The parts he had been uncertain about were slowly being revealed.
This might not just be a simple testing ground.

Could a person's soul cross over in an illusion?

Cale couldn’t come up with a definitive answer yet.

It was because there was still a big problem.

The problem was…

“I can’t defeat the unranked monsters even with these powers.”

But the situation had changed.

It had changed by quite a bit.

Choi Han was here, and the fact that this world might not be an illusion had changed
Cale’s mindset.

“Hehehe.”

Get rid of the baggage on his mind, all of his regrets.

Cale raised his head.

He looked at the people looking down at him from the second and third-floor windows
before looking up at the roof.

He could see Park Jin Tae, Kim Min Ah, Lee Jin Joo, and the others looking down at him
from the ledge.

Park Jin Tae thought that he had made eye contact with Cale’s nonchalant gaze.

It was at that moment.

“Please take a good look.”

Choi Han started to speak to the people at the ledge.

“Please watch and learn.”

“What do you mea-”

Park Jin Tae who was about to ask suddenly got chills throughout his body.

His gaze headed down.

There were no changes.

Kim Rok Soo was just standing there.

But Park Jin Tae felt a big difference.

Actually, he was not the only one who had felt the difference.

“…Holy crap. What is that?”

Kim Min Ah’s hands were shaking as she held onto the ledge.

Park Jin Tae's mouth turned dry.

‘Such a pressure is coming from Kim Rok Soo-’

An intense amount of pressure was coming from Kim Rok Soo.

Choi Han continued to say the things Cale had told him to tell these people who could
not look away from Kim Rok Soo.

“Your potentials. Your futures. You will now see the true value of your powers.”

Cale slowly started to walk with the Dominating Aura surrounding him.

“Screeeeeeeeeech-!”

“Grrrrrr- grrrrrr-”

The Grade 1 monsters focused their gazes on Cale.

Choi Han watched this before saying the last part.

“Humans continue to grow. Please watch and grow.”

The moment those words reached everyone’s ears…

Cale opened up his arms toward the two monsters showing him hostility.

Crackle, crackle.

Rose gold fire flowers and current started to flow around him.

Small whirlwinds gathered at the tips of his feet as well.

“Time to go.”

His body quickly rushed toward the monsters.

But Cale’s face looked relaxed.

The monsters’ patterns, attributes, and weaknesses…

Adding the powers he had gained as Cale to Kim Rok Soo's record…

“It's been a while since I stretched like this.”

Cale laughed while thinking about his time as team leader Kim Rok Soo.

“Screeeeeeeeeech-!”

Cale was flying toward the body of the skeleton monster charging at him.

The rose gold colored light was gathered in his hands as if they were guns.
The moment Cale thought that this testing ground might be a real world…

He started to think.

‘If this is a different world and I need to leave this place to return home… ’

Then there was only one answer.

‘Let's teach them.’

Teach the people here how to do it.

Originally, the twenty years old Kim Rok Soo was pretty useless.

However, as he passed 25, 30, and then 35, Kim Rok Soo became a decent person.

He had grown.

If even he had grown, what if these people who were supposed to die here ended up
surviving and growing?

‘They’ll all be better than me.’

Just thinking about it was making him laugh.

That was what Cale wanted.

For that reason, he had started this first lesson.

"Screeeech- screeeeeeech!”

Cale moved even faster toward the 3-meter tall mummy-like skeleton monster charging
toward him.
Jang Man Soo had barely managed to crawl over to the ledge and peeked out while
holding onto the railing.

He could see the wind surrounding Cale and the reddish-gold light in his hands.

But Jang Man Soo started to shout.

“Rok Soo! Dodge!”

He could see a black animal charging toward Cale.

The black snake wolf.

Jang Man Soo had seen people being eaten by this black wolf that was covered in
snakeskin.

He had also heard that people who said goodbye to him as they went hunting were
squashed by that bastard’s front paw.

That bastard was a source of fear and hell.

Kim Rok Soo looked too weak and tiny compared to this house-sized snake wolf.

“Roooooar!”

The black snake wolf charged at him from the right with its jaw open.

Jang Man Soo’s eyes opened and his hands that were holding the railing started to
shake.

‘No.’

Kim Rok Soo could not die.

“Rok Soo--!”

Baaaaang!

Jang Man Soo shouted as he heard a loud explosion.

A lot of dust shot up.

However, the dust soon subsided.

Jang Man Soo subconsciously opened his mouth.

“…A shield?”

A silver shield with two wings open was blocking the black wolf.

“…Holy crap. How many powers does this son of a bitch have?”

He heard Park Jin Tae mumbling, but Jang Man Soo could not say anything.

The shield was small compared to his shield.

It was only big enough to block the black wolf's face and front paw.

But the way it was being used was different.

At least, that’s how Jang Man Soo felt.

Kim Rok Soo was not using the shield to block the enemy, but so that he could keep
moving forward.

Jang Man Soo made eye contact with Cale who was on the other side of the shield.

He might be wrong, but it seemed as if Rok Soo was looking at him.

It was as if he was teaching him that this was how to use a shield even though he was
in the middle of a battle.

It was as if he was showing how to do it.

“…Did I make a mistake?”

“Of course not!”

Jang Man Soo looked toward Park Jin Tae. But Park Jin Tae was not looking at him. He
was speaking.
“He’s obviously using the shield like that for you to see, Mr. Jang Man Soo! Isn’t that
obvious?”

Park Jin Tae stopped talking for a moment.

He still couldn’t take his eyes off the rose-gold light in Cale’s hands.

“Crazy bastard.”

Park Jin Tae realized that the pressure flowing out of Cale had disappeared at some
point.

However, his hand was still full of sweat.

“Screeeech!”

Cale, who had been looking at Jang Man Soo, started to walk again.

Craaaaaaack-

His shield slowly started to crack.

This Indestructible Shield was not even at half power after all.

“…And I can’t overdo it.”

Cale wasn't using all of his powers.

Efficiency was the most important thing right now.

Swoooooooosh-

Cale rode the wind and shot forward before the shield broke.

“Roooooooooooooooar!”

The wolf’s roar echoed in Cale's ear.

Someone landed on the roof at that moment.

“Huff, huff! I’m here!”

It was Bae Puh Rum.

Kim Min Ah walked over to Bae Puh Rum. To be more specific, she had walked over to
her brother who was on his back.

"Oppa!”

“Mr. Kim Min Joon.”

Choi Han also walked over to Kim Min Joon and made eye contact with him.

Kim Min Ah flinched for a moment before stepping back. It was because she saw
Grandma Kim standing behind Choi Han.

“I will get started.”

Grandma Kim immediately put her hand on Kim Min Joon's infected wound.

A bright light surrounded his wound.

They heard a sharp voice at that moment.

“Screeeeeech!”

The skeleton covered in bandages swung its arms at Cale.

Swoooooooosh-

The bandages on both of its arms instantly turned into sharp whips that struck down
to split Cale in half.

The movement was elaborate.

However, there were no openings. Actually, even if there were any openings, they
would only last a few short seconds. It swung its bandage whips around before
striking down at Cale.

Park Jin Tae bit down on his lips.

“…Those damn bandages-”

Park Jin Tae who had escaped from that monster in the past to survive started to
frown.

He heard Choi Han’s voice at that moment.

“Three steps to the left.”

“…What the hell are-”

Park Jin Tae's eyes opened wide.

Cale quickly took three steps to the left.

“The blind spot of the two arm bandage attack.”

Everybody looked toward Choi Han at that moment.

“Please look at Rok Soo hyung. I'm just repeating what he told me.”

They heard Lee Chul Min’s voice at that moment.

“My goodness! It really is a blind spot!”

Park Jin Tae’s eyes opened wide as he quickly looked back at Cale.

‘It’s as Choi Han, no, as Kim Rok Soo said!’

Three steps to the left.

An area where the bandage whips could not reach was there.

“Five steps forward.”

Cale then quickly took five steps forward. He mumbled the things he had told Choi
Han.

Choi Han continued to speak as well.

"The bandage monster will raise its left arm.”

"The bandage monster will raise its left arm.”

It was a pattern.

It was a monster’s unchanging pattern that all monsters Grade 1 and lower had.

Cale could see the bandage monster raise its left arm.

“The first weakness. The left armpit.”

Cale could see a red rock in the spot of the bandage monster’s armpit when it raised
its arm.

“Aim.”

Park Jin Tae was hearing Choi Han's voice, but it felt as if Kim Rok Soo was talking to
him.

That was not it.

It was actually Kim Rok Soo.

Choi Han was sharking Kim Rok Soo’s will.

Choi Han continued to speak.

“Fire.”

The moment Park Jin Tae saw the bandage monster raise its arm… He saw a rose gold
light shooting toward its left armpit.

It looked like a gun.

Park Jin Tae subconsciously took his gun out of his pocket.

“First weakness destroyed.”

“Screeeech-!”
He heard the monster’s scream and Choi Han's voice at the same time.

Park Jin Tae’s eyes were still focused on Cale.

“Screeech, kiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!”

The screeching monster looked toward Cale.

Sharp thorns shot out from on top of the bones that had been covered by the bandages
and headed for Cale.

However, Cale was not there.

“Move through the legs.”

Cale’s body was already passing through the monster’s skeleton legs.

Park Jin Tae got the chills seeing him move so boldly.

Who would ever think about moving through a Grade 1 monster’s legs?

Especially a monster that swung bandage whips all around itself!

‘But Kim Rok Soo managed to do it.’

He passed through the legs as if he was lying down and sliding through before raising
his arms.

“The second weakness.”

He would quickly take care of this monster.

“Inside the right thigh.”

Crack, crackle!

The Fire of Destruction, two strands of its fiery thunderbolt struck the leg bone by its
thigh.

“Explode!”
Baaaaaang!

The fiery thunderbolts exploded. The skeleton monster’s screaming shook the area.

“Screeeeeeeeeeeeech---!”

Its eyes inside the skull turned red.

“Approaching berserk state.”

This was a unique trait of the skeleton monster.

It would immediately enter berserk state once the second weakness was attacked and
become twice as strong.

That was why this bastard was scary.

‘If you don’t know about it that is.’

But if you knew about it?

‘It’s very easy.’

The skeleton monster turned around.

Cale started to laugh.

He could see Park Jin Tae standing on the roof and looking at him with a focused gaze.

“Good, he’s paying attention.”

Cale quickly moved to the right.

Choi Han continued to speak.

“The black snake wolf’s second attack.”

The black wolf to the right jumped over the skeleton and charged for Cale.

“Aim for the ankle.”

Fire.

The fourth fiery thunderbolt pierced through the black wolf’s right ankle.

Its skin was like a snake.

However, its weakness was fire.

“Roooooooooar!”

The wolf roared as its body leaned to one side.

Choi Han continued to speak.

“Jump.”

Cale kicked off the ground. He stepped on the wolf’s head and his body shot up.

Then he was able to make eye contact with the bandage monster.

“Screeeech-!!”

He made eye contact with the skeleton monster that was swinging its bandages and
thorny bones while looking at him.

The moment he looked into those eyes…

“Fire the last bullets.”

Choi Han made a comment. The word ‘bullet’ etched itself in Park Jin Tae’s mind.

The rose gold thunderbolts struck the skeleton's two eyes.

Baaaaaang!

They were not strong enough to destroy the skeleton's head.

They were only strong enough to cause explosions where the monster’s eyes should
be.
Cale used the explosion to move and his body rolled on the ground.

The skeleton monster’s last weakness was its eyes that had turned red.

It was a critical weakness that only appeared once it went berserk.

The skeleton monster’s body started to tilt without even being able to scream.

“Roooooooooooooooar!”

The skeleton monster’s body was starting to fall on the black wolf.

The black wolf that had one ankle ripped off was doing its best to dodge the skeleton's
body.

It was because there was fire coming out of where the skeleton's red eyes had exploded.

The black snake wolf that had snake skin could not let that fire touch its body.

However, Choi Han's voice reached Jang Man Soo's ears at that moment.

“Use the shield.”

A silver shield blocked the black snake wolf's path.

The snake wolf could not move forward. And on top of it…

“Roooooooooooooooar!”

A burning skeleton head, its sharp thorny bones, and bandages that would easily catch
fire fell on the snake wolf.

Baaaaaaaaaang-!

Fire shot up.

The people on the roof heard Choi Han’s voice.

“I only managed to memorize the first battle. Rok Soo hyung will tell you about the rest.”
Park Jin Tae, Jang Man Soo, Kim Min Ah, and the others all looked away from the
burning monsters and at Cale who was heading back to the building.

‘C, crazy bastard!’

Park Jin Tae’s voice was shaking.

He couldn't even think straight long enough to try to hide it.

How long had it been?

How long had it taken him to take down those two monsters?

It didn't seem to take very long.

“Damn it.”

Park Jin Tae’s hands were shaking.

‘I feel like I could do it.’

Damn it!

He felt as if he could take down the bandage monster. He felt as if he could take down
the black snake wolf as well.

‘As long as I'm with Jang Man Soo that is.’

He turned toward Jang Man Soo.

Jang Man Soo's hands were shaking as well. Jang Man Soo started to speak.

“Umm, umm, hey, Jin Tae. Don’t you think we could take care of the bandage monster
and snake wolf when the Grade 1 monsters come to attack?”

Park Jin Tae chuckled while looking at Jang Man Soo who was speaking while looking
at him with an awkward expression. That was all he could do.

He felt as if he could take down these monster bastards that he had run away from all
this time as Jang Man Soo said.
‘Of course, we don't have the experience.’

It was not easy to move around while attacking the monsters following the pattern
with proper timing as Kim Rok Soo had done.

It would only be possible if they trained over and over to make that pattern feel normal.

‘But Kim Rok Soo did it.’

Was it possible?

Could a person move like that because they had foresight and used data?

‘…He couldn’t do it without a ton of experience.’

Park Jin Tae could not believe it.

He quietly looked at the approaching Kim Rok Soo.

However, Cale, who had memorized these patterns as if they were his own instincts
and had tons of experience that Park Jin Tae did not know about, let out a small sigh.

‘My body is weak.’

His body felt slow compared to when he had been team leader Kim Rok Soo. He was
weak.

He didn't have enough muscles.

Even the ancient powers that weren’t even at half strength were difficult for this body
to handle.

‘But I was still able to fight pretty easily.’

Drip.

Cale wiped away the small amount of blood at the corner of his lip and looked up at
the roof.

A corner of Park Jin Tae’s lips was up as he looked down at Cale with an odd expression.
Cale chuckled at Park Jin Tae and started to speak.

“Kim Min Ah, Bae Puh Rum.”

He sounded extremely calm, as if he had just come back from a walk.

Kim Min Ah and Bae Puh Rum looked at Cale.

They weren't the only ones.

Everybody inside the building was looking at Cale through the windows or on the roof.

Boom!

They heard two more monsters approaching, but they were still focused on Cale.

Cale quietly took in their gazes and started to speak as if that was easy to do.

“Come down. I'll teach you guys something this time.”

“Min Ah, should we go down?”

Kim Min Ah who heard Bae Puh Rum's question was staring at Cale with a piercing
gaze before she responded.

“Of course we are going down, how can we not?”

Bae Puh Rum nodded his head while looking south with a concerned gaze.

“Damn it. I hate snakes.”

“…The problem is that it is a snake-headed human.”

“Exactly.”

This monster that had the head of a snake but the body of a giant that could be seen
in mythologies was approaching them.

Kim Min Ah looked at the other monster next to it while calmly speaking.

“…And the other has a head of a bird but the body of a snake.”

The two monsters were slowly approaching. They seemed to be enjoying a nice walk.

Bae Puh Rum pulled at his hair as he continued to speak.

“…What the hell do they want? Why did these monsters appear?”

“It just means it’s a terrible crisis.”

“Exactly! I'm scared of reptiles…”

“But isn't it doable since they’re both just half and half?”
“…Min Ah.”

Kim Min Ah looked away from Bae Puh Rum who sounded as if he wanted to cry.

She knew Bae Puh Rum was a punk who acted this way on purpose.

“Anyway, let’s go do-”

Kim Min Ah flinched as she was about to say that they should go down.

“What’s taking you so long?”

Cale was gently stepping on the ledge and walked onto the roof.

Swoooooooosh-

A light breeze was surrounding him like a whirlwind.

"Are you not coming down?”

Cale sounded as if he was saying they were walking to the convenience store just
outside or something.

Park Jin Tae walked forward at that moment.

“Hey, Kim Rok Soo!”

Cale turned toward Park Jin Tae.

"I want to go next.”

“…I guess you're getting antsy?”

“Yeah.”

Park Jin Tae had his gun in his hand and looked extremely heated to fight.

“No.”

“What?”
However, Cale sternly shook his head.

“This monster matches well with the Kim Min Ah-Bae Puh Rum pairing.”

“…Them?”

Park Jin Tae started to frown.

“How can these children be useful? It’s better for me to go first.”

Cale reinterpreted Park Jin Tae's words.

“Are you saying children should stay back because it is dangerous while adults like you
should fight, Mr. Park Jin Tae?”

“…What are you talking about?’

Park Jin Tae instantly started to frown and looked away from Cale.

Park Jin Tae then heard Kim Min Ah's voice.

“Hey mister, I'm stronger than you.”

“What?”

Park Jin Tae looked toward Kim Min Ah.

Kim Min Ah took out a hair tie and tied her straight hair into a ponytail as she continued
to speak.

“I saw you fighting earlier, mister. I'm better than you.”

Bae Puh Rum scratched his head and walked in between Park Jin Tae and Kim Min Ah.

“Ahem, umm, hyung-nim? Min Ah, Min Joon-hyung, and I have survived with just the
three of us. That should be all I need to say, right?”

Park Jin Tae started to smile after seeing Bae Puh Rum speak awkwardly but confidently.

“You pretended to be a fool on purpose.”

Bae Puh Rum awkwardly smiled in response. Kim Min Ah smacked Bae Puh Rum's
back.

“Let’s go down.”

“You're going down together.”

Kim Min Ah looked to one side.

Choi Han had put his hand on the decently healed Kim Min Joon's shoulder.

“I took care of the urgent parts. We can check on him later to make sure.”

Grandma Kim removed her hand from Kim Min Joon’s injury with a tired face.

Kim Min Ah's eyes opened wide.

The infected wound that had been covered in pus and blood still had left a scar, but it
looked much better.

Her healing ability was shocking.

This was the reason Park Jin Tae and the others all listened to Grandma Kim even as
they expanded their level of influence in the central shelter.

“Thank you, grandma.”

“No need to thank me.”

Grandma Kim shook her head at Cale and reached her hand out toward him.

“I'm okay.”

Cale took a step back.

“…You too-”

“It’s just a bruise.”

“On the corner of your mouth-”

“That is an internal injury.”

“……Okay.”

Cale nonchalantly wiped away the dried blood by his mouth.

Grandma Kim looked at him with a concerned expression before stepping back.

“Grandma.”

“Thank you, Jin Joo. Seung Won.”

Lee Jin Joo and Lee Seung Won helped to support Grandma Kim.

Cale approached the siblings.

“Hey, Seung Won.”

“Huh?”

“You come down too.”

“Me?”

“Yeah.”

Cale then looked toward Kim Min Joon.

“Mr. Kim Min Joon?”

“…Yes?”

He had heard about most of the situation while Bae Puh Rum carried him over. He had
seen Kim Rok Soo take care of two Grade 1 monsters in less than thirty minutes while
he was being healed.

“You’re able to use your ability, correct?”

Bae Puh Rum stepped forward after hearing Cale's question.

“Excuse me. Hyung-nim should probably-”

But Kim Min Ah grabbed his arm. Bae Puh Rum could see the cold look in Kim Min
Ah's face.

She calmly started to speak.

“Oppa’s ability is not related to the injury at all. Also…”

She looked around the roof.

She could see the two approaching monsters and everybody looking at them.

“I don’t think it makes sense to try to get some rest in this situation.”

Kim Min Ah and Kim Min Joon made eye contact.

Kim Min Joon started to speak.

“That’s right. It’s an urgent situation.”

Park Jin Tae looked toward Kim Min Joon.

‘A military uniform.’

Although the clothes were a mess, he could tell it was a uniform. Even his shoes were
military boots.

Kim Min Joon reached his hand out toward Choi Han.

Kim Min Joon had seen Choi Han’s sword art that had destroyed the Grade 3 monsters
while on the other building with Kim Min Ah and Bae Puh Rum.

“Can you please help me?”

“Of course.”

Choi Han put Kim Min Joon on his back.

Cale looked toward Kim Min Joon and Lee Seung Won while starting to speak.
“Mr. Kim Min Joon and Mr. Lee Seung Won will move together during this battle.”

Cale continued to speak as Kim Min Joon looked toward Lee Seung Won.

“Lee Seung Won’s ability is recording…”

Kim Min Joon’s eyes clouded over at that moment.

“…And Mr. Kim Min Joon's ability is message.”

Cale pointed to his neck.

“Voice delivery.”

Lee Seung Won and Lee Jin Joo looked toward Kim Min Joon.

Cale quietly watched the three people looking at each other before turning around.

Boom!

The snake-headed giant's club struck down on the ground.

The two monsters that were slowly approaching had gotten close.

The two monsters stepped on the burnt corpses of the monsters from earlier.

Crack.

The corpses of the two monsters they had feared until now crumbled and turned into
ashes.

People gulped while watching that before looking toward Cale.

Cale then patted someone's shoulder as he walked back to the ledge.

“Please come down and wait with Lee Chul Min. You are up next.”

Swoooooooosh-

He then headed down while being surrounded by the wind once again.
Bae Puh Rum followed behind him while carrying Kim Min Ah.

“…Lee Chul Min!”

“Yes, leader-nim!”

“Follow me!”

Lee Chul Min hesitated after hearing Park Jin Tae's order but followed behind him as
if he had no choice.

Of course, Choi Han, Kim Min Joon, and Lee Seung Won were already going down the
stairs.

Cale, Bae Puh Rum, and Kim Min Ah were already on the ground.

Gulp.

Bae Puh Rum became tense as soon as he saw the snake-headed monster and the
snake-bodied monster getting closer.

‘They really are different.’

Unlike when he faced off against other monsters, just looking at these monsters made
him fearful.

‘Can I win against that?’

Bae Puh Rum quickly started to think. He then looked toward Cale.

‘Mm!’

He made eye contact with Cale who was looking at him.

Pfft.

Cale chuckled while looking at Bae Puh Rum.

Cale was having this thought while looking at Bae Puh Rum.
‘It’s interesting seeing him this naive too.’

Bae Puh Rum.

He was a government worker in the newly created Korean Seoul Central Shelter ‘Ga’
Precinct.

Cale recalled what Kim Min Ah had told him in the past.

‘Bae Puh Rum? He's on paternity leave right now.’

Unlike the past where mayors and aldermen were elected, a new system of
government officials was created after the cataclysms with the central shelters at the
core.

Each precinct appointed a leader who was in charge of the administration.

Each leader of the central shelter was called the ‘Precinct Leader.’

“Umm, what do you want me to do?”

Cale put his hand on Bae Puh Rum who was cautiously asking him a question.

‘They said he’d be at the Precinct Leader level in ten years.’

Cale remembered that Bae Puh Rum was in charge of the Seoul Central Shelter ‘Ga’
Precinct's region defense as a section chief.

“…Something about bringing in the wind.”

“Excuse me?”

People had said that Bae Puh Rum controlled the wind as he moved.

“Bae Puh Rum.”

“Yes?”

“You use the wind to fly in the sky, right?”

Bae Puh Rum flinched at Cale’s question before awkwardly responding.

“Yes?”

“Have you not thought about using the wind in a different way?”

“I did, but it didn’t work too well. Haha.”

Pat. Pat.

Cale patted Bae Puh Rum's shoulder.

“Then watch what I do and try to do the same thing.”

“Excuse me?”

Bae Puh Rum asked back, but Cale didn’t pay him any attention.

Instead, he turned toward Kim Min Ah.

Kim Min Ah was observing the Grade 1 monsters with a sharp gaze. She seemed to be
inspecting them.

Cale stood next to her as he started to speak.

“Use your ability to its maximum level.”

Kim Min Ah's shoulders started to shake.

She was still looking at the monsters as she started to speak.

“…But I can’t control it.”

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

Kim Min Ah could not control her ability at this time.

She didn't know how to use it properly either.

That was why she could not fend off a single monster properly.
There was a requirement to be in charge of an attack team in the vanguard at the
company where Kim Rok Soo was a team leader.

A Grade 1 Ability user specialized in attacking.

Kim Min Ah easily met that requirement.

Cale quietly continued to speak to her.

“I will control it for you.”

Kim Min Ah looked toward Cale.

Cale looked into her shaking pupils and continued to speak.

“All you need to do is use your ability as much as you want.”

Her shaking pupils calmed down.

Kim Min Ah quietly nodded her head.

“I'll give it a try.”

It was at that moment.

"W, what?”

Lee Chul Min’s eyes opened wide as he was about to walk out of the building through
a window on the second floor.

He was looking at Kim Min Ah.

Boom!

The ground shook at that moment.

It was not because of the monsters’ footsteps.

A huge half-transparent spear had struck down on the ground.

There was a person holding onto that spear.

It was Kim Min Ah.

She was easily grabbing this spear that was three-times her height.

"Who is she?”

Lee Chul Min gasped in astonishment.

However, he couldn't say anything after seeing what happened next.

All he could do was stand there with his jaw dropped.

“…Crazy bastard.”

Park Jin Tae couldn’t help but swear.

Kim Min Ah looked to her side.

Her pupils started to shake.

“Just-”

Kim Min Ah couldn’t help but ask.

“Just who are you?”

She could see Cale in front of her.

Boom!

Another large spear struck down on the ground and caused the dust to rise.

Shaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa-

Water was swirling to create a large spear.

The spear was pointing its sharp blade toward the sky as if it was going to pierce the
sky.
A portion of the Sky Eating Water's power was being activated in Cale’s hand.

‘It really is weak.’

Cale could once again feel that only a portion of the ancient powers had been absorbed
by his soul.

But he was not disappointed that it was weaker than usual.

The method the ancient powers gave him to make them stronger…

‘Gobble up our existences. Each time one of these voices disappears… You'll become
stronger.’

Cale had rejected that method.

That was why he could feel the wills of the owners of the ancient powers and he could
always be with them.

‘I'm sure they’ll throw a fit when I go back.’

Cale thought about how the Super Rock and the other owners of the ancient powers
would be concerned about him once he returned to his original world.

Pfft.

Cale chuckled as he grabbed the spear.

Chhhhhhh-

The water covered his hand and then pointed at the enemies instead of the sky.

Kim Min Ah was blankly staring at him.

She made eye contact with Cale at that moment.

“Follow me.”

Cale kicked off the ground and said one more thing.
"This is attribute tutoring, so watch carefully and do what I do.”

This was the second lesson.

Cale could feel Bae Puh Rum and Kim Min Ah following behind him.

Boom. Boom. Boom!

The snake-headed giant was walking toward them with its large club. This monster
was over 3 meters tall.

“Roooooooar!”

The snake-headed giant raised its arm.

The black club headed toward the sky.

Its movement didn’t look slow at all.

In fact, it was much quicker than the snake wolf and the skeleton from earlier.

It also seemed much stronger as well.

Cale started to speak as Kim Min Ah and Bae Puh Rum gulped after seeing the club
being raised.

His voice sounded very sharp.

“Bae Puh Rum! Take Kim Min Ah and move 2 meters to the left!”

Bae Puh Rum subconsciously grabbed Kim Min Ah and quickly moved about 2 meters
to the left as if he was possessed.

It was much faster to fly slightly off the ground than to run.

Bae Puh Rum saw Cale moving 2 meters to the right at the same time.
‘That’s the opposite direction.’

Bae Puh Rum and Cale were moving in opposite directions.

Cale shouted once more at that moment.

“Kim Min Ah! Stab!”

Tap.

Kim Min Ah kicked off the ground as soon as she got away from Bae Puh Rum.

She could see Cale raising his spear on the right side as well.

His spear was heading for the giant’s right thigh.

In that short instant… Kim Min Ah and Cale made eye contact.

“Don’t think about the direction and just stab forward with all of your strength!”

“Ah.”

Kim Min Ah finally understood what Cale meant when he told her she didn’t need to
control her ability.

She clenched her spear with both hands.

Oooooo-

Kim Min Ah could feel the immense amount of strength moving to her arms.

Her muscles became much firmer.

Crack.

The half-transparent spear in her hands slowly started to crack.

She then heard Cale's voice.

“Now!”
Kim Min Ah pushed her spear forward.

It was at that moment.

Baaaaaang-!

The giant’s club hit a spear.

Cale's spear had struck the giant’s club to make that loud noise.

The snake-headed giant had a pretty quick reaction speed.

That was why it had changed the direction of its club that had been heading down to
respond to Cale’s attack.

Craaaack-

The water spear cracked before it was destroyed.

“Ugh.”

Cale’s body was pushed back.

But at that moment…

“Roooooooooar!”

The monster’s body twisted and it screamed.

Kim Min Ah looked down at her spear.

Driiiiiiiiiiiip.

The monster’s black blood dripped down from the spear that had pierced the giant’s
thigh.

As long as it only had one club…

The monster could not dodge the attacks from both sides.
They came right after one another.

“…Holy shit… Isn’t that monster’s skin extremely thick?”

Lee Chul Min couldn't hide his astonishment as he watched.

It was the same for the others.

The scary thing about this snake-headed giant was its skin that they could not damage
no matter how many times they attacked.

But if there was a spear with enough strength to pierce through it…

It was possible.

Kim Min Ah looked toward Cale.

Cale, who had stood back up as if he was never pushed back in the first place, created
another water spear as he started to speak.

“You pierce. I defend. Or vice versa.”

Cale started to smile.

“Easy, right?”

“It’s very hard.”

A smile appeared for the first time on the stoic Kim Min Ah's face.

Cale charged toward the snake-headed giant again.

“Roooooooooar!”

The monster headed for Kim Min Ah who had injured it.

She heard Cale’s voice in his ear at that moment.

“Kim Min Ah, I’m not going to say anything anymore, so follow me with your eyes.”
Cale trusted Kim Min Ah's abilities.

“Stab as hard as you can without thinking about controlling it.”

“But it’s hard to control the direction.”

“Just stab when I tell you to stab.”

Kim Min Ah's weakness was in direction control.

Her spear was so strong that Kim Min Ah couldn’t control it to go where she wanted it
to go at this point in time.

It was quite difficult to fight against moving monsters.

She might accidentally harm her allies or attack nearby buildings and cause chaos.

But Kim Min Ah realized something while looking at Cale.

‘…If that person makes the monsters stop moving! If the monster is standing still
where this person tells me to stab…!’

Then her attack would work.

Cale moved toward the giant’s back and stabbed with his water spear as Kim Min Ah
had those thoughts on her mind.

“Forward! Stab!”

Kim Min Ah followed Cale's voice and swung her spear from the front.

Their directions were opposite, but their movements were similar as if they were
reflections.

Baaaaaaaaaang!

The giant’s club struck Kim Min Ah’s spear.

Kim Min Ah was not pushed back.

In fact, it was the giant that was pushed back.

And on the pushed back giant's back…

“Roooooooar!”

The water spear stabbed in.

“Hmm. I guess I really can’t do it?”

Cale’s spear did not manage to pierce the giant’s skin.

There definitely seemed to be some limits to this partial ancient power.

Craaaaaaack.

However, the giant's black club started to crack.

It was unable to withstand Kim Min Ah's power.

“Follow me.”

Cale immediately started to move again. His body was heading for the monster’s left
ankle.

Kim Min Ah moved toward the right ankle.

“Stab!”

Kim Min Ah's spear stabbed deep into the giant’s right ankle.

Cale’s spear blocked the black club.

“…Wow… shit.”

Bae Puh Rum was blankly staring at this sight.

He then made eye contact with the moving Cale.

“Go bring the bird-headed snake over. That thing only goes for one person at a time.”
“Excuse me?”

“It’s behind you.”

“Mmph!”

Bae Puh Rum shot up into the air in shock.

“Shhhhhhh-!”

Bae Puh Rum could see a bird-head opening its beak and sticking out its snake tongue
to where he had just been standing.

The bird's eyes looked toward Bae Puh Rum.

Bae Puh Rum got chills all over his body.

“Come toward me!”

He quickly headed toward Cale after hearing that.

The bird-head chased behind Bae Puh Rum with its beak open.

Shhhhhhhhhhhhhh-

The snake body moved very quickly. Bae Puh Rum felt as if the bird's beak was right
behind his back.

‘Faster…! Faster!’

Bae Puh Rum used everything he had to fly even a tiny bit faster.

He didn’t know what was going on, but his speed was slowly starting to increase.

“…Holy shit!”

Bae Puh Rum arrived right in front of Cale who was holding his spear and aiming for
the giant’s side.

Bae Puh Rum's pupils started to shake.

‘Didn’t he tell me to come here?’

He had come as Cale had mentioned, but Cale was calm.

“I'm going to crash like this!”

“Yeah. Don’t stop and keep coming.”

Bae Puh Rum started to frown. His speed was too fast for him to stop.

“Y… you!”

It was at that moment.

“Ride the wind.”

Cale moved to the side after saying that short statement. Bae Puh Rum's eyes opened
wide.

The giant's side was now in front of Bae Puh Rum instead of Cale.

‘Damn it!’

He couldn’t even speak out loud.

‘Crash into the giant? Into a monster with such thick skin? Am I going to die?’

All sorts of thoughts filled Bae Puh Rum’s mind.

Swooooooosh-

He heard the sound of the wind.

“…Ah?”

Bae Puh Rum felt a whirlwind surrounding his body.

The wind was covering him.

‘Ride the wind.’

Bae Puh Rum noticed multiple whirlwinds gathering in front of him as he thought
about what Cale had said.

They looked like shields surrounding Bae Puh Rum…

But also like arrows aiming for the enemy.

He was charging toward the giant as if he had become an arrow.

Bae Puh Rum’s instincts were telling him something.

‘I'm not going to get hurt.’

The wind, this large wind arrow, was giving Bae Puh Rum both relief and courage.

He only focused on the wind for now.

He focused on this free but firm and sharp wind.

Bae Puh Rum curled up.

It was at that moment.

Baaaaaang!

The wind arrow cradling Bae Puh Rum struck the giant.

“Roooooooooooar!”

“Ugh!”

As both Bae Puh Rum and the giant both groaned…

Cale shouted.

“Kim Min Ah!”

The giant and the Bae Puh Rum bounced off in different directions after crashing.

And in the spot where the two of them had disappeared…

There was another figure that was charging forward without being able to slow down.

And as for the person who had been standing still as Cale had told her to follow him…

Kim Min Ah’s eyes clouded over.

“Stab!”

Kim Min Ah stabbed her spear forward with everything she had as soon as she heard
Cale’s voice.

Crackle.

She used so much strength that the cement underneath her feet started to crack.

"Screeeeeeeeeech!”

And the spear stabbed accurately into the mouth of the open bird’s beak.

As Kim Min Ah watched it happen…

Cale had approached her at some point, grabbed her, and quietly whispered as he
moved her back.

“Push.”

She pushed the spear.

“Let go.”

She let go of the spear.

The spear pierced the bird-headed snake.

"Sss-ssss--”

The bird-headed snake fell on the ground without even being able to scream properly.

Blood was dripping out of its beak.

It then soon stopped moving.

Kim Min Ah quietly watched what had just happened.

“…I-”

‘Did I defeat that monster?’

Kim Min Ah's pupils started to shake.

Cale recalled some of his memories about Kim Min Ah.

Mother, brother, and Kim Min Ah.

That was her family.

Her mother had died from a monster attack.

“You won.”

She looked to the side after hearing Cale’s voice.

Kim Min Ah looked toward the angry snake-headed giant that was getting back up
after falling down when Bae Puh Rum crashed into it.

“Now we just need to get rid of that thing?”

“That’s right. Let’s go.”

Cale took the lead and Kim Min Ah pulled out the spear that was sticking out of the
monster’s body and followed behind him.

“Oh, I'm fine?”

Bae Puh Rum looked at his body that didn't have a single injury in shock as he followed
behind them.

Actually, he moved in front of them.

The Sound of the Wind that Cale had created… Those whirlwinds were still by his side.
‘I knew he would figure it out quickly.’

Bae Puh Rum was slowly starting to understand the method of controlling the wind.

Kim Min Ah followed behind Bae Puh Rum who was moving in front of them.

Cale quietly watched the two of their backs.

Bae Puh Rum had quick speed, could change directions quickly, and act as a tanker.

Then there was Kim Min Ah who couldn't control the direction of her ability but the
power behind it was scary.

These two were a great combination.

They would support each other.

Cale looked at their backs and started to speak.

“The two of you… If you are thankful for the things you learned from me… Help me out
and go somewhere with me.”

“…Where?”

Bae Puh Rum asked and Kim Min Ah slightly looked back.

“Roooooooooar!”

The snake-headed giant was charging toward them.

But the two of them were not scared at all.

It was already injured in multiple places and looked ready to fall at any moment.

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“Seomyeon, Busan. Go there with me.”

Cale was drawing an image in his mind.

Choi Han.

Lee Soo Hyuk.

Choi Jung Soo.

Kim Min Ah.

Bae Puh Rum.

Park Jin Tae.

The images of his allies who would take care of the attacking was slowly being created.

The couple looked confused after hearing an unexpected location. Cale shared his
thoughts with them.

“I won't make you do anything dangerous. Think about it.”

The two of them tilted their heads in confusion before charging toward the snake-
headed giant as dealing with this monster came first.

Cale also kicked off the ground and followed behind them.

‘It should end quickly.’

The snake-headed giant should soon fall to these two who were getting a feel for how
to take care of it.

Cale looked farther south past the snake-headed giant.

The leader of the seven Grade 1 taster monsters.

The Dark Tiger that was a mix of a lion and a tiger was looking at Cale with a piercing
gaze.

It was scary and looked as if it wanted to rip Cale up into pieces right now.

Cale looked right into its eyes as he started to speak.

“You know how to speak the human language, right?”

The Dark Tiger’s eyes opened wide as if it had read Cale’s lips.

Smirk.

Cale smiled while looking at its reaction.

Another record popped up in his mind.

< The leader of the Grade 1 taster monsters is 1.5 times stronger than regular Grade
1 monsters and has a unique trait. >
< This was a trait that was only found in the leader of the taster monsters since the
start of the cataclysm. >

Since the cataclysm…

Only at this moment…

A trait only shown by the leader of the taster monsters.

A special power that would never appear again.

< It was able to communicate. >

The leader of the taster monsters was the only monster that could communicate with
humans.

Cale smiled toward the Dark Tiger.

Cale then added the Dark Tiger to his list of allies that would make up the attack team
to fight against the unranked monster.

Alberu Crossman looked toward the person sitting across from him.

His eyes looked tired.

He also looked anxious.

The situation… An unexpected situation had happened.

‘…Damn it.’

The White Star had smacked him from behind.

Alberu Crossman had to come to a decision quickly.

Would he withdraw from the Endable Kingdom?

Or would he stay here until the end?

He then started to speak to the person who had come to see him.

“They want to make a deal?”

The person nodded their head.

“Yes, your highness.”

“…What’s the cost?”

“The curse that the Sun God placed on the Crossman blood.”

Alberu's eyes opened wide.

The curse that the Sun God placed on the Crossman household.

< Descendants of the cursed blood. >

< The touch of the Sun God will always be by your side. >

< Never set your eyes on taking over the sky. >

< The Sun will always rise. >

< The moment darkness is planted in your bodies… >

< The moment a person with that darkness becomes the head of the household, the
sky will be destroyed and the ground will tremble. >
Alberu recalled the words he had read thousands of times.

His voice sounded very low.

“…How did you?”

“I happened to find out because of this incident.”

The person put on an awkward smile.

“Please don't worry as I will keep it a secret.”

“…Ha!”

Alberu was at a loss for words.

However, the person calmly continued to speak.

“Anyway, I was told you would receive an equivalent compensation if you place that
on the scale for the deal.”

“…Is that what the God of Death told you?”

“Yes, your highness.”

Excommunicated priestess Cage nodded her head.

Alberu hesitated for a moment before starting to speak.

“But that’s beneficial for me.”

It was extremely beneficial if this curse was taken away.

Cage ended up learning his secret, but it would not matter if the curse was removed.

What could Cage do about a curse that did not exist?

That was why he found it odd.

“Why does the God of Death want such a thing?”

His eyes looked confused.

He knew that Choi Han had made a deal with the God of Death. He didn’t know the
details and Choi Han didn't tell him what he had offered in return, but it couldn’t have
been something small.

“What benefit does the God of Death get by taking the curse of my bloodline?”

“Gods are unable to personally help. That is why he wants to help in a different way.”

She shrugged her shoulders and mischievously responded.

“Gods love and cherish heroes. Especially heroes who have escaped their fate.”

She then quickly added on.

“But why do you think it is the God of Death who is offering this deal?”

“…Then?”

“The God of Death is only a messenger.”

Cage turned around and headed toward the entrance of the tent.

Flap.

She lifted the flap and someone walked in.

“…Saint Jack.”

Saint Jack smiled at Alberu after hearing his name.

“The Sun God wishes to take the curse back.”

“…Why?”

Saint Jack shook his head.

“I do not know the answer, however, he did tell me one thing.”

Jack repeated what the Sun God had told him.

“He said that, ‘I need to fix my mistake, the path that went wrong a long time ago.’ He
also said that right now was the only time to do it. This is his only chance to do so.”

Cage handed Alberu a video communication device.

This video communication device looked different than regular ones as it had a perfect
split of black and white.

“Should you agree to the deal, only you will be able to use this video communication
device as the person making the deal. You'll be connected right away.”

“…You mean to Cale Henituse?”

“Yes, your highness.”

Cage gave a short response.

“This video communication device will become the only way to communicate with
young master Cale.”

Alberu reached his hand out toward the video communication device.
The large snake-headed giant’s last scream echoed through the area.

“Roooooooar!”

Its large body finally started to fall down.

Boom-!

There was black blood dripping out of the fallen snake-headed giant's entire body as
it had holes everywhere.

As for the person who had created those injuries…

‘I did it……!’

Kim Min Ah started to smile while looking at the fallen giant.

“Huff, huff.”

However, she was breathing heavily and both of her arms were shaking.

The hand she mainly used to hold her spear was also visibly shaking.

“Min Ah, are you okay?”

Bae Puh Rum walked over and asked about Min Ah's condition with concern.

Kim Min Ah chuckled while looking at Bae Puh Rum.

"Bae Puh Rum, I think I'm at least better than you are right now?”

“Is that so?”

Bae Puh Rum looked down at his body.

He wasn't injured even though he crashed into the giant like a rocket over and over
while controlling the whirlwinds Kim Rok Soo had given him, but he was still a mess.

Of course, he had some minor injuries and bruises, but it was a win if he could defeat
a Grade 1 monster with these kinds of injuries.

“Do you need me to help you walk?”

Kim Min Ah shook her head at Bae Puh Rum's question.

She put some strength into her legs and stood up straight.

‘This is the first time.’

It was the first time she had done this.

She had never fought while using her ability as much as she wanted.

‘…My body can’t keep up with my ability.’

Maybe that was the reason her whole body was shaking.

It didn’t hurt.

These issues would disappear once her body got used to her ability.

She realized that her ability was best described as ‘Herculean Strength.’

That was why it was even more shocking.

‘…Kim Rok Soo, this person, just-’

This person named Kim Rok Soo.

She became more shocked the more she thought about it.

She looked to her side.

Cale and Kim Min Ah made eye contact.

She heard his nonchalant voice.

“That was amazing.”

She observed how Cale somewhat wiped the blood flowing out of the corner of his lips
as she talked to him.

“Kim Min Ah, you fought pretty well.”

Something was weird.

Cale’s nonchalant praise was making Kim Min Ah weirdly emotional for some reason.

She couldn’t understand why she was feeling this way.

“Bae Puh Rum, you did well too. You fought well.”

It was the same for Bae Puh Rum as well.

The two of them finally felt that they had really defeated this giant after hearing Cale,
who only seemed slightly older than them, praising them.

Kim Min Ah subconsciously blurted out.

“I want to go there too.”

Cale looked toward her and Kim Min Ah expanded on what she had said out of impulse.

“Seomyeon, Busan. I want to go there.”

She then quickly added on.

“In return, you need to make me stronger.”

She could see a gentle smile appearing on Cale's stoic face.

It looked as if he knew she would say something like that.

“Okay.”

Cale calmly responded and turned around.

“The two of you head back to the building now.”

He then walked over to Park Jin Tae and Lee Chul Min who were standing outside the
main door to the building.

Bae Puh Rum started to speak with a blank expression as he watched Cale walk away.

“…Wow. Isn’t that hyung so cool? He’s totally sick!”

“You were cool too.”

“…Huh?”

Bae Puh Rum’s eyes opened wide as he looked toward Kim Min Ah.

Kim Min Ah looked at him with a confused expression and Bae Puh Rum cautiously
asked.

“Really? I was cool?”

“Yeah.”

“…Min Ah.”

"What is it?”

“To be honest with you, I didn't say this earlier while we were fighting the giant because
the timing didn't seem right. Can I say it now?”

“Sure.”

Bae Puh Rum smiled brightly at Kim Min Ah giving him the okay and started to speak.

“You were so cool when you were swinging the spear earlier. I think you’re the coolest
person in the world. I couldn't take my eyes off of you earlier.”
Kim Min Ah truly was the only one in Bae Puh Rum’s eyes.

Pffft.

Kim Min Ah chuckled before responding.

“Keep going.”

“Hmm?”

“Praise me more.”

“Okay! You’re the best.”

“You're so cute.”

Kim Min Ah looked toward Bae Puh Rum as if he was cute and Bae Puh Rum couldn't
help but smile widely after seeing her gaze focused on him.

The two of them then looked somewhere.

Cale who had been heading back to the building had stopped and was looking at Bae
Puh Rum and Kim Min Ah.

“Ahem.”

“Hem!”

Kim Min Ah and Bae Puh Rum slowly avoided Cale’s gaze.

They then quickly headed toward the building.

The two of them heard Cale's voice as they passed by him.

“You look good together.”

Bae Puh Rum flinched after hearing that while both of them responded to him.

“T, thank you very much!”

“I know. We look really good together.”

Bae Puh Rum and Kim Min Ah entered the building after giving responses that suited
their personalities while two other people walked over to Cale.

“Kim Rok Soo.”

One of them was Park Jin Tae.

He already had his gun in his hand as if he was itching to use it.

“What is it?”

Park Jin Tae slowly turned his head after seeing Cale looking right at him.

He then recalled the conversation he just had with Choi Han.

Before he and Lee Chul Min had walked over toward Kim Rok Soo because they knew
it was their turn…

‘What do you want?’

He had made eye contact with Choi Han.

Lee Seung Won, Kim Min Joon, and Lee Jin Joo were off to one side doing something
and Choi Han had just been chatting with Lee Seung Won as well.

But then, Choi Han had split off on his own to walk over to him.

Choi Han had looked at him with a vicious gaze.

‘I wish to have a conversation with you.’

Choi Han then looked toward Lee Chul Min who walked away once Park Jin Tae nodded
his head.

Park Jin Tae looked toward Choi Han after seeing that Lee Chul Min was far away.

Choi Han started to speak at that moment.

‘Lower your gaze, punk.’

‘…What?’

Park Jin Tae looked toward Choi Han in shock at this sudden change in demeanor, but
Choi Han was calm.

Actually, he was angry.

He had heard everything about how Kim Rok Soo had been treated from Lee Seung
Won.

Choi Han put his hand on Park Jin Tae’s shoulder.

He had learned a lot of things from Cale.

Pat. Pat.

Choi Han looked almost identical to Cale as he patted Park Jin Tae’s shoulder.

‘…You beat up Rok Soo hyung?’

Park Jin Tae got the chills at the suffocating murderous intent focused only on him.

He continued to hear Choi Han's voice as well.

‘Why? Why did you do it? Ah, nevermind. There were no good reasons based on what
I heard.’

Choi Han had recalled what Lee Seung Won had told him.

‘Hyung was the only one to get beat up. Only Rok Soo hyung. They came up with
random reasons to beat him.’

‘They always beat him like that?’

‘N, no. That’s not the case. This was the first time he was beaten up, but they always
treated him badly.’

Choi Han quietly whispered to Park Jin Tae.

‘Rok Soo hyung is probably leaving you alone because he needs you right now and
because you are useful. That’s probably why he is leaving Lee Chul Min alone as well.’

Choi Han’s sunken gaze looked toward Lee Chul Min who was quite far away from Park
Jin Tae.

‘Remember that I am watching you.’

That voice still echoed in Park Jin Tae's ears.

“Haaaaa.”

The person sighing was Lee Chul Min, Park Jin Tae’s trusted subordinate and an attack-
type ability user.

He was sending Cale a heartrending gaze.

‘Do I really need to fight too?’

That was what the gaze seemed to be saying.

Cale looked right back at him and Lee Chul Min eventually dodged his gaze and started
to frown without Park Jin Tae knowing.

Cale held back a snort after seeing Lee Chul Min’s reaction.

‘Lee Chul Min, it’ll be hard for you to escape this time.’

Lee Chul Min.

This bastard was someone who had escaped on his own while pretending to listen to
Park Jin Tae’s order to ‘Let the weak and useless people escape first!’ when the original
central shelters had lost their powers.

There was one more thing.

‘He ends up a guild leader.’

Lee Chul Min and Park Jin Tae.

Cale needed these two people for the upcoming battles, but he was not going to pay as
much attention to them as he did for Bae Puh Rum and Kim Min Ah.

‘I'll make sure to use you properly. I’ll make it so that you want to run away.’

But he will not be able to run away.

Cale would take these two people to Seomyeon, Busan no matter what.

He would make them do the hard work.

‘And the team leader won't leave them alone.’

Based on team leader Lee Soo Hyuk's personality, he would flip a lid once he heard
about what happened at the central shelter once he left.

Cale was planning on taking Grandma Kim and the Lee siblings with him as well. They
would probably tell Lee Soo Hyuk everything.

‘It’s going to be vicious.’

His reaction was going to be vicious and scary.

Cale suddenly got the chills but shook his head to get rid of that feeling and started to
speak.

“There are 3 Grade 1 monsters left.”

Park Jin Tae and Lee Chul Min looked south.

Boom-!

A giant bear that was over 5 meters tall and required them to look far up in order to
see its face took a step forward.

A bear covered in purple tiger stripes.

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“That monster’s name is Poison Bear.”

Poison.

That word made Park Jin Tae clench his fists. He definitely realized that it was his turn.

He heard an eerie noise at that moment.

“Shaaaaa- Shaaaaaaaaaa-”

Lee Chul Min started to frown.

“…Disgusting bastard.”

Cale continued to speak at that moment.

“You can probably tell based on how it looks, but that is the human mask spider. It’s a
spider that wears a human face like a mask.”

Lee Chul Min slowly stepped back as the 3 meter tall spider wearing a crying child's
face as a mask got closer.

Lee Chul Min saw it at that moment.

Smile.

Cale whispered as he smiled.

“Let me make a prediction.”

“…What?”

“Originally, you would have run away.”

Lee Chul Min urgently looked to see Park Jin Tae's reaction as his pupils started to
shake. Park Jin Tae looked away from Cale and Lee Chul Min with a stoic gaze.

Lee Chul Min's heart sank after seeing that and he urgently started to speak.

“No! I would have fought until the end!”

“Is that so?”

Pat. Pat.

Cale patted Lee Chul Min's shoulder.

“Then give it your best.”

‘Damn it! I've been had!’

Lee Chul Min started to frown while looking at Cale’s relaxed smile. He now needed to
give everything he had in this fight.

Lee Chul Min heard Park Jin Tae's voice at that moment.

He was speaking in a stoic tone.

“That’s right, Chul Min. You should fight at least once with everything you have.”

Lee Chul Min's pupils started to shake for a different reason.

“…Leader-nim?”

“You’ve always been hiding your strength instead of fighting with everything you had.
Did you think I would not know that?”

“…Ah.”

Lee Chul Min could see Park Jin Tae smiling while looking at him. Park Jin Tae raised
his gun.

“Fight properly… If you don't want to be hit by my bullet.”

‘Damn it!’

Lee Chul Min barely managed to smile back.

“Leader-nim! Please don't worry!”

But neither Cale nor Park Jin Tae were giving Lee Chul Min a look. Lee Chul Min
became annoyed at this, but he pushed it down.
There was a simple reason for it.

‘It’s safe here.’

He found Kim Rok Soo annoying and Park Jin Tae scary, but…

Next to these two people was currently the safest place.

That meant that he needed to fight hard.

“Even the leader is stepping forward.”

Lee Chul Min looked toward the monster majestically stepping forward behind the
bear and spider.

This monster had a mane like a lion, but it looked like a tiger.

It's black, grey, and white stripes were more beautiful than vicious while its black
mane was rich and shiny.

The term majestic suited this Grade 1 monster.

“…The Dark Tiger.”

Park Jin Tae quietly mumbled the name he had heard from Kim Rok Soo.

But he couldn't just stand there and watch the monster forever.

The Dark Tiger started to speak.

“You're quite skilled.”

“……!”

Park Jin Tae and Lee Chul Min's eyes opened wide.

It was Korean.

The monster was speaking a human language.

Cale started to speak as if this was normal.

“Not bad, right? Won’t you make a deal with me?”

“…A deal?”

The Dark Tiger's black eyes slowly observed Cale.

‘A monster that can communicate.’

Cale was able to come up with this plan as soon as he had learned about these monsters.

There was a hypothesis that arose in the future about this Grade 1 monster.

< The monster that could communicate was a taster monster but still could give orders
to the other Grade 1 taster monsters. In that case, wouldn’t it possibly be able to give
orders to other Grade 1 monsters or lower-grade monsters? >

If this hypothesis was true…

Then it was possible to come up with an innovative plan.

The Dark Tiger was strong and had many abilities, but it also had many other things
Cale needed.

“Yes, a deal.”

“What kind of deal?”

“As you might have already realized, you'll end up dying by our hands in the end.
Wouldn't it be better to join us than to die?”

Lee Chul Min and Park Jin Tae looked toward Cale in shock.

‘What the hell is he talking about?’

Lee Chul Min’s jaw dropped in astonishment.

Kim Rok Soo was talking about being on the same side as a monster.
How could that be?

‘Absolutely not!’

It made no sense.

However, Lee Chul Min gasped in shock after hearing the Dark Tiger's response.

"What an interesting proposal. But I cannot do that.”

"Why not?”

“I have an order I must carry out.”

“…Is that so?”

An order. Those words made Cale's eyes cloud over.

A monster that can communicate.

Cale knew he needed to speak to this monster.

It was not just so that he could make it a part of his allies.

‘The ones responsible.’

This sudden cataclysm that happened on earth.

He wanted to know who was responsible for it.

These monsters that had suddenly appeared… And the abilities suddenly given to
humans and the odd events.

There must be a reason for it.

‘The Demon World and the sealed god. I'm sure they’re related somehow.’

Cale wanted to hear more details about it.

This monster that could communicate was a precious source of information to figure
that out.

“How disappointing. Dark Tiger, it would have been great if you could join me.”

Cale suddenly saw the Dark Tiger's gaze change.

“Grrrrrr.”

The Tiger quietly growled and shook its head left and right.

Its mane was shaking.

It then looked down and quietly looked at its body. The Dark Tiger's eyes opened wide
as it raised its paw.

Lee Chul Min flinched but the Dark Tiger just raised its front paw and patted the
ground a few times.

“…Ho!”

The Dark Tiger laughed in disbelief. It then looked as if it was deep in thought.

Cale recalled a record as he watched.

This was a comment about this situation he had seen in the future.

< For some odd reason, these monsters that could communicate tried to speak to the
humans. They tried to communicate at least once. >

< Of course, these monsters attempted to communicate before saying, ‘there’s no point
to chat with you.’ and then killed the humans. >

< The important question is, why did these monsters try to communicate with
humans? >

< Wouldn’t they have had no reason to communicate if they just wanted to kill all
humans and destroy the original central shelters? >

< There must be a reason these monsters tried to communicate with humanity. >
This Dark Tiger's goal.

Cale thought about that goal as he started to speak.

It was so that he could use a certain word.

“Then I might be able to give you the 'freedom’ to ignore your orders.”

He started with that statement in order to figure out its goal.

The Dark Tiger's eyes had opened wide as Cale had started to speak.

“……!”

It then returned to normal before those black eyes slowly looked around at the two
remaining Grade 1 monsters it presided over, as well as the monsters surrounding the
building at a distance. Finally, it looked toward the humans.

It seemed to be slowly observing the people who had come out of the building.

“Mm.”

The Dark Tiger saw something and its eyebrows started to twitch before it looked at
Cale.

“…Who are you?”

Cale started to smile.

‘It seems to be interested in me.’

He realized that a word he had used had caught the Dark Tiger's interest.

“Me?”

Cale could see the Dark Tiger’s shaking pupils.

It seemed to be in quite a chaotic state.

Cale leisurely started to speak.

“I'm someone who might know where you came from.”

“……!”

The Dark Tiger's jaw dropped.

It truly seemed to be shocked.

“…Hey, Kim Rok Soo. What the hell are you doing?”

Cale heard Park Jin Tae whisper to him, but he ignored it and only focused on the Dark
Tiger.

It was at that moment.

“Grrrrrrr!”

“Shaaaaa- Shaaaaaaaaaa-”

The two other Grade 1 monsters started to shout.

Boom, boom boom, boom!

The Poison Bear stomped its feet.

Cale looked past the Poison Bear to the Dark Tiger behind it.

He started to speak after seeing the Dark Tiger quietly observing him.

“Is this your decision?”

The decision of the Dark Tiger that was the leader of the Grade 1 taster monsters.

Cale could tell its decision based on the Poison Bear and the human mask spider’s
movements.

‘I guess it wants to see if I’m worth chatting with?’

This Dark Tiger would try to kill Cale if it determined that Cale was not worthy of
chatting with it as the records had mentioned.

But if he was deemed worthy?

He didn’t know what that would mean, but he knew something would happen.

Cale lightly shrugged his shoulders.

“Well, that’s fine.”

He then started to smile.

“We can quietly chat after taking care of everything else.”

He then started to speak to Park Jin Tae and Lee Chul Min.

“We will kill those two and capture the Dark Tiger alive.”

“What?”

“Y, you crazy!”

‘Capture it alive? That monster?’

Capturing it alive was even harder than killing it.

Park Jin Tae and Lee Chul Min gasped in shock, but they didn't have any time to keep
talking.

Boom, boom, boom!

The Poison Bear was close to Cale, Park Jin Tae, and Lee Chul Min after taking a few
steps with its long legs.

Park Jin Tae opened his mouth to speak.

“…Poison!”

Black smoke was starting to rise from the Poison Bear’s body.

Its large body was quickly approaching them as well.

“Dodge!”
Park Jin Tae and Lee Chul Min quickly dodged after hearing Cale's voice.

The Poison Bear’s fist struck down on the ground.

Baaaaang!

A giant crater appeared on the ground, sending dust flying everywhere.

“Ugh!”

As Park Jin Tae frowned after seeing the dust… He heard a chilling noise.

Tap, tap, tap!

It was a light but quick noise.

‘The human mask spider!’

The spider came to attack them through the dust the Poison Bear had created.

“Shaaaaa- Shaaaaaaaaaa-”

The spider opened its mouth.

Park Jin Tae couldn't see the monster because of the dust, but he could imagine where
it was based on the noise.

It was at that moment.

“We’ll take care of it quickly this time! Park Jin Tae!”

Cale then started giving orders.

“Move 3 meters to the right and aim for the mouth!”

Park Jin Tae couldn't see anything because of the dust but immediately moved 3
meters to the right.

Then he could see it.

He could see the spider’s open mouth as the dust settled.

He heard Cale's voice at the same time.

“Fire!”

He launched a bullet.

“Shaaaaa-!”

Green spider web started to pour out of the human mask spider’s mouth at the same
time.

The bullet crashed into the green spider web.

Baaaaaaaaaang!

A fire had started.

The green spider web caught on fire.

But the spider web did not burn from the fire. The fire just followed along the spider
web toward the spider itself.

“Lee Chul Min!”

“Fuck!”

Lee Chul Min reached for his back after hearing Cale calling him.

Clang!

There were two large sickles in Lee Chul Min’s hands.

Swoooooooosh-

He could feel the whirlwind surrounding his feet. Lee Chul Min immediately
understood what Kim Rok Soo was telling him to do.

“You crazy bastard!”

The swearing Lee Chul Min's body shot up into the air.

He then stopped on top of the burning spider web.

Siiiiiiizzle-

Lee Chul Min's shoes started to burn.

But Lee Chul Min's feet were not burning.

Lee Chul Min.

He had an ability that gave him fire and ice resistance.

Cale shouted at that moment.

“Start running!”

Lee Chul Min started to run.

Cale shouted again.

“Park Jin Tae, 10 o'clock direction, fire twice!”

Tang! Tang!

Park Jin Tae could see his bullets heading toward the Poison Bear behind the spider.

“…Kim Rok Soo, you crazy son of a bitch!”

He could see a rose gold colored thunderbolt shooting forward along with his bullets.

Crackle. Crackle.

He could see Kim Rok Soo who was surrounded by rose gold light.

He looked like a god out of a myth who was surrounded by thunderbolts.

Park Jin Tae started to speak as he saw the rose gold thunderbolt and the bullets flying
toward the Poison Bear.
His instincts were telling him something.

“Explode!”

His instincts were saying it was time for him to say that.

Baaaaaang!

The bullets exploded before reaching the Poison Bear.

The aftershock hit the front of the Poison Bear and the back of the human mask spider.

“Shaaaaa!”

The human mask spider started to scream with the burning spider web in its mouth.

“Lee Chul Min! The eyes!”

Lee Chul Min ran across the burning spider web and reached the spider's face.

He started to frown as he shouted back.

“Fuck! Do you know how many eyes a spider has?!”

‘How can I slash all of them? I'm strong and accurate, but I’m slow!’

Lee Chul Min heard Cale's voice at that moment.

“The human mask!”

‘Ah!’

Lee Chul Min realized which eyes he was talking about.

“Park Jin Tae! The spider’s chin!”

Lee Chul Min could feel a strong attack hit the spider's chin at that moment.

It must have been Park Jin Tae's bullet.

The spider's chin jerked up from shock.

Lee Chul Min then kicked off the spider web and jumped up.

He observed the spider that was flailing in pain after Park Jin Tae's attack.

‘…I can see it!’

Lee Chul Min was someone whose accuracy was the only attribute that could rival Park
Jin Tae even while using sickles as weapons.

The fact that his accuracy rivaled that of Park Jin Tae, who had been a national
representative for shooting showed how delicate and sharp Lee Chul Min’s sickles
were.

“Shaaaaa-!”

Lee Chul Min made eye contact with the spider's eyes.

The jumping Lee Chul Min's sickles headed down.

Crack!

The sharp ends of the sickles in both of his hands accurately struck the mask behind
the spider’s face.

It stabbed into the eyes of the human image.

“Kiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii--!”

A green liquid burst out of the stabbed eyes.

The spider flailed in pain.

Lee Chul Min shouted in shock and disbelief.

“Holy crap! That really was the weakness!”

Who in their right mind would have expected this mask to be the spider’s weakness?
They would just think that this mask was just for camouflage.

‘…What crazy data.’

He was scared of Kim Rok Soo’s data ability.

‘…Kim Rok Soo, he really…… ’

Kim Rok Soo with his ability awakened was scary.

He was scary for many different reasons.

Lee Chul Min had not heard Park Jin Tae and Choi Han’s conversation, but he had seen
Choi Han's piercing gaze focus on him as well.

It had instantly given him the chills.

“Lee Chul Min!”

He heard Park Jin Tae shout at that moment and felt his left side go cold.

“Gasp!”

The spider's sharp legs that looked like large spears were striking toward him. The
spider that was now spurting green blood not just from its mask but from its real eyes
as well was charging toward Lee Chul Min.

“Shaaaaa- Shaaaaaaaaaa!”

It looked as if it was rampaging before death, trying to take him with it as it died.

“Son of a…!”

Lee Chul Min urgently started to move. He needed to dodge that leg.

He rolled on the ground to dodge.

Swooooooosh-!

Lee Chul Min watched the large spider web brush past his head.
‘Holy shit!’

He really thought that he was going to die.

‘…I'm alive.’

Lee Chul Min was about to sigh in relief before quickly raising his head. He suddenly
had a question.

‘He was helping those high schoolers almost as if he was pampering them, but why do
I have to struggle like this?’

However, he didn't have time to think about something like that.

It was because he thought that he would die if he was hit even once by the human
mask spider’s legs.

But the moment he raised his head…

“…Gasp!”

Baaaaaang!

A rose gold thunderbolt struck down on the spider’s eyes that were covered in green
liquid.

Fire shot out of the spider’s eyes with a loud explosion.

The spider's body was shaking as if it had really been struck by a thunderbolt.

It then fell to the ground.

It was because it had no strength in its legs anymore.

The spider started to shake with its legs stretched out before it stopped moving.

“…I, is it dead?”

‘Did they really kill a Grade 1 monster so easily?’

Of course, this was not easy to do.

They needed Lee Chul Min’s level of accuracy, Park Jin Tae’s shooting ability, and Kim
Rok Soo's abilities.

However, nobody was hurt.

Lee Chul Min had felt how amazing Kim Rok Soo's ability truly was after participating
himself.

‘Please watch and learn.’

Those words echoed in his ear.

He became scared at the same time.

He heard an unbelievable noise at that moment.

“Cough!”

“Kim Rok Soo!”

Lee Chul Min could see Kim Rok Soo coughing up blood as Park Jin Tae shouted.

Black blood was dripping down from Kim Rok Soo’s mouth.

Lee Chul Min finally remembered that Kim Rok Soo was an extremely feeble person.

“…Ah.”

Lee Chul Min's heart sank while watching the staggering Kim Rok Soo.

‘This bastard-’

He couldn’t let this bastard faint!

He subconsciously tried to walk toward Kim Rok Soo.

Park Jin Tae was about to do the same as well.

Both of them heard Cale's voice at that moment.

“It’s not over yet!”

Lee Chul Min raised his head.

He could see a large black shadow covering him.

It was the shadow of the approaching Poison Bear.

“…Ah.”

Park Jin Tae heard Cale's voice as Lee Chul Min's eyes opened wide.

“Fire at the Poison Bear’s belly button!”

“Belly button?”

“The white dot!”

The place he was calling the Poison Bear’s belly button was the only white spot on the
Poison Bear’s lower belly.

It was about the size of a baby’s palm, which meant it was very small compared to the
Poison Bear's body.

But it was possible for Park Jin Tae.

Park Jin Tae urgently twisted his body and fired a bullet.

Tang!

A bullet shot out toward the Poison Bear’s belly button.

B, bang!

But the bullet exploded before it reached the belly button.

“Damn it, the poison!”

Park Jin Tae could see the bullet exploding because of the poison smoke surrounding
the Poison Bear.

He then started to frown.

‘…I don’t have many left!’

He only had a few bullets left that he could use.

The number of bullets was determined by how much of his ability he could use.

Park Jin Tae didn't have much left after using his abilities without any rest today.

“Hey! I don’t have many bullets le-”

“Fire.”

He heard Cale’s stern voice at that moment.

Park Jin Tae looked toward him.

“I only have one or two bullets left!”

He heard Cale’s low voice.

“You need to fight with everything you have.”

Park Jin Tae suddenly recalled how he had told Lee Chul Min to give everything he had.

Kim Rok Soo was repeating his own words back to him.

“Squeeze it out. Then it’ll come out.”

Kim Rok Soo's nonchalant gaze seemed to overlap with Choi Han’s gaze from earlier
for Park Jin Tae.

The two of their gazes seemed oddly similar to the point that Park Jin Tae felt as if
what Choi Han had said earlier was said by Kim Rok Soo.

Park Jin Tae clenched his eyes and opened them back as he started to speak.
“Fine! Okay! I'll squeeze it out!”

“Now.”

Cale had been waiting for this moment.

Because of the bullet that had exploded after hitting the poison smoke…

There was fire in the air.

It was only slightly bigger than the bear's belly button.

The Poison Bear was a scary monster because of its immense strength and large body.
Furthermore, they couldn’t approach it because of the poison surrounding its body
that would be critical to them if they came in contact.

But if that poison was burning…

That fire was their one chance to pierce through the bear's poison and attack it.

The fact that the size was extremely small and barely larger than the monster’s belly
button didn't matter.

“Park Jin Tae! Shoot toward the fire!”

Park Jin Tae's eyes clouded over.

He understood what Cale was saying.

The gun pointed at the Poison Bear’s white dot.

His index finger pulled the trigger.

It was at that moment.

“Grrrrrr! Grrr, roooooooooar!”

The Poison Bear’s shout echoed out.

Actually, it was a scream.

“Roooooooar!”

There was a black fang in the back of the Poison Bear's neck.

The black fang that bit the bear as if the poison didn’t matter at all twisted the Poison
Bear’s neck instantly.

“Gr, grrrrrrrrrrrrrr-”

The Poison Bear was now just whimpering as its body tilted forward.

“Holy shit, what the hell?!”

Lee Chul Min urgently retreated back in shock.

The close to 5 meter tall body slowly fell to the ground.

Boooom!

The Poison Bear’s large body fell on top of the spider.

Pat.

Then a Tiger’s front paw was placed on top of the Poison Bear's body.

“…Why?”

Park Jin Tae's pupils started to shake.

It was the Dark Tiger's black fang that had ripped out the Poison Bear’s neck just now.

Drip. Drip.

The Poison Bear's blood was dripping off its fang.

The Dark Tiger that was nonchalantly standing there looking majestic was giving them
a different type of fear.

They were all silent because of this unexpected development.

Park Jin Tae realized something during that silence.

‘Ah!’

He could tell where the Dark Tiger was looking.

‘Kim Rok Soo!’

The Dark Tiger wasn’t even looking at the Poison Bear as it was observing Kim Rok
Soo.

Kim Rok Soo was also looking at the Dark Tiger.

Park Jin Tae could tell that the silence would soon be broken.

It was because Kim Rok Soo opened his mouth.

“Did I pass the test?”

Cale slowly approached the Dark Tiger.

He didn't look scared at all.

“Am I qualified to chat with you, Dark Tiger?”

The Dark Tiger started to speak at that moment.

“I.”

Smile.

The Dark Tiger started to smile.

‘It’s smiling?’

As Cale flinched in confusion…

“My name is Alberu Crossman.”

“…What?”
‘What did this tiger bastard just say? Who?’

Cale’s mind went blank as his eyes opened wide.

He could see Kim Rok Soo, himself, being reflected in the Dark Tiger's eyes.

The Dark Tiger looked at Cale as it continued to speak.

“I almost didn't recognize you because of your shell.”

“…This, what-”

Cale was at a loss for words while the Dark Tiger smiled elegantly like a certain
someone.

“Let’s chat. Let’s talk about what is going on. I'm curious about a lot of things as well.”

Cale ended up blurting something out.

“…This crazy-”

The Dark Tiger shook its head in response.

Its beautiful mane was shaking.

The Dark Tiger started to speak in a tone that sounded almost as if it was sighing.

“Very disrespectful as I expected.”

Hearing that made Cale certain.

“Holy shit, it really is him.”

It really was Alberu Crossman.

‘No, what the hell-’

Why was Alberu Crossman here?

Why was he in the form of a Dark Tiger?

What the hell was going on?
Cale looked toward the Dark Tiger in shock.

Cale was not the only one who was wondering what was going on.

“Son of a…”

Park Jin Tae's pupils started to shake.

‘What am I looking at right now?’

Park Jin Tae had never seen anything like this since the world became like this.

Lee Chul Min, who had small injuries here and there from rolling around the ground,
walked up to Park Jin Tae and started to speak.

“Leader-nim, d, did that monster just introduce itself? A, Alberu what?”

Lee Chul Min could not hide his shock as he stumbled through the monster’s name.

He was more nervous about this monster not acting like a regular monster than its
foreign-sounding name.

“Grrrrrr-”

“Screeeeeeeeeeeeech---!”

Park Jin Tae turned toward the noisy Grade 2 monsters that had been pushed to the
back by the taster Grade 1 monsters.

“Grrrrr!”

“Kruuuuuu-”
The monsters were all making suppressed noises.

Park Jin Tae started to laugh in disbelief.

“Ha!”

It felt as if the monsters were confused as well.

They seemed to be shocked by this situation too.

Park Jin Tae could not help but share his thoughts.

“…Does this make any sense?”

Park Jin Tae suddenly got chills on his back.

He felt an overwhelming pressure behind him.

‘Mm!’

But he could not turn around.

It was a pressure he had felt many times already.

Lee Chul Min and Park Jin Tae saw someone running past them toward Cale who was
close to the Dark Tiger.

“Rok Soo hyung!”

It was Choi Han.

Park Jin Tae and Lee Chul Min could hear Choi Han’s shocked voice.

The Dark Tiger and Cale heard his voice as well.

Alberu the Dark Tiger tilted its head.

“…Rok Soo?… Hyung?”

Alberu then saw the awkwardness in Cale's eyes before the tiger started to smile.
The Tiger opened its mouth and started to speak in a loud voice.

“Hmm. So it’s my dongsaeng Rok Soo.”

Dongsaeng Rok Soo.

People either dropped their jaws in shock or closed their mouth after hearing that voice.

Lee Seung Won who was watching subconsciously started to speak.

“Holy shit. Are we in some traditional fairy tale or something?!”

A tiger, the Grade 1 monster Dark Tiger, was calling a human its dongsaeng!

How was this possible?

They heard something even more shocking at that moment.

Lee Seung Won could see a smile appear on the anxious Kim Rok Soo's face.

“Then I will consider you to be Alberu Crossman hyung-nim.”

“Sure thing, my dongsaeng.”

Choi Han who had approached them looked at them in disbelief.

Of the many people looking at them, Lee Seung Won subconsciously started to speak
again.

“…Noona, what is going on?”

“…I… don’t know either.”

They then heard Kim Min Ah's brother, Kim Min Joon, quietly mumbling.

“…The world is vast and there are a lot of shocking things. This would be a total hit if
we still had TVs……”

The Lee siblings quietly nodded their heads.

Cale and the Dark Tiger were still chatting.

“Dongsaeng Rok Soo, it sounds like we need to chat.”

“I will prepare a spot.”

“This is the spot you said you would prepare?”

The Dark Tiger looked shocked as it looked around.

“Yes?”

Alberu turned toward Cale after hearing the brusque voice respond.

He could see an extremely skinny and feeble man.

The pale Cale had looked very weak to the point he would feel pity every so often while
looking at him, but he wasn’t as bad as this person in front of him right now.

‘He looks like he hasn't had much to eat in a while.’

It was different than the wealthy Cale Henituse missing his meals despite his affluence.

This person whose face looked even sharper because their cheekbones were visible
due to their extremely skinny cheeks was enough to make Alberu’s heart feel heavy.

‘This punk looks quite bad, but the others are pretty similar.’

Alberu had just observed the people who were looking out of the building windows
or standing on the roof.

Many of them looked very thin.

Some of them looked healthy, but they were in the minority.

"What are you thinking about, sir?”

Alberu heard Cale’s voice, no, the voice of this man called Rok Soo.
“…I was thinking that this spot you prepared is quite terrible.”

“What’s wrong with this spot?”

“Everybody is looking at us right now.”

Cale looked around after hearing Alberu’s response.

Only a few people were still outside as most of the people had gone back into the
building.

The Grade 2 monsters were still at a distance creating a wall around them.

Cale was currently in between the wall of monsters and the building. He was sitting at
the center of the area where they had just fought against the taster Grade 1 monsters
facing Alberu.

Alberu had expected them to go somewhere quiet, that was why he was looking at
Cale who had prepared this clearly open area in shock.

But he soon understood the situation.

“I guess this place would indeed be the quietest.”

This was a spot where neither humans nor monsters were willing to approach.

Others would not be able to hear them if they chatted quietly.

“Hey, Kim Rok Soo.”

Alberu turned toward the direction of the voice calling Cale.

It was Park Jin Tae who was one of the people who had not gone back into the building.

Park Jin Tae flinched at the Dark Tiger looking at him before quickly looking away after
hearing Cale's voice.

“What is it, sir?”

“Is it okay to do this?”

Park Jin Tae turned toward the Grade 2 monsters still surrounding the area.

"Are you sure it’s safe?”

Cale answered without any hesitation.

“Until 5 pm… As long as this Alberu Crossman hyung-nim is sitting here, the Grade 2
monsters will not attack.”

Cale had a clear record in his mind related to this incident.

< The taster Grade 1 monsters attacked the central shelter for a few hours and
tormented or killed the people inside. >

< The things that happened after that fell into one of three categories throughout all
of the central shelters. >

First.

< At exactly 5 pm. Once the leader of the taster Grade 1 monsters moved away from
the central shelter… The Grade 2 monsters came charging in. >

Second.

< Even if the leader of the taster monsters did not leave the central shelter area, the
Grade 2 monsters still came charging in at 5 pm. >

Third.

< If the leader of the tasters left the central shelter area before 5 pm, the Grade 2
monsters started to attack even before 5 pm. >

Cale answered with certainty based on those three pieces of information.

"We are safe until 5 pm, so please tell everyone to get some rest.”

Park Jin Tae was hesitant but had no choice but to trust Cale. He had seen enough until
now.

“I got it.”
“Yes, sir. Please rest well. You’ll need to fight again later.”

Cale had an odd smile as he said that. Park Jin Tae felt the back of his neck going cold
for some reason, but he ignored that feeling and went back to the building.

The Dark Tiger watched him leave before it started to speak.

“Are the people involved the only ones left now?”

Cale, Choi Han, and Alberu were the only ones here now.

Choi Han started to speak at that moment.

“…Your highness.”

Choi Han's expression did not look good.

Alberu's tiger face tilted sideways in confusion as he looked at Choi Han. Choi Han
finally managed to ask in a heavy voice.

“…Did you make a deal with a god?”

Alberu slowly nodded his head.

“Yes.”

Alberu could see the two people’s faces at that moment.

“Fuck.”

Cale who was brushing his face with both hands, and…

“Why-!”

An angry Choi Han whom he had never seen get angry before.

“Huh?”

Alberu subconsciously gave a confused response before Choi Han, who seemed to be
barely suppressing his anger started to speak.
“I was enough, so why did you give up your lifespan-!”

“Huh?”

Alberu gave another confused response which made Choi Han subconsciously start to
get angry again.

‘Someone other than me!’

Someone else had made a deal with the God of Death.

Alberu must have give up a part of his lifespan or something equivalent to it.

There was a fire burning in Choi Han's heart thinking about that.

“That motherfucking God of Death!”

The swearing Choi Han heard an awkward voice.

“But I made a deal with the Sun God?”

“Excuse me?”

“Hmm?”

Choi Han and Cale turned toward Alberu at the same time.

Their sparkling gazes made Alberu subconsciously start to tell them about what had
happened.

“I met with Saint Jack.”

He told them about how Cage came to his tent and had served as a messenger to
connect him with Saint Jack.

“The deal was that I would get a device that would allow me to talk to Cale in order for
returning the curse of the Crossman bloodline. I was only told that I could chat with
you through this device.”

That device was a black and white video communication device.

“I thought I was going to have a video call with you since they gave me a video
communication device. But that…”

Alberu stopped for a moment before continuing to speak.

“It was a sleep induction device.”

“A sleep induction device?”

“Yes.”

“I was told that holding onto that video communication device would put me to sleep
within five minutes and make me remain asleep for one or two hours. I was told that
I could chat with you in my dream. I took that as only the two of us chatting together.”

“Ah!”

“Hmm?”

Cale gasped while Alberu looked at him in confusion. Choi Han responded for Cale.

“Your highness, the flow of time is different here.”

“The flow of time?”

Cale added on.

“Time moves faster in your world than it does here. It’s only been two days here.”

“What?”

Alberu's eyes opened wide.

However, Cale nodded his head and deciphered what was going on.

“…There shouldn’t be any issues if you remain here as the Dark Tiger while you are
asleep, your highness.”

The one or two hours that Alberu sleeps in their world would be multiple hours here,
but there shouldn't be much of an issue if the time he slept here was in his dream.
“Mm, for the flow of time to be different… But there shouldn't be any issues if it is in
my dream. It won’t affect the world I'm in while I get to spend more time with the two
of you.”

Alberu nodded his head as well. His mane majestically fluttered in the wind.

“Anyway, I opened my eyes to this situation.”

Cale quietly recalled the battle just now.

‘…It was indeed a bit weird.’

The Dark Tiger’s reaction had become weird during their conversation. Cale realized
that that must have been when Alberu had opened his eyes as the Dark Tiger.

Furthermore, he was able to deduce some other things as well.

‘The monsters that appeared on Earth definitely have a connection to the Demon
World or to the sealed god.’

And one more thing…

‘The God of Death and the Sun God… Actually, all the gods might have tried to intervene
with what happened on Earth.’

The proof of that was the leader of the taster monsters in front of him right now.

‘Maybe the monsters that were capable of communication… Held a much deeper
meaning.’

Cale could see Choi Han's shoulders flinching as he organized his thoughts.

He turned his gaze before realizing that the Tiger’s black eyes were staring at Choi
Han with a piercing gaze.

“…Looks like our instructor made a deal with his lifespan?”

“Mm.”

Choi Han avoided Alberu’s gaze while the Dark Tiger started to frown, making it look
heinous.

It was extremely vicious.

“It looks like I need to have a deep conversation with my instructor.”

“Mm.”

Choi Han avoided Alberu's gaze again and looked toward Cale. He was asking Cale to
do something.

Alberu stopped looking at Choi Han and looked toward Cale as well.

“Now then. I pretty much explained my side of the story, so now it is my turn to listen
to your story.”

“Mm.”

It was Cale who groaned this time.

The Tiger didn't care and started to smile.

“I know about the test and the sealed god and little bits here and there based on
everything I've heard.”

The Tiger looked around.

It was very different than his world.

“…But this situation does not seem to be a simple test.”

Even without considering the monsters, the crumbled buildings and roads, the
people's appearances and clothing… Their abilities…

Everything was different than Alberu’s world.

“And why…”

The most important thing.

“Choi Han looks the same, but…”

The Tiger got a little closer toward Cale.

The black eyes could see all of Cale.

Choi Han watched them with nervousness.

He bit down on his lips.

‘What do I do?’

Alberu asked in a low voice as Choi Han had all sorts of thoughts going through his
head.

It was the question that Choi Han had been worried about.

"Why do you look different?”

Cale looked toward Alberu without saying anything.

Alberu continued to speak while looking at him. He was not done talking yet.

“I know you very well.”

That was the reason he was able to figure it out.

"The way you fought earlier while coughing up blood didn't seem like someone who
was just trying to clear a test.”

The Cale he knew seemed very affectionate, but he was cold in some aspects.

Cale had a stoic expression on his face during the battle just now as well, but Alberu
could feel the desperation and solemness underneath that stoic face after having spent
so much time with Cale.

That was why he realized it.

This place meant something to Cale Henituse.

“Where is this place? It must be related to you somehow.”

Alberu asked Cale a question.

"Can you explain it to me?”

He could see Cale quietly observing him.

“I'll listen with full sincerity.”

Alberu recalled the image of Cale fighting just now and added on.

“No matter what it is you tell me, I'll sincerely listen to anything you tell me.”

Cale’s pupils shook for a moment.

His eyes were the same as Cale Henituse although everything else looked different.

The dark reddish-brown eyes calmed down and continued to observe Alberu as if they
had never been shaking in the first place.

“Your highness.”

Cale's mouth opened after a long time.

“Yes.”

Alberu waited for what Cale had to say.

Cale continued to speak without any hesitation after he opened his mouth to speak.

Alberu looked as if he would listen to whatever Cale had to tell him.

Cale continued to speak after a short duration of silence.

"Are Raon, On, and Hong okay?”

“…Huh?”

"The children. Are they doing well?”

Alberu let out a sigh with a look of disbelief.

However, he responded to him.

It was actually weird that Cale Henituse had not asked him about them as soon as he
saw him.

“They’re fine. As Choi Han probably told you, they were quite chaotic at first, and even
before I fell asleep, they were talking about destr-, mm… Anyway, the Molan patriarch
is making sure to feed them properly.”

“I see. Are they eating well?”

“Yes. They are eating very well because I told them that you said they need to eat well.”

“I see. I am a transmigrator.”

“…Huh?”

Alberu questioned his ears for a moment.

He wondered if he had heard incorrectly because of his tiger ears.

Alberu could see that Cale looked calm.

Cale continued to speak with that calm expression.

“I started to possess Cale Henituse's body two years ago.”

“…Huh?”

The Dark Tiger's jaw dropped.

Cale casually added on.

“For reference, my name is Kim Rok Soo and I worked at a company in this world until
I was thirty-six years old until I suddenly woke up in Cale Henituse's body and have
lived as Cale Henituse for the past two years.”

Alberu could only respond in the exact same way.

“…Huh?”

The Dark Tiger was looking at Cale with a blank expression.

But all Alberu could see was Cale’s calm face.

“…So, you’re saying…”

Alberu Crossman, the Roan Kingdom’s crown prince, quietly mumbled in his shocked
tiger face.

“…So, it is body possession?”

He could see both Cale and Choi Han nod their heads in response.

They both seemed quite nonchalant about it, and that made Alberu slightly annoyed
even as his mind was a chaotic mess.

Cale didn't notice that as he added on.

“Oh, just so you know your highness, this is something only Raon, Choi Han, and now
you know about.”

“No, that…”

That’s not the important thing right now!

Alberu closed his mouth without being able to finish saying what he wanted to say.

“Ho.”

He was just in disbelief.

‘Possession? Did he say possession?’

The word, ‘possession,’ floated around in his mind in circles.

Even Alberu Crossman, who would not be shocked about most things, could not hide
his shock at this fact that he could have never even imagined.

But his expression was slowly returning to normal. It was because he recalled word
for word what Cale had just said.

‘For reference, my name is Kim Rok Soo and I worked at a company in this world until
I was thirty-six years old until I suddenly woke up in Cale Henituse's body and have
lived as Cale Henituse for the past two years.’

If it was two years ago, then that was the year Cale had used the Silver Shield at the
capital.

Alberu slowly started to realize the hidden reason behind why Cale's reputation
started to change.

‘It must be because he became a different person.’

It was completely unbelievable.

“In that case…”

Alberu opened his mouth after a while.

“In that case, is this appearance your true appearance?”

“That is the case, however… This appearance is also my past appearance from when I
was around twenty years old.”

“Is that so?”

“Yes, your highness. Ah!”

Cale stopped talking and looked toward Choi Han as if he realized something.

Choi Han smiled after seeing his gaze and started to speak.

“I wish to tell you something as well.”

Alberu who also looked toward Choi Han flinched after hearing that statement.
“…There's more?”

Cale started to speak at that moment.

“Choi Han is my friend’s paternal cousin once removed. He’s an elder in my friend’s
family.”

“…Ho.”

The Dark Tiger’s pupils started to shake once again, but Cale and Choi Han continued
to speak without caring.

"As Cale-nim mentioned, I am Cale-nim’s friend’s paternal cousin once removed.

Basically, Cale-nim’s friend is my nephew. And just so you know your highness, I
traveled through dimensions when I was about 17 years old and am actually much
older than I look.”

“He’s right, your highness. Choi Han is quite old. In fact, he is probably older than your
grandfather, the deceased former Emperor. Am I right?”

“Yes, Cale-nim. Of course, I am older than him.”

“Your highness, he says he is.”

Alberu who had been listening to the two of them started to speak again after a long
pause.

“You motherfucking bastards.”

The Dark Tiger started to shake its head. Its majestic mane was elegantly waving in
the air.

“…Are you done now?”

Alberu could see Cale firmly nodding his head.

“There are more details, but I believe we’ve mentioned the big issues.”

“Your highness. I will slowly tell you the details.”

Choi Han had a calm smile on his face as he said that with an innocent expression.

Alberu looked at them with an even deeper frown before starting to sigh as he nodded
his head.

“…I guess my secret is nothing in comparison.”

It was quite funny, but Alberu felt that his secret about being a quarter Dark Elf was
nothing in comparison to Choi Han and Cale’s secrets.

It felt even more like that because of Choi Han and Cale’s nonchalant demeanors as
they shared their secrets.

‘I do like that though.’

Alberu found it funny that he was having such a thought right now, but liked what he
just thought about.

There was something else he liked as well.

‘They trust me.’

He could feel the emotions behind the two people who told him their secrets.

Whether it was Choi Han who said it as if it was nothing but had his fists clenched or
Cale who was focused on observing his expressions…

Either way, they trusted Alberu and told him their secrets.

The Dark Tiger started to speak.

“I like it.”

“Excuse me?”

“…Excuse me?”

The confusion was now on Choi Han and Cale’s faces.

Alberu didn't care as he nodded his head with a satisfied expression.

“I will maintain your secrets.”

He then added on.

“Then am I the dongsaeng?”

"Should I be the hyung?”

“No. I don’t like that.”

The Dark Tiger sternly shook its head before adding on.

“Aren’t you planning on returning to where we are anyway?”

Cale could see that Alberu's gaze was focused on him after asking that question.

Cale responded without any hesitation.

“I plan on going back. Of course I will go back.”

He was quite happy to be able to meet people from his past whom he had to let go of
once before, but the people of his present where he had not lost anybody yet was
precious as well.

Cale truly wanted to create a future with the people of his present.

This world he was going through this test could be a real world and the people he was
looking at could really be living breathing people, but…

Kim Rok Soo's 36 years. The memories he had with these people during that time were
not there.

Cale heard Choi Han's voice as he organized his thoughts once more.

“I’ll be going back as well.”

There was a smile on Choi Han’s face.

There seemed to be a bit of sorrow in his smile.

After being next to Cale's side here, Choi Han had been thinking about the moment he
traveled through dimensions. He had thought about what it would be like to go back
to that time.

‘I won’t be able to get used to it.’

Unlike Cale, who could adjust pretty well even after returning to his twenty-year-old
self, Choi Han was not confident that he could live a normal life as a high school
student.

‘It’s impossible.’

He had not forgotten that his name was Choi Han, but he had forgotten about a lot of
other things.

He had also experienced a lot of new things as well.

Many of Choi Han's emotions had been buried or broken during those times, but they
had newly blossomed to arrive at where he was now.

‘I like how it is right now.’

Even though they had not taken care of the White Star yet… Even though a lot of things
were uncertain and things could be dangerous for Choi Han and the people he had
connected with, Choi Han still liked how it was right now.

That was why he had no desire to go back.

Choi Han recalled a portion of the conversation he had with the God of Death,
something he had not told anyone.

‘Let me know if you want to go back to your world.’

‘Really… Just as Cale-nim mentioned… ’

“The gods really do whatever the hell they want.”

Choi Han flinched after subconsciously saying that out loud before making eye contact
with Alberu and Cale.
“That’s very true.”

"Choi Han, nice choice of words.”

Choi Han chuckled at the two of them who were strongly showing their agreement
and nodded his head.

Alberu quietly observed Choi Han and Cale who seemed to be more at ease and kept
his mouth shut.

‘…I’ll tell them later.’

Originally, Alberu was planning on telling Cale about how the White Star had smacked
him in the back.

However, he kept his mouth shut after seeing the desperate expression on Cale’s face
during the battle and hearing that this was Cale’s past from when he was twenty years
old.

‘…I'll do as much as I can do first.’

It was not something that could be resolved even if he mentioned it right now, so he
decided not to tell them for the time being.

It was at that moment.

Pat.

Cale put his hand on the Dark Tiger's furry front paw.

“Now then, hyung-nim.”

“…What is it?”

Alberu felt iffy after seeing that Cale was smiling brightly.

He found the smile to be even more suspicious as he suddenly called him hyung-nim
after calling him ‘your highness’ until just a moment ago.

It felt extremely sly after he thought about the fact that Cale was at least 38 years old.
“Hyung-nim, around when are you going to wake up?”

“Why do you want to know?”

“I don’t know how the Dark Tiger would act once you wake up.”

Alberu who had been feeling iffy looked down at his body after hearing a normal and
understandable question before he started to speak.

“I'm dominating this body so it should move as you tell it to move if I order it to follow
your orders while my mind is not here.”

Then Alberu could chat with Cale again as the Dark Tiger once he fell back asleep.

Smile.

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

“Oh. That’s great.”

“…Right?”

For some reason, Alberu had a bitter taste in his mouth after seeing that smile.

It was at that moment.

“Kiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii--!”

A sharp screeching noise filled Alberu’s ear. As the Dark Tiger’s eyes looked up at the
sky…

“It’s here.”

Cale stood up from his seat.

He could see a shocked Park Jin Tae running toward him.

“Hey, Kim Rok Soo! Isn't that a Grade 1 monster? Why did another Grade 1 monster
appear? I thought you said there were only seven of them!”
Another Grade 1 monster, a large hawk-like monster with stiff grey feathers, was
headed this way.

This monster was not a regular Grade 1 monster.

Alberu started to speak.

“That one seems like a leader too.”

Although it was screeching like a monster right now, this monster was actually
another leader of the taster monsters that was capable of communication.

Cale started to speak at that moment.

“First. At exactly 5 pm. Once the leader of the taster Grade 1 monsters moved away
from the central shelter… The Grade 2 monsters came charging in.”

In addition…

“Second. Even if the leader of the taster monsters did not leave the central shelter area,
the Grade 2 monsters still came charging in at 5 pm.”

And finally…

“Third.”

Cale made eye contact with Lee Jin Joo.

“If the leader of the tasters left the central shelter area before 5 pm, the Grade 2
monsters started to attack even before 5 pm.”

The third was the worst situation.

Although there would be no leader monster there, the remaining Grade 1 taster
monsters and the Grade 2 monsters would all come charging in.

Cale turned his gaze and looked up at the sky.

The Steel Feather Hawk, another leader of the taster monsters that was headed
toward this building…
This hawk was the bastard who had attacked the central shelter closest to this central
shelter.

It fell under the third category as it had come to attack this place as well.

The corners of Cale’s lips started to go up.

“The prey is here.”

Cale slightly shook his head.

“No. I guess it is an enemy to chat with?”

Alberu’s eyes clouded over after hearing his mumbling.

He didn’t know everything that was going on, but he could deduct something from
what Cale just said.

“You… Are you planning on keeping that bastard captured here?”

Cale raised his hand instead of responding.

This was a signal they had discussed in advance.

Lee Jin Joo started to speak at that moment.

{Starting now.}

Her voice was shaking a bit.

‘I didn’t know he would really do it!’

Her heart was shaking even as she said the things Kim Rok Soo told her to say in
advance.

But she clenched her fists and opened her mouth.

Lee Jin Joo's voice echoed to the two nearby central shelters that could hear her.

She was speaking to the two other central shelters that would be doing their best to
resist the Grade 1 monsters with the information from Cale that Park Jin Tae had
delivered.

She delivered a message to them.

{We will now send the first round of reinforcements.}

Park Jin Tae who had been headed toward Cale stopped moving and looked toward
Lee Jin Joo with his eyes opened wide.

He then turned his head again to look at Cale.

{Please hold on a little longer.}

Grandma Kim remembered the conversation she had with Kim Rok Soo and stood up.

“It’s my turn now.”

Lee Jin Joo added on.

{The first round of reinforcements will take care of all of the taster monsters.}

Cale opened his mouth to speak.

“Choi Han.”

“Yes, Rok Soo hyung?”

Cale’s gaze was focused on Lee Jin Joo even after hearing Choi Han's response while
also looking at the Steel Feather Hawk.

He continued to speak with his gaze still focused.

“Play around with that Steel Feather Hawk for a while. At least until 5 pm. You can get
some rest while training Lee Chul Min.”

Choi Han’s eyes sparkled for a moment before he nodded his head with an innocent
expression.

“Yes, hyung-nim.”
Cale started to smile after hearing a reliable response.

He then looked past Park Jin Tae who was now close to him and looked toward Alberu.

“Please go with me, hyung-nim.”

“Ho.”

Park Jin Tae could not hide his shock at the fact that Cale was going to go help another
central shelter with this leader monster.

However, the Dark Tiger started to smile and revealed its hidden fangs.

The Tiger's low voice echoed in the area.

“Are you and I the first round of reinforcements?”

“There are a few other people as well.”

Cale stopped for a moment before continuing on.

“First.”

Each central shelter's attack teams had people who might not be at Park Jin Tae's level
but were at least pretty close.

The central shelters had crumbled in the past because of the taster monsters, but they
should still be holding on thanks to the information Cale had given them.

‘I told them to send up a signal if they fell.’

They had not seen any of the signals yet.

That meant that everybody was doing their best to hold on.

That meant that there was only one thing for Cale to do.

“First, we will go to help them.”

He then quickly added on.

“Then, we will prepare to launch a counterattack.”

Park Jin Tae and Alberu looked toward Cale while Choi Han seemed calm.

“C, counterattack? Us?”

Park Jin Tae was stumbling on his words.

‘How could they launch a counterattack against these monsters? Was something like
that even possible?’

Park Jin Tae could see Cale’s calm gaze after he asked that question.

Cale opened his mouth and started to speak in a calm voice.

“There’s no reason we can’t launch a counterattack.”

His voice sounded peaceful.

"We can't keep being on the receiving end.”

However, the corners of Cale's lips that had twisted up gave Park Jin Tae the chills.
At the central shelter closest to the one Cale was at…

“Fuck!”

Jae Ha-Jung who was taking on the role of supporter at this location was frowning with
both of his hands shaking.

The tree trunks coming out of his hands were tightly binding a large iron door.

Baaaaang! Bang!

But the iron door looked ready to break at any moment from the banging.

No, it was already starting to break.

The door had dents here and there and it was starting to bend, slowly causing gaps to
appear on the sides.

And beyond the iron door…

“Kihehehe!”

They heard the laughter of an animal that resembled a monkey.

The banging on the iron door became louder every time it laughed.

“Fuck!”

He started to frown.

‘It’s toying with us!’

The monster was toying with the people who were hiding inside and doing everything
they could to resist.

But that was slowly coming to an end.

“Hyung-nim!”

Bae Cheol-Ho, the ‘General’ at this central shelter, clenched his hand that was holding
a piece of paper after hearing Jae Ha-Jung's desperate voice.

It was the information that Park Jin Tae, the leader of the nearby central shelter, had
brought him last night.

He had thought that the fearless Park Jin Tae had finally gone crazy after hearing that
it was information from one of his shelter’s ability users with the power of foresight.

But everything on that paper was true.

The monsters appeared along with the solar eclipse. The weaker Grade 3 monsters
came charging in first.

Then, seven taster monsters appeared.

This extremely accurate foresight gave him the chills, but this information allowed
them to last until now.

…Yes, until now.

It didn’t look as if they could last any longer.

“Ugh.”

“Huff, huff!”

There were injured people groaning in pain behind Bae Cheol-Ho.

And in front of him…

Beyond the breaking iron door…

“Kihehehe!”
He could hear the red monkey monster’s laugh as the other monsters started to
approach.

He could see the Grade 2 monsters getting closer through the only crack on the
boarded windows that they had purposely left in order to be able to look out.

The other Grade 1 taster monsters that had been leisurely enjoying the situation from
the rear were approaching as well.

This all started to happen once the Steel Feather Hawk disappeared.

“Hyung-nim!”

"General-nim!”

Bae Cheol-Ho could hear people shouting for him from multiple directions.

The veins on the hand clenching the paper looked ready to burst, but he was just
looking at the iron door that was on the brink of breaking with a stoic expression.

But he could not do that any longer.

“Hyung-nim! I can't hold on any longer!”

Jae Ha-Jung shouted toward Bae Cheol-Ho while looking as if he was going to cry.

His shaking hands and sweat-drenched body were telling them that he had reached
his limits.

Bae Cheol-Ho grabbed his weapon again.

If it was difficult to last inside the building, he needed to at least head outside and lure
the monsters away.

Bae Cheol-Ho started to speak.

“…Jae Ha-Jung.”

Jae Ha-Jung started to frown as if he knew what was about to happen.

Bae Cheol-Ho and Jae Ha-Jung started to speak at the same time.

“You can sto-”

“Hyung-nim, I will do what I can to hold on a little loon-”

It was at that moment.

{Starting now.}

Everybody inside the building shut up.

It was that voice.

They could not forget the voice that they heard during the solar eclipse. It was the
voice that had been providing them with information every hour.

{We will now send the first round of reinforcements.}

Jae Ha-Jung and Bae Cheol-Ho looked toward each other.

Bae Cheol-Ho clenched his fists again.

{Please hold on a little longer.}

The woman continued to speak.

{The first round of reinforcements will take care of all taster monsters.}

Bae Cheol-Ho released his clenched fists.

Jae Ha-Jung started to mumble.

“…What? Is that even possible?”

‘Taking care of all taster monsters? How was that possible?’

Everybody had those thoughts.

Bae Cheol-Ho’s voice echoed inside the building at that moment.

“Let’s hold on a little longer!”

Someone with an arm injury started to shout toward Bae Cheol-Ho.

“General! There’s no way that is true-!”

“No matter what, it means that someone is coming to help us!”

The person speaking to Bae Cheol-Ho shut his mouth.

Bae Cheol-Ho looked around.

‘We already gave up on running away.’

Some people had tried to give up on the central shelter and run away when the Grade
3 monsters came to attack, but most of them had stayed in the building.

It was because they knew it was hell outside as well.

Bae Cheol-Ho had also convinced them with the information in his hand.

‘We can only keep holding on here even if we end up dying.’

They needed to last just one night.

Bae Cheol-Ho made up his mind.

He then walked over to Jae Ha-Jung.

“Jae Ha-Jung! Please keep it up for a little longer!”

Bae Cheol-Ho then moved his hands toward the iron door that was barely being
maintained by the tree trunks rather than to his weapon.

Jae Ha-Jung started to frown while watching him.

“…Fuck! I have no choice but to keep it up!”

He put more strength into his shaking hands with an annoyed expression.
“Sigh.”

“Hey, let's go.”

Other people were shaking their heads but still walked over to the iron door and
pushed against it with their hands.

These were the people who were not severely injured.

The other people started to quickly move as well.

“Hey! Go bring that couch and put it by the door!”

“Ask the people on the second floor! See if they have anything else to throw outside!
What is up with the kid making the flaming bottles?”

“She’s out right now from lack of strength!”

“Haah, shit! Throw whatever we can! We need to prevent as many monsters from
getting near here!”

But those noises stopped for a moment.

“Kihehe! Hehe! Kihehehe!”

It was because the monster’s laughing started to become louder.

But they quickly snapped out of it.

It was because of the voice echoing in their minds.

‘We will now send the first round of reinforcements.’

It should get at least a little better than now if they could hold on for just a bit longer.

That thought was starting to take hold in people's minds.

But they didn’t have much time.

As they started to think about how much time must have passed since they heard the
voice…

Baaaaang! Bang! Baaaaang!

Jae Ha-Jung could feel his legs slowly starting to lose strength.

“Ugh!”

He didn’t even have the strength to grumble anymore.

All he could do was groan.

Someone who watched him struggle asked Bae Cheol-Ho a question.

“When do you think they’ll get here? Hopefully they get here quickly!”

Bae Cheol-Ho could not respond to that question. It could not be helped.

‘…It’ll take them a while.’

He was thinking about the distance between Park Jin Tae's central shelter and this
central shelter.

They were pretty close in comparison to most central shelters, but it was still quite
the distance.

‘It's not just the distance we have to worry about right now.’

They had to get past the monster obstacles to get here.

They said to hold on a little longer, but Bae Cheol-Ho was certain that it would be a
long time.

‘And if the sun goes down during that time-’

Forget it passing 5 pm as they fought against the monsters to get here, if the sun went
down…

‘…They might not come.’

Bae Cheol-Ho was thinking about the worst possible scenario.

It was his job to do that.

This was the only thing he could say to the others.

“…They will get here if we keep holding on.”

His job was to give them at least a small amount of hope.

But his mind was full of concern about how to get past this difficult situation, as he
could not just irresponsibly give them false hope.

‘At least the information Park Jin Tae gave us is reliable.’

That information had not lied.

That was why it was the thing he could trust the most right now.

“Hyu, hyung-nim!”

Bae Cheol-Ho then heard the person who was looking out the crack in the window on
his behalf shouting in shock.

‘Are they already here?!’

Bae Cheol-Ho urgently looked toward the person thinking that the reinforcements had
arrived.

"General-nim!”

A scout who was on a higher floor ran down the stairs in shock as he called out to Bae
Cheol-Ho.

Bae Cheol-Ho then saw the person who had called him from the window.

“Ah.”

Bae Cheol-Ho let out a gasp.

What he saw on the person's face was despair and not joy.

They all then heard the scout who was coming down the stairs.

“T, there’s another monster that appeared in the sky! It seems to be a Grade 1 monster
based on its size!”

All of their faces filled with despair.

They had been toyed with by the Steel Feather Hawk that was 1.5 times stronger than
the other Grade 1 monsters until now.

‘There’s nobody worth chatting with here.’

The Steel Feather Hawk that had toyed with them left after saying that.

The remaining Grade 1 monsters started to run wild after that and the Grade 2
monsters started charging forward.

But another flying monster in such a situation?!

They couldn’t help but become filled with despair.

Bae Cheol-Ho started to speak at that moment.

“…That's not possible.”

The information said that only seven Grade 1 monsters would appear right now.

But there was another one?

Was this information wrong?

Bae Cheol-Ho’s mind started to go blank.

The person looking out the window continued to speak at that moment.

"T, the monster is heading down! I, it seems to be heading toward us!”

His voice was shaking.

It was full of fear. That fear quickly spread to everybody inside the central shelter.

Bae Cheol-Ho started to frown after realizing this.

“Damn it!”

Bae Cheol-Ho moved his hands away from supporting the door and urgently ran
toward the crack in the window.

“Hyung-nim, over there-”

The person at the window pointed in a direction for him.

“…Ho.”

Bae Cheol-Ho let out a gasp.

His gasp put even more fear on the faces of the others inside the building.

The person next to Bae Cheol-Ho continued to shout.

“I, it is descending extremely quickly!”

The extremely large monster was descending extremely quickly as he mentioned. It

looked as if it wanted to destroy this building.

The person whispered quietly so that only Bae Cheol-Ho could hear.

“Hyung-nim, should we run away? We can’t last-”

Bae Cheol-Ho looked up at the sky before barely managing to open his mouth.

“Yes. We will start with the people in the rear.”

“Yes, sir. We will move the old and the weak firs-”

“Hold on!”

The person had to stop talking after hearing Bae Cheol-Ho shout.
He looked toward Bae Cheol-Ho in confusion.

“Hyung-nim?”

“…What is that?”

Bae Cheol-Ho moved his face closer to the window instead of looking at the other
person.

His gaze was focused on the monster that was descending faster and faster.

He then said a single question.

“…A person?”

Silence filled the building again.

Bae Cheol-Ho started to mumble in disbelief through the silence.

“…There's a person on top of the monster’s back?”

What the hell was going on?

Even Jae Ha-Jung looked toward Bae Cheol-Ho in shock.

He then saw and heard something.

He saw that Bae Cheol-Ho's eyes that had been full of despair and disappointment
slowly focus again while his voice no longer sounded weak.

Bae Cheol-Ho continued to speak.

“In addition to the monster…!”

He couldn't believe it.

But he could now see the people who had originally been covered by the monster’s
large body.

There was one person on the monster's back.

Then there were some more people descending behind the monster.

His instinct was telling him something.

“It’s the reinforcements!”

People heard a loud groan as soon as he shouted.

Baaaaaang!

“Ugh!”

Jae Ha-Jung groaned and fell on his knees at that moment.

“Dodge!”

“Grab Ha-Jung and retreat!”

The people who were supporting the iron door grabbed Jae Ha-Jung and moved back.

The tree trunks started to break…

And a large hole appeared on the iron door that could not hold out any longer.

“Kihehe! Kihehehe!”

The red monkey monster outside the hole was laughing while looking at them.

Screeeech-

The iron door with the large hole slowly started to crumble.

Boom!

The iron door fell and there was nothing left to protect them.

“…Ah.”

Jae Ha-Jung’s eyes became blurry as he watched.

“Kihehe! Hehehe!”

The red monkey took a step into the building.

The monkey with red fur and red eyes looked excited. It seemed excited at the fact that
it could now kill these people.

‘I worked my ass off to hold on!’

Jae Ha-Jung bit down on his lips and it started to bleed.

‘No. It couldn't continue like this. This couldn't be it.’

His shaking lips opened as he started to speak.

“N, no-”

It was at that moment.

“Kihehe?”

The monkey looked up at the sky.

Boooom!

The people inside could hear a loud noise as a shadow covered the iron door.

“Kihehe?”

The monkey slowly turned its head after seeing a shadow cover its body.

And then it saw it.

“Grrrrrrrrr!”

“Grrrrrrr!”

“Screeeeeeech!”

The Grade 2 monsters were quickly retreating.

They seemed to be in a hurry.

However, the red monkey could not see that properly.

It was the same for the people inside the central shelter.

“Kiiiiiiiiiii, kiiiiiiiiii-”

The red monkey subconsciously started to curl up.

The monkey's red eyes looked toward the arrogant black eyes looking down at it.

Bae Cheol-Ho started to speak.

“…A tiger.”

A black tiger with a lion's mane had landed on the ground and was now looking at the
red monkey and the people inside the central shelter with a nonchalant expression.

It was at that moment.

“Mr. Bae Cheol-Ho?”

They could all see a person on the tiger's neck.

Bae Cheol-Ho looked toward that man as well.

A skinny young man started to speak.

“The reinforcements are here.”

“Ah.”

Bae Cheol-Ho let out a gasp.

He could see Cale who was standing there with a relaxed smile.

Cale patted the Dark Tiger's body with one hand.

“Hyung-nim.”
Alberu started to speak with a frown on his face.

“…There’s no way, right?”

It wasn’t what he was thinking, was it?

Alberu had a small amount of hope.

However, Cale easily ignored that hope.

“Hyung-nim.”

“…What is it?”

Unlike Alberu who responded weakly, Cale pointed toward the red monkey and
shouted in a refreshing manner.

“Please bite it!”

Alberu lowered his head and mumbled to himself.

“…Damn it.”
The moment the Dark Tiger’s large body moved…

One of the people watching from inside the shelter started to mumble.

“…A thunderbolt.”

Its movement was indeed like a thunderbolt.

And at the end of its movement…

“Kiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii, eeeeek! Kiiiiiiiiiiiiiik!”

The Dark Tiger's large fangs dug into the red monkey's neck.

“Kiiiiiiiiiiii, kiiiiiiiiiiiiiiik!”

Everybody dropped their jaws in shock after hearing the whimpering of the monster
that had been such a source of fear for them.

The fear inside their hearts started to subside.

Boom-!

The red monkey knelt down on both of its knees as it died.

The people inside could see the Dark Tiger lightly wipe its mane as well as the person
still on top of the tiger.

Jae Ha-Jung subconsciously opened his mouth.

“…Did you really-”

‘Did you really come here to help us?’

He needed certainty about this desperate situation.

But Jae Ha-Jung could not finish asking the question.

It was because the Dark Tiger and the person on top of it turned their backs to him.

“Let’s finish the rest.”

Alberu continued to sigh after hearing Cale’s comment.

Cale just ignored his sighs.

“Your highness, I thought you said you know everything about the leader monster
except one thing.”

Alberu was able to learn ‘everything’ about this leader monster once he was connected
to the monster’s body.

Well, everything except one thing.

Cale recalled how Alberu had mentioned that one thing.

‘I'm able to go through all of the Dark Tiger's memories, however… I can’t figure out
where this bastard came from.’

Where had the Dark Tiger come from?

Where had all these monsters come from?

‘The true owner of this body definitely knows where it came from, but that memory
seems to have been erased once I was brought inside.’

Cale caressed the tiger’s mane as he continued to speak.

“Please, let's hurry since we need to quickly figure that one thing out as well.”

“Haaaaaaaaa. Fine.”

Alberu sighed and took a step away from the people.

“Screeeeeeeeeeeeech-”

“Grrrrrr!”

They could hear the monsters growling from all around them.

“…For the crown prince… to do such… Such… things that bring down my dignity……”

“Your highness.”

Cale urged the hesitating Alberu on.

“Hyung-nim, please hurry up and roar.”

“You son of a bitch.”

Alberu had no choice but to do as he asked.

The Dark Tiger opened its mouth and bared its heinous fangs.

Alberu then roared.

“Roooooooooar!”

The Dark Tiger’s thunder-like roar made the air around the central shelter start to
shake.

Cale recalled what Alberu said earlier as he felt the shaking.

‘Cale. This leader of the taster monsters seems to be able to affect the Grade 2 monsters
to a degree as you suspected.’

Cale had focused on something in addition to the fact that the leader of the taster
monsters was capable of communicating in the past.

Command.

Could the leader monsters command the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters?

He had come up with such a hypothesis.

He was able to hear a portion of the response regarding that issue from Alberu.

‘I looked through this body's memories and noticed that the Grade 3 monsters feel
intense fear and pressure from this body while the Grade 2 monsters feel significant
fear and pressure.’

Intense fear and pressure.

Significant fear and pressure.

The two of those were quite different, but there was something he could gather from
this information.

Even if it could not 'command’ these monsters…

“Kiiiiiiiiiiii!”

“Grr! Grr!”

“Rooooar!”

The Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters all felt fear from the leaders of the taster monsters.

The Grade 2 monsters showed a bigger reaction than when the Dark Tiger had first
appeared and urgently retreated back.

The Grade 2 monsters started to surround the building, similar to the Grade 2
monsters at Cale's central shelter.

Cale watched this for a moment before turning away.

‘Ah, Cale. You mentioned the taster monsters, right? The other Grade 1 taster monsters
only feel a small amount of fear and pressure.’

As Alberu had mentioned earlier, unlike the Grade 2 monsters that had retreated, the
remaining Grade 1 monsters were warily glaring at the Dark Tiger and Cale.

The monsters showed a small amount of fear, but they quickly realized that they
outnumbered them and started to look for an opening to attack.
“Looks like we can’t show them any openings.”

Cale then opened up both hands.

Chhhhh-

Crackle!

The water spear was in his right hand while a rose gold thunderbolt was in his left
hand looking like a spear.

“Cale, are you really going to fight? Will you be okay?”

“No. I cannot end up fainting. I'm just showing them that I have these powers in order
to act tough and make them be more cautious about attacking us.”

“Ah, is that so?”

“Yes, sir.”

“As expected of you.”

Alberu and Cale were nonchalantly chatting.

But the Grade 1 taster monsters that could not hear their conversation tensed up
because of their wariness of the Dark Tiger and this human's power and they did not
dare to attack.

The people inside the central shelter could not believe what they were seeing.

This man was firmly standing on top of this large tiger while controlling it as if it was
part of his body.

Then there were the powers of water and fiery thunderbolt in that man’s hands.

“…Who the hell is this person?… Is he even human?”

Others agreed with what Jae Ha-Jung was mumbling as well.

They had heard about ability users with multiple abilities because of Lee Soo Hyuk,
one of the most famous ability users during this time, but they had never seen it for
themselves.

Jae Ha-Jung started to think about the abilities of this man in front of him.

“…Water… thunderbolt.”

He also controlled a monster. The only occupation he could come up with was-

“…A tamer?”

He couldn’t come up with a term for someone with all these abilities.

Jae Ha-Jung was standing quite far away, but he could see the smile on the man’s face.

‘He can look so relaxed even while having all these monsters in front of him.’

Forget just being surprised, it was sending currents throughout his body.

He recalled the woman’s voice he heard a moment ago.

‘We will now send the first round of reinforcements. Please hold on a little longer. The
first round of reinforcements will take care of all taster monsters.’

Jae Ha-Jung subconsciously blurted out.

“…We might be able to survive.”

He then heard the leader of this central shelter, Bae Cheol-Ho, start to shout.

“Oh, my goodness!”

Jae Ha-Jung urgently turned toward the voice.

Bae Cheol-Ho was holding his head with both hands.

His pupils were frantically shaking.

He was looking toward the sky from which the Dark Tiger had descended. It was
focused on that spot.
He was looking at the other people who were also descending from the sky.

Bae Cheol-Ho started to tear up after noticing one of those people.

He then heard a voice he had missed for so long.

“Eldest Uncle!”

Bae Cheol-Ho started to speak.

“Puh Rum!”

Bae Puh Rum descended quickly.

The others with him had no choice but to quickly descend as well.

“Eldest Uncle!”

Bae Puh Rum ran past the red monkey's corpse and entered the building. Bae Cheol-
Ho had already run down as well.

“My goodness!”

Bae Puh Rum and Bae Cheol-Ho embraced each other.

It was almost a miracle to meet a family member in this new world.

Bae Puh Rum couldn't hide his shock at the fact that Bae Cheol-Ho had been so close.
This was his Eldest Uncle whom he had seen many times even aside from the major
holidays.

It was at that moment.

“Hello, sir.”

Bae Cheol-Ho noticed the people who had descended with Bae Puh Rum.

Puh Rum snapped back to his senses after hearing the voice and moved away from
Bae Cheol-Ho.
The person who had greeted Bae Cheol-Ho started to speak.

“My name is Kim Min Ah.”

Bae Puh Rum quickly moved to Min Ah's side and started to speak.

"Ah, she’s m, my, g, girl-”

“Tell him later.”

“Okay.”

Puh Rum quickly shut up after hearing Kim Min Ah’s stern voice. But everybody could
tell their relationship based on their flushed cheeks.

Kim Min Ah then bowed toward Bae Cheol-Ho and quickly turned around.

“I will be back in a moment, sir.”

“…Huh?”

Kim Min Ah immediately headed out of the building. Bae Cheol-Ho subconsciously
reached out.

“It’s dangerous out-”

But Bae Cheol-Ho's hand could not reach Kim Min Ah.

She had already moved far away.

“Uncle, it’s okay.”

As he heard his nephew Puh Rum's voice…

Boom!

A large spear stabbed down on the ground. Kim Min Ah easily grabbed the spear and
started to walk toward the Dark Tiger's side.

“Uncle, our Min Ah is super strong. Me too.”

“…What?”

‘You’re strong too?’

Bae Cheol-Ho's eyes opened wide.

The man on top of the Dark Tiger started to speak.

“Park Jin Tae!”

The other person who had come to this central shelter…

Was none other than Park Jin Tae, whom Bae Cheol-Ho knew to be the leader of the
other shelter.

That Park Jin Tae who was said to have a terrible personality started to frown as he
responded.

“O, okay! I’ll be there!”

Bae Cheol-Ho looked confused as he watched Park Jin Tae respond in a grumbling tone
but hurrying over after putting Jang Man Soo, who was on his back, down on the
ground.

He then quietly swore after making eye contact with Bae Cheol-Ho.

“Damn it……”

“Park Jin Tae!”

However, he heard Cale calling for him again and started to speak to Bae Cheol-Ho.

“…Grandma Kim here will tell you everything you need to know.”

“Nice to meet you.”

Bae Cheol-Ho quickly bowed toward the grandma with a benign smile before looking
back at Park Jin Tae.

“…Park Jin Tae.”

“What is it?”

Bae Cheol-Ho looked toward Park Jin Tae who responded in a brusque tone as he
pointed outside with one hand.

“Who is that person?”

His finger was pointing toward Cale.

The expression on Park Jin Tae's face disappeared for the first time.

He finally started to speak after a while.

“…Who knows? Even I can’t really tell anymore.”

He could not fathom Kim Rok Soo’s abilities anymore.

However, there was something he did know.

No matter what abilities he had…

“He’s the current leader.”

“Huh? It’s not you?”

Bae Cheol-Ho’s eyes opened wide. He was shocked to hear such a response from the
greedy Park Jin Tae.

Park Jin Tae had a bitter smile on his face.

“You'll understand once you see what happens. We can survive if we do as he says. All
of us.”

Boom-!

Bae Cheol-Ho watched the last of the Grade 1 taster monsters that had attacked this
central shelter fall to the ground.
“…Ho.”

An emotion greater than admiration flowed out of his mouth.

He had not expected all of the Grade 1 taster monsters to truly fall.

He saw a hand in front of him at that moment.

“Hello. My name is Kim Rok Soo.”

This was the man who had stood on top of the Dark Tiger’s back and gave orders to
Kim Min Ah, Park Jin Tae, and Bae Puh Rum to get rid of the monsters one by one.

Bae Cheol-Ho firmly grabbed that hand.

“My name is Bae Cheol-Ho. Thank you very much from the bottom of my heart.”

He wanted to show his gratitude however he could.

That was why he tried to say something else, but Cale shook his head.

“We don’t have much time because we need to go help the other nearby central shelter
as well, so I will keep it short.”

Bae Cheol-Ho thought about the third shelter in the vicinity after hearing Cale say that
they didn't have much time.

“Of course. Please feel free to say whatever you need to say.”

Bae Cheol-Ho grabbed Cale’s hand with both hands as he said that.

Cale continued to speak in a calm voice.

“Is Miss Che Soo Jung here?”

Bae Cheol-Ho’s eyes opened wide.

“…Che Soo Jung?”

“Yes, sir. The lady who makes the flaming bottles.”

"She is. But why do you ask?”

Cale answered Bae Cheol-Ho's question without any hesitation.

“I need to tell her in person, but… We are thinking about launching a counterattack.”

“Excuse me?”

“Haven’t you heard that the greatest defense is offense?”

“Excuse me?”

As Cale's expression turned blank after hearing Bae Cheol-Ho answering the same way
over and over…

“Do you need me for something?”

A woman wearing round glasses started to walk down from the second floor.

Cale looked into the focused eyes behind the glasses and nodded his head.

“Yes, ma’am, I do.”

The Embodiment of Fire, the Flaming bottles thrower.

Che Soo Jung.

He needed her very much.

Che Soo Jung approached Cale with both suspicions about why he was looking for her
as well as gratitude for taking care of the taster monsters.

But Cale had a lot of things to do.

He asked Bae Cheol-Ho a question.

“Ah, Mr. Bae Cheol-Ho. Do you know about Mr. Joo Ho-Shik?”

“…Of course I know him. Isn’t he the leader of the other central shelter?”
Park Jin Tae, Bae Cheol-Ho, and Joo Ho-Shik.

The central shelters led by these three people were the ones in the nearby vicinity.

Bae Cheol-Ho did not look happy while thinking about Joo Ho-Shik.

‘That person is difficult to talk to.’

Even Lee Soo Hyuk who had been the strongest person in this area had found it
difficult to handle Joo Ho-Shik.

He was very good to the people in his shelter, but he was difficult to talk to. He was
someone who believed in an unusual religion.

Bae Cheol-Ho started to speak.

“Are you planning on going there?”

“Yes, sir.”

He continued to speak.

"We need to help them out as well.”

Bae Cheol-Ho grabbed Cale’s hands even tighter in admiration.

Cale found his expression and action to be awkward and slowly pulled his hand away
as he continued to speak.

"We need to hurry. We have a lot of things to do.”

Cale started to gently smile.

“Noona. It's 6 pm.”

“Yeah.”

Lee Jin Joo raised her head.

It was the end of autumn.

The wind was starting to get colder as the beginning of winter approached.

The sun was already disappearing under the western sky.

She turned her head and looked toward Cale.

“Rok Soo. It’s almost night time.”

Cale watched the Earth’s sunset for the first time in a long while as he started to speak.

“Yeah. It’s almost night time.”

Night.

For the people who had to suffer for a long time in despair…

For Kim Rok Soo's past that was full of regret…

A night of potential that could bring forth a different future was approaching.
Boom- boooooom!

The iron door that had been barely repaired was shaking loudly.

Jae Ha-Jung grabbed onto a tree trunk and started to shout.

“The monsters really are running wild as Mr. Rok Soo said!”

Jae Ha-Jung got the chills the more he thought about it.

‘All of Mr. Kim Rok Soo’s prophecies have been correct!’

As Kim Rok Soo had mentioned using his ‘foresight,’ the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters
became crazy once the sun went down and started to attack the central shelters
together.

They were also 1.5 times stronger than normal.

A drop of sweat dripped down from Jae Ha-Jung's back.

‘If we faced this situation without knowing anything……!’

Would he have been able to survive?

‘No, I would have died long before this.’

Jae Ha-Jung wondered if he would have died when the Grade 1 taster monsters had
appeared.

That was why he was relieved.

He was relieved that this was not ‘an unexpected night’ and it was now ‘a night where
they finished the minimum preparations they needed.’
Jae Ha-Jung started to speak.

“Hyung-nim! Is it bearable?”

Bae Cheol-Ho looked at his nephew instead of responding to Jae Ha-Jung.

“Puh Rum.”

“Don’t worry, uncle!”

Wind was gushing out of Bae Puh Rum’s two hands as he stood by the window.

Swooooooosh-

A strong gust of wind shot out like a rocket.

Baaaaang!

“Kaaaaaaaa, kaaaaaaaaaaaaa!”

“Grrrrrr!”

The monsters that were hit by the wind rockets retreated back. The people inside the
building did not miss that opening and started to attack the monsters outside through
the window.

There was one more thing.

“Screeeeeeeeeech-!”

There was a sharp screech and a large hawk’s claws attacked the monsters.

The owner of those claws, the Steel Feather Hawk, shot up into the air.

“Screeeeeech! Kiiiiiiiiiiiiiii-!”

Steel feathers shot out like arrows and attacked the monsters once it flapped its large
wings.

The Steel Feather Hawk was relentlessly attacking to prevent the Grade 2 and Grade 3
monsters from approaching the central shelter building.

Bae Cheol-Ho watched this and started to speak.

“I still can't believe it.”

He recalled what Kim Rok Soo had said.

‘Tonight. There will be a leader monster stationed here for the night.’

The Steel Feather Hawk that had left this place after saying that there was nobody here
worthy of chatting with was now protecting this place.

It was an unbelievable sight.

Bae Cheol-Ho made eye contact with the Steel Feather Hawk at that moment.

‘Mmph!’

As Bae Cheol-Ho's shoulders subconsciously flinched after looking into the hawk’s
strong gaze…

The Steel Feather Hawk's beak opened and it started to speak in Korean.

“I wouldn’t do such useless things if it wasn't for that valuable offer. Tsk.”

It then turned away from Bae Cheol-Ho.

Bae Cheol-Ho let out a sigh of relief and turned around, only to make eye contact with
Bae Puh Rum.

“Ahem.”

Bae Puh Rum started to smile as Bae Cheol-Ho had an awkward expression on his face.

“Uncle, don’t worry too much. I'll work hard too. Our Rok Soo hyung-nim said that I
have a lot of talent.”

Cale had never said such a thing to Bae Puh Rum.

‘It’s enough with you being here. Try working together with Jae Ha-Jung.’

All he said was…

‘Do you think I can do a good job?’

‘I'm certain that you will be enough for this shelter to hold on.’

The obvious truth.

It was just that it had reached Bae Puh Rum's ears in a slightly more exaggerated way
than he had intended.

Bae Puh Rum started to speak at that moment.

"We also don't need to hold on for a long time.”

Bae Cheol-Ho's eyes clouded over.

The people around them all looked toward Bae Puh Rum.

‘Don’t need to hold on for a long time.’

Bae Puh Rum started to speak again.

They just needed to hold on for a few hours.

“We only need to hold on until they start the ambush from the rear!”

Bae Cheol-Ho started to speak.

“Yes, we only need to hold on until then.”

The people around them firmed their resolves and nodded their heads.

It was at that moment.

Buzz.

Bae Cheol-Ho looked down at his hand.

There was a walkie-talkie in his hand.

It was one of the items that Kim Rok Soo had left for Bae Cheol-Ho.

It was not a regular walkie-talkie but a medium for an ability user's ability.

 Ah. Ah.

He could hear a man’s voice.

 Can you hear me?

“Uncle! It’s Min Joon hyung’s voice!”

Kim Min Joon. Kim Min Ah’s brother was the owner of these walkie-talkies.

 …Is that you, Puh Rum?

“Yes, hyung!”

Bae Puh Rum responded brightly.

“Hyung! Hyung! Can you check to make sure Min Ah is okay?”

 …Haaaaaaaa.

Kim Min Joon sighed on the other side of the walkie-talkie before continuing to speak.

 What is the current status?

Bae Cheol-Ho turned away from the disappointed Bae Puh Rum and responded.

“We are still okay for now.”

 I understand. Please contact me if anything changes and we will contact you if

anything unexpected happens as well.

“Of course. I will do so.”

 Let’s all work hard.

That was how their first communication with Kim Min Joon ended.

‘Let’s all work hard.’

Those words echoed in Bae Cheol-Ho’s mind.

“Yes. We must hold on.”

Although night had just started… They were already waiting for the sun to rise tomorrow.

And at the same time…

 Ah. Ah.

Kim Min Joon contacted the second walkie-talkie.

 Grandma. Can you hear me?

Grandma Kim looked around the building as she started to speak.

“Is that you, Min Joon?”

 Yes, ma’am. Grandma, how is it looking over there?

Grandma Kim looked around once more after hearing his question.

She was originally at Park Jin Tae's central shelter.

She had then gone to Bae Cheol-Ho's shelter to heal the wounded.

Finally, she had come to Joo Ho-Shik's central shelter and was spending the night there.

“How it looks right now-”

Her eyes looked toward the main entrance.

Most of the windows here were tightly boarded, but the door was open.

It was okay for them to do that.

Baaaaaang!

Baaaaang!

The monsters ran into a half-transparent wall.

“Roooooar!”

“Screeeeeeeeech!”

The monsters’ crazed cries echoed all around her.

But on the building's southern and northern sides…

The monsters had no choice but to run into a half-transparent wall.

As for the person who made those walls…

“Ugh!”

Jang Man Soo's arms were stretched out to either side as he focused his full attention
on the shields.

On the building’s west side…

“I didn’t think I would end up helping the humans.”

A 3-meter tall white rabbit mumbled in an imposing voice as it attacked with its fluffy
back paw.

“Screeeeeeeeeeeeech!”

“Rooooar!”

Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters were falling to the ground with each kick.

“But worthy deals are bound to catch my attention.”

The White Rabbit turned its head and drew a circle.

“Grrrrr!”

“Rooooar!”

Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters lost their lives because of its large rabbit ears.

As for the building’s east side…

“Huuuuaaaaaah!”

Kim Min Ah shouted as she swung her large spear.

“Rooooooar!”

“Rooooar!”

Monsters fell down with each swing.

Kim Min Ah’s eyes were sparkling.

“…I don’t need to control it because they're attacking from everywhere!”

She didn't need to worry about controlling the direction nor attacking the wrong thing
right now.

There were enemies coming from all sides.

As long as she didn't attack behind her… It was fine as long as she didn't swing the
spear toward the building.

And behind Kim Min Ah…

The window behind her was open even though the rest of the windows were all tightly
boarded.

Grandma Kim was stationed there.

Cale had said the following to Kim Min Ah.

‘Grandma Kim is someone who has seen a lot of battlefields. Jump through the window
and get inside if grandma says to run.’

Kim Min Ah kept those words on her mind as she swung her spear.

Grandma Kim watched her as she started to speak.

“Everybody is doing a good job.”

Grandma Kim looked around at the Joo Ho-Shik shelter’s people around her. All of
them looked determined to overcome this trial.

‘…The problem is that it is not simply determination.’

Grandma Kim held back her thoughts as she made eye contact with a man.

This was the person who was acting as the leader with Joo Ho-Shik not being here.

He smiled toward Grandma Kim and energetically responded.

“Please don't worry! We will definitely be victorious!”

The man’s eyes looked full of energy.

He was not the only one. Most of the people in this shelter were full of hope.

They responded brightly.

“Foresight? I didn't think I would meet someone with such a power in person! Even
the strongest monsters are on our side now! It’s all thanks to that sir!”

“Mr. Ho-Shik was right! We will be victorious!”

“We will definitely be victorious! We all just need to give it our best!”

Grandma Kim made eye contact with Jang Man Soo.

Jang Man was extremely busy maintaining his shields, but he still put on an awkward
smile. Grandma Kim had a similar smile on her face as well.

The two of them recalled Kim Rok Soo's advice.

‘It’s probably best to just let them be.’

Grandma Kim started to speak.

"Anyway, we are fine, Min Joon.”

 Yes, ma’am, I got it.

“And Min Ah is fine too.”

 …Thank you very much, grandma. I will contact you if anything unexpected happens,
ma’am.

“Okay, I’ll leave it to you.”

Buzz.

Kim Min Joon ended his conversation with Grandma Kim.

He heard Lee Jin Joo's voice as he looked down at the walkie-talkie for a moment.

“I'm glad that everybody is okay.”

“I agree.”

Kim Min Joon could see Lee Seung Won who was crouching next to Lee Jin Joo and
recording the information from his communication.

Kim Rok Soo had told these three people the following information.

‘Recording, message, and amplification. These three things together can create an
information network. The three of you are important right now, but you need to use
those abilities for the future.’

Kim Min Joon clenched his fists.

He had been struggling with the thought that his sister and her friend had strong and
useful abilities in this world but that he was just baggage.

But he now knew that that was not the case.

The walkie-talkie in his hand started to glow.

Buzz-

It was in order to communicate with the third walkie-talkie.

It was at that moment.

Baaaaaang--!

They heard a loud noise.

Kim Min Joon who was on the roof could see a black Yong that swept through the
monsters.

“Fuck! Tell me before you attack! I'm an ally! You need to give me time to dodge!”

He could hear Lee Chul Min's desperate shouts as well.

But Kim Min Joon's eyes were focused on one spot.

They were focused on the man who lowered his sword and coldly glared at the
monsters that were starting to fill the spot the black Yong had charged through just
now.

Choi Han.

“…It’s safe here as well.”

He felt currents in his body as he felt relieved.

That was the reason for it.

Buzz.

Once he was connected to the other side…

 How is everybody doing?

Kim Min Joon responded energetically to Kim Rok Soo's question.

“Everybody is doing fine.”

He then asked.

“Is everything okay on your side?”

Cale looked around and calmly responded.

“There are no issues yet. I will contact you again later as we discussed.”

 I understand.

Buzz.

That was all they said.

Cale just needed to activate the walkie-talkie as Kim Min Joon instructed him to call
back.

Cale put the walkie-talkie back into his pocket and looked around.

He could see the desolate city that had no lights as the electricity had been cut.

It was full of dilapidated or completely destroyed buildings.

Furthermore, there were dry blood marks and bone fragments that he couldn't tell
whether they belonged to monsters or humans.

Cale could see all of this even though it was night time.

Crackle.

It was because of the light inside the small glass bottle in his hand.

“Ah, it feels so stifling. Can't we make it any brighter?”

Cale could see Park Jin Tae walking up toward him.

Currently, they were stealthily moving with Cale in the front, followed by Alberu, Park
Jin Tae, Joo Ho-Shik, and Che Soo Jung.
Park Jin Tae had peeked toward Alberu warily before walking forward and speaking
to Cale.

Nobody else other than Cale had a light with them as they followed him.

“I don’t even see any monsters around here.”

Cale shook his head at the grumbling Park Jin Tae.

“That won't do. There are monsters around the streets as well, sir. We need to quietly
get to our destination.”

They needed to first get to their destination.

Park Jin Tae pouted and looked back after hearing Cale's stern response.

He flinched at the Dark Tiger's eyes he saw right away. He then looked toward Joo Ho-
Shik and Che Soo Jung beyond the Dark Tiger before sticking right next to Cale.

“Hey.”

He then started to speak.

“I understand having Che Soo Jung here since she's famous for her abilities.”

Che Soo Jung was famous as the Flaming bottles thrower.

She was so strong that there were rumors prior to this incident about how the monsters
who managed to survive her flaming bottles attacks would hide whenever they saw
here.

That was why Park Jin Tae had thought that it was a smart decision to include her in
this nighttime ambush squad.

“But Joo Ho-Shik?”

How did it make any sense to bring Joo Ho-Shik?!

“Kim Rok Soo.”

"What?”

Park Jin Tae frowned at how Cale was slowly starting to speak informally to him before
sighing and quietly whispering.

“Hey. Joo Ho-Shik is a crazy bastard. Even Lee Soo Hyuk found him difficult!”

The tiger’s ears twitched at that moment.

He had been loud enough for the nearby Alberu to hear. Of course, the two people
behind the large tiger did not hear it.

Alberu and Park Jin Tae heard Cale’s voice at that moment.

“I know.”

Cale knew Joo Ho-Shik better than Park Jin Tae did.

Why?

A lot of people died at Joo Ho-Shik's shelter, but a larger number of people still
managed to survive in comparison to other places.

In addition, they had not scattered and instead had come together as a group once
they ran out of the building.

And in the future…

Joo Ho-Shik who survived this ordeal would go on to create a 1 person guild.

The guild’s name was ‘Joo Ho-Shik.’

He was the only guild member.

He was the guild leader, assistant guild leader, the secretary, and guild member.

That alone was weird, but…

That 1 person guild was a church.

Joo Ho-Shik had created a religion.

It was a religion of his own.

He hated and loathed anybody getting involved with his religion.

He did not accept anybody into his guild.

He just said that his religion was salvation just for him and never even revealed what
that religion was to the world.

Nobody other than Joo Ho-Shik knew the name of Joo Ho-Shik's religion nor any
information about it.

‘It’s quite funny.’

He had received all sorts of requests in that 1 man guild.

In fact, he became extremely rich from it.

This was something that most people knew about the eccentric Joo Ho-Shik in the
future.

Cale, who had gathered information about the important guilds as part of his job,
knew a few more things.

Joo Ho-Shik's 1 man guild was something created because of his ability.

And Joo Ho-Shik had used all of his money to restore the destroyed lands of Korea.

The destroyed mountains, fields, rivers… He spent money in all sorts of places.

That was why Joo Ho-Shik actually had no money.

Cale started to speak.

“He’s very crazy. He’s also someone who does a lot of good deeds.”

Joo Ho-Shik was truly crazy.

But he was quite a good person.

Cale had never seen someone like him before.

“Wait, what the hell do you mean he is crazy but a good perso-?!”

Park Jin Tae pounded his chest as he could not speak loudly and looked toward Cale
in disbelief.

He heard Cale's low voice at that moment.

“We need to fight together because I know how he is.”

Park Jin Tae got the chills for some reason after hearing Cale's firm response.

He finally managed to speak again after a while.

“…You know about Joo Ho-Shik's ability too, right?”

Joo Ho-Shik never told anybody about his ability, but he used that ability as he pleased.

That was why people had selected him as their leader.

However…

“No matter what I did, I couldn't deduce his ability at all.”

He could not decipher Joo Ho-Shik's ability.

Something was weird.

Joo Ho-Shik's ability was a topic of question for everyone. They didn’t know what it
was.

But Cale knew.

He opened his mouth to speak.

“Faith is amazing. Isn't that the case?”

Park Jin Tae instantly started to frown.

“Haaaaaaaaa. That’s what Joo Ho-Shik always says.”

“Pffft.”

Cale chuckled. Park Jin Tae was about to get annoyed before his eyes clouded over.

“Perhaps?”

“That perhaps is probably correct.”

Park Jin Tae quietly mumbled after hearing Cale’s response.

“…Faith?”

Smile.

Cale started to smile.

Joo Ho-Shik’s ability was simple.

Faith.

Things Joo Ho-Shik believed in would happen.

However, his ability was not omnipotent.

His faith was restricted to ability users’ abilities.

For example, it could make an ability with an explosiveness of 5 and raise it to a 7.

It could extend the reach of an attack from 2 to 4.

Joo Ho-Shik could make an ability user's ability stronger based on the level of faith.

As long as he believed that that was the case.

‘Park Jin Tae and his flame bullets, Che Soo Jung the Flaming bottles thrower, and Joo
Ho-Shik, the ability amplifier.’
If these three people were together…

And if Cale's fiery thunderbolt was added to the mix as well…

Tonight…

The crazed violent monsters would meet an even crazier power.

‘No.’

Cale started to smile.

‘They’ll be smacked in the back.’

It would not be them but the monsters that were smacked.

Park Jin Tae said something after looking at Cale's expression.

“…Damn, what a vicious expression.”

“Hmm.”

Flinch.

Park Jin Tae turned his head after hearing a voice behind him.

The Dark Tiger smiled after making eye contact with Park Jin Tae.

‘Damn it. So damn vicious.’

A monster like that smiling just made it look scarier.

Park Jin Tae frowned and shut up.

It was at that moment.

“Over here.”

Cale stopped walking.

Park Jin Tae raised his head.

It was the same as every other night.

Even with all the neon signs that had lighted up Korea at night time having disappeared,
even as people were getting tired from surviving in this world that was full of
monsters…

The stars appeared in the night sky every night.

He could see a building thanks to the light from the stars.

“Are we starting over here?”

Cale turned his head after hearing a gentle voice.

Joo Ho-Shik walked over to him.

Park Jin Tae started to frown again after looking at him.

‘My goodness. His fashion sense is quite amazing.’

He was wearing a white shirt, white pants, and white shoes.

They were all decorated with the blood of monsters.

‘Crazy bastard.’

This guy was a crazy bastard for a different reason than Kim Rok Soo.

“Yes, sir. We are starting here.”

“Hmm. I see.”

Joo Ho-Shik looked up at the building and calmly continued to speak.

“I see that this is the starting point of faith.”

Park Jin Tae started to frown.

“That’s right. It is the start of faith.”

He frowned even more after hearing Cale calmly responding back.

Joo Ho-Shik quietly observed Cale for a bit before starting to speak again.

“…Do you know about faith?”

Cale didn't even look at Joo Ho-Shik and responded as he motioned to Che Soo Jung.
“Is there much to faith? All you need is to have faith in yourself.”

Joo Ho-Shik's eyes immediately clouded over.

He then gently smiled.

“The mind of someone with the great power of foresight is truly different. I wish to
learn about such a faith as we-”

“Hey, mister. You're being too loud.”

A stoic Che Soo Jung moved in between Joo Ho-Shik and Cale.

There was a jigae that was wider than her on her back.

She would not let anybody touch her jigae.

“Too loud, faith is an amazing-”

“Sorry, I have no desire to hear about a cult.”

Che Soo Jung easily ignored Joo Ho-Shik and looked toward Cale.

Click.

Cale was activating the walkie-talkie.

Paat.

The walkie-talkie was soon covered by a bright light and… Cale started to speak.

“We’ve arrived at the starting point for the operation. I will now explain the operation
one last time.”

Everybody quietly focused on what Cale had to say.

The start of the operation was simple.

It revolved around a single question.

‘While the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters are running wild at night… Where are the
Grade 1 monsters?’

The Grade 1 monsters would attack tomorrow as the final hurdle for humans to
overcome.

‘Where would those bastards be during the night?’

The answer to that question was officially documented in the future.

< While the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters attacked the central shelters in a state of
madness, the Grade 1 monsters were all waiting and relaxing at a set distance. >
< They were all gathered together in one spot. >
< They quietly waited for their turns without hunting any humans. >

That was the reason that on this night when the central shelters lost their powers…
The people who escaped from the central shelters and hid throughout the city were
able to survive.

“Current location. In between the Grade 1 monsters and the Grade 2 and Grade 3
monsters by Park Jin Tae's central shelter.”

And using that fact as the foundation…

“Starting from this location…”

In this spot that was in between the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters attacking the
central shelters and the Grade 1 monsters who were quietly waiting together to hunt
tomorrow… In between these two groups…

“We will commence Operation Rat in a Jar.”

He would put an end to both sides.

Buzz.

Cale moved his mouth away from the walkie-talkie and walked into a building.

24 hours.
That was how long they had to last until the new central shelter appeared.

“It’s too long.”

There were basic needs.

People needed time to eat, sleep, and relax.

“Hyung-nim. See you later.”

“Sure thing, my dongsaeng.”

Cale said goodbye to Alberu and the Dark Tiger disappeared into the darkness.

The remaining four people went up to the building’s roof.

The people following behind Cale looked toward where he was pointing.

First, they saw the shelter where Park Jin Tae was the leader.

The shelter that was located nearby was bright.

It was because there was a fire on the roof.

Cale had asked them to maintain this fire.

That was why he could see well right now.

He could see the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters attacking the shelter.

“There’s so many of them it's disgusting.”

As everybody quietly agreed with Park Jin Tae's mumbling…

“Let's get started.”

Cale pointed toward the sky.

The gun in Park Jin Tae's hand pointed toward the sky.
“Fire.”

Park Jin Tae pulled the trigger as soon as Cale gave the command.

Baaaaang!

Kim Min Joon, who was on top of the roof of the shelter, could see fire shooting up into
the sky in the distance.

Lee Seung Won who was next to him started to shout.

“We’re starting!”

Buzz.

Kim Min Joon's walkie-talkie started to glow.

He opened his mouth to speak.

“Can you hear me?”

 We can hear you.

 I can hear you as well.

He heard Bae Cheol-Ho and Grandma Kim's nervous voices.

Kim Min Joon looked forward after confirming that the connections were still stable.

His hands were starting to get sweaty. His forehead was starting to get sweaty from
nervousness as well.

‘…Can we really do it? To even consider a counterattack… Are we really going to launch
a counterattack?’

Kim Min Joon had many questions on his mind, but he didn't doubt it.

And not long after the fire in the distance shot up in the air…
“Roooooooooar!”

He heard a vicious roar.

The owner of that roar easily jumped over the monsters that were retreating from
feeling instinctual fears and stood next to someone.

Choi Han started to speak to the Dark Tiger standing next to him.

“You're here.”

“Yeah.”

Kim Min Joon shouted the moment the Dark Tiger appeared.

“Please get started!”

Bae Cheol-Ho at the second central shelter immediately shouted toward the Steel
Feather Hawk.

“Now!”

Grandma Kim at the third shelter shouted toward the White Rabbit.

“Now!”

The Steel Feather Hawk landed in front of the building.

The large White Rabbit moved to the front of the building entrance and stood in front
of Jang Man Soo's shield.

Alberu stood in front of Choi Han.

Alberu and the two leader Grade 1 monsters standing in front of their respective
central shelters all recalled what Cale had said earlier.

‘Even if the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters are crazy from the madness… They will still
have an instinctual fear toward the leaders of the taster monsters.’

Some would feel it more than the others.

‘Please go easy on them at first.’

The Steel Feather Hawk and White Rabbit were not regular Grade 1 monsters.

Unlike the Grade 1 taster monsters that would appear between the Grade 2 monsters
and the Grade 1 monsters, they were 1.5 times stronger than the Grade 1 monsters.

Furthermore, they were recorded as 'special’ existences as they were capable of

communication.

Even if Cale's hypothesis in the future about their being able to control the other
monsters was wrong… These leaders of the taster monsters were sources of fear for
the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters.

That was why it was easy for these leader monsters to handle two or three Grade 2
and Grade 3 monsters at once, even if they had gone crazy.

They had gone easy on them at the start as Cale had asked.

‘But once I give the signal… ’

The Steel Feather Hawk’s feathers started to stick up like needles.

The White Rabbit's red eyes started to glow before its white fur started to turn stiff
like thorns.

What Cale had told them was…

‘Please awaken the instinctual fear inside them.’

The leader monsters started to reveal their strength to the Grade 2 and Grade 3
monsters without holding back.

“Screeeeeeeech---!”

The Steel Feather Hawk's sharp screech that was completely different from earlier
rumbled through the night.

It was the same for the White Rabbit.

Their loud shouts made the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters flinch.

They could not overcome their instincts even while in states of madness.

"Are you not going to do it, sir?”

"Fine, I’ll do it. Sigh.”

The monsters felt the same fear from the Dark Tiger's roar.

“Grrrr, grrrr.”

“Whimper.”

“Whimper.”

Step. Step.

The Grade 2 to Grade 3 monsters… Especially the Grade 3 monsters started to retreat
backward.

The wild monsters trying to kill the humans had to curl up in fear at the existence of
even stronger wild monsters.

These stronger monsters did not let their prey get away.

“Die!”

Hundreds of sharp feathers shot out from the Steel Feather Hawk’s wings and attacked
the monsters.

“Rooooooooar!”

“Roooooooooar!!”

It was the same for the White Rabbit.

“Roooooooooar!!” “Roooooooooar!!”

"What wonderful noises to hear.”

Boom!

The corpses of the monsters that were destroyed by the White Rabbit’s two feet fell to
the ground.

“Whimper.”

The remaining monsters started to retreat even more.

As they could not think rationally in this state of madness…

These monsters were unable to feel the number of allies on their side.

All they could feel was their instinctual fear of the leader monsters.

One Grade 3 monster slowly stepped back before turning around and starting to run.

“Khahahaha! Yes, run away! Otherwise, I will kill you! Screeeech-!”

The Steel Feather Hawk laughed before launching another loud screech that would fill
their minds with fear.

That was the beginning.

The Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters slowly started to run away one by one.

The same thing was happening in all three locations.

“Ha, haha-”

Bae Cheol-Ho laughed in disbelief as he watched.

“I guess those bastards know how to run away as well.”

Even if the leader of the taster monsters were strong, these Grade 2 and Grade 3
monsters were running away out of instinct without realizing their numbers advantage.

The number of monsters running away slowly started to increase.

These bastards who had been trying to kill as many people as possible until just a
moment ago running away made all the humans watch in disbelief.

“…Surviving this night was this easy by having the leader monsters by our side.”

That fact was making him feel despondent.

He heard Jae Ha-Jung's voice at that moment.

“Hyung-nim. It might have felt easy because we knew what we had to do, but…”

Jae Ha-Jung had a similar thought for a moment as well, but he had a different thought
first.

Bae Cheol-Ho turned toward Jae Ha-Jung.

Jae Ha-Jung was shocked at something else.

“I don’t think it is easy to turn those leader monsters into ‘allies’?”

The leader monsters did not keep trying to communicate with the humans.

Only one person was an exception.

“Furthermore, wasn’t all of this only possible because we knew the monsters’ traits
and battle styles?”

No matter how many times Jae Ha-Jung thought about it…

“…It would have been impossible if we didn’t know everything like we did.”

It was impossible to do this unless they knew everything that would happen as if it
was recorded somewhere.

Who in their right mind would think about drawing the leader monsters to their side?

Who would have known about the monsters’ specific traits?

Bae Cheol’s mouth slowly opened again.

It was impossible if they didn’t know these things, but…

“It was possible once we had that information.”

He then started to think about someone.

“The fact that we have someone who knew all that-”

The fact that someone like that appeared at this time…

“Is a miracle.”

That was the only way he could describe it.

Bae Cheol-Ho, Jae Ha-Jung, and the people around them all looked at each other with
the same thought on their minds.

“Uncle!”

As the silence was broken by Bae Puh Rum's voice…

Baaaaaang!

Baaaaang!

They heard multiple explosions in the distance.

Bae Cheol-Ho urgently headed toward the window.

He could see fire shooting up from multiple directions.

These were the fires that Kim Rok Soo had mentioned.

However…

“…It seems much stronger than what he told us?”

The fire seemed much bigger than what Kim Rok Soo had explained.

“Uncle, you had that thought too? I wondered about the same thing.”

Bae Cheol-Ho realized that he was not mistaken after hearing Bae Puh Rum's response.
This was something that Cale had not expected as well.

Actually, nobody, including Park Jin Tae and Che Soo Jung, expected this as well.

“…Holy crap!”

Park Jin Tae watched the fire shooting up with a look of disbelief before looking to his
side.

Joo Ho-Shik was watching the burning building with a gentle smile on his face.

“The power of faith truly is strong.”

“Ha!”

Park Jin Tae just laughed as he was at a loss for words after hearing that comment.

Park Jin Tae, Che Soo Jung, and Cale had used their fire-related abilities just now.

Joo Ho-Shik's ability was activated as well.

It was a weird power.

Park Jin Tae just felt as if something supported him as he used his ability, making it
even more explosive than normal.

“He said… that it would only make it slightly stronger, didn’t he?”

He said it would make something with an explosiveness of 5 turn into 7.

He heard Che Soo Jung's voice at that moment.

“He wasn't wrong. Your ability and my ability were only slightly amplified.”

It had turned an explosiveness of 5 into a 7.

Che Soo Jung clenched a flaming bottle in her hand as she looked toward someone.

“…It was just that one person's ability was significantly amplified.”
Cale looked toward the burning building.

Baaaaang! Baaaaang!

These empty buildings were all starting to explode one by one as they spread the fire.

Cale looked down at his hands.

He then looked toward Joo Ho-Shik.

Cale couldn't even use half of his Fire of Destruction right now.

He couldn't even use that less than half ancient power at max power.

He needed to use his wind and water powers tonight as well.

He had to save for those.

He could not faint.

That was why he just used a small amount of power.

But that power…

“…Three times.”

Was three times stronger than normal.

It was because of Joo Ho-Shik's faith ability.

‘It can affect ancient powers as well? This faith ability can do that?’

Cale looked toward Joo Ho-Shik.

Joo Ho-Shik started to speak.

“Didn’t you say that you would then use your wind ability?”

Cale called forth the wind.

He only used a tiny amount of his power.

But the moment Joo Ho-Shik's hand was pointed at Cale…

Swooooooosh-

The wind was amplified.

Cale sent the wind toward the fire.

The fire followed the direction of the wind and Cale's will to aim for the monsters
without spreading elsewhere.

Cale looked toward Joo Ho-Shik.

Joo Ho-Shik started to speak.

“It looks like I can have faith in you.”

He then pointed toward the other buildings.

He was pointing at the buildings they had confirmed were empty, the buildings they
would now light on fire.

“Are you not going to do it?”

Cale stood up straight after hearing that question.

He had no way of knowing how Joo Ho-Shik's power was capable of amplifying ancient
powers.

However, there was one thing he was certain about.

‘This is beneficial to us.’

It would help them out.

‘I can push forward a little stronger.’

Cale slowly started to modify the plan in order to pressure the enemies more than he
originally planned. He might need to fight a little more ferociously, but that was the
more certain method now that Joo Ho-Shik was here.

Cale looked toward Che Soo Jung, Park Jin Tae, and Joo Ho-Shik as he started to speak.

“…We will light the paths of the monsters escaping from the three central shelters on
fire.”

The important part was this next part.

“However, we will not touch the three locations where the Grade 1 monsters are
staying.”

The Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters that have nowhere to run would run to the places
with no fire as they ran away in fear of the leader monsters.

Their natural instincts for survival would lead them that way.

And at the end of that path…

“The escaping Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters will end up in the Grade 1 monsters’
resting areas.”

How would the Grade 1 monsters react to the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters not
following the plan and running toward them?

Cale calmly continued to speak.

“There’s no need for us to do everything, right?”

Swooooooosh-

The wind coming out of Cale’s hand surrounded the four of them.

"We will also gather the Grade 1 monsters to one spot as well.”

The Grade 1 monsters and the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters that wouldn't be thinking
straight in their states of madness…

For that large area that was bound to be full of chaos…

In order to create that area…

“We need to quickly start fires or quickly destroy the buildings.”

The four of them started to move on Cale’s wind.

They were moving through the streets they expected the monsters to use.

Fire destroyed the buildings and blocked the paths of the monsters as the four people
flew by.

“…Holy crap! This is really crazy!”

Park Jin Tae couldn’t help but be astonished while looking at the fires.

Che Soo Jung moved past him as they were moving past building after building while
being surrounded by a whirlwind and threw a flaming bottle.

Baaaaaang!

It caused another fire.

“Please stop mumbling uselessly and work.”

“Ugh! I'm very good at working too!”

Park Jin Tae pulled the trigger without any hesitation.

Tang!

The fire shooting out of the national shooting representative’s hand burned brighter
than usual as it reached its target.

Baaaaang!

Fires continued to shoot up one after another.

The people in the distance could see the fires better as the number started to increase.

The fires were creating a large circle that looked as if they were headed toward the
three central shelters.

However, the people at the central shelters knew that that wouldn't be the case.

They knew that these fires would not reach them.

However, the beautiful fires were so clear that it gave them the chills.

Bae Cheol-Ho could not say anything as he watched.

“…Ha, haha-”

All he could do was laugh.

As the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters ran away from the Steel Feather Hawk…

They were met by fires that were starting to look like a tsunami.

The front and the back…

Watching the monsters being surrounded on both sides made Bae Cheol-Ho think
about the day that had been so long.

It had felt even longer as he had faced death many times.

Squeeze.

He clenched his fists.

The 24 hours were not up just yet.

“Jae Ha-Jung. Open the door.”

“Yes, Hyung-nim.”

Screeeech.

The door of the central shelter opened.

“Let’s go.”
“Yes, uncle.”

The three central shelters.

Everybody other than a small number of people to protect the buildings all headed
outside.

They then heard Kim Min Joon's voice through the walkie-talkie.

 Attack.

It was now their turn to attack the backs of the escaping enemies.

They were no longer humans trying to dodge monsters and escape.

Just as how it was in the future… Just as how people had acted in Kim Rok Soo's
memories…

The humans who had been dodging and hiding from the monsters all charged out of
buildings to take back their homes.

And in the vanguard…

“Your highness, please push them a little more.”

“I know. Stop with the nagging. Please.”

It was Choi Han.

As Cale had mentioned before… The person who would fight the most tonight…

The person who had been defending against the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters alone
at one of the central shelters would now…

“I'll head over first, your highness.”

“I'll follow you soon.”

He would now go to destroy the resting areas of the Grade 1 monsters.

And along with Cale, until the sun came up…

The two of them would fight without any rest.

‘Choi Han.’

‘Yes, Rok Soo hyung?’

‘After we take these people to the new central shelter… We’re going to go see Choi Jung
Soo.’

‘…Is that so?’

‘Yes. Choi Han.’

‘Yes?’

‘Have you considered taking in another student? It’s a punk named Choi Jung Soo. He’s
pretty talented with the sword.’

Choi Han started to smile.

Choi Han who quickly ran across the roofs of buildings to get past the escaping
monsters could see Cale who was waiting for him.

“You're a bit late.”

“I'm sorry, Rok Soo hyung.”

Cale shrugged his shoulders at Choi Han’s response before looking toward a spot
where the fire had not reached.

Although there was no fire there, the light from the fires lit up that area.

“Grrrrrr.”

“Grrr.”

The Grade 1 monsters whose rest was ended not out of their own volition bared their
fangs toward Cale and Choi Han.
These monsters that were much stronger than the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters were
starting to get up one by one.

The shining black aura at the tip of Choi Han's sword looked ready to turn into a black
Yong at any moment.

The current surrounding Cale’s body shot up.

“Let’s go.”

“Yes, Rok Soo hyung.”

The two of them landed in front of the Grade 1 monsters together.

“Gasp.”

Alberu sat up as soon as he took a breath.

He could see someone looking at him.

“…Ca… ge?”

“Yes, it is me, your highness.”

Jack and Cage were looking at him with nervous gazes from the other side of the couch
Alberu had been lying on.

Alberu slowly looked around.

“…This is driving me crazy.”

Jack and Cage flinched after hearing the first words he said after waking up, but Alberu
did not have time to focus on them.

He had woken up while he was fighting.

He had just been biting monsters apart in the body of a monster named the Dark Tiger
until he opened his eyes only to suddenly find himself back here.

Sunlight was coming in through the tent entrance.

The sunlight was red.

Cage quietly started to speak.

“It is evening now, your highness.”

“It’s already that late?”

Alberu thought for a moment and mumbled to himself.

“…Two times as fast? Or is it three?”

“Excuse me?”

“It’s nothing.”

He shook his head at Cage's question. Alberu then noticed the curiosity behind the two
priests’ eyes as they looked at him.

‘I'm sure they want to know how Cale and Choi Han are doing.’

Alberu looked down toward his stomach.

The half-black-half-white video communication device was sitting there.

He opened his mouth to speak.

“Has nothing else happened while I was sleeping?”

“Yes, your highness. There wasn’t even a call to the emergency line because you
prepared everything prior to falling asleep.”

“That’s a relief.”

Cage and Jack carefully observed the calmly responding Alberu.

He was calm, but his body was covered in sweat.

That was why Cage had wondered whether she should wake him up prior to the
discussed time.

They did not do so as he looked peaceful other than the fact that he was sweating so
much.

“…Your highness. The contents of the deal-”

“Hold on.”

He opened his hand toward Cage to stop her from speaking.

The two priests didn’t know because they were faced away from it, but there was a
small amount of red sunset coming in from the tent entrance.

It was obvious what that meant.

“Please come in, Raon-nim.”

He couldn't see Raon but the entrance flap lifted a little more.

“Meeeeeow.”

“Meeow!”

Two kittens walked in first and then the tent entrance was tightly closed before the
young black Dragon revealed himself.

"Crown prince!”

“Yes, Raon-nim.”

Raon, On, and Hong.

The three of the slightly lifted Alberu's tent entrance flap every so often to signal
whether it was okay for them to enter.

Even though Ron and Beacrox were taking care of the three of them, they were both
busy managing the Molan household and taking care of things here.

Maybe that was the reason…

Or maybe it was for cookies…

It might even be because they wanted to hear some news about Cale and Choi Han,
but…

The three of them came to look for Alberu every so often.

“Hey, crown prince! Are you sick?”

“Oh no, it's bad if he gets sick, nya!”

“…He needs to rest, nya, it’s probably because he hasn’t been able to rest, nya.”

These three didn’t find it difficult to talk to Alberu.

Maybe it was because they've seen him frequently since they were young.

‘No. It's because they’re like Cale.’

These three were probably imitating Cale who acted rudely around him all the time.

The corners of Alberu’s lips went up just a bit.

“I'm okay, Raon-nim.”

“Really?”

“Of course, Raon-nim. In fact, I'm doing quite well.”

Alberu started to think while looking at the young Dragon and the young Cats who
seemed relieved after hearing what he just said.

‘Do I tell them or not?’

Would he tell them about Cale and Choi Han, or would he remain silent? Alberu was
debating what to do.

But he didn't need to think for long.

‘Your highness. No, hyung-nim.’

‘What is it?’

He recalled a short portion of the conversation he had with Cale while they were
moving.

‘Hyung-nim, you’ll keep coming and going to see me, right?’

‘Yes?’

‘Then it is probably best not to tell them everything and instead just give them a brief
positive explanation. Keep things positive, you know? It’s a simple request, right?”

‘…You motherfucker. That's difficult to do.’

Alberu started to speak.

“Thanks to a deal I made with the Sun God earlier, I am now able to chat with Cale
Henituse every so often.”

Raon’s round eyes opened wide.

Hong who was putting his paw into the cookie basket stopped moving while On looked
frozen stiff as she was looking at Alberu.

Saint Jack urgently started to speak at that moment.

“Your highness. If you tell them about all of that-”

“It’s okay to tell them.”

Alberu confidently responded.

“It’s okay since he’s doing well.”

His expression and tone… Everything was calm and confident.

Maybe that was the reason…

“He also asked if you, Raon-nim, and On, and Hong were doing well. He asked if you
were eating properly.”

The children averaging nine-years-old gathered together before their expressions

brightened.

Cage, who also looked much better, started to speak.

“I, is he really fine?”

“Yes. You don’t need to worry.”

There was a small smile on Alberu’s face as he responded without any hesitation.

Alberu's gentle expression made everybody look even more relieved.

“Hey crown prince, crown prince!”

“Yes, Raon-nim.”

“Can I tell grandpa Ron and Beacrox?”

Alberu gently nodded his head.

“Of course, but please just quietly tell Ron Molan and bring Beacrox and Ron over here.
I think I’ll need to explain it to the two of them.”

“I got it!”

“Oh, and please don't tell the others about it yet. I'll call them over separately and tell
them myself.”

“I got it, crown prince!”

Raon looked at On who nodded her head and quickly headed toward the tent entrance
with Hong and Raon.

On then suddenly stopped, turned around and bowed toward the crown prince.

“Thank you very much, your highness.”

Alberu's eyes opened wide.

She always spoke informally and added, ‘nya,’ so he thought that was her style, but she
seemed quite mature just now.

“Ah! I’m thankful too, crown prince!”

“I'm thankful, nya! I'll pay you back for it, nya!”
Alberu gently responded after hearing Raon and Hong as well.

“No, it was nothing. I didn’t do much, Raon-nim.”

The children averaging nine-years-old looked even more relieved after seeing his
demeanor and energetically exited the tent. They seemed excited that they had a
mission to complete for the first time in a long while.

Alberu quietly observed them before turning toward Cage and Jack.

“I hope that you two could bring some people over as well, priest-nims.”

“Ah, of course!”

Saint Jack urgently jumped up from his seat. He had a bright expression on his face.

On the other hand, Cage’s expression that had been bright until a moment ago seemed
a bit odd.

“…Who should we bring over?”

Alberu started to speak to respond to her question.

“Please bring Miss Rosalyn. Ah, Saint-nim, could you please bring your sister?”

“Yes, sir! Of course. I will go and quickly bring Hannah over.”

“That’s wonderful. Thank you very much. It looks like we will all need to have our first
meeting in a long while.”

Saint Jack slightly bowed to Cage and Alberu and headed out of the tent.

Cage slowly followed behind him. She stopped at the entrance once Jack left and
turned around to look at Alberu.

“Your highness.”

Cage hesitated for a moment before continuing to speak.

“I tend to be pretty sharp because I've been to a lot of places. That is why… Really-”
She could not continue to speak.

This was what she wanted to ask.

‘Really, is young master Cale-nim really okay? Your expression seems kind of fake, your
highness.’

But she could not ask her question.

It was because Alberu started to speak as she stood there unable to finish her question.

“They’re fine. Those punks are fine.”

Cage closed her mouth after hearing his response. She then bowed and left the tent.

“I will quickly bring Miss Rosalyn over.”

Alberu was now left alone in the tent once Cage left.

“Huuuuuu.”

Alberu brushed his face with both hands.

He could feel that his hair was still wet with sweat.

The disgusting feel of it made Alberu start to frown as he recalled what Cale said again.

‘Then it is probably best not to tell them everything and just give them a brief positive
explanation. Keep things positive, you know? It’s a simple request, right?’

‘Keep things positive, you know?’

Those words kept echoing in his mind.

“That damn bastard. He's pushing all the difficult things to me.”

Alberu could not stop frowning.

Keep things positive?

“How can I make any of that positive?”

Alberu recalled the night on the battlefield.

Fires, explosions…

The night was full of madness.

Alberu could not stop frowning while thinking about the two punks who were at the
center of it all.

Park Jin Tae raised his voice.

“Hey, Kim Rok Soo!”

"What?”

Park Jin Tae started to frown at Cale’s short response.

"Ah, this bastard is just going to speak informally to me now all the time, isn’t he?”

He then raised his voice again and shouted loud enough for Kim Rok Soo to hear.

“Hey! Y, your hyung-nim is acting weird!”

Cale created an opening and looked behind him.

The Dark Tiger had a somewhat blank expression on its face. The Dark Tiger made eye
contact with Cale at that moment and Cale shouted toward it.

“Take down all the monsters in your way!”

There was a flash in the Dark Tiger's eyes and it quietly started to move its large body.

“Park Jin Tae! You fight too!”

“Man, people are going to think I am taking a break or something. Do you know how
hard-!”
But Cale had already turned his head back and resumed fighting.

“Fuck!”

Park Jin Tae frowned before touching the gun in his hand.

His fingers were slightly shaking.

His body was full of minor injuries and he was bleeding.

“So annoying. It’s so annoying!”

It was still dark.

The sun was not coming up.

Everywhere around him was full of the stench of blood.

No.

It was full of the monsters’ disgusting body fluids.

Baaaaang!

He turned his gaze.

"What are you doing?”

Kim Min Ah moved past him.

Park Jin Tae looked to the side.

Kim Min Ah had pierced a monster that had tried to ambush Park Jin Tae from the side.

It was a Grade 1 monster.

It was a snake-headed giant, the same monster that Cale taught Kim Min Ah to fight
against earlier.

“…So damn strong.”

“I've always been strong.”

Kim Min Ah said something else as she moved past Park Jin Tae.

“It’s just that I only recently learned how to fight properly. Isn't that the same for you?”

That was the case.

Park Jin Tae realized it as he learned how to fight properly as well.

Even though he was surrounded by chaos, blood, and madness…

He could feel it.

‘…Humans can win!’

He was getting faster and faster at dealing with the Grade 1 monsters by following Kim
Rok Soo's data.

The people Kim Rok Soo had designated as the attack team were slowly starting to get
a feel for their potential.

They were getting stronger, unlike these monsters.

It was worth trying.

They could win.

That was why they could not stop.

Even though this fucking night was so damn long…

Nobody could stop.

Park Jin Tae’s finger pulled the trigger.

Tang!

A bullet flew into a monster’s eye.

Ever since the cataclysm and the discovery of abilities… His shooting skills that had
regressed for some reason were slowly returning again.

Baaaaaang-!

Park Jin Tae turned after hearing a loud noise.

“Roooooar!”

“Grr- grrrrr!”

Monsters were falling down as a shining black light shot up between them.

It was quite far away, but it was the only thing clearly visible in the darkness.

It could not be helped.

There was a person whose body was surrounded in rose gold current next to the
shining black light.

Furthermore, the person dressed in white was visible thanks to that rose gold light as
well, and Joo Ho-Shik, the person dressed in white, clenched his hands together.

“I have faith!”

“So fucking crazy!”

Park Jin Tae swore as he laughed after hearing the voice.

Those three people… No, those two people…

Choi Han and Kim Rok Soo…

He could see these two people fighting no matter where they were.

It was because of that rose gold current.

They were too visible in this battlefield full of Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters and Grade
1 monsters as well.
That was why he could not stop.

That was also the reason that Cale could not stop.

He knew that people all around them were looking at him and Choi Han.

“Huff, huff. How much time has passed?”

He could hear Joo Ho-Shik's heavy breathing behind him.

Joo Ho-Shik who had been shouting, ‘I have faith!’ over and over was sticking to Choi
Han and Cale to provide them significant support.

Cale had a watch.

“I’m not sure.”

But he did not have time to look at his watch.

“Roooooooooooooooar!”

Cale moved after looking at three Grade 1 monsters charging toward him.

2 meters to the left, and then backward in the 5 o’clock direction.

Then a thunderbolt to the front.

Crackle!

A small rose gold thunderbolt struck the monster’s body.

Slash, slash.

Choi Han's sword slashed two other Grade 1 monsters.

"Are you okay?”

Choi Han asked and Cale responded while laughing.

“Ask that after you catch your breath.”

Choi Han had been slowly breathing heavier since a bit earlier.

“Hyung, you’re in much worse condition.”

Choi Han stood in front of Cale and made it so that Cale could not keep moving
forward.

Choi Han was correct.

Cale could tell that he was in terrible condition.

His hands were slightly shaking. There was dry blood by his mouth.

He was also turning pale.

‘But it's still bearable.’

He would not faint.

‘It’s all thanks to Joo Ho-Shik.’

Joo Ho-Shik's ‘faith’ was surprisingly able to amplify Cale’s ancient powers and Choi
Han’s aura.

Actually, for some odd reason, Joo Ho-Shik's ability actually supported Cale and Choi
Han better than the others.

‘Does Joo Ho-Shik have more faith in me and Choi Han?’

Joo Ho-Shik's ability changed strength based on the level of faith.

‘Why?’

Why would he feel that way?

Cale had many questions, but he chose to listen to what was going on rather than
thinking about that again.

He could hear it.

He could hear the monsters’ cries.

But there was definitely less than before.

The fire and explosions destroyed most of the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters and the
Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters that had suddenly been ambushed while they were
resting were unable to move quickly because of their large bodies and had their
weaknesses attacked by the humans.

This ambush was a success.

However, there were still too many of them.

Monsters kept appearing no matter how many times they slashed and killed.

It was especially difficult because of the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters that became
1.5 times stronger from madness.

They were so crazy that they continued to charge forward even after receiving injuries
that would normally make them become afraid, fall, or run away.

That stopping would make things a bit easier.

“Haaaaa.”

Cale sighed as he started to think.

‘When. When will the sun rise? If the sun came up… ’

Then humans would become the predators instead of the prey.

Cale started to think about Joo Ho-Shik who had asked him the time and Park Jin Tae
who had seemed a bit out of it.

He could then feel that the people were starting to slow down.

Even if the people he had gathered for this attack had grown at rapid speed and
showed their talents…

Those people were starting to get tired.

They were almost out of strength.

They couldn't help it.

They were not used to such a long battle.

That was why he could not get tired yet.

“Choi Han.”

“Yes, hyung-nim?”

“The black Yong. Can you use it one more time?”

Unlike Choi Han's shining black aura, the black Yong required Choi Han to use a lot of
strength. That was why he was fighting with his aura right now.

But Cale could read the mood of the battlefield.

As the others are getting tired…

“Yes, I can.”

“Then please use it.”

They needed to show those people the strength of their allies.

“Huuuuuu.”

Choi Han took a deep breath before pointing his sword toward the sky.

Black aura started to gather around his sword and slowly started to take the form of a
black Yong.

“Mr. Joo Ho-Shik. Please use your ability on me.”

Choi Han flinched after hearing Cale’s statement, but he stayed still as he could not
break his concentration.

Cale gathered fiery thunderbolts into both of his hands as Joo Ho-Shik shouted.
Cale could feel his fiery thunderbolts becoming stronger thanks to Joo Ho-Shik's ability.

He would use his fiery thunderbolts along with Choi Han’s black Yong to sweep
through the battlefield.

Then the Grade 1 monsters should retreat back and the allies would feel revitalized.

Cale had such thoughts as he started to look toward the tip of Choi Han's sword that
was pointed to the air.

That would be where the black Yong would soon open its jaw and charge through the
battlefield.

But the moment he raised his head…

“…Ah.”

Cale's jaw dropped.

He reached out and grabbed Choi Han’s shoulder.

…Hyung?”

Cale nonchalantly commented as Choi Han flinched in response.

“The sun is coming up.”

The night sky was slowly starting to get brighter.

Night had passed and dawn was approaching.

"We did it.”

Cale added on.

“We passed the crucial moment.”

Cale looked around at the evidence of the fierce battle.

He could see the madness disappearing from the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters as the
world became brighter.

The weakened Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters slowly started to retreat.

Cale had a record in his memories.

< Once the night passed, the Grade 2 and Grade 3 would no longer be crazy and would
stop attacking the central shelters. >
< They could no longer attack, as it was now the Grade 1 monsters' turn to attack. >
< This was a rule that was followed at all original central shelters that were attacked.
>

Cale's gaze reached the Grade 1 monsters.

There were still many Grade 1 monsters that were alive.

But the crazy Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters, humans, and leader monsters… Along
with the fire and explosions… The chaos created by all sorts of things managed to kill
many Grade 1 monsters.

And…

Park Jin Tae, Kim Min Ah, Bae Puh Rum, Bae Cheol-Ho, Che Soo Jung, etc.

He could see all of them.

They all looked tired.

They looked up at the sky that was lighting up before looking toward Cale.

Cale smiled toward them.

It was a smile that let them know that they had won, that they had survived.

He then said the following.

“Let’s finish the rest and head toward our new base.”

Everybody laughed and tightly clenched their weapons with shaking hands.
But once the sun came up all the way…

Cale calmly said something to everyone there who were clenching their weapons.

“Let’s get some rest first.”

Park Jin Tae started to speak.

“…Huh?”

‘Get some rest?

In this situation?’

Park Jin Tae looked around.

The Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters were quickly retreating, but the still alive Grade 1
monsters were still here.

But everybody there suddenly saw something weird.

Last night…

It was something they were unable to see during that hell-like chaos.

That something was located where Choi Han and Cale had mainly been fighting.

“…Those monsters are-”

There were cold corpses of quite large monsters underneath the corpses of the Grade
2 and Grade 3 monsters that had charged in here.

They seemed larger than the other Grade 1 monsters.

Bae Cheol-Ho blurted out the thought that came to his mind.

“The second taster monsters?”

Similar to how there were taster monsters between the Grade 3 and Grade 2 monsters,
there were supposed to be taster monsters between the Grade 2 and Grade 1 monster
switch too.

Cale nodded his head.

“Yes sir. Those are the second taster monsters.”

Cale looked toward the Grade 1 monsters that were just glaring at them after seeing
that the humans were not attacking as he continued to speak.

“They’re just huge. The second taster monsters are much easier to deal with than the
first taster monsters.”

Although they were larger than Grade 1 monsters, their strength was only between
Grade 1 and Grade 2 monsters.

They were at about Grade 1.5.

There were no leader monsters either.

This information had been recorded in the future.

< As for the second round of taster monsters, the Grade 1 monsters did not attack the
central shelter for a set amount of time even after all of the taster monsters were
defeated. This was different than the situation with the first round of taster monsters.
>

< The first round of taster monsters were special while the patterns for the second
round of taster monsters were easier to understand. >

Honestly speaking, it was the first round of taster monsters that were weird.

It was the transition between Grade 3 and Grade 2 monsters but Grade 1 monsters
came out as tasters and their leader was much stronger than regular Grade 1 monsters.
That was why these Grade 1.5 monsters in the second round of tasters… Truly fit the
term, ‘taster.’

“We are safe until 9am as the Grade 1 monsters will not attack the shelter. Everybody
can go back and get some rest.”

Choi Han walked over to the calmly speaking Cale.

Shake.

Choi Han slightly shook his sword and monster blood fell off the sword and onto the
ground.

“…Ho.”

The others all watched this with different expressions.

However, they were all full of shock and astonishment.

‘They were able to locate the taster monsters and kill them all during that chaos?
Those two really went hunting.’

‘…They didn't only kill the taster monsters. They were the ones to kill the most Grade
1 monsters as well.’

‘Holy crap! They created a mountain of monster corpses!’

Bae Cheol-Ho, Kim Min Ah, and Park Jin Tae. They each had different thoughts but
came to the same conclusion.

‘Amazing.’

‘I really need to follow this person to Seomyeon.’

‘…Crazy bastard.’

As Bae Cheol-Ho mumbled…

"We survived.”
The conclusion was that all their different emotions reached the conclusion that they
had survived.

"Everybody, please come over here for a moment.”

Cale walked away from the spot where the Grade 1 monsters had gathered and
motioned to the others.

Originally, the Grade 1 monsters would be split up into three to attack the three central
shelters later, but…

Cale had used the fire and the Grade 2 and Grade 3 monsters to gather the Grade 1
monsters to one spot.

"Do you have something to tell us?”

Park Jin Tae looked around at the people who had gathered here and asked Cale the
question.

Cale looked at the group and started to speak.

“Between 9am and 12pm… Every shelter in the world will disappear for three hours.”

The central shelters lost their powers at noon yesterday, however…

Other temporary shelters were slowly losing their powers one by one.

And all shelters would disappear from Earth for the last three hours of this 24 hour
cycle.

Cale lifted up one finger.

"We will fight for one of those three hours.”

He then lifted up another finger.

“We will only focus on defending for the remaining two hours.”

Cale looked at his allies who were covered in monster fluids and blood, as well as small
injuries, as he continued to speak.
“Jang Man Soo, Jae Ha-Jung, and Kim Rok Soo. These three people will each cast shields
on the three central shelters. Bae Puh Rum will move around with Joo Ho-Shik so that
Joo Ho-Shik can use his ability on each central shelter's defender to support them.”

“Hold on!”

Bae Cheol-Ho raised his hand into the air.

His pupils were shaking.

“Mr. K… You also have a defensive ability-”

"I do.”

“Ho.”

Bae Cheol-Ho let out a gasp.

Cale didn’t care as he continued to speak.

He didn’t have much time.

“Of course, other ability users will need to fight the Grade 1 monsters during those
two hours of defense. But once it becomes noon…”

Cale looked up at the sky.

“There will be another solar eclipse.”

They could tell that the solar eclipse was the signal to show that this day of battle was
over even without him saying anything.

Cale saw that they understood and pointed toward the central shelter.

“That is why we should head back for now.”

Choi Han walked toward him.

“Do you want to get on my back?”

“It’s fine.”

Cale shook his head and motioned to the side.

“Grrrrrr.”

The Dark Tiger came over.

It was not the only one. The Steel Feather Hawk and the White Rabbit came over as
well, and Cale started to speak to the two monsters.

“Let’s discuss the deal in detail after we move to the new central shelter.”

“Hmph. Fine. Just know that you'll be in serious trouble if you try anything funny.”

“That is totally fine. There is definitely a need for a discussion of value.”

The Steel Feather Hawk and White Rabbit each said something before stepping back.
Cale then got on the back of the Dark Tiger that had lowered its head.

Cale called Choi Han over with a serious expression as the others quietly watched.

“Choi Han.”

“Yes, hyung-nim. I will wake you up at 9am.”

‘Hmm?’

As the others became confused…

“Okay. I'm going to get some sleep.”

Cale laid down on the Dark Tiger's soft fur and… He then instantly fell asleep.

Choi Han looked at him with a satisfied gaze before turning his head. The others were
looking at him with all sorts of emotions.

Even the two leader monsters were looking at Choi Han and Cale with confused
expressions.
Choi Han debated what to say after seeing their expressions before he started to speak.

“I’m relieved that Rok Soo hyung did not end up fainting. I will see you all at 9am.”

Choi Han smiled innocently and followed behind the Dark Tiger that was slowly
returning to the central shelter.

“…My goodness.”

Park Jin Tae who was watching this shook his head as he followed behind Choi Han.

It was the same for the others.

“As I expected.”

Only Joo Ho-Shik was looking at Choi Han and Cale with an odd gaze.

“…The two of their abilities seemed a bit special.”

Joo Ho-Shik looked down at his hands.

He had clasped them together all night to pray.

He didn't believe in a religion, but it was the action he thought of whenever he thought
of a prayer so it had became a habit now.

He had many thoughts in the past regarding this ability that had suddenly appeared
after the cataclysm.

Is there a god?

What am I supposed to have faith in?

Joo Ho-Shik who had nothing to believe in other than himself had started to think
about god even though he didn't believe in a religion.

“…Hmm. They said that both of them had suddenly appeared, right?”

Kim Rok Soo was supposed an orphan.

Choi Han had suddenly appeared claiming to be Kim Rok Soo's close dongsaeng.

Both of them also used powers that were different from the others.

He could tell the difference clearly because he had used his 'faith’ ability to support
them.

“…Are they human?”

Were those two people really human?

Or, were they something else?

An odd glow filled Joo Ho-Shik's eyes.

“Hey, Mr. Joo Ho-Shik!”

He heard a grumbling voice at that moment.

"What are you doing? Why are you standing there with a blank expression?! Are you
not coming?”

Park Jin Tae had turned back and was grumbling at Joo Ho-Shik in an annoyed voice.
Joo Ho-Shik smiled gently and started to walk toward his central shelter.

“…He’s a weird one alright.”

Park Jin Tae watched Joo Ho-Shik with a suspicious gaze before starting to walk again.

“Grrrrrr.”

“Screeeeeech---”

The still remaining large number of Grade 1 monsters were biding their time and
glaring at the humans.

Baaaaang! Bang! Baaaaang!

Loud banging noises were coming from all directions.

The Grade 1 monsters were attacking more intensely than ever before.

Buzz. Buzz.

 Mr. Kim Min Joon! This is Bae Cheol-Ho! Please send Mr. Joo Ho-Shik over here!

Kim Min Joon quickly responded into the walkie-talkie after hearing Bae Cheol-Ho’s
request from the second central shelter.

“Mr. Joo Ho-Shik will be there soon!”

 Please have him come as soon as possible! Jae Ha-Jung is barely holding on!

Baaaaang! Baaaaang!

Bae Cheol-Ho's voice was hard to hear because of the loud noises.

It was probably the same situation on Bae Cheol-Ho's side as well.

"Grandma!”

Kim Min Joon grabbed the walkie-talkie.

 Min Joon! I sent Mr. Joo Ho-Shi with Puh Rum!

“Thank you very much!”

 Baaaaang! Baaaaang!

Kim Min Joon could hear the banging noises on the other side of the walkie-talkie. He
subconsciously started to speak.

“Is Mr. Jang Man Soo doing okay?”

 Yes. Man Soo is doing well! Min Ah is safe too!

Jang Man Soo was responsible for the third central shelter’s defense.
 Are you okay over there?

Kim Min Joon looked forward after hearing Grandma Kim's question.

Through the building’s open door…

 You guys received the least of Mr. Joo Ho-Shik's ability.

Jae Ha-Jung had received the most of Joo Ho-Shik’s ‘Faith’ ability since their defensive
plan had started. Next was Jang Man Soo.

The defender of this central shelter where Kim Min Joon was at had received Joo Ho-
Shik's help the least.

 All the other ability users other than Choi Han were sent to the other central shelters
as well.

That was the case.

The only one here to fight was Choi Han.

 Even if the Dark Tiger is there… You guys have the least amount of ability users.

However, even with this being the case…

Kim Min Joon could say the following to her.

"We are safe here. Please don't worry.”

Baaaaang! Bang!

Grade 1 monsters were furiously charging forward.

They were heading toward the silver shield.

They were heading toward the two wings that spread out from the shield and covered
the entire building.

However, the shield stayed firm.

It did not break.

Kim Min Joon could see Kim Rok Soo who was standing there with his hand on the
shield.

Whether it was because the shield was extremely large…

Or because Kim Rok Soo was quite small…

But it looked as if the shield and two wings were coming out of Kim Rok Soo's whole
body and protecting this place.

Kim Min Joon could see Kim Rok Soo's face properly because he was closer to Kim Rok
Soo than the others.

He could see Rok Soo's body as well.

Blood had started to flow out of the corners of his mouth again.

And although he was standing firm, his hands and arms were slightly shaking.

Kim Min Joon heard Lee Jin Joo's voice at that moment.

{The current time is 11:55 am.}

It was coming to an end.

Kim Min Joon heard Lee Seung Won mumbling next to him.

“The current time is 11:55 am. Defender Kim Rok Soo’s shield is still standing firm
while Choi Han and the Dark Tiger are continuing their attacks from outside the shield.”

The two black figures outside the half-transparent silver shield were darting through
the battlefield.

They were, of course, the Dark Tiger and Choi Han.

They couldn’t stop all of the Grade 1 monsters, but Choi Han and the Dark Tiger were
taking care of most of them.
Cale would not have been able to last so long if they had not been able to do so.

Kim Min Joon looked toward Kim Rok Soo, Choi Han, and the Dark Tiger for a moment.

The past 24 hours slowly passed through his mind.

Buzz. Buzz.

 Min Joon. See you soon.

Kim Min Joon quietly responded to Grandma Kim's voice from the still connected
walkie-talkie.

“Yes ma’am. See you soon.”

He then heard Lee Jin Joo's voice again.

{The current time is 11:58 am.}

There were only two minutes left now.

The people at all three central shelters slowly looked up at the sky.

They looked toward the sun.

The past 24 hours passed through their minds as if it was a movie.

Although it had felt like hell, they could now reflect on it as they had survived.

This was the same for Cale.

“Ugh.”

Cale kept his groan quiet as he kept his two arms forward. The silver shield stayed up
without shaking at all.

{The current time is 11:59 am.}

The Grade 1 monsters charged forward crazier than ever before.

Baaaaang! Baaaaang!

Hand, feet, head… The monsters aimed for Cale’s shield with everything they had.

“Huff. Huff.”

Cale could see Choi Han breathing heavily on the other side of the shield.

Choi Han was very strong, but he still had a limit to his stamina as he was human.

Cale and Choi Han were both exhausted.

However…

‘Just a little longer… ’

If they held out just a tiny bit longer…

{10.}

Lee Jin Joo's countdown had started.

{9. 8. 7… }

If he held on just a bit longer…

{4. 3… }

Cale lifted his head up.

Really soon now…

{2. 1.}

Now.

The sun was covered in darkness.

The monsters’ attacks, their chilling screams…

They all instantly stopped.

Cale, well, Kim Rok Soo finally felt it.

At this very moment…

‘I… ’

“I changed it.”

‘My past.

My record.

My regret.

My despair.’

He finally changed one thing.

Cale closed his eyes for a moment and then opened them back.

Once he opened his eyes to a world of darkness because the sun was covered up…

He saw a beautiful light in the distance.

It felt like an aurora that had come down to the ground.

And he saw a large castle surrounded by that aurora.

He could see a multi-story large castle with a Korean-style tile roof.

There were modern looking buildings surrounding that castle as well.

He then heard Lee Jin Joo’s shaking voice.

{The place you see right now… }

Everybody was looking at the place Cale had talked about the whole day.
{The place you see right now is our new base.}

{Once the sun comes out again… }

{We will head over there.}

And once 1 minute passed and the sun reappeared…

The Grade 1 monsters dispersed quickly as if that was the deal.

Cale deactivated his shield.

“Rok Soo hyung.”

“You worked hard.”

Cale patted Choi Han’s shoulder and turned around.

He motioned to the people who had been inside the building all day while shaking in
fear.

He was motioning for them to come outside.

And…

“Let’s go to our new home.”

He was telling them they should quickly move to the new central shelter, their new
base.

The core ability users of the three central shelters who had been the only ones to have
‘zero deaths’ in this 'first central shelter destruction incident’ gathered in the large
castle at the center of the large new central shelter.

In the meeting room at the top of that castle…

“Kim Rok Soo.”

Park Jin Tae looked toward Cale.

"So, you’re saying… No, according to your ‘foresight’.”

Park Jin Tae suppressed his wildly beating heart and barely managed to speak.

“An ‘unranked monster’ will soon appear in Seomyeon, Busan?”

Park Jin Tae, Kim Min Ah, Bae Puh Rum, and the others.

Many of them were looking at Cale’s mouth.

Choi Han was standing behind Cale as if he was a guard.

Cale opened his mouth and gave a short response.

“Yes.”

It was time.

“That is why I plan on going to Seomyeon, Busan.”